Academia-Cat en HR

Academia World of Wonders
Balances Pipettes pH measurement Titration Density and refractometry Thermal analysis Automated Chemistry
Innovative solutions For excellent research
METTLER TOLEDO launches the Academia Initiative for your success

Everyday aspects of work at universities, universities of applied science and research institutes present many challenges. When it comes to research and teaching, you must adapt yourself to different environmental conditions, meet tighter quality requirements and always be up to speed with the latest technological developments when carrying out research work. You must manage and process a wealth of data. Often you have to accomplish these goals while complying with stringent regulations and directives. METTLER TOLEDO's comprehensive range of solutions helps you address each of these critical challenges. Through our instruments, software and services, you can streamline processes, enhance throughput and achieve compliance. Our scope of solutions ranges from standard laboratory equipment such as balances, pipettes and pH meters through titrators, instruments for thermal analysis, melting point and density meters to solutions in the field of automated chemistry. And of course all of these areas are supplemented by corresponding service solutions. We believe we have earned a leadership position in our industry not merely because we offer amazing solutions, but because our solutions offer amazing value to customers like you. We hope you enjoy looking through our Academia catalog. In addition to presenting our range of products, the catalog also acts as a reference guide with tips, tricks and important information about popular applications and product areas, and thus further paves the way for excellent research.
METTLER TOLEDO
For global research
Excellent solutions for your success

METTLER TOLEDO is a leading global manufacturer of precision instruments that are used in the lab, in industry and food retailing.
One of our key markets is laboratories involved in the fields of research and development, pharmaceutical research or general quality control. Quality control laboratories mainly include labs in the pharmaceutical/ biopharmaceutical, chemical, food and cosmetics industries. The extensive range of solutions from METTLER TOLEDO can be used in virtually every laboratory around the world. We are the largest global supplier of the three most frequently used laboratory instruments (balances, pipettes and pH meters) and we are a pioneer in the field of automated chemistry. Laboratory instruments from METTLER TOLEDO are the foundation of labs all over the world, as they improve processes in research and development, drug discovery and quality control. The data generated by our instruments can be analyzed and managed in our applicationspecific software and interfaced with your information systems. Benefits include enhanced accuracy, productivity and compliance. METTLER TOLEDO provides numerous customers, who already use our products in their laboratories, with comprehensive industrial solutions for the various stages of a multitude of manufacturing processes. These solutions range from receiving raw materials through the relevant manufacturing process, inline process control and endof-line packaging control, to logistics and shipping. Increasingly, these solutions are fully integrated into the customer's IT environment, helping automate their workflows. METTLER TOLEDO's solutions are also used in food retail. Products and solutions covering the management of fresh food range from receiving goods and prepackaging, to in-store solutions for self-service departments, deli counters and checkout terminals. METTLER TOLEDO products can all be networked and collect data at the item level. Our software assists customers with pricing and inventory management and also provides valuable information for merchandising decisions.
About us
II
At METTLER TOLEDO, we serve customers worldwide with our extensive sales and service network. Our own sales and service organizations around the globe ensure our customers deal with trained, experienced and highly qualified specialists. So that you can protect your investments, we offer our ServiceXXL solution a wide-ranging system of service packages tailored to meet your specific requirements.
For more information about METTLER TOLEDO, go to www.mt.com Come visit us!
III
Contents
METTLER TOLEDO and the Academia Initiative..................................... II
Pipettes
Introduction by Dr. Klaus Jrgen Wannowius. ............. 192
Pipette tips...............................................198 Pipetting 360 Pipettes Tips Service............................232 Manual pipettes........................................246 Electronic pipettes.....................................256 Special pipettes/special solutions................270 Pipetting robots. ........................................278 Peristaltic pump........................................282 Pipette accessories.................................. 286 Services for pipettes................................. 292
Balances
Introduction by Prof. Wolfgang Laqua...... 2
Milestones in weighing................................. 6 Product overview........................................16 Micro Balances.......................................... 20 Analytical Balances.................................... 32 Precision Balances. .................................... 50 Platforms, terminals and weighing platforms.................................................. 80 Weighing modules..................................... 88 Comparator Balances................................. 96 Moisture analyzers (moisture determination)............................104 Calibration Devices (pipette calibration)....... 114

pH measurement and electrodes

Introduction by Prof. Dr. Dr. Reinhold Carle
Balance accessories
Weighing tools. .........................................124 Anti-vibration panels..................................126 Weighing tables........................................128 Printers....................................................130 Density kit................................................134 Data management and software.................138 Safety weighing cabinets. ...........................144 Additional accessories...............................150 Weights...................................................164 Services for balances................................176

and Dr. Dietmar R. Kammerer.............296

Benchtop instruments............................... 304 Portable meters. ........................................ 314 Benchtop and portable instruments.............324 Buffer solutions. ........................................328 Electrodes............................................... 332 Cables and plugs..................................... 348
Online analytics
Intelligent Sensor Management (ISM). ......... 350 ISM pH sensors....................................... 354 ISM oxygen sensors................................. 356 Transmitters (pH, redox, oxygen)............... 358 Turbidity sensors. ..................................... 360 Turbidity transmitters................................ 364
Powder dosing
Automatic powder dosing. ..........................180 Dosing heads...........................................186 Instrument overview..................................188 Automation and safety...............................190
IV
Titration
I ntroduction by Cristina Mazzola and Peter Albert. ................................366
Excellence titrators....................................372 Automation. ..............................................378 Karl Fischer titrators. ................................. 382 Oven sample changers............................. 388 Entry level titrators.................................... 390 Accessories............................................. 394
Reference section
We have compiled a comprehensive reference guide for the METTLER TOLEDO Academia Initiative that covers all information relating to day-to-day work in the lab.
Density measurement and refractometry

Benchtop instruments............................... 402 Automation. ............................................. 406 Standards................................................ 410 Accessories.............................................. 413 Portable meters. ........................................ 414
Turn our know-how into your success

Balances........................................ 472 Pipettes. .........................................524 pH measurement............................540 Titration.........................................548 Density and refractometry...............556 Thermal analysis. ............................564 Thermal values............................... 576 AutoChem...................................... 578
Thermal analysis
Introduction by Dr. Claus Otto............. 418
Thermal values.........................................424 Excellence thermal analysis. ...................... 432 Crucibles and accessories. ........................ 446
AutoChem
Introduction by Prof. Dr. Peter Hofmann. .....................450
In-situ FTIR reaction tracking. ..................... 458 In-situ particle characterization.................. 460 Synthesis and laboratory reactors.............. 462 Reaction calorimetry. ................................ 466 Parallel synthesis..................................... 468 Software................................................. 469
Index
598
METTLER TOLEDO
For global research
Academia World of Wonders online

VI
Our Academia catalog shows that research is in no way a dried-up and boring field. Our high-tech products set the standard for quality and performance. We support the success of young researchers in their academic and professional training through the capabilities of our products. In future, we want to promote particular achievements through our Academia Initiative. New technologies are essential in order to maintain consistently high, cost-effective and environmentally-friendly growth. The Academia Initiative gives you a head start for future professional success.
A supplementary reference section is provided, which includes tips for both beginners and professionals in the lab. Tina, the METTLER TOLEDO coach for excellent research, is here to share basic knowledge and tips for day-to-day work in the lab.
Photos: Holger Sandmann
Justus von Liebig would be delighted: Prof. Laqua in action presenting an experiment at the Liebig Museum in Giessen, Germany.
An incomparable instrument
Prof. Wolfgang Laqua Justus von Liebig dedicated his entire life to science. Without him, modern chemistry would not exist. But this most famous German chemist actively encouraged publicity and wanted his knowledge to extend beyond the scientific community. So he published his popular "Letters on Chemistry" in the German "Augsburger Allgemeine Zeitung" newspaper in the form of a science column aimed at a wide public audience.
"... it is the balance, that incomparable instrument which gives permanence to every observation, dispels all ambiguity, establishes truth, detects error, and guides us in the true path of inductive science."
the young professor of chemistry. The balances were set up there in a special room, the weighing room. This room was north-facing and thus protected from sunlight, and it was not heated because temperature fluctuations adversely affect the weighing result. The success story of precision instruments from Giessen was continued when Mettler-Waagen GmbH, founded in Switzerland, acquired the Spoerhase family firm in the 1950s, which is still there today. The analytical balances from this global market leader are considered the best in the world. Liebig's former institute was turned into a museum in 1920, and is one of the six most important chemistry museums in the world. The Liebig Museum is located on Liebig street in Giessen right next to the Mathematikum (mathematical science center), and is known throughout the scientific community as the birthplace of organic chemistry. The Justus Liebig Society of Giessen supports the museum. A fantastic experience is offered by Prof. Dr. Wolfgang Laqua, Prof. em. for inorganic chemistry at the JLU and chairman of the society, in his presentations of experiments at the historical site.
Rdiger Paul from METTLER TOLEDO had the opportunity to speak to Prof. Laqua about weighing using historical and modern balances.
Justus von Liebig, from "Letters on Chemistry No. 9", circa 1842
Rdiger Paul: What do you think would Justus Liebig still think so precisely about weighing today? Prof. Laqua: Yes, of course, and obviously he wouldn't be the only one! The notion that a balance is important for a chemist and essential for an analytical chemist was recognized even before Liebig's time, in fact it was understood from when Lavoisier (1743 - 1794) discovered the law of the conservation of mass in chemical reactions. Do you agree that weighing is the most important step in chemical analysis? Quantitative chemical analysis, be it of a pure substance (determination of the chemical formula) or a mixture (determination of the proportion of individual substances), involves many important steps. In this process, weighing has the same importance as counting in mathematics. If I want to determine the proportion of boys and girls in a class, I must be able to count; if I cannot, there is no point in trying. If I want to determine the proportion of mercury in an amalgam used for filling teeth and I don't understand how to use a modern balance, then I should leave well alone. In other words, without accurate weighing there is no chance of an accurate result and without a balance there is no result at all!
This quote shows that he had left the arts of alchemy far behind him and was focused on exact science. For Liebig it was clear that weighing plays an important role as the first step in analysis. Analytical balances were the "sanctuary of the chemist" which however, required a great deal of patience from the researcher. At that time, balances had long beams, which swung so slowly that people even talked about the "martyrdom of weighing". Liebig is said to have given himself a break by smoking "one cigar per weighing". However, this did not distract him from his dedicated work in improving fine precision balances, without which he could never have developed his pioneering ideas. In Giessen he was supported by the master joiner Hoss, who improved the balances so significantly that they became global bestsellers and were later marketed under the label "Mettler Waagen Spoerhase GmbH". These balances were able to produce astounding results. Even today, two of them can be used for precise weighing to 0.5 mg at a maximum capacity of 100 g. The University of Giessen, who took on Liebig at just 21 years of age, set up a separate laboratory for
How important is selecting the right balance? Before an experimenter starts a chemical analysis, they must decide on the level of accuracy required in the result. This affects the selection of the instrument. There is no point in taking a sledgehammer to crack a nut, not just for reasons of cost but also for reasons of time because the use of a high-sensitivity precision balance always requires more time than the use of a lower-quality balance. Liebig despaired that he could not find any differences between materials of plant and animal origin. What could ultramodern balances offer today, compared with Liebigs balances? Liebig was faced with the problem of the identical composition of many substances found in the plant and animal organism (such as proteins) following the revolutionary invention of the "five-bulb device" for the "elementary analysis of organic bodies". This five-bulb device, also called the "Kaliapparat", remained until the second half of the 19th century an essential instrument for the determination of the chemical formula of an unknown compound. However, without the simultaneous use of an analytical balance, Liebig would not be able to discover the types of
complicated chemical formulae such as those found in alkaloids (e.g. quinine). Compared to the unbelievably complicated compounds that play a major role today in biochemistry for example, the formula for quinine analyzed by Liebig appears incredibly simple. In other words, the analytical balances used by Liebig in Giessen did not enable him to win any prizes in biochemical analysis. Or put another way, the more complicated the composition of a biomolecule, the greater the demands on the performance of an analytical balance. Which factors can distort a result and how can this be prevented? An elementary analysis for the determination of the chemical formula of a compound is absolutely pointless if the substance under analysis is not in an extremely pure form. In other words, if the compound contains unknown proportions of any foreign substances, then it cannot be determined even with the best balance the result will be incorrect and therefore unusable. Sample preparation in terms of the purity of the compound under analysis therefore has the highest priority. In addition, as Liebig himself knew, the balance must be used under "proper" conditions. Disturbing influences such as drafts, large differ-
ences in temperature, electrostatic and magnetic interference, should be eliminated wherever possible. Which technologies are important for a modern high-performance balance? I would have loved to have used balances with "MonoBloc technology" and a clearly reduced number of components in the load cell this ultimately offers much better longterm stability and higher performance for these balances. What is the significance of "FACT", the automatic adjustment of the sensitivity, or proFACT in the application? Basically, the answer to this question is similar to the previous one: increased reliability for weighing results; a balance, which monitors and adjusts itself automatically, provides good results and this reduces the expense of testing. How important is a good introduction to and good training in the practice of weighing for beginner students and future scientists? During my studies, I learned how to understand and operate a balance in my physics internship, and was
stance under the microscope: It was full of tiny slivers of glass, which had come from the remains of a broken ampoule from the person who had synthesized the calcium antimony sulfur compound (who was a postgraduate student of the assistant professor). As a result, my incorrect analysis was found to be correct. taught by physicists. I can only hope that nowadays, i.e. following the introduction of bachelor and master programs, nothing has changed. Anyone who doesn't understand the physical principles of a balance and how to evaluate the weighing result should not be using an analytical balance. It's only too common to see cases of students, particularly in the first semester, who specify the result of a weighing to 5 or 6 decimal places, even though the first decimal place is already unreliable. Do practical seminars at universities, particularly dealing with sample preparation, do enough and provide sufficient information about the importance of weighing? Of course this is a major focus when educating our students, especially at the start of quantitative chemical training. This was also the case when I was a student. However, this training was not necessarily understood by everyone even then. I remember being a student in quantitative chemical training at the TU Berlin (Berlin University of Technology) and my assistant professor gave me a sample in order to determine its calcium, antimony and sulfur content. After a great deal of effort, my result was unfortunately incorrect and my suspicion as to the reason was confirmed when I observed a little of the analysis sub During your career in teaching, what has motivated you to work with young people, and what is your main focus in science for which you are a Professor emeritus? My motivation has hardly changed over the years: it is to show children, pupils and students how exciting chemistry is and how important it is to our well-being, particularly for the future. In short, I have always wanted, and still want, to inspire enthusiasm for chemistry! So it was a really wonderful challenge for me, to take students, who had to complete chemistry as a minor subject in their training and who didn't want to see at the start that the subject they had chosen also had something to do with chemistry, for example to convey the significance of chemistry for medicine, biology, physics and agricultural science, so that the aversion they had to chemistry at the start had changed at least to acceptance, if not to enthusiasm, by the end of the semester. I tried to help my degree and postgraduate students to understand that every result they obtained, from any area, should be critically questioned and that not everything in terms of data, for example from an expensive instrument, is necessarily correct. It was sometimes difficult to convince degree students that a measurement had to be repeated two or even three
times in order to get a reliable result. "But I've checked everything carefully and even read the temperature during the process," they would tell me. Well that's fine, but the thermometer was not calibrated! As part of my current role at the Liebig Museum in Giessen, I am at great pains when presenting my experiments, especially to students in grades 4 to 7 who have not yet had chemistry lessons, to remove their fear of this "horror subject" which is the topic of amazing rumors in schools. For me, there is nothing better than hearing a child at the end of my presentation saying: "I didn't know that chemistry could be so much fun." Thank you for talking to us.
Simply
ingenious
As a leading global manufacturer of laboratory balances, METTLER TOLEDO systematically pursues its aim of making weighing as simple as possible. This results in impressive solutions, which save time and money and optimize accuracy and reliability.
Balances
Historical
overview
Special Notable Significant

Dr. Erhard Mettler presents the first analytical balance, which works using the substitution principle.
Balances
1945
Chemistry
For his discovery of splitting atoms
Nobel prize winners for Chemistry and Physics have made impressive contributions to the world of science. They also represent the progress in which METTLER TOLEDO has also played a part.
Otto Hahn
Photo: Bundesarchiv
The world of Chemistry marvels at the first microbalance with areadability of 0.000001 g.
The PT, the first electronic precision balance.
Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv
1952
1973
Chemistry
For their invention of distribution chromatography
Chemistry
For their separate pioneering work on the chemistry of organometallic sandwich compounds
Archer J.P. Martin
Richard Laurence Millington
Otto Hahn
Geoffrey Wilkinson
Historical
overview
Balances
The legendary PM is launched.
The UMT5 is the first electronic microbalance with 51 million point resolution.
Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv Photo: dpa - B ldarchiv
1986
Physics
1992
Chemistry
For his important contributions to the theory of electron transfer reactions in chemical systems (Marcus theory)
Photo: Xvlun wikipedia
For their design of the scanning tunneling microscope
Gerd Karl Binnig
Heinrich Rohrer
Ernst Ruska
Rudolf Arthur Marcus
10
The market launch of the revolutionary MonoBloc weighing cell is another milestone for METTLER TOLEDO. More compact, rugged and durable than earlier models, it became the reliable and precise "heart" of many balances.
The HR73, the first moisture measuring instrument with halogen technology.
1993
Physics
1996
Chemistry
For their discovery of fullerene, also known as buckyballs, a new form of carbon with ball-shaped molecules
For their discovery of a pulsar in a binary star system
Josef H. Taylor jr. and Russel A. Hulse
Sir Harold W. Kroto
Robert F. Curl, Jr.
Richard E. Smalley
11
Historical
overview
Balances
Award
The AX analytical balance technical breakthrough with touchscreen and automatic door opening with IR sensors.
2000
Chemistry
For the discovery and development of conductive polymers
Alan J. Heeger
Alan G. MacDiarmid
Hideki Shirakawa
12
Award 2004
XS, the first balance with grid weighing pan, sets new standards in terms of speed, ergonomics and efficiency.
Innovative new features such as the color touchscreen, QM toolkit and wireless data transfer using Bluetooth make XP the leading precision balance on the market.
Photo: dpa - B ldarchiv Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv
2003
Physics
2004
Physics
For pioneering work on the theory of superconductors and superfluids
For the discovery of asymptotic freedom in the theory of strong interactions
Alexei A. Abrikosow
Vitaly L. Ginzburg Anthony J. Leggett
David J. Gross
H. David Politzer
Frank Wilczek
Photo: dpa - B ldarchiv
13
Historical
overview
Balances
Security knows no alternative: The XP analytical balance offers unique options for optimum data and sample security, as well as maximum functional reliability for the user.
With its leading measurement performance (52 g maximum capacity at 1 g readability), the XP56 micro balance enables the precise determination of the smallest quantities and therefore maximum sample yield and cost savings.
2000
Physics
2006
Physics
For contributions to the quantum theory of optical coherence
For investigations of cosmic background radiation
Roy J. Glauber
John C. Mather
George F. Smoot
14
Fast, ergonomic and tailored to requirements: Innovative solutions for pipette calibration for multi-channel and single-channel pipettes can significantly increase the efficiency of your pipette calibration professional data management and precision guaranteed.
QUANTOS, a global innovation, automatically doses tiny amounts of pourable substances directly into the tare container.
Photo: Wolfram Daeumel
2007
2008
Chemistry
For his studies of chemical processes on solid surfaces
Chemistry
For the discovery and further development of green fluorescent protein
Gerhard Ertl
Osamur Shimomura Roger Tsien
Photos: ProlineServer wikipedia
Martin Chalfie
15
Balances
16
User-friendly
The right balance for your needs
Choose between two levels: Classic and Excellence

Our Classic line can do (almost) everything. Excellence products are qualified to meet the strictest requirements.
Find out about METTLER TOLEDO during your education and training, then later in your working life, you will see METTLER TOLEDO is the industry standard, synonymous with quality, accuracy and durability. Our balances meet a wide variety of requirements for customers in sectors ranging from pharmaceuticals, cosmetics, chemistry and the food industryto universities and educational establishments that provide research, trainingand development.
17
Overview
Balances
Customer requirements
METTLER TOLEDO solutions

Excellence level
Tailor-made weighing solutions
Customer benefits
Efficiency in daily weighing A high degree of userfriendliness Precise measurement of the smallest samples Balances for use in regulated areas (e.g., FDA, GxP, USP) Safe handling of toxic substances Weighing under difficult conditions (e.g., fume hoods, static charges, clean rooms) Connectivity is key Comprehensive data management solutions
Unique measurement performance Built-in tools for quality management (e.g., MinWeigh) Touchscreen user interface Individual profiles and access rights for 8 users Password protection Hands-free operation ErgoClips for safe sample handling Integrable anti-static kit 7 interface options (including wireless Bluetooth and Ethernet) LabX software for data management Dedicated pipette calibration solutions for professional applications, including software support from Calibry
Excellence products offer all theadvantages of Classic products, plus: Maximum yield for valuable substances Minimum weight (according to USP, K = 3/0.1% uncertainty) as low as 0.45 mg Conformity with regulations 100% data security Seamless documentation Full traceability of results Maximum productivity High-speed weighing technology User-friendly operation Increased process security Increased user security Hands-free operation Secure sample placement
Classic level
For simple weighing tasks Simple weighing tasks Occasional or portable use Balances for small budgets Good measurement performance Push-button operation Rugged design Precise Easy to operate Reliable
18
Select the right micro balance or analytical balance
Excellence Plus
At the extreme limits for weighing
XP micro balances With up to 52 million resolution points, even the smallest sample quantities can be measured with 100% accuracy. XP line Innovative solutions increase user, data and sample security. XS line SmartGrid, the revolutionary grid weighing pan, reduces weighing times considerably ensuring maximum productivity for daily weighing. MS line The rugged metal housing with integrated overload protection ensures a long operating life at a great price.
Security knows no alternative
Excellence
Simple and efficient weighing
NewClassic
Reliable and rugged for simple weighing
For more information, go to
www.mt.com/micro
Suggestion: page 176
19
Micro Balances
XP Line
Balances
The touchscreen display makes operation clear and simple.
Accuracy
20
Micro Balances: Maximum resolution Intelligent solutions
22
100% accuracy for small samples

With a resolution of up to 21 million points, XP6 micro balances and XP2U ultra micro balances are ideal for high-precision weighing of the smallest samples. Maximum resolution
With their extremely high resolution and reproducibility, XP2U and XP ultra micro balances can weigh even the smallest samples, down to 0.1 g. This ensures the maximum yield for valuable substances.
Complete freedom of movement

Direct access due to the motorized draft shield, which can be opened on any side. Very easy operation infrared sensor, keystroke or manual activation.
23
Micro Balances
XP Line/XS Line
Balances
XP Micro Balances
All models offer:
Comprehensive password protection Alphanumeric sample labeling 4 IDs per sample Sensors for hands-free operation Firmware download via Internet Display of various weighing units
Built-in
SmartScreen color display The touchscreen enables convenient and error-free operation SmartGrid and ErgoClips For fast results and safe sample handling SmartSens and ErgoSens For hands-free operation QM toolbox For maximum safety in regulated environments MinWeigh Warns if the value drops below the minimum weight LevelControl Warns if the balance is not level 8 users Individual settings for 8 users, user management with password protection GxP-compliant documentation Seamless documentation, complete traceability proFACT Fully automatic time and temperature-controlled internal weight adjustment and linearization DeltaTrac Color Permanent display of the available weighing range Connections Built-in RS232 interface, slot for second interface (7 options, including wireless Bluetooth) Applications Comprehensive range of built-in applications LabX PC software For electronic data management (see pages 138 ff)
QM tools (MinWeigh, LevelControl, user management with password protection, BalanceCheck, ChangeHistory, etc.)
Factor calculation Piece counting, formulation, percent weighing, statistics, density determination, differential weighing Motorized doors on the draft shield Removable display Adaptability to environment and weighing process Built-in RS232 interface, slot for second interface (7 options) Communication in 8 languages (e, g, f, i, sp, russ, jap, chin) Easy connection to LabX PC software
Bluetoot h
www.mt.com/xp-analytical
24
XP Micro Balances
Model Maximum load Readability Repeatability Linearity Stabilizat ion Minimum Weighing pan (mm) weight1) Order no.
XP2U XP6
2.1 g 5.1 g
0.1 g 1 g
0.2 g 0.6 g
1 g 4 g
10 s 8 s
0.45 mg 1.2 mg
16 27
11115545 11115515
XP microbalances
XS3DU 0.8 g 3.1 g
1) Typical
1 g/ 10 g
1 g/ 4 g 6 g
10 s/6 s
1.5 mg/ 9 mg
27
11122445
minimum weight according to US Pharmacopoeia (USP).
All models can also be supplied in calibrated versions.
Accessories
also available
The entire selection is listed starting on page 122.
25
Micro Balances
XP Line
Direct
Maximum sample yield Excellent cost savings
With their leading global performance, XP micro balances are the first choice when it comes to weighing small quantities of valuable substances.
Direct dosing of small quantities in tare containers Measurement performance: 52 g x 1 g Typical minimum weight according to USP: 2.1mg
Balances
26
With ErgoClip

Direct dosing
XP micro balances can be used to dose the smallest sample quantities directly in tare containers. This eliminates the risk of errors when transferring samples. The result is maximum measuring accuracy, no risk of contamination and excellent cost savings.
27
Safe handling
ErgoClip Tube
The safest solution for filling tubes (e.g., Eppendorf or PCR tubes).
ErgoClip Flask Micro

For secure placement of test tubes and volumetric flasks. ErgoClips can be set individually on all sides, which enables direct dosing in containers with a small opening.
MinWeigh Door Micro

This enables direct dosing in the end container itself without having to open the draft shield. By reducing turbulence in the weighing chamber, stable results are available immediately.
29
Micro Balances
XP Line
Balances
Security knows no alternative
MinWeigh
MinWeigh uses red digits to warn if the value drops below the minimum weight for the sample.
LevelControl
The XP warns if leveling is faulty and indicates suggestions for correction on the display, thus ensuring a level balance and reproducible results.
XP microbalances
Model Maximum load XP26 XP26
DeltaRange
Readability Repeatability 1 g 2 g/ 0.01 mg 1 g 52 g 2 g/ 0.01 mg 1.5 g
Linearity 6 g
Stabilizat ion 3.5 s 3.5 s/ 2.5 s 3.5 s 3.5 s/ 2.5 s
Minimum Weighing weight1) pan (mm) 2.1 mg 3.6 mg 2.1 mg 3.6 mg 40x40 40x40 40x40 40x40
Order no. 11106048 11106051 11106054 11106057
22 g
5.1 g
22 g 52 g
11 g
2 g/ 5 g 10 g 1.5 g 20 g 2 g/ 6 g 30 g
XP56 XP56DR
DeltaRange
1) Typical
Accessories
also available
30
XP Micro Balances
All models offer:
Comprehensive password protection Alphanumeric sample labeling 4 IDs per sample Sensors for hands-free operation Firmware download via Internet Display of various weighing units
Built-in
QM tools (MinWeigh, LevelControl, user management with password protection, BalanceCheck, ChangeHistory, etc.)
Factor calculation Piece counting, formulation, percent weighing, statistics, density determination, differential weighing Motorized doors on the draft shield Removable display Adaptability to environment and weighing process Built-in RS232 interface, slot for second interface (7 options) Communication in 8 languages (e, g, f, i, sp, russ, jap, chin) Easy connection to LabX PC software
Bluetoot h
31
Photo: panthermedia | Yuri Arcurs
32
For the best
Analytical Balances XP Line
analysis
33
Analytical Balances
Excellence Plus XP Line
Innovative
Fast Precise
Comprehensive security knows no alternative
Innovative solutions increase user security and guarantee unique sample security and measuring accuracy.
Balances
34
LevelControl
The XP warns if leveling is faulty and indicates suggestions for correction on the display, thus ensuring safe results.
35
Analytical Balances
Balances
Sample in
Open door close door
Open sesame!
Thanks to the SmartSens infrared sensor, weighing can be carried out without touching the balance: the weighing chamber door opens and closes automatically. Full focus on the sample ensures that expensive or toxic substances are weighed safely and without spilling.
Precision Balances Excellence Plus XP Line
Balances
Fast and safe sample handling
ErgoClips, the holders for volumetric and round-bottom flasks, glass and plastic test tubes, and disposable weighing pans, allow secure placement of all types of tare containers.
SmartGrid, the revolutionary grid weighing pan, minimizes the surface

area for turbulence in the weighing chamber and provides measurement results extremely fast. Spilled substances are caught by the tray and no longer distort the weighing result.
XP Analytical Balances
Model
DeltaRange
Direct filling in the tare container accelerates the weighing process considerably. A static charge of the tare container is prevented by the Faraday effect of the grid basket. Incorrect weight displays are therefore eliminated.
Weighing pan (mm) 78x73 78x73 78x73 78x73 78x73 78x73
Maximum load
31 g
Readability Repeatability 0.01/ 0.1 mg 0.01 mg 0.01/ 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 520 g 0.1 mg 0.1/ 1 mg
Linearity
Stabilizat ion 2.5 s/ 1.5 s 2.5 s 2.5 s/ 1.5 s 1.5 s 1.5 s 1.5 s/ 1.5 s
Minimum weight1) 21 mg 120 mg 21 mg 21 mg 120 mg 120 mg 120 mg 120 mg 1200 mg
Order no. 11106036 11106024 11106027 11106030 11106042 11106045
XP105 XP205
120 g 220 g
81 g
0.015/ 0.05 mg 0.15 mg 0.015 mg 0.1 mg 0.015/ 0.05 mg 0.15 mg 0.05 mg 0.1 mg 0.2 mg 0.4 mg
XP205 DeltaRange XP204
220 g 220 g
XP504 XP504 DeltaRange

1) Typical
101 g
520 g
0.1/ 0.5 mg 0.5 mg
Accessories also available The entire selection is listed starting on page 122.
38
All models offer:

Comprehensive password protection Alphanumeric sample labeling 4 IDs per sample Sensors for hands-free operation Firmware download via Internet Display of various weighing units Integrated QM tools (MinWeigh, LevelControl, user management with password protection, BalanceCheck, ChangeHistory, etc.) Factor calculation Piece counting, formulation, percent weighing, statistics, density determination, differential weighing Height-adjustable inner draft shield Motorized doors on the draft shield Removable terminal Adaptation to the environment and the weighing process Built-in RS232 interface, slot for second interface (7 options) Communication in 8 languages (e, g, f, i, sp, russ, jap, chin) Easy connection to LabX PC software
XP Analytical Balances
Bluetoot h

Excellence XS Line
Analytical Balances
Ingenious
Excellence XS Line
Balances
40
solution
41
Excellence XS Line
Analytical Balances
The academia balance

High-performance
XS, the first balance with grid
Ideal for teaching Rugged and stable Easy-to-clean Easy-to-use
Balances
weighing pan, sets new standards in terms of speed, ergonomics and efficiency.
42
High-performance weighing The SmartGrid grid weighing pan, revolutionary in

the laboratory, minimizes the surface area for turbulence in the weighing chamber. This reduces stabilization times considerably.
The ErgoClips sample holder, the innovative accessory

for the secure placement of various weighing containers on the SmartGrid, improves sample handling and reduces the effect of electrostatic charge.
43
Excellence XS Line
Analytical Balances
Clean solution Click & wash

Extremely easy removal without tools
Balances
Due to the grid weighing pan fastening on the back, spilled substances simply fall into the tray underneath. The weighing result is not distorted. Both parts can be removed for easy cleaning.
XS Analytical Balances StabiliModel Maximum load Readability Repeatability Linearity zat ion XS105 41 g DualRange 120 g XS205
DualRange
81 g
Minimum weight1) 30 mg 120 mg 30 mg 120 mg 120 mg 120 mg 120 mg 1200 mg 120 mg
Weighing pan (mm) 78x73 78x73 78x73 78x73 78x73 78x73
Order no. 11106009 11106000 11106015 11106012 11106006 11106003
0.01/ 0.1 mg 0.01/ 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.1/ 1 mg 0.1 mg
0.02/ 0.05 mg 0.2 mg 0.02/ 0.05 mg 0.2 mg 0.07 mg 0.07 mg 0.2 mg 0.2 mg
4 s/ 1.5 s 4 s/ 1.5 s 1.5 s 1.5 s 1.5 s/ 1.5 s 1.5 s
220 g 61 g 120 g
XS64 XS104
XS204 81 g DeltaRange 220 g XS204

1) Typical
0.1/ 0.5 mg 0.5 mg 0.07 mg 0.2 mg
220 g
Accessories also available The entire selection is listed starting on page 122.
44
All models offer:

Firmware download via Internet Display of various weighing units Factor calculation Alphanumeric identification Density determination for solid, liquid and viscous substances Formulation and totaling Statistical display with , % Calculation of coefficients Comprehensive password protection Communication in 8 languages (e, g, f, i, sp, russ, jap, chin) Easy connection to LabX PC software
XS Analytical Balances
Touchscreen For quick and easy operation SmartGrid and ErgoClips For fast results and safe sample handling Left/right operation The right-hand door can be opened from the left and vice versa GxP-compliant documentation Seamless documentation, complete traceability FACT Fully automatic internal adjustment DeltaTrac Permanent display of the available weighing range Connections Built-in RS232 interface, slot for second interface (7 options, including wireless Bluetooth) Applications Built-in standard applications LabX PC software For electronic data management (see pages 138 ff)
Bluetoot h
www.mt.com/xs-analytical
Analytical Balances
Classic Plus
Balances
Large sensor keys and an illuminated display make the AB-S very user-friendly.
46
Routine
Simply Classic
Thanks to the integrated adjustment weight, precise and reliable results are guaranteed. WithFACT, the balance adjusts itself automatically. Time-consuming tests with external weights are reduced. Simply precise
Temperature changes affect the accuracy of the weighing results. FACT adjusts the balance automatically whenever the sensor detects a value that is outside the permitted tolerance limits.
Displayed weight
Upper limit
Weight
Lower limit Time
47
Analytical Balances
Classic Plus/NewClassic
Balances
Classic Plus Analytical Balances

For quick and reliable weighing results Fully automatic internal adjustment High-quality housing made from cast aluminum with resistance to chemicals Built-in PC or printer connection as standard Glass draft shield with sliding doors. Free access from right, left and top. Built-in applications
All models offer:

Piece counting, percent weighing, dynamic weighing Adaptation to the weighing process Display of various weighing units Free factor for multiplication and division
www.mt.com/classic
Classic Plus
AB135-S/FACT
Dual Range
Maximum load
31 g
Readability
Repeatability
Linearity
Weighing pan (mm)
Order no.
120 g 220 g
AB265-S/FACT
Dual Range
61 g
0.01 mg/ 0.1 mg 0.01 mg/ 0.1 mg
0.03 mg/ 0.1 mg 0.03 mg/ 0.1 mg
0.2 mg 0.2 mg
80 80
11139502 11139506
All models offer fully automatic internal adjustment (FACT) and can also be supplied in calibrated versions.
NewClassic
MS104S MS204S MS304S 120 g 220 g 320 g 0.0001 g 0.0001 g 0.0001 g 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.2 mg 0.2 mg 0.3 mg 90 90 90 11124474 11124477 11124480
All models offer fully automatic internal adjustment (FACT) and can also be supplied in calibrated versions.
Accessories also available
The NewClassic balance models listed here will be available from July 2009.
48
Heavy metal
NewClassic Analytical Balances
For quick and reliable weighing results Fully automatic internal adjustment High-quality housing made from cast aluminum with resistance to chemicals RS232/USB for connection to PC; RS232 for barcode scanner or printer Protects the weighing cell from overload SmartTrac displays the used part of the weighing range The protective cover protects the balance from scratches and dirt Diagnostic tests for checking the keypad, repeatability, etc. Programmable keys for quick access to frequently used applications Protection of the weighing configuration against accidental changes Built-in applications: Piece counting, percent, differential and dynamic weighing, statistics
www.mt.com/newclassic
(from July 2009) Suggestion: page 176 Click here to watch our movie on easy cleaning
Classic redefined
The
solid metal housing is timeless and protects the MonoBloc weighing cell. This ensures accuracy and repeatability in all environments. QuickLock draft shield can be removed in just a few simple steps without even moving the balance. The panes are dishwasher-proof. its large numbers, clear symbols and intuitive menu, the high-contrast display ensures quick and easy operation. adjustable foot and clearly visible level indicator are arranged at the front for optimum readability. can be transferred to Microsoft Excel at the touch of a button.
49
The
With
The
Data
50
Ph
Precision Balances Excellence Plus XP Line
The right precision balance for every requirement

Select the right Precision Balance
Excellence Plus
High productivity and exceptional solutions, increased security reduced risks
XP Line Innovative tools and color touchscreen for safe and documented results. Maximum weighing performance and hands-free operation increase productivity. A wide range of complex accessories enables individual solutions. XS Line High-speed, rugged version and easy operation for unrivalled performance at high throughput. MS Line The rugged metal housing with integrated overload protection ensures a long operating life at a very attractive price.
Excellence
Highly productive in routine operation
NewClassic
Reliable and rugged for simple weighing
51
Precision Balances
Top loader
Fast Precise Reliable
Balances
52
Outstanding measurement performance

A separate processor takes the MonoBlocHighSpeed weighing cell to maximum speed, and thanks to the overload protection even heavy loads do not trouble the XP.
53
Precision Balances
Balances
Color-coded operation
for demanding applications
Intuitive user interface, combined with maximum weighing performance, increases productivity in regulated environments.
Color-coded user profiles

Offer a familiar feel and reassure users that they are working with their "own" balance and with the correct settings.
The displays are shown actual size
54
55
Precision Balances
Balances
User-friendly
Faster, more accurate results with MonoBlocHighSpeed technology and MinWeigh for 100% process reliability.
Multilingual
English French Spanish Japanese German Italian Russian Chinese
The display is shown actual size
Touchscreen
Makes XP operation easy to understand, quick and userfriendly.
56
MinWeigh
Warns if the sample weight drops below the permitted minimum. Ensures 100% process reliability.
The display is shown actual size
Weighing-in guide
Quick and secure weighing-in with clear display in red and green.
57
Precision Balances
Sizes
Balances
The family S/M/L platforms for precise weighing from 0.1 mg up to 64 kg.
XP
58
S-M-L Versatile use
59
Precision Balances
Hard to lift Easy to weigh Anywhere up to 64 kg

XP Balances
with M and L platforms are the first choice for high-capacity weighing tasks. Their rugged design and superior weighing technology ensure fast results in all environments. The color touchscreen and a range of sophisticated accessories make operation deceptively simple and support the creation of purpose-built weighing solutions.
Balances
60
XP Precision Balances
All models offer:
Integrated QM tools (MinWeigh, LevelControl, user management with password protection, BalanceCheck, ChangeHistory, etc.) Comprehensive password protection Alphanumeric sample labeling, 4 IDs per sample Sensors enable hands-free operation Firmware download via Internet Display of various weighing units Factor calculation Piece counting, formulation, percent weighing and dynamic weighing, statistics, differential weighing and density determination Adaptation to the environment and the weighing process Large weighing pans made from stainless steel, with resistance to chemicals Overload protection Removable terminal Communication in 8 languages (e, g, f, i, sp, russ, jap, chin) Easy connection to LabX PC software SmartScreen color display The touchscreen enables convenient and error-free operation SmartSens and ErgoSens For hands-free operation QM toolbox For maximum safety in regulated environments MinWeigh Warns if the value drops below the minimum weight LevelControl Warns if the balance is not leveled 8 users Individual settings for 8 users, user management with password protection GxP-compliant documentation Seamless documentation, complete traceability proFACT Fully automatic time and temperature-controlled internal weight adjustment MonoBlocHighSpeed technology For maximum weighing performance Reliability Made from metal with resistance to chemicals IP54 InUse Protection against dust and water DeltaTrac Color Graphic display of the available weighing range Connections Built-in RS232 interface, slot for second interface (7 options, including wireless Bluetooth)
Bluetoot h
Applications Comprehensive range of built-in applications LabX PC software For electronic data management (see pages 138 ff) FreeWeigh software Connection to FreeWeigh.Net for optimum process control
Amazing solutions using ingenious accessories

Stand
To save place and protect the terminal from dirt, it can also be mounted on a stand.
System integration
The weighing platform for the XP precision balance is also available separately. Compact, rugged and with excellent weighing performance, it is ideal for system integration.
Data acquisition made easy

Commercially available keyboards or barcode readers can be connected easily and used with the XP.
Second interface
With support for Bluetooth, Ethernet or PS/2, the XP can always be connected. Select one of the 7possible additional interfaces.
Precision Balances
Balances
S-Platform
Model XP204S XP404S XP404S
De taRange
Maximum load 210 g 410 g

410 g
80 g
Repeatability Readability 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg/ 1 mg 1 mg 1 mg 1 mg/ 10 mg 1 mg 1 mg/ 10 mg 1 mg/ 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg/ 0.1 g 10 mg 10 mg/ 0.1 g 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg/ 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.2 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg/ 0.6 mg 0.9 mg 0.9 mg 1 mg/ 6 mg 0.8 mg 1 mg/ 6 mg 1 mg/ 6 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg/ 60 mg 8 mg 8 mg/ 60 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg/ 60 mg 80 mg 80 mg 80 mg 80 mg 80 mg
Linearity 0.2 mg 0.2 mg 0.6 mg 2 mg 2 mg 10 mg 2 mg 6 mg 6 mg 20 mg 20 mg 20 mg 20 mg 60 mg 20 mg 100 mg 20 mg 20 mg 50 mg 60 mg 60 mg 60 mg 100 mg 100 mg
Weighing pan 90 mm 90 mm 90 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 190x223 mm 190x223 mm 190x223 mm 190x223 mm 190x223 mm
Order no. 11130052 11130076 11130082 11130022 11130020 11130040 11130000 11130088 11130094 11130061 11130070 11130060 11130102 11130039 11130100 11130101 11130201 11130200 11130206 11130152 11130141 11130140 11130221 11130220
XP203S XP603S XP603S

De taRange
210 g 610 g 120 g 610 g 1210 g

2100 g 5100 g
1000 g 500 g
XP1203S XP2003S
De taRange
XP5003S
De taRange
XP802S XP1202S XP2002S XP4002S XP4002S

De taRange
810 g 1210 g 2100 g 4100 g

4100 g
800 g
XP6002S XP6002S De taRange XP8002S
6100 g 1200 g 6100 g 8100 g
XP10002S 10100 g XP10002S 2000 g De taRange 10100 g XP2001S XP4001S XP6001S XP8001S 2100 g 4100 g 6100 g 8100 g
XP10001S 10100 g

64
M-Platform
Model XP6002M
De taRange
Maximum load
6100 g 12100 g
2400 g 1200 g
Readability 0.01 g/ 0.1 g 0.01 g/ 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g/ 1 g 12100 g 16100 g

3200 g
Repeatability 0.01 g/ 0.06 g 0.01 g/ 0.06 g 0.08 g 0.08 g/ 0.6 g 0.08 g 0.08 g 0.08 g/ 0.6 g 0.08 g 0.6 g 0.6 g
Linearity 0.06 g 0.06 g 0.1 g 0.6 g 0.1 g 0.2 g 0.6 g 0.2 g 0.6 g 0.6 g
Weighing pan
Order no.
237x237 mm 11130233 237x237 mm 11130239 237x237 mm 11130245 237x237 mm 11130251 237x237 mm 11130257 237x237 mm 11130735 237x237 mm 11130732 237x237 mm 11130738 237x237 mm 11130263 237x237 mm 11130741
XP12002M
De taRange
XP8001M XP8001M
De taRange
1600 g
8100 g
8100 g
XP12001M XP16001M XP16001M

De taRange
0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g/ 1 g 0.1 g 1 g 1 g
16100 g 20100 g 12100 g 20100 g
XP20001M XP12000M* XP20000M*
L-Platform
XP8001L XP16001L XP32001L XP32001L De taRange XP64001L XP16000L XP32000L XP64000L 8100 g 16100 g 32100 g 32100 g 64100 g 16100 g 32100 g 64100 g
6400 g
0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g/1 g 0.1 g 1 g 1 g 1 g
0.08 g 0.08 g 0.08 g 0.1 g/0.6 g 0.1 g 0.6 g 0.6 g 0.6 g
0.2 g 0.2 g 0.3 g 0.3 g 0.5 g 0.6 g 0.6 g 0.6 g
280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm
11130630 11130633 11130636 11130639 11130642 11130645 11130648 11130651
All models can also be supplied in calibrated versions, except for models marked with *.
XP Precision Balances
Exce lence Plus XP Precision balances Regula o y Comp iance High Productiv ty Amazing Solu ions
www.mt.com/xp-precision
Versatility For High-End Requirements
65
Precision Balances
Balances
67
Precision Balances
Excellence XS Line
The academia balance

Powerful Rugged
The XS is designed for error-free operation in harsh environments with high throughput. With its large platform and rugged design, it copes easily with high-performance weighing tasks.
Balances
Exce lence XS The new precision balance rom METTLER TOLEDO Eff c ency without compromise That s the weigh!

Excellence XS: the legend of tomorrow
www.mt.com/xs-precision
68
20% faster
Cutting edge technology: the MonoBloc HighSpeed weighing cell offers maximum measurement performance.
69
Precision Balances
Balances
Robust
The XS is extremely rugged and reliable. With IP54 InUse protection, it is ideally suited to all environments.
Easy operation
Touchscreen clear, simple and convenient operation.
Alphanumeric keypad for easy sample labeling.
XS Precision Balances
Model XS403S XS603S Maximum load 410 g 610 g Readability 1 mg 1 mg 1 mg 1 mg/ 10 mg 1 mg 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg/ 0.1 g 10 mg 10 mg/ 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g Repeatability 0.9 mg 0.9 mg 0.9 mg 1 mg/ 6 mg 0.8 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg/ 60 mg 8 mg 8 mg/ 60 mg 80 mg 80 mg 80 mg Linearity 2 mg 2 mg 2 mg 6 mg 2 mg 20 mg 20 mg 20 mg 60 mg 20 mg 60 mg 60 mg 60 mg 100 mg Weighing pan 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 190x223 mm 190x223 mm 190x223 mm Order no. 11130153 11130156 11130159 11130162 11130165 11130168 11130171 11130174 11130177 11130180 11130183 11130186 11130189 11130192 XS203S 210 g
XS603S 120 g DeltaRange 610 g XS1003S XS802S XS2002S XS4002S 1010 g 810 g 2100 g 4100 g
XS4002S 800 g DeltaRange 4100 g XS6002S 6100 g XS6002S 1200 g DeltaRange 6100 g XS4001S XS6001S XS8001S 4100 g 6100 g 8100 g
All models can also be supplied in cal brated versions, except for models marked with *.
70
XS Precision Balances
All models offer: Firmware download via Internet Alphanumeric sample labeling Display of various weighing units Factor calculation 7 integrated applications: percent weighing, dynamic weighing, statistics, piece counting, formulation and density determination Adaptation to the environment and the weighing process Large weighing pans made from stainless steel, with resistance to chemicals Overload protection Communication in 8 languages (e, g, f, i, sp, russ, jap, chin) Easy connection to LabX PC software Touchscreen For quick and easy operation GxP-compliant documentation Seamless documentation, complete traceability FACT Fully automatic internal adjustment MonoBlocHighSpeed technology For maximum weighing performance Reliability Made from metal with resistance to chemicals IP54 InUse Protection against dust and water
Bluetoot h
Connections Built-in RS232 interface, slot for second interface (7 options, including wireless Bluetooth)
DeltaTrac Permanent graphic display of the available weighing range Applications Built-in standard applications LabX PC software For electronic data management (see pages 138 ff)
XS High-capacity Precision Balances

Model XS6001M Maximum load 6100 g Readability 0.1 g 0.1 g/ 1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g/ 1 g 0.1 g 1 g 1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g/ 1 g 1 g 1 g
Repeatability 0.08 g 0.08 g/ 0.6 g 0.08 g 0.08 g/ 0.6 g 0.08 g 0.6 g 0.6 g 0.08 g 0.08 g 0.08 g 0.1 g/ 0.6 g 0.6 g 0.6 g
Linearity 0.06 g 0.6 g 0.1 g 0.6 g 0.2 g 0.6 g 0.6 g 0.2 g 0.2 g 0.3 g 0.3 g 0.6 g 0.6 g
Weighing pan 237x237 mm 237x237 mm 237x237 mm 237x237 mm 237x237 mm 237x237 mm 237x237 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm
Order no. 11130270 11130273 11130276 11130745 11130748 11130279 11130751 11130660 11130663 11130666 11130669 11130672 11130675
XS6001M 1200 g DeltaRange 6100 g XS10001M 10100 g XS12001M

DeltaRange 12100 g
2400 g
XS16001M 16100 g XS10000M* 10100 g XS16000M* 16100 g XS8001L XS16001L XS32001L 8100 g 16100 g 32100 g
XS32001L 6400 g 32100 g DeltaRange XS16000L XS32000L 16100 g 32100 g
All models can also be supplied in calibrated versions, except for models marked w th *.
71
Precision Balances
NewClassic
Unbreakable
Reliable Rugged
Balances
The metal housing, with resistance to chemicals, and the MonoBloc weighing cell with overload protection ensure a long operating life at an attractive price. With its large numbers, clear symbols and intuitive menu, the high-contrast display ensures quick and easy operation. Three freely programmable SmartKeys ensure that routine tasks can be started quickly.
Click here to watch our movie on SmartKeys
72
73
Precision Balances
NewClassic
Balances
Simply weighing
Two models for tough conditions are fully protected against dust and water jets (IP65)
Click here to watch our movie on testing and IP protection
Electromagnetic compatibility The unique metal housing guarantees reliable weighing results; adverse effects from storms or electromagnetic interference caused by other devices are reduced considerably.
Resistance to chemicals The housing of NewClassic balances is resistant to most chemicals including acetone. The protective cover shields the balance from dirt and sctatches.
Dishwasher-proof The glass elements of the draft shield can be cleaned easily and conveniently in the dishwasher.
74
NewClassic Precision Balances

Model MS303S MS303SE MS403S MS603S MS1003S MS1602S MS1602SE MS3002S MS3002SE MS4002 MS4002SDR MS6002S MS6002SDR MS6001S MS8001S MS8001SE MS12001L MS16001L MS16001LE MS32001L MS32001LE MS32000L MS32000LE MS15KLE MS30KLE MS15KLIPE MS24KLIPE
1220 g 820 g
Maximum load 320 g 320 g 420 g 620 g 1020 g 1620 g 1620 g 3200 g 3200 g 4200 g 4200 g 6200 g 6200 g 6200 g 8200 g 8200 g 12200 g 16200 g 16200 g 32200 g 32200 g 32200 g 32200 g 15 kg 30 kg 15 kg 24 kg
Readability 0.001 g 0.001 g 0.001 g 0.001 g 0.001 g 0.01 g 0.01 g 0.01 g 0.01 g 0.01 g 0.1/0.01 g 0.01 g 0.1/0.01 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 1g 1 g 2 g 2 g 2 g 2 g
Repeatability 0.001 g 0.001 g 0.001 g 0.001 g 0.001 g 0.01 g 0.01 g 0.01 g 0.01 g 0.01 g 0.06/0.01 g 0.01 g 0.06/0.01 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.5 g 0.5 g 1 g 2 g 1 g 2 g
Weighing pan 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 170x200 mm 170x200 mm 170x200 mm 170x200 mm 170x200 mm 170x200 mm 170x200 mm 170x200 mm 190x226 mm 190x226 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm 351x245 mm
Order no. 11124489 11124611 11124492 11124498 11124504 11124516 11124629 11124522 11124635 11124528 11124531 11124537 11124540 11124561 11124564 11124662 11124573 11124576 11124671 11124588 11124683 11124701 11124704 11124713 11124722 11124734 11124740
IP65
All models can also be supplied in calibrated versions from July 2009.
NewClassic Precision Balances

For quick and reliable weighing results ully automatic F internal adjustment igh-quality housing H made from cast aluminum with resistance to chemicals S232/USB for R connection to PC; RS232 for barcode scanner or printer Protects the weighing cell from overload martTrac displays the S used part of the weighing range Programmable keys for quick access to frequently used applications Protection of the weighing configuration against accidental changes iagnostic tests for D checking the keypad, repeatability, etc. uilt-in applications: B Piece counting, percent, differential and dynamic weighing, statistics
The protective cover shields the balance from dirt and sctatches.
75
Precision Balances
Excellence XS EX Line
Safety
Balances
and efficiency for hazardous applications
A detailed explanation of Ex is provided on page 498.
Robust
The dirt-resistant housing makes it easy to clean the surfaces. The rugged design offers complete overload protection.
www.mt.com/xs-ex
76
Touchscreen display
Safe and easy operation via touchscreen with graphical user interface.
Stand for terminal

Save space and avoid soiling the terminal by using an optional stand.
Excellence XS Ex2 balances enable efficient weighing in ATEX Zone 2 environments.
ErgoSens
The freely positionable and individually configurable ErgoSens enables hands-free operation of the balance.
77
Compact draft shield

The sliding doors can be opened easily and enable free access to the weighing chamber as well as easy cleaning. To save valuable space, the draft shield doors do not jut out over the balance.
Free-standing platform
The Ex2 platform is available in three sizes and is the perfect solution for integration in automatic systems.
Absolute cutting edge technology

The MonoBlocHighSpeed weighing cell with maximum weighing performance and unique rugged design.
XS Ex2 Precision Balances

All models offer:
Firmware download via Internet Alphanumeric sample labeling Display of various weighing units Factor calculation 7 integrated applications: percent weighing, dynamic weighing, statistics, piece counting, formulation and density determination Adaptation to the environment and the weighing process Large weighing pans made from stainless steel, with resistance to chemicals Overload protection Communication in 8 languages (e, g, f, i, sp, russ, jap, chin) Easy connection to LabX PC software ATEX Zone 2 Approved for danger zone 2 (Category 3G) Touchscreen For quick and easy operation GxP-compliant documentation Seamless documentation, complete traceability FACT Fully automatic internal adjustment MonoBlocHighSpeed technology For maximum weighing performance Reliability Made from metal with resistance to chemicals Connections Built-in RS232 interface, slot for second interface (7 options, including wireless Bluetooth)
Bluetoot h
DeltaTrac Permanent graphic display of the available weighing range LabX PC software For electronic data management (see pages 138 ff)
XS Ex2 Precision Balances

Model XS603SX XS1003SX Maximum load 610 g 1010 g Readability 0.1 mg 1 mg 1 mg 1 mg/ 10 mg 0.01 g 0.01 g 0.1 g 0.01 g/ 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 1 g 1 g Repeatability 0.2 mg 0.9 mg 0.8 mg 1 mg/ 6 mg 8 mg 8 mg 80 mg 10 mg/ 60 mg 80 mg 80 mg 80 mg 100 mg 600 mg 600 mg Linearity 0.2 mg 2 mg 2 mg 6 mg 20 mg 20 mg 60 mg 60 mg 60 mg 100 mg 300 mg 500 mg 600 mg 600 mg Weighing pan 90 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 127x127 mm 170x205 mm 170x205 mm 190x223 mm 237x237 mm 237x237 mm 237x237 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm 280x360 mm Order no. 11121620 11121626 11121632 11121638 11121644 11121650 11121656 11121674 11121680 11121686 11121704 11121710 11121716 11121722 XS204SX 210 g
XS5003SX 1000 g De taRange 5100 g XS4002SX XS6002SX XS4001SX 4100 g 6100 g 4100 g
XS6002MX 1200 g De taRange 6100 g XS6001MX 6100 g XS12001MX 12100 g XS32001LX 32100 g XS64001LX 64100 g XS32000LX 32100 g XS64000LX 64100 g
All models can also be supplied in calibrated versions. Power supply for Ex Zone 2 (PS X2) must be ordered separately. Order no.: 11132730
79
Precision Balances
Excellence X platforms and industrial terminals
Individually combined
Platform + Terminal = Weighing solution
Balances
80
Excellence X platforms and industrial terminals. The perfect combination for maximum precision in challenging applications.
81
Precision Balances
Optimal Functional
Ideal
Balances
82
The X platform is available in three platform sizes (S, M and L). With a capacity from 210 g to 64 kg and a readability of 0.1 mg to 1 g, it offers optimum capacity and weighing pans with ideal dimensions for every workplace. Together with industrial terminals, Excellence X platforms offer the perfect combination for maximum precision in industrial applications. Connecting the X platform and IND terminal
Connecting an X platform to an IND terminal is very simple. All of the application functions of an IND terminal are now also available for an X platform. In addition, the settings for adjustment, testing or the filter of an X platform can be made via an IND terminal. More information about IND terminals can be found in our industrial catalog.
Precision Balances
User-defined combinations
X platform product overview
X platforms are available in three different sizes: S, M and L platforms. The models for 0.1 and 1 mg are supplied with a Pro draft shield.
Balances
S platform
Model X204S* X404S X404S X203S X603S* X603S Maximum load 210 g 410 g
80 g
Repeatability Readability 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg/ 1 mg 1 mg 1 mg 1 mg/ 10 mg 1 mg 1 mg/ 10 mg 1 mg/ 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg/ 0.1 g 10 mg 10 mg 10 mg/ 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.2 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.9 mg 0.9 mg 1 mg 0.8 mg 1 mg 1 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg 8 mg 80 mg 80 mg 80 mg 80 mg
Linearity 0.2 mg 0.2 mg 0.6 mg 2 mg 2 mg 10 mg 2 mg 6 mg 6 mg 20 mg 20 mg 20 mg 20 mg 0.1 mg 20 mg 20 mg 50 mg 60 mg 60 mg 0.1 g 0.1 g
Order no. 11130055 111130079 11130085 11130008 11130014 11130046 11130062 11130091 11130097 11130073 11130043 11130109 11130112 11130115 11130209 11130212 11130215 11130146 11130149 11130226 11130229
DeltaRange 410 g
210 g 610 g
120 g DeltaRange 610 g 1210 g

500 g
X1203S X2003S X5003S X1202S X2002S
DeltaRange 2100 g
1000 g DeltaRange 5100 g 1210 g 2100 g
X4002S* 4100 g X6002S* 6100 g X6002S X8002S

DeltaRange 6100 g
1200 g
8100 g
X10002S 10100 g X10002S 2000 g DeltaRange 10100 g X4001S* 4100 g X6001S X8001S 6100 g 8100 g
X10001S 10100 g
All models can also be supplied in cal brated versions, except for models marked with *.
84
A wide selection of terminals are available to meet every requirement, including customerspecific configured versions. For help finding the right terminal, simply give us a call. Information about load cells can be found in the reference section starting on page 508.
M platform
Model X12002M De taRange X8001M X12001M* X12000M X20001M X20000M Maximum load 2400 g 12100 g 8100 g 12100 g 12100 g 20100 g 20100 g Readability 10 mg/ 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 1 g 0.1 g 1g Repeatability 10 mg 80 mg 80 mg 80 mg 0.6 g 0.6 g Linearity 60 mg 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.2 g 0.6 g 0.6 g Order no. 11130242 11130248 11130723 11130260 11130266 11130729
L platform
X16001L X32001L* X64001L* X32000L 16100 g 32100 g 64100 g 32100 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 0.1 g 1 g 0.08 g 0.08 g 0.1 g 0.6 g 0.2 g 300 mg 500 mg 0.6 g 11130603 11130606 11130612 11130618
All models can also be supplied in calibrated versions, except for models marked w th *.
85
High-resolution bench/floor scales
Weighing platforms
86
For heavyweights
Up to 6000 kilograms Weighing terminals Floor scales Weighing modules/weighing cells Volume measurement Special solutions
Measurement and weighing technology for industry

From the food industry, through pharmaceutical ingredients manufacturing, formulation of pharmaceuticals, metal, electrical and plastics industry or petrochemicals, transport and logistics to machine and plant engineering our experience and our knowledge of these industries is applied to all of our weighing solutions. METTLER TOLEDO measurement and weighing technology is the result of over 60 years of research and development combined with close cooperation with our customers.
Heavyweights need a separate catalog. To request a catalogue, contact your local METTLER TOLEDO representative.
87
Weighing put
to the test
Maximum productivity
Extremely short stabilization times accelerate your processes.
Our compact weighing modules are specially designed for use in automatic processes and harsh ambient conditions.
Weighing Modules
Modulo WM Line
High speed
Performance, reliability and profitability
Approved for danger zones Special version for ATEX Zone 2. Intrinsically safe version for ATEX Zone 1 or FM Class I, Div. 1. Long service life The stainless steel housing combined with overload protection guarantees reliable results under all conditions. Easy to clean The wipe-clean version offers IP66 protection.
Excellent connectivity Can be connected directly to every process control system via RS232 or RS422. Accessory modules for Profibus, DeviceNet or Ethernet.
Modulo WM line
Model Maximum load Readability Repeatability (s) Size (DxWxH mm) Order no.
WM124-L22 WM123-L22 WM503-L22 WM3002-L22 WM6002-L22
121 g 121 g 510 g 3100 g 6100 g
0.1 mg 1 mg 1 mg 10 mg 10 mg
0.1 mg 1 mg 1 mg 10 mg 10 mg
240x85x126 240x85x126 240x85x126 240x85x126 240x85x126
42102000 42102004 42102008 42102012 42102026
WM...-W...: Available in wipe-clean version WM...-X...22: Approved for danger zone 2 (Category 3G) WM...X-...CL: Approved for danger zone 1 (Category 3G)
91
Weighing Modules
WXS
OEM Weighing Modules
High throughput
in automation/process technology The fast and modular concept for every environment
Minimize cycle times with high-speed weighing using WXS weighing modules. WXS modules can be integrated easily into your system.
92
Can be adapted to your requirements Install your own weighing equipment on the flexible adapter weighing pan.
System connections Various optional interfaces or connection modules, including RS232, Ethernet, Profibus, DeviceNet or Bluetooth. The modules can be integrated easily into your connection plan.
Rugged design for a long service life The stainless steel housing with mounting equipment is designed for analytical weighing in harsh environments.
WXS component
WXS205S/15 WXSS205* WXS205SDU/15 DualRange WXSS205DU* DualRange WXS204S/15 WXSS204*
Maximum load 220 g 220 g

110 g
Repeatability Readability 0.01 mg 0.01 mg 0.01/ 0.1 mg 0.01/ 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.04 mg 0.04 mg 0.03/ 0.07 mg 0.03/ 0.07 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg
Stabilizat ion Linearity 0.15 mg 0.15 mg 0.2 mg 0.2 mg 0.25 mg 0.25 mg 3 s 3 s 3 s/2 s 3 s/2 s 2 s 2 s
Terminal
Housing
Order no. 11121003 11121001 11121008 11121006 11121023 11121021
None Stainless steel Monochrome Stainless steel None Stainless steel Monochrome Stainless steel None Stainless steel Monochrome Stainless steel
220 g 220 g 220 g 220 g
110 g
* Also available in cert fied versions
93
Weighing Modules
WXT
OEM Weighing Modules

94
High throughput
as standalone version
The WXT can be accessed from all sides and offers maximum flexibility when positioning the weighing cell, electronic unit and terminal.
www.mt.com/wx
More information about evaporation traps can be found in the reference section starting on page 516.
Easy to clean The protective cover enables efficient cleaning to prevent cross-contamination. WXT bench version

Compatible accessories All weighing modules are compatible with a wide range of accessories. This includes a evaporation trap for pipette calibration and the compact draft shield.
RepeatReadability ability Stabilizat ion Linearity
Maximum load
Terminal
Housing
Order no.
WXTS205* WXTP205

WXTS205DU
DualRange* DualRange
110 g
WXTP205DU WXTS204* WXTP204

110 g
220 g 220 g 220 g 220 g 220 g 220 g
0.01 mg 0.01 mg 0.01/ 0.1 mg 0.01/ 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg
0.04 mg 0.04 mg 0.03/ 0.07 mg 0.03/ 0.07 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg
0.15 mg 0.15 mg 0.2 mg 0.2 mg 0.25 mg 0.25 mg
3 s Monochrome 3 s Color 3 s/2 s Monochrome 3 s/2 s Color 2 s Monochrome 2 s Color
White coated White coated White coated White coated White coated White coated
11121011 11121012 11121016 11121017 11121026 11121027
* Also available in cert fied versions
WX Weighing Modules
GxP-compliant documentation Seamless and GxPcompliant documentation can be configured easily and flexibly. FACT Fully automatic internal adjustment and linearization. Touchscreen Display with touchscreen technology for safe and easy operation. Connections Built-in RS232 interface, optional second interface. Stainless steel The stainless steel housing offers reliable protection for the weighing cell and electronics. Built-in applications Adapter For below-the-balance weighing.
All models offer:
Use with or without terminal Overload protection Interface for below-the-balance weighing Several options for parameter configuration Up to 5 m cable length between weighing cell and electronic unit 50 mm standard weighing pan and 36mm adapter weighing pan with mounting jack WXS: 206 x 127 x 70 mm (L x W x H) WXT: 224 x 135 x 80 mm (L x W x H) Optional: transport case
95
Exact precision
Comparator balances are used for all metrological applications such as determination of mass, weight calibration and quality control in other words, wherever maximum precision and accuracy is required.
96
97
Comparator Balances
For nanotechnologists
10 ng Measurement accuracy 500 ng Repeatability
Balances
The M_one can be used to connect 1 kg mass primary standards made from stainless steel to the national kilogram prototype made from platinum-iridium. The comparator is used for the determination of mass in the framework of international comparative measurements and calibrations for national institutes, calibration laboratories and industry. For example, an M_one comparator is used at the PhysikalischTechnischen Bundesanstalt (PTB, Federal Institute of Physics and Technology) at Braunschweig in Germany. The PTB is the national metrological institute which provides scientific and technical services.
98
Weighing in a vacuum
Determination of mass in a vacuum is a step towards nanotechnology. The M_one vacuum system measures masses up to 1 kg. In combination with the 3-beam weighing pan, the automatic turntable guarantees maximum repeatability and enables the measurement of weights, balls and masses of various forms. The vacuum weighing sluice and vacuum transport container can be used to further optimize the measurement performance. More information about comparators can be found in the reference section on page 506.
99
Weight determination from 0.1 g to 6000 kg

With 52 million points, mass comparators have an extremely high resolution and also offer maximum repeatability. These two features enable the execution of comparison weighing between a known reference weight and an unknown test specimen, even with a minimal weight difference. Mass comparators are mainly used by national institutes, bureaux of standards, and national and industrial calibration laboratories for weight determination. These applications require an extremely high resolution. Automated mass comparators In an automated mass comparator, the fitting of several weight pieces prior to the weighing process and the removal of the weights at the end of the process is a single step in each case. No manual intervention is required during the automated measurement process, which increases the quality, accuracy and efficiency of comparison weighing. Manual mass comparators Manual mass comparators are used for all metrological applications such as determination of mass, weight calibration and quality control, which require maximum accuracy. Kilogram prototype, made from platinum-iridium
100
Manual mass comparators from METTLER TOLEDO cover a weighing range from 1 mg to 6000 kg.
Comparator Balances
Maximum precision made easy

Our manual comparator models offer a maximum load of up to 6,000 kg. On models for up to 2 kg, the weighing chamber doors open automatically. This leaves the operator's hands free for working with the sample. The menu-driven application guides the user through the weighing process, while the touchscreen makes operation easy. All models have an interface for data
Automatic volume comparator

The VC1005 volume comparator determines the volume and density of test weights (1 g 1 kg) by comparing a test weight with a volume standard.
a_comparator
For automatic determination of test weights, by comparing a test weight with a standard or through downwards/ upwards calibration. Systems in the a_comparator line comprise a comparator balance with high resolution, a weight magazine and a 3-axis robot, as well as the housing and controller.
www.mt.com/comparators
101
Comparator Balances
More than accurate

Comparators offer maximum accuracy for the determination of mass and weighing applications to ensure verifiability.
Balances
102
Comparator Balances
Model Maximum load Readability Repeatability5) Order no.
M_one 1)
1001.5 g 10011 g M_10 1) 2) 5.1 g a5 111 g a107 2) 111 g a100 2) 1109 g a1000 2) 111 g AX107H 2) 111 g AX106H 2) 1011 g AX1006 2) 10011 g AX10005 2) 2) 16 kg AX16004 32 kg AX32004 2) 64 kg AX64004 2) UMX5 5.1 g XP26C 22 g XP56C 52 g AX106 111 g AX206 220 g AX1005 1109 g AX1004 1109 g AX2005 1109 g (min. 998 g) VC1005X 1109 g XP2004S 2300 g XP2003S 2300 g XP5003S 5100 g XP10003S 10100 g AX12004 12111 g XP26003L 26.1 kg XP32003L 32.1 kg XP64003L 64.1 kg XP64002L 64.1 kg 64.1 kg XP64002L-T 4) XP155KS 150 kg XP604KM 600 kg XP1003KM 1100 kg XP2003KL 2200 kg XP6002KL 6000 kg
100 ng 1 g 100 ng 100 ng 1 g 10 g 100 ng 1 g 1 g 10 g 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 g 1 g 1 g 1 g 2 g 0.01 mg 0.1 mg 0.01 mg 0.01 mg 0.1 mg 1 mg 1 mg 1 mg 0.1 mg 1 mg 5 mg 5 mg 10 mg 10 mg 0.05 g 0.1 g 0.5 g 1 g 10 g
500 ng 8 g 160 ng 980 ng 1.6 g 10 g 800 ng 1.5 g 2 g 20 g 0.2 mg 0.2 mg 0.4 mg 0.4 g 1.5 g 3 g 3 g 4 g 0.02 mg 0.07 mg 0.04 mg 0.02 mg 0.1 mg 1 mg 0.8 mg 1 mg 0.2 mg 3 mg 10 mg 8 mg 25 mg 30 mg 0.15 g 0.3 g 3 g 10 g 100 g
Customer solution Customer solution 11107540 11107541 11107541 11107542 11115765 11115755 11115725 11115785 11115815 11115845 11115875 11115575 11106022 11106023 11115635 11115935 11115665 11115695 11115975 11115965 11130124 11130120 11130121 11130122 11137811 11120685 11120686 11120688 11120687 11120689 11120800 11120805 11120810 11120815 11120820
With automatic weight handling, vacuum and constant pressure With automatic weight handling 3) Volume comparator 4) Portable comparator balance 5) Repeatability at maximum load
1) 2)
103
Moisture Analyzers
HR/HG/HB/MJ line
Moisture Analyzers
Fast
reliable moisture determination
104
Halogen moisture analyzers from METTLER TOLEDO offer fast and reliable moisture determination for laboratory and production environments. Our industrial solutions meet all regulations for the pharmaceutical industry, offer maximum resolution for the plastics industry and rugged, user-friendly instruments for the food industry.
105
Moisture Analyzers
HR/HG/HB/MJ line
Moisture Analyzers
Select the
right moisture analyzer
Excellence Plus
Ideal for R&D and regulated environments
HR83 Readability of 0.1 mg, password protection and traceable sample ID the HR83 provides safe and documented results for comprehensive compliance with official regulations. AutoMet accelerates the method development considerably, further increasing productivity. HG63 Easy operation, several drying processes, sample labeling and a high degree of process flexibility make the HG63 the ideal tool for fast and reliable routine tests. HB43-S The HB43-S combines halogen heating technology with analytical performance. The fast drying program provides faster results for increased productivity. The comprehensive library of methods simplifies method development.
Excellence
Reliable in routine applications
Classic Plus
Compact analytical performance for laboratory and production
Classic Light
Rugged and reliable MJ33 in routine operation The MJ33 offers a rugged design, key basic functions and easy operation for daily routine tasks, for example for incoming goods control in the plant.
Halogen technology for optimum results

METTLER TOLEDO was the first company to launch innovative halogen heating technology. The low mass of the halogen lamp heats up without delay. The round halogen radiator ensures uniform warming of the samples. Reproducible results are achieved in just a few minutes, from the very first measurement.
Moisture Analyzers
HR/HG/HB/MJ line
Moisture Analyzers
108
The professional solution for R&D

HR83 Halogen moisture analyzers
The HR83 moisture analyzer offers a high degree of safety, an extremely precise measurement process and excellent repeatability. This powerful tool provides results which also meet the strictest requirements. You can save laboratory time and development costs with functions for automatic method development.
Compliance with all SOPs and other regulations The HR83 is ideal for areas where compliance with official regulations is required. The device contains all functions and features to meet these requirements.
AutoMet reduces method development AutoMet makes it easy to achieve results that match the reference values. This can lead to a reduction of up to 50% of the method development time.
Precision and repeatability The outstanding measurement performance of the HR83 is based on analytical balance technology from METTLER TOLEDO. For precise results with a readability of up to 0.001% moisture content.
HG63 for reliable routine tasks

Select the HG63 if fast and repeatable results are required. A selection of drying programs, direct access to 10 methods and the latest heating and weighing technology make HG63 the perfect solution for routine tests.
109
Moisture Analyzers
HR/HG/HB/MJ line
Moisture Analyzers
110
Precise results
HB43-S compact halogen moisture analyzer
The HB43-S halogen moisture analyzer combines outstanding halogen heating technology with outstanding analytical performance in a compact format.
The academia
Halogen technology for optimum results

The round halogen radiator ensures fast, uniform warming of the samples. Proven technology for highly reproducible results in minutes.
dryer
Practical tips for moisture determination can be found in the reference section starting on page 500.
Accessories for moisture analyzers can be found on page 163.
www.mt.com/moisture www.moisture-guide.com
111
Moisture Analyzers
HR/HG/HB/MJ line
Moisture Analyzers
Direct access to methods at a keystroke
Switch directly between two drying methods at a keystroke. For error-free operation, the drying method designation is displayed in plain text.
Display of all information

Alphanumeric method designations and display of the target weight ensures exact results. Individual method designations describe the substances.
Integrated drying methods

Over 100 preconfigured methods simplify method development. All stored methods comply with official guidelines.
112
MJ33 Compact moisture analyzer

The rugged solution with infrared technology for routine tests
The MJ33 offers a rugged design, key basic functions and easy operation for daily routine tasks. It is particularly well suited to use in the plant, e.g., for goods control. Two metal element radiators warm the sample.
HR, HG, HB and MJ Moisture Analyzers

Maximum sample weight Readability (%) Repeatability with 10 g sample Heating technology Temperature range Method memory and development Printer Order no.
HR83 HR83-P HG63 HG63-P HB43-S MJ33
81 g 81 g 61 g 61 g 54 g 35 g
0.01/0.001 0.01/0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.015% 0.05%
Halogen Halogen Halogen Halogen Halogen Infrared
40 - 200C 40/AutoMet 40 - 200C 40/AutoMet 40 - 200C 10/Test function 40 - 200C 10/Test function 50 - 200C 2 50 - 160C 1
HA-P43 Integrated HA-P43 Integrated RS-P42 RS-P26
00214702 00214703 00214700 00214701 11121800 11121810 11120339
For easy data transfer: LabX direct moisture software
113
Calibration Devices
for liquids
Gravimetric calibration of pipettes
Simply
114
Why is pipette calibration important?

A distinction is made between a performance test for a pipette and pipette calibration. A pipette test is carried out to test the accuracy and precision of a pipette with defined tolerances. Calibration also includes a mechanical test and adjustment or repair if required. Both measures are important for accurate pipettes.
More information about pipette calibration can be found in the reference section starting on page 516.
essential
115
For liquids
Calibration Devices
From 1 l up to 200 ml
Pipette Calibration Solutions
and fast single-channel pipette calibration
The XP26PC balance is a highspeed solution for the calibration of single-channel pipettes. With a weighing capacity of 22 g and a readability of 1 g, the balance meets ISO 8655 requirements for micropipettes down to a volume of 1 l. Operational efficiency is ensured by the photocell gate, which enables hands-free opening of the automatic door. The integrated evaporation trap prevents errors that can occur due to evaporation of the test liquid during weight measurement.
XP26PC The micro balance for extremely easy
The system speed and throughput are supported by a large liquid container, which enables continuous pipetting without interruption. Guaranteed accuracy is ensured by a calibration kit. The calibration kit contains an OIML certified 1 g weight, a special weighing pan and tweezers, so that the balance can be calibrated easily and at regular intervals using an external weight.
116
Calibrate your micropipette at maximum speed with the XP26PC Micro Balance.
The XP26PC is part of the Excellence Plus line of microbalances and is a specialist solution for pipette calibration. With a readability of 1 g, the XP26PC meets the calibration requirements of ISO 8655 for micropipettes (volume 1 l) and is three times faster than conventional balances.
Fast and ergonomic

The integrated photocell gate for hands-free operation offers optimum ergonomics: as soon as a pipette interrupts the photocell gate, the plate for the evaporation trap opens automatically.
XP26PC Micro Balance

Model Order no.
XP26PC
Technical data
11106021
Evaporation trap Readability Maximum load Standard measurement uncertainty Dimensions (L x W x H)

Evaporation traps
Integrated 0.001 mg 22 g 0.0015 mg 487 x 263 x 296 mm

Order no.
Evaporation traps for XP/XS analytical balances 11140043 Evaporation traps for XP56/XP26 micro balances 11140041
117
On all channels
Efficient multi-channel pipette calibration
118
the highly compact calibration system
MCP
119
For liquids
More information about evaporation traps can be found in the reference section on page 516.
Calibration Devices
MCP1-S
Highly compact calibration system for single-channel and multi-channel pipettes

The MCP1-S is the ideal solution for easy and cost-effective calibration of all single-channel and multi-channel pipettes at your workplace. Each individual channel of an 8-channel or 12-channel pipette is tested separately in a short period of time. On a conventional balance, up to 360 measurements are required in accordance with ISO 8655; the MCP1-S achieves this in just 30 measurements. The fully automatic procedure ensures that calibration is more ergonomic and up to 10 times faster than using a conventional analytical balance. The highly compact system has an extremely space-saving design and weighs only 8 kg. It is supplied in a robust kit, in which all components can be transported safely. The MCP1-S increases your productivity during calibration and guarantees reliable values the ideal solution for the calibration of single-channel and multi-channel pipettes. Standard scope of delivery: Single-channel element with 20 ml evaporation trap Multi-channel element for up to 12 channels (12 x 16 ml) Calibration kit with E2 OIML certified 20 g weight, transport case
Flexible
Replace the 12-channel transport device with the glass evaporation trap provided and calibrate your single channel pipettes in just a few seconds.
Portable
The MCP1-S system comes in a transport case, making it ideal for on-site calibration.
Scalable
Combine up to 5 MCP work stations for pipette calibration with high throughput.
120
Calibry calibration software

for efficient data management
Calibry software guarantees comprehensive data management and complete traceability. In addition to meeting the requirements of ISO 8655, Calibry software supports all MCP systems as well as XP26PC and conventional balances.
Model MCP1-S
Order no.
Including evaporation trap (single-channel and multi-channel), transport case and accessories
Technical data MCP
11138007
work station
Up to 12 Integrated 0.01 mg 101 g 0.02 mg 510 x 177 x 165 mm
Order no.
Number of channels Evaporation trap Readability Maximum load Standard measurement uncertainty Dimensions (L x W x H)
Version of PC
software
Calibry Light Calibry Calibry Network
11138423 11138419 11138420
Intuitive and powerful

Calibry software guides the user through the calibration process step by step. Faulty channels can be identified immediately.
5 x faster than usual for 12 channels
www.mt.com
121
122
Select the right accessories for your balance
Accessories
High-quality upgrades
123
Accessories Excellence Balances
ErgoClips
Balances
Using ErgoClips to optimize the weighing process

ErgoClips are used to securely fasten small or unusually shaped tare containers, speeding up and simplifying everyday weighing processes. TheErgoClips also allow dosing of tiny quantities of valuable samples directly into the vessel of choice, resulting in less loss, lower disposal costs andimproved productivity. Micro ErgoClip holder
Micro ErgoClip basket
Micro ErgoClip flask
Micro MinWeigh door
ErgoClip weighing boat
ErgoClip titration basket
Small ErgoClip basket
ErgoClip tube
ErgoClip filter holder
ErgoClip adapter for capsules and glass bottles
ErgoClip round bottom flask ErgoClip flask
ErgoClip small flask
124
ErgoClip holder
www.mt.com/ergoclips
Click here to watch our movie on ErgoClips
Micro Balances
Analytical Balances XS
ErgoClips
ErgoClips weighing kit for various weighing vessels which are used on the XS/XP analytical balances. (3 ErgoClips: For round bottom flasks, weighing boats and test tubes; 20 weighing boats; 10 disposable aluminum pans) Micro ErgoClip basket Micro ErgoClip flask Micro MinWeigh door Holder for up to 3 micro ErgoClips ErgoClip weighing boat ErgoClip titration basket Small ErgoClip basket (basket for small weighing samples) ErgoClip tube ErgoClip fi ter holder ErgoClip adapter for QUANTOS and glass bottles ErgoClip round bottom flask ErgoClip flask ErgoClip small flask MinWeigh door Holder for up to 3 ErgoClips
Order no.
11106707
XP26
XP56
XP
11107889 11107879 11107869 11140175 11106748 11106883 11106747 11106784 11140185 11141570 11106746 11106764 11140180 11106749 11140170
125
Accessories
Anti-vibration panels
Durable
AMS anti-vibration panel
Ideal for balances and dryers Reduces unexpected vibrations by more than 98% Stainless steel design Ideal for clean rooms
Balances
AMB anti-vibration panel

Ideal for high resolution balances Vibration-damping air chambers Regulation of air chambers
using integrated valves

Stainless steel design
Anti-vibration panels
Specifications AMS Dimensions LxWxH (mm) 450x300x40 Maximum load 100 kg Material DP stainless steel Reduction in vibration 50 Hz 95% 100 Hz 98% Normal frequency 7 Hz Temperature range -20 ... +160 Weight 12 kg Order no. 99451896 AMB 450x300x40 120 kg DP stainless steel >95% >98% 2 Hz -20 ... +160 25 kg 99451897
126
Accessories
Weighing tables
Balances
Shock absorber
The right weighing table for all balances
Repetitive movements and static workplaces result in improper stresses on the body. METTLER TOLEDO weighing tables are ergonomic and speed up the weighing process. The height-adjustable weighing tables with their elbow cushions improve efficiency, device operation and comfort levels during work. The working surface is separate from the integrated weighing table. This effectively prevents vibrations from being transferred to the balance, which quickly stabilizes the balance and results in more accurate weighing results. The METTLER TOLEDO weighing tables help deliver reliable weighing and are a step forward in lab equipment.
Weighing tables from METTLER TOLEDO
Weighing table for MCP2
Ergonomic work
The user adapts the height of the outer bench to his own height to take the strain off his neck and backmuscles. The elbow cushions protect the arms when undertaking repetitive work.
Low-vibration tables
A weighing table consists of two decoupled tables. The outer working surface absorbs impact so that the balance on the inner table is not disturbed. Thanks to their versatility, the weighing tables can be used for any type of balances.
Weighing table for analytical balances/micro balances

128
Technical data
METTLER Toledo weighing tables
Type Order no. XP26PC weighing table 11138041 XP Micro weighing table 11138042 MX weighing table 11138044 MCP2 weighing table 11138040 MCP5 weighing table 11138043 Width (mm) 760 760 760 760 1380 Depth (mm) 803 803 803 803 1380 Height (mm) 784 784 784 784 760
Stone tables*
Type Order no. Bianco sardo ground 99451876 99451875 99451877 99451878 99451879 99451886 99451887 99451888 99451889 99451890 99451946 99451947 Width (mm) 70 90 120 60 140 90 200 60 100 60 80 150 Depth Height (mm) (mm) 70 78 70 78 70 78 60 90 80 78 60 91 70 78 63 9 70 78 60 72 55 78 73 78 * Stone thickness 8 cm
Classic stone tables
129
Accessories
Printer
Balances
Quality printing
The Compact Printer family
No matter which METTLER TOLEDO device you connect to, you always get a print-out to satisfy all quality standards. Hand-written entries in lab journals are time-consuming and may result in transcription mistakes. Records on normal but self-adhesive printer paper from METTLER TOLEDO will help you avoid these mistakes in the future. The print-outs can be saved and used at any time as evidence of original weighing data.
Quick and reliable

The printer produces quick and clear print-outs of your results for both simple and more complex applications.
Print in your own language

The compact printer supports the languages of the connected devices, be it English, Russian, Chinese (simplified), Japanese or any other language.
Selecting the right model

You can choose between the RS-P25/USB-P25 for simple printouts, the RS-P26 with integrated real-time clock and date details or the RS-P28 for extended statistics and totaling functions.
We'd recommend stocking up when you place your order: Paper rolls from METTLER TOLEDO
Accessories
Printer
Balances
The right printer

for every balance
Model Print function Automatic detection of settings ntegrated real-time clock with I calendar, zero/taring button Statistics function Totaling function Interface
RS-P25 USB-P25 RS232/USB
RS-P26 RS232
RS-P28 RS232
www.mt.com/lab-printers
132
203 mm
120 mm
Print unit Matrix printer Ribbon cassette Interchangeable, black Print format 5 x 7, line length of 24 characters Printing speed 2.3 lines a second Paper roll Standard paper 57.5 mm (B), max. 60 mm Print quality Heat-resistant and light-fast paper (GxP) Service life of print unit 1.5 million lines Frequency of mains voltage Internal power supply, 100-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz Power consumption 150 mA (100V), 60 mA (240V) Interface RS232C, 9-pin or USB interface Height up to 4,000 m Operating temperature 0-40C Relative humidity Max. 80% at 31C, decreasing in linear fashion to 50% at 40C, non-condensing Overvoltage category Class II Pollution degree 2 Standard equipment Power cable (country-specific) Interface cable Paper roll (1) Ribbon cassette (1) Dimensions 1 20 mm x 203 mm x 73 mm (WxDxH) Net weight 740 g (including paper roll)
73 mm
Accessories Paper cover Paper roll 57.5 x 50 to 60 mm Swivel pin Black ribbon cassette RS9 M/F cable, 1 m RS9 F/F cable USB cable 1m Sticky label
Order no. 12120734 12120799 12120735 12120798 11101051 51190362 12130716 11600388
Standard equipment 1 item 5 items 1 item 1 item 1 item 1 item 1 item 1 item
133
Accessories
Density determination
Buoyancy
Fast Reliable
Density determination with solids Totally efficient
Density
The density (symbol: or D) of a material is defined as the mass in grams the material contains in 1cm3. Density therefore states the mass pervolume and is a characteristic property of a material which is not dependent on shape or size. Relative density (specific density), obtained by comparing with a standard, is still commonly used. The standard for comparison is normally water at 4C, whose density is known as one. Many other types of density, such asbulk density, knock density, compressed density, pure density, apparent density etc., have a role to play in technology. Density can be determined by weighing using Archimedes' principle. This states that a body submerged in a liquid (gas) experiences buoyancy corresponding to the weight of volume of liquid displaced.
Balances
You will find information about determining the density of liquids on pages 512+513.
134
Accessories
Balances
Quick and reliable
Use the density kit from METTLER TOLEDO for analytical and precision balances to determine density. Perfectly suited to solid, liquid and viscous substances.
Integrated solution
The XP and XS balances have integrated software for density determination which guides you step by step through measuring liquids, solids or pasty substances.
Tailor-made sinker
Available for the density determination of liquids (calibrated if necessary).
Simple and convenient

The information provided on the balance display will safely guide you through the density determination.
136
Optimum precision and traceability

Print-outs are detailed and suitable for the lab journal and other forms of documentation. Thestatistical evaluation improves the accuracy of your results.
Useful supplement
The density software also allows you to determine the density of viscous substances with the aid of a gamma sphere.
www.mt.com/density-determination
Accessories for density determination with balances

Balance Description AB-S AB-S density kit for determining the density of solids XS/XP (Precision) Dens ty kit for precision balances, 1 mg and 0.1 mg models XS/XP (Analysis) Dens ty kit for XS/XP analytical balances AX AX density kit for determining the density of solids SR/SG/SB Below-the-balance weighing device for weighing large samples under the balance Sinker For determining the density of liquids, used in conjunction with the density kit 210485, 225600, 33360, 11106706 or 11132680 Calibrated (sinker and certificate) Recalibrated (new certificate) Calibrated We supply a calibrated thermometer (with certificate) for thermometer density determination in line w th qual ty guidelines Order no. 00033360 11132680 11106706 00210485 21301097 00210260 00210672 00210674 11132685
137
Data Management
Electronic lab journal

Routine jobs made easy
Photo: panthermedia | Jasper Grahl
Accessories
Software
Balances
Software
LabX Balance Your weighing assistant
LabX is a PC software solution which allows methods to be run from the balance. LabX guides the user through the method and automatically produces calculations and evaluations. All data is collected centrally.
Data export and data security

It doesn't matter whether you transfer your weighing data automatically to an Excel spreadsheet or set up a connection between LabX and LIMS, access to and the security of your data is guaranteed at all times. All data is stored in a Microsoft SQL database based on industry standards which can extensively display results and easily print out protocols.
Central administration
LabX makes central management of your instruments possible. Jobs like checking calibration data or managing and changing methods can be handled centrally. Not only does this save time it prevents mistakes, too.
140
Go to page 510 for more details of the LabX and Laboratory Information Management Systems (LIMS)
Intuitive user guidance

Users can easily carry out their daily work, such as preparing standard HPLC solutions or the residual weighing of substances on the balance, without having to go near the PC. The user is guided every step of the way. LabX ensures compliance with all specifications and indicates missing balance calibrations and tests. LabX has more than 25 pre-installed methods which cover most aspects of a lab (e.g. standard solutions, moisture determination, ash determination, filter weighing).
Software LabX balance LabX Direct Balance Description Order no. Powerful PC software for controlling devices and managing data LabX pro version 11120301 LabX Light 11120307 Instrument license, package 1 11120312 Instrument license, package 3 11120313 Instrument license, package 5 11120314 Instrument license, package 10 11120315 Instrument license, package 20 11120316 Balance connection 11120310 Validation manual 1 11120332 Validation manual 2 11120333 PC software for simple data transfers into open applications (e.g. Excel) 11120340
141
Accessories
Software
Balances
Effective management with modern software

LabX makes central management of your instruments possible. Jobs like checking the calibration data or updating methods can be undertaken at a PC workstation. Changes are automatically applied to all connected instruments on request. Not only does this save time it prevents mistakes too.
Laboratory Office
Complete support according to FDA 21 CFR Part 11

LabX provides all the tools needed for data management and storage in line with FDA guidelines (21 CFR Part 11). This includes comprehensive user management, access protection, electronic signature and audit trail. METTLERTOLEDO also provides full support and a two-volume validation manual for system validation. This keeps validation costs to a minimum.
142
Use LabX to control your measurements from any location

LabX Pro can be used to control measurements using balances and titrators from any point in your network. Simply connect your instruments to a PC or link them directly to the company network. This setup allows you to access data from your office or control measurements in real-time when working at another location. Your data is stored in a central database and can be analyzed in a pleasant, modern and structured Windows-based software environment.
IT
www.mt.com/LabX
Quality Control
Important information about LIMS can be found starting on page 510.
LabX software for balances and titrators

METTLER TOLEDO supported instruments Client/server network Control of several instruments Management of instruments Complete FDA21CFR Part11 support Direct balance access (RapidAccess) Real-time view/check Job/method editor Automatic statistics/monitoring graphics Graphic evaluation of results Compiling reports LIMS connection Order no. (English version)
LabX pro for balances
LabX light for balances
LabX pro for titrators
LabX light for titrators
AX, MX, UMX, XP, AG, XS, PR, SR, PG-S, SG, AT, MT, UMT, AB-L, AB-S, PB-L, PB-S balances 11120304
T50, T70, T90, DL5x, DL7x and DL31, DL32, DL38, DL39 titrators 51106500
11120307
51106550
143
When working with toxic substances

So you can enjoy your Nobel prize
Safety weighing cabinets
Balances
146
Optimum personal protection

Stable weighing results
Skan and a1 safety weighing cabinets offer optimum protection for staff and the environment when working with toxic substances or minute quantities of active substances. More stable weighing results are also obtained.
Properties and benefits of the ST1 cabinet

Unique
ST1 cabinet with a filter unit, double sack waste system, printer table and additional active carbon filter for filtering solvent vapors.
directional air flow management using BAFFLE technology (patent pending) Area around balance is virtually free from turbulence Enlarged inner space for microbalances of the very latest generation The high, curved design also makes pipette handling possible Alarm system with two sensors and data recording Free from vibrations thanks to independent filter unit Separate, removable rear wall makes for easy cleaning Certified HEPA filter system Safe filter changes Double sack waste system for disposing of waste without the risk of contamination Work panels made from Trespa, granite or stainless steel Scope for connecting up a second cabinet
Alarm sensors measure the flow speed on both sides of the opening. Faults are recorded along with time and date (suitable for documentation on PCs).
If you are interested in these products, please contact your local METTLER TOLEDO representative.
The ST1 is equipped with a filter unit separate from the cabinet as standard. The filter unit has a centrifugal fan, ensures a constant flow speed and indicates the filter's load condition. Vibrations from the filter housing are not transferred to the cabinet and the function of the analytical balance is not limited.
Safety weighing cabinets
Balances
Standard equipment HFC-S 1200-MT

Operating Twice
Safe workplace
The Skan safety cabinet has two HEPA filter units and on request an active carbon filter to reduce gaseous contamination in the outlet air. Thanks to its compact design, the safety weighing cabinet will save space in any lab. The ceramic working surface is scratchresistant, easy to clean and offers a high level of chemical resistance.
principle: Air current directed inwards
the reliability thanks to two HEPA H14 filters fitted in series pressure plenum of prefilter with its dynamic seal transports contaminated air via the HEPA H14 filter only active carbon attachment for reducing gaseous contaminants in the outlet air compensation as filter loading increases main filter, solvent sensor for detecting filter transparent and bright work zone
Positive
Optional
Automatic Qualifiable
saturation
Easy-to-clean, Robust
working surface made from technical ceramic, glazed with virtually universal chemical resistance and very high resistance to scratches to operate using the SKANCONTROL display with clear and simple operating processes indication of differential pressure and operating hours counter quiet operation, only around 52 dB (A)
Easy
Digital Very
Vibration-free operation
The specially developed weighing platform is permanently fixed to the weighing table and therefore disconnects the balance from the safety cabinet. Result: Guaranteed vibration-free operation.
If you are interested in these products, please contact your local METTLER TOLEDO representative.
Efficient ionizer option

The ionizer option integrated in the armrest produces measurable results in the inner space and allows you to accurately and cleanly weigh minute amounts of substance.
148
149
Accessories
We have what you need

Accessories for clever solutions
Balances
150
151
Accessories
Excellence Balances Antistatic kits/Filter weighing
Balances
Before you take that measurement

Eliminate electrostatic charges
Neither positive nor negative: An ionizer uses high-level voltage to produce positively and negatively charged ions. These are attracted by the electrostatically charged object and neutralize those on the surface of the weighing sample. Forces which could distort the result are therefore eliminated.
Antistatic tips can be found on page 514
For XP analytical and micro balances

The integrable antistatic kit is available as an optional accessory. It comprises a point ionizer which can be attached in six different positions depending on sample size and shape and for operation by both left- and right-handed users. A second point ionizer can be attached to the opposite side of the weighing chamber resulting in optimum protection and greater efficiency. The antistatic kit is activated automatically each time the door opens and prevents the substance in the weighing chamber from being dispersed.
U ionizer
The antistatic kit produces positive and negative ions which will discharge electrostatically charged substances or vessels in a matter of seconds. The antistatic kit does not draw air into the weighing chamber and therefore prevents substances from being dispersed unlike other products available on the market. No extra operating steps are needed.
Antistatic kit
Integrated antistatic kit for XP analytical balances with power supply Optional second point electrode for the antistatic kit Power supply for antistatic kit for XP analytical balances (needed for optional electrode 11107762 or 11107764)
Order no. 11107761 11107762 11107763 Order no. 11107767 11107765 11107766
Universal antistatic kit*

Universal antistatic kit (U ionizer) including electrode and power supply unit Optional point electrode for discharging small samples Power supply unit for universal antistatic kit (needed for optional electrode 11107764 or 11107765)
* can be used for all balance types
152
Filter weighing
Precision down to the last particle
Transports means mobility - and emissions. Because of their cost-effectiveness, diesel vehicles are gaining in popularity but their particle emissions are subject to tight limits governed by stringent requirements. Determining the weight of fine dust particles is an important job for the automotive industry and will only gain in importance as emission standards are tightened up. METTLER TOLEDO has developed new solutions for filter weighing in order to quickly and easily measure fine dust at any time. We offer a complete range of filter kits for accurately determining even tiny differences in weight. They fit perfectly on micro balances, ultramicro balances and analytical balances. On request customers can select a printer or the LabX PC software for customized data processing to complete the solution. We are also the first supplier anywhere in the world to provide an automated weighing solution to measure fine dust particles for the automotive industry. This innovative filter robot solution (FA747), designed especially for diesel emissions, enables the weight of fine dust particles to bedetermined in a quick, cheap and easy way.
Filter kit for filter weighing on the analytical balance
XP2U filter kit for filter weighing on the micro and ultra micro balances order no. 002211214
www.mt.com/filter-weighing
Filter kit for balances
Description Filter kit for XP analytical balances Filter kit for XP6 analytical balances (with a diameter of up to 110 mm) (with a diameter of up to 110 mm)
Order no. 11140000 00211227 11122136 00211214
Filter kit for XP2U/XP6 analytical balances (with a diameter of up to 47/70 mm) Filter kit for XP2U/XP6 analytical balances (with a diameter of up to 50 mm)
153
Accessories
Excellence Balances
Balances
Draft shield
Magnetic protection shield
Description Order no.
XP XP XS XS (Analysis) (Precision) (Analysis) (Precision) n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. x x x x x n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. x x x x x
Draft shield
Pro draft shield for 1 mg models, effective height 248 mm Glass-free draft shield for 1 mg models (food industry), effective height 248 mm Draft shield for 0.1 g and 10 mg models, effective height 175 mm MagicCube draft shield for 1 mg and 0.1 mg models, effective height 175 mm Draft shield for entire balance, dimensions (WxDxH) 300x450x450 mm (MC W12) Draft shield for entire balance, dimensions (WxDxH) 550x470x580 mm (MC W64) 11131651 11131652 11131653 11131650 11134430
11134470
n.a.
n.a.
Weighing pans
MPS (magnetic protection) for 0.1 g model, 190x223mm MPS (magnetic protection) for 10 mg model, 170x 205mm Weighing pan 190x223 mm, incl. pan support Weighing pan 170x205 mm, incl. pan support and protective ring 11132625 11132626 11132655 11132660 n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. x x x x n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. x x x x
Optional interfaces
BT option: Bluetooth interface, multi-point connection for linking up to 6 Bluetooth-capable devices BTS option: Bluetooth interface, single-point connection Ethernet option: For connecting to an Ethernet network e-link IP65 EBO1: Ethernet connection to e-link network with IP65 protection RS-USB adapter cable PS/2 option: Interface for connecting commercially available keypads and barcode readers RS232C option: Interface for connecting a printer (RS-P42), computer or titrator LocalCan option: Interface for connecting up to five LC (LocalCan) instruments MiniMettler option: MiniMettler interface for connecting to older systems 154 11132530 11132535 11132515 11120003 11103691 11132520 11132500 11132505 11132510 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Optional interfaces
Sensors
Sensors
XP XP XS XS (Analysis) (Precision) (Analysis) (Precision) x x x x
ErgoSens, optical sensor for zero-contact operation
11132601
IP54 cover for AC adapter

IP54 cover for AC adapter 11132550 x x x x
Density kits
Density kit for XS/XP precision balances (1 mg and 0.1 mg models) Density kit for XS/XP analytical balances Certified thermometer for determining density Sinker 10 ml Sinker 10 ml, certified version 11132680 11106706 11132685 00210260 00210672 n.a. x x x x x n.a. x x x n.a. x x x x x n.a. x x x
Kit for dynamic weighing

Kit for dynamic weighing, 0.1 and 10 mg models ('S' platform), 4-liter vessel 11132657 n.a. x n.a. x
Auxiliary displays
BT-BLD Bluetooth-capable auxiliary benchtop mounting. Wireless connection. Backlit LCD. RS/LC-BLDS auxiliary display for benchtop mounting or on balance. Backlit LCD. LC/RS-BLD auxiliary display on benchtop stand with backlit LCD 11132555 11132630 00224200 x x x x x x x x x x x x
Auxiliary displays
155
Accessories
Excellence Balances
Balances
Barcode readers
XP XP XS XS (Analysis) (Precision) (Analysis) (Precision) x x x x
RS232C barcode scanner The following accessories are needed for operation (not included in 21901297): Power supply unit, 5V, EU Cable RS232 F Null modem adapter Bluetooth barcode reader One of each of the following cables is needed for operation (not included in 21901298): Power supply unit 12V, EU PS/2 barcode reader The following accessories are needed for operation (not included in 21901297): PS/2 wedge single cable PS/2Y barcode reader The following accessories are needed for operation (not included in 21901297): PS/2 wedge twin (Y) cable
21901297
21901370 21901305 21900924 21901298 x x x x
21901313 21901297 x x x x
21901307 21901297 x x x x
21901308
156
Reduces risks in your everyday work using pipette tests Regular pipette tests and calibrations are key stages in checking the accuracy of your pipettes if you are to ensure data integrity. Testing pipettes with a balance is a key part of this process. METTLERTOLEDO provides solutions for both regular pipette tests and for professional pipette calibration according to ISO 8655. We help you find the right balance between the pipette calibrations you undertake yourself and a service for your pipettes, tailored to your needs.
Pipette calibration
Accessories for pipette calibration

Evaporation trap for XP56/XP26 Evaporation trap for XP/XS Large evaporation trap for XP/XS analytical balances (100 ml) Evaporation trap for AX/AT Evaporation trap for WXS/WXT/SAG Reagent container, 50 containers Barometer Certified thermometer Evaporation trap for MCP 20 ml Calibration kit for MCP, with E2 weight 20g Glass tubes (5 tubes) for MCP Transport case for XP26PC Glass tubes (5 tubes) for XP26PC 11140041 11140043 11138440 11140042 11138010 17007544 11600086 11132685 11138006 11138254 11138253 11106997 11107605
More information about pipette calibration can be found on pages 516+538
Protective covers
Protective cover for XP terminals only Protective cover, for XS terminal only Protective cover for 'S' weighing platform, 10 mg/0.1 g models (platform only) Protective cover for 'M' weighing platform (platform only) Protective cover for XS balances with 'S' platform 10 mg/0.1 g models Protective cover for XS balances with 'M' platform Protective cover for XS balances with 'L' platform 11132570 11106870 11133034 11132574 11132571 11132572 11132573 x n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. x n.a. x x n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. x n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. x x x x x x
157
Accessories
Excellence Balances
Balances
Stands and wall fixtures
XP XP XS XS (Analysis) (Precision) (Analysis) (Precision)
Stand for terminal 30 cm above the weighing pan ('S' and 'M' platforms) Stand for terminal 30 cm above the weighing pan ('L' platform) Stand for printer and terminal for XS/XP analytical balance Terminal wall mounting
11132636 11132653 11106730 11132665
n.a. n.a. x x
x x n.a. x
n.a. n.a. x x
x x n.a. x
Antitheft device
Steel cable 11600361 x x x x
Terminal cable
Extension cable for terminal 4.5 m 11600517 x x x x
Filling process control

LV11 small items feeder for automatic balance feeding LV11 'Pro' draft shield door for models with an accuracy of between 0.1 mg and 1mg LV11 draft shield door for all XS/XP analytical balances 21900608 11132711 11106715 x n.a. x x x n.a. x n.a. x x x n.a.
LC-I/O box
Relay interface for controlling up to 8 external instruments via the balance 21202217 x x n.a. n.a.
Foot switch
Extra foot switch with selectable function for the balance LC foot switch with selectable function 11106741 00229060 x x x x x x x x
Transport case
Transport case for XS/XP precision balance 10 mg/0.1 g with space for printer ('S' platform) Transport case for all XS/XP analytical balances Transport case for XP microbalances 11132595 11106869 11106729 n.a. x x x n.a. n.a. n.a. x n.a. x n.a. n.a.
XP-SE kit
Separate electronics kit for XP analytical balances Extension cable 0.6 m Extension cable 5.0 m 11106743 00211535 00210688 x x x n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a.
Below-the-balance weighing device

Hook for weighing under the balance for 'M' and 'L' size platforms. (integrated in 'S' size platforms) 11132565 n.a. x n.a. x
Production certificate
'Pro' production certificate for XS balances 11106895 incl. incl. x x
158
Classic Balances/General accessories

Accessories
Balances
Accessories Classic balances

Draft shield
Draft shield with sliding doors (left/right/top), height 237 mm Draft shield with sliding doors (left/right/top), height 237 mm Draft shield with sliding doors (left/right/top), height 165 mm 11103682 Description Order no. AB-S/FACT New Classic ML
x x x
12122404 12122405
Protective covers
Classic protective cover NewClassic S protective cover (balance with draft shield) NewClassic S protective cover NewClassic L protective cover (MonoBloc) NewClassic L protective cover (strain gauge) 11135408 x x x x x 12121820 12121851 12121852 12121853
Auxiliary displays
AccuPac/rechargeable battery
Self-contained, rechargeable external power supply for operating balances for 815 hours WxDxH (mm) 120x180x95. Cable length 150 mm
21254691
Antitheft device
Steel cable with Classic lock Steel cable with NewClassic lock 00590101 x 11600361 x
Density kits
For determining solids for determining liquids with deformation elements 0033360 0033360 + 00210260 x
AccuPac/rechargeable battery
x
Auxiliary displays
LC/RS-BLD auxiliary display on benchtop stand with backlit LCD Rs232 auxiliary display 00224200 12120057 x x x x
Transport case
Transport case has space for a draft shield up to 237 mm in height Transport case for all MS-S balances 11103834 x 11124245 x
Antitheft device
160
General accessories
Interface options
Balances Description AX/MX/UMX RS232C option Second interface for connecting a printer or computer LC option LocalCAN universal interface for connecting several devices MiniMettler interface for reverse compatibility with MT/AT systems PG-S LC-G option LocalCAN universal interface for connecting various devices at the same time (supersedes the standard RS interface) SB LC-B option LocalCAN universal interface for connecting various devices at the same time (supersedes the standard RS interface) Order no. 11100070 11100071 11100072
11101055
00228110
LC switchbox
The LC switchbox allows up to three balances to be connected to a printer via the LocalCAN interface. LC switchbox
Order no.
00229220
LC I/O relay interface

You can use the programmable LC I/O relay interface to connect up to 8 different large capacity devices (up to 8A at 230V) to your PR/SR balance.
Order no.
LC I/O
21202217
Foot/hand switch
Foot/hand switches are ideal if the balance is difficult to access or cannot be operated directly.
Balances
Description PR/SR/AG/SG LC-FS foot switch with adjustable function for balances with AX/MX/UMX* LocalCAN universal interface PG-S/XS/XP*
Order no.
00229060
* Optional LocalCAN interface needed
161
Accessories
Balances
Auxiliary displays
Balances Description Order no.
Balances RS232C interfaces All balances with LocalCAN interfaces* All balances with Bluetooth interface
RS/LC-BLD Auxiliary display (weight value and unit only if defined) RS232C connection and external power supply RS/LC-BLDS for table and balance mounting. Connection via RS232C cable with illuminated LCD. LC-PD auxiliary display with passive display (LCD) on table stand LC-PDS auxiliary display with passive display (LCD) on balance stand BT-BLD (Bluetooth) auxiliary display for table mounting. Wireless connection from balance to display by means of wireless Bluetooth network with illuminated LCD
00224200 11132630 00229100 00229070
11132555
* AX, MX, UMX, XS, XP, PG-S, PB, GB and SB need optional interfaces.
External, rechargeable sources of power. With the self-contained PowerPack, you can undertake weighing processes anywhere, even outdoors.
External power supply

AB-S/PB-S SB AG/PR/ PG-S1)/SB

1)apart
PP-B10 PowerPack (for operating balances) not mains-dependent, rechargeable external source of power for 8-10 hours of weighing operations, WxDxH (mm) 120x180x95 Installation plate for securing the PowerPack PP-B10 in the balance AccuPac R/G/B not mains-dependent, rechargeable external power source for operating balances for 8-15 hours, WxDxH (mm) 120x180x95 length 150 cm
00224500 00230168
21254689
from PG-S 0.1 g models
Please contact our service team for information on how to use models AB and PB in zone 2 areas.
Antitheft devices
AX Antitheft device with universal cable lock AT Antitheft device with metal bolt for bench feedthrough PR Antitheft device with metal bolt for bench feedthrough AB-S/PB-S/SB/PR/ Steel cable with lock SR/PG-S/SG/PL-S/AL/PL AG Antitheft device with metal bolt for bench feedthrough
11600361 00210440 00229175 00590101
00238480
We offer antitheft devices which are tailored to different balance models and have no impact on the weighing results.
162
A draft shield improves the quality of your weighing results, especially for balances with fine readability ranges (0.001 g), and protects the weighing sample from ambient influences.
Draft shield
SAG Draft shield (standard with SAG105) PR/PG Draft shield with removable side panels for all PR/PG balances PG-S with 0.001 g/0.01 g readability. Net height 135 mm (Standard accessory for PR/PG-S balances with 1 mg readability) PR/PG-S High draft shield with 3 sliding doors for all PR/PG-S balances with 0.001 g/0.01 g readability. Net height 265 mm
00238857
00225269 00225500
Aluminum sample pan for all applications.
Absorbent glass-fiber fi ter
Accessories for moisture analyzers

Accessories Order no. HA-TCC HR/HG temperature calibration kit, with certificate for three temperatures HA-TC Temperature calibration kit HA-D90 Aluminum sample pans (80) HA-DR1 Reusable stainless steel pans (3) height 6 mm Reusable stainless steel pan (1) height 15 mm HA-PH Sample pan handle. Makes it easier to remove hot sample pans (3) HA-F1 Glass-fiber filter for liquids (100) HA-CAGE Gold housing for drying fibers 00214528 00214455 00013865 00214462 00013954 00214526 00214464 00214695 Accessories HA-CASE transport case for HR and HG Transport case for HB Protective cover for keypad(2), HR and HG Protect ive cover for keypad(2), HB HA-P43 Printer for HR83, HG63 RS-P42 Printer for HB43 Paper (self-adhesive) for integrated printers HA-P43 and RS-P42 (3 rolls) Paper for integrated printers HA-P43 and RS-P42 (5 rolls) Ribbon for integrated printers HA-P43, LC-P45 and RS-P42 (cassette, black) Order no. 00214515 11113855 00214533 11113363 00214456 00229265 11600388 00072456 00065975
163
A service you can rely on
OIML weights
OIML weights
Heavy
Select the right weight from our huge range of weights
Whether you need individual weights to test certain points of your balance or a complete set of reference weights to verify other weights METTLER TOLEDO always has the right solution. Weights of the E1, E2, F1 Premium line Satisfy the most stringent of standards for mass standard labs and routine testing of analytical balances Are produced from high-grade steel, melted under a vacuum to prevent impurities MonoBloc design and electropolished surfaces to ensure maximum mass stability Weights of the F1AC, F2AC, M1 - M3 Basic line
Ideal for routine balance testing Economic design with adjustment chamber All weights are made from high-grade stainless For more information, go to
Weights
steel aluminum is not used for mg weights
www.mt.com/weights
166
Metal
167
OIML weights
Premium line
E1, E2, F1 specifications

Wire weight High-grade steel Density: 8.0 kg/dm3 Magnetic susceptibility: < 0.01 Cylindrical weight wit h knob High-grade steel Density: 8.0 kg/dm3 Magnetic susceptibility: < 0.01 MonoBloc
Weights
Premium line OIML E1, E2 & F1
Weight and case Weight and case, including certificate Wire weight Wire weight marked Cylindrical weight with knob Cylindrical weight with knob marked
Marked individual weights on request
E1
Nominal value 1 mg 2 mg 5 mg 10 mg 20 mg 50 mg 100 mg 200 mg 500 mg 1 g 2 g 5 g 10 g 20 g 50 g 100 g 200 g 500 g 1 kg 2 kg 5 kg 10 kg 20 kg 50 kg Order number for wooden case
E2
Order number for wooden case 158301 158311 158321 158331 158341 158351 158361 158371 158381 158391 158401 158411 158421 158431 158441 158451 158461 158471 158481 158491 158501 158511 158521 158531 Order number for plastic case 158306 158307 158316 158317 158326 158327 158336 158337 158346 158347 158356 158357 158366 158367 158376 158377 158386 158387 158396 158397 158406 158407 158416 158417 158426 158427 158436 158437 158446 158447 158456 158457 158466 158467 158476 158477 158486 158487 158496 158497 158506 158507 158516 158517 158526 158527 Nominal value 1 mg 2 mg 5 mg 10 mg 20 mg 50 mg 100 mg 200 mg 500 mg 1 g 2 g 5 g 10 g 20 g 50 g 100 g 200 g 500 g 1 kg 2 kg 5 kg 10 kg 20 kg 50 kg
F1
Order number for wooden case Order number for plastic case 159417 159427 159437 159447 159457 159467 159477 159487 159497 158607 158617 158627 158637 158647 158657 158667 158677 158687 158697 158707 158717 158727 158737
Shape
Shape
159000 159001 158300 159010 159011 158310 159020 159021 158320 159030 159031 158330 159040 159041 158340 159050 159051 158350 159060 159061 158360 159070 159071 158370 159080 159081 158380 159090 159091 158390 159100 159101 158400 159110 159111 158410 159120 159121 158420 159130 159131 158430 159140 159141 158440 159150 159151 158450 159160 159161 158460 159170 159171 158470 159180 159181 158480 159190 159191 158490 159200 159201 158500 159210 159211 158510 159220 159221 158520 159230 159231 158530
159410 159411 159416 159420 159421 159426 159430 159431 159436 159440 159441 159446 159450 159451 159456 159460 159461 159466 159470 159471 159476 159480 159481 159486 159490 159491 159496 158600 158601 158606 158610 158611 158616 158620 158621 158626 158630 158631 158636 158640 158641 158646 158650 158651 158656 158660 158661 158666 158670 158671 158676 158680 158681 158686 158690 158691 158696 158700 158701 158706 158710 158711 158716 158720 158721 158726 158730 158731 158736 158740 158741
168
Weight sets
E1
1 mg 500 mg 1 mg 200 g 1 mg 1 kg 1 mg 2 kg 1 mg 5 kg 1g 50 g 1g 500 g 1 mg 1 kg
E2
1 kg 1 mg 5 kg 500 mg 1 mg 200 g 1 mg 1 kg 1 mg 2 kg 1 mg 5 kg 1g 50 g 1g 500 g 1 mg 1 kg 1kg 5 kg
1 mg 2 mg 5 mg 10 mg 20 mg 50 mg 100 mg 200 mg 500 mg 1g 2g 5g 10 g 20 g 50 g 100 g 200 g 500 g 1 kg 2 kg 5 kg Numbe o we gh s 12

159300 159301
23
159340 159341
25
27
28
8
159310 159311
12
159320 159321
38
159360 159361
4
159331
12
158801 158806 158807
23
158840 158841 158846 158847
25
27
28
8
158810 158811 158816 158817
12
158821 158826 158827
38
158861
4
158830 158831 11125900 11125901
Wooden case
159350 11117614 11117616 159351 11117615 11117617
159330 158800
158850 11117624 11117626 158851 11117625 11117627 158856 11117321 11117323 158857 11117322 11117324
158820 158860
P as c case
Weight sets
F1
1 mg 500 mg 1 mg 200 g 1 mg 1 kg 1 mg 2 kg 1 mg 5 kg 1g 50 g 1g 500 g 1 kg 5 kg
1 mg 2 mg 5 mg 10 mg 20 mg 50 mg 100 mg 200 mg 500 mg 1g 2g 5g 10 g 20 g 50 g
Ideal for the pharmaceutical industry
100 g 200 g 500 g 1 kg 2 kg 5 kg Numbe o we gh s Wooden a e

12 161700 161701 161706 161707 23 158900 158901 158906 158907 25 27 28 8 12 158880 158881 4 158890 158891 158910 11117802 11117804 158870 158911 11117803 11117805 158871 158916 11119979 11119981 158876 158917 11119980 11119982 158877
The second weight is marked to ensure a clear distinction.
Pa
a e
158886 11125907 158887 11125908
169
OIML weights
Basic line
F1AC, F2AC, M1AC specifications

Leaf weight Stainless steel Density: 7.9 kg/dm3 Non-magnetic Cylindrical weight with knob Stainless steel Density: 7.9 kg/dm3 Non-magnetic Cylindrical weight with knob: F1AC / F2AC 10 g 20 kg
Basic line OIML F1AC, F2AC and M1AC

Q
METTLER TOLEDO Quality
Weights
Great tips are listed starting on page 520.
Weight and case Weight and case, including certificate Leaf weight Leaf weight marked Cylindrical weight with knob Cylindrical weight with knob marked
Marked individual weights on request
Individual weights
F1AC
Nominal value 1 mg 2 mg 5 mg 10 mg 20 mg 50 mg 100 mg 200 mg 500 mg 1 g 2 g 5 g 10 g 20 g 50 g 100 g 200 g 500 g 1 kg 2 kg 5 kg 10 kg 20 kg Order number for plast ic case
F2AC
Order number for plast ic case
M1AC
Order number for plast ic case
Weight sets
1 mg 2 mg 5 mg 10 mg 20 mg 50 mg 100 mg 200 mg 500 mg 1 g 2 g 5 g 10 g 20 g 50 g 100 g 200 g 500 g 1 kg 2 kg 5 kg Number of weights Plastic case
F1AC
1 mg 500 mg 1 mg 200 g 1 mg 1 kg 1 mg 2 kg 1 mg 5 kg 1g 50 g 1g 500 g
Shape
11119491 11119561 11119079 11118271 11117935 11117751 11119492 11119562 11119080 11118272 11117936 11117752 11119493 11119563 11119081 11118273 11117937 11117753 11119494 11119564 11119082 11118274 11117938 11117754 11119495 11119565 11119083 11118275 11117939 11117755 11119496 11119566 11119084 11118276 11117940 11117756 11119497 11119567 11119085 11118285 11117941 11117757 11119498 11119568 11119086 11118286 11117942 11117758 11119499 11119569 11119087 11118287 11117943 11117759 11119455 11119525 11119042 11118191 11118055 11117711 11119456 11119526 11119043 11118192 11118056 11117712 11119457 11119527 11119044 11118193 11118057 11117713 11119458 11119528 11119045 11118194 11118058 11117714 11119459 11119529 11119046 11118195 11118059 11117715 11119460 11119530 11119047 11118196 11118060 11117716 11119461 11119531 11119048 11118201 11118061 11117717 11119462 11119532 11119049 11118202 11118062 11117718 11119463 11119533 11119050 11118203 11118063 11117719 11119464 11119534 11119051 11118204 11118064 11117721 11119465 11119535 11119052 11118205 11118065 11117722 11119466 11119536 11119053 11118206 11118066 11117723 11119467 11119537 11119054 11118211 11118067 11117724 11119468 11119538 11119055 11118212 11118068 11117725
12
23
25
27
28
12
11119511 11119512 11119513 11119514 11119515 11119516 11119517 11119581 11119582 11119583 11119584 11119585 11119586 11119587
170 170
Weight sets
F2AC
M1AC
1 mg 2 mg 5 mg 10mg 20mg 50mg 100mg 200mg 500mg 1 g 2 g 5 g 10 g 20 g 50 g 100g 200g 500g 1 kg 2 kg 5 kg Numbe o we gh s Pa
12 23 25 27 28 8 12 12 23 25 27 28 8 12
a e 11118456 11118457 11118458 11118459 11118460 11118461 11118462
11117862 11117863 11117864 11117865 11117866 11117867 11117868 11117771 11117772 11117773 11117774 11117775 11117776 11117777
11118339 11118340 11118341 11118342 11118343 11118344 11118345
Accessories
Tweezers
We gh orks
O de numbe S a gh S a gh S a gh Ben Ben ps o 1 mg 20 g we gh s eng h 115 mm ps o 1 mg 20 g we gh s eng h 220 mm ps o 20 g 200 g we gh s eng h 140 mm 15900 11116544 11116543 15901 11116540 A um num po yam de o 2 kg we gh s eng h 320 mm A um num po yam de o 5 kg we gh s eng h 470 mm ABS o 500 g we gh s eng h 150 mm ABS o 1 kg we gh s eng h 150 mm
O de numbe A um num po yam de o 500 g 1 kg we gh s eng h 300 mm 222175 15902 15903 11123094 11123095
ps o 20 g 200 g we gh s eng h 200 mm ps o 1 mg 200 g we gh s eng h 115 mm
Var ous accessor es
We gh gr ps
Ny on g oves
B ush Lea he g oves pa Ny on g oves pa
We gh ma k ng O de numbe no su ab e o egu a ed env onmen su ab e o a app ca ons 72001 11123098 158798 158799 11116500 S ee w h p as c coa ng o 2 kg we gh s S ee w h p as c coa ng o 5 kg we gh s A um num o 10 kg and 20 kg we gh s A um num o 10 kg and 20 kg we gh s w h eye o c ane A um num o 50 kg we gh s w h eye o c ane O de numbe 11123096 11123097 15904 1116517 11116515
M c o be c o h su ab e o a app ca ons B ush su ab e o a app ca ons We gh ma k ng w h max 5 d g s a phanume c
171
OIML weights
CarePacs
Weights
The new CarePacs

Use just two test weights for routine testing of your balances. Use the test weights in your CarePac as recommended by METTLER TOLEDO. This will save you time and money and you can also be sure of accurate measurement results. CarePacs contains tweezers, gloves and other accessories for professional working with weights.
Flexible testing
CarePacs offer the option to add a third weight for customer specific testing, e.g., minimum weight determination.
Professional accessories
Ergonomic tweezers and weight forks, gloves and cleaning cloths suitable for clean rooms satisfy the most stringent requirements of all sectors.
Traceability and work instructions

Each CarePac is supplied calibrated and certified for traceable testing. The standard CarePac equipment includes the manufacturer's SOPs to ensure standard and precise routine tests.
172
CarePacs include the following:

Two
test weights recommended by METTLER TOLEDO especially for the individual balance model. CarePacs represent an enormous cost saving in terms of purchase and recalibration compared with standard weight sets. weights are designed such that they are suited for calibration for a process tolerance of up to 0.03%.
The
The
173
OIML weights
CarePacs
Weights
Professional CarePacs
for smooth routine tests
CarePacs are available in three different sizes and allow routine testing up to a weighing capacity of 8kg.
Customer-specific 3rd weight

The 3rd weight is used for customer-specific testing, e.g. determining the minimum weight.
OIML OIML E2 class E2 class Nominal value Order no. Nominal value Order no. 1 mg 11123044 1 g 11123053 2 mg 11123045 2 g 11123054 5 mg 11123046 5 g 11123055 1 0 mg 11123047 10 g 11123056 20 mg 11123048 20 g 11123057 50 mg 11123049 50 g 11123058 100 mg 11123050 100 g 11123059 200 mg 11123051 500 mg 11123052
Why is routine testing important?

Measuring instruments have to be checked regularly to check whether daily use has changed the quality of their measurement results. You will find detailed information in the know-how section starting on page 522.
174
CarePac S
For weighing ranges up to 490 g
PB303 AB204 PL202 AB265 PL303 AB304 XP203 AL204 XP204 EL202 XP205 EL204 XS203 EL303 XS204 JL1503-C XS205 200 g F2 10 g F1 11123001 AB54 AL54 HG63 HR83 JB203-C JL203-05 PL83 XP56 XS64 50 g F2 2 g E2 11123003
Balances
PB403 XP404 XS403 OIML Arrangement 200 g F2 20 g F1 Order no. 11123000
AB104 JL502-C AB135 JL603-C AL104 PB153 EL104 XP105 JB803-C XS104 JL203-CMR XS105 100 g F2 5 g E2 11123002
XP26 20 g F1 1 g E2 11123006
XP6 MX5 5 g E2 0.2 g E2 11123005
XP2U UMX2 2 g E2 0.1 g E2 11123004
CarePac M
For weighing ranges of 500 g 4,900 g
JB2503-C JL602 JL802 PB503 PB602 PL601 PL602 XP504 XP603 XP802 XS603 XS802 JL1501 JL1502 P81501 P81502 PL1501 PL1502
CarePac L*
For weighing ranges of 58 kg
EL2001 EL3002 JB2002 JB3002 JL3001 PB3001 PB3002 PL3001 PL3002 XP2001 XP2002 XP2003 XS2002 EL6000 EL6001 JB6001 JB8001 JL6001 PB5001 PB8000 PB8001 PG6002 PL6000 PL6001 XP5003 XP6001 XP6002 XP8001 XP8002 XS6001 XS6002 XS8001
Balances
OIML
EL4001 JB4002 PB4002 PG4002
XP4001 XP4002 XS4001 XS4002
Arrangement Order no.
500 g F2 20 g F1 11123007
1,000 g F2 50 g F2 11123008
2,000 g F2 100 g F2 11123009
2,000 g F2 200 g F2 11123010
OIML
Arrangement Order no.
Balances
XP1202 XP1203 XS1003
5,000 g F2 200 g F2 11123011

* available from April 2009
CarePacs
OIML Arrangement 200 g F2 100 g F2 50 g F2 200 g F2 100 g F2 500 g F2 1,000 g F2 2,000 g F2 5,000 g F2 50 g F2 50 g F2 50 g F2 100 g F2 100 g F2 10 g F1 10 g F1 10 g F1 500 g F2 Order no. 11123026 11123027 11123028 11123029 11123030 11123036 11123037 11123038 11123012 for METTLER TOLEDO balances which are not included in the current sales program, or for balances from other manufacturers.
5,000 g 100 g 111230
175
XXL
If you want to guarantee thereliability of balances, calibration and preventative maintenance are
Balances
essential
176
service
METTLER TOLEDO offers a tailored calibration and maintenance service for research and teaching customers who are not subject to regulations such as DIN EN ISO 9001, GLP, GMP, etc. Our trained technicians bring the necessary equipment to your lab and calibrate and check all laboratory balances.
We offer
Annual on-site maintenance check Check of basic settings Function test Function-related cleaning Adjustments in line with manufacturer specifications Calibration certificate (optional)
Tips on how to calibrate balances can be found starting on page 522.
177
The Service XXL
Solution
178
Proactive maintenance for academic excellence

Cutting-edge research and teaching always need the very best measurement results. Reliable measurement results, constant availability and a long service life guarantee the highest possible number of successful projects and practicals. Switching from reactive to proactive maintenance offers many benefits: Accurate and traceable measurements Longer life expectancy for your equipment Maximum period of use
Quick
response in emergencies Complete control of maintenance budget Reduced administrative expenditure
We offer
Validation Validation
support from experts protocols developed by the manufacturer Software updates and service contract
Validation
Segment-specific
installation and equipment
qualification Equipment re-qualification Factory-trained and authorized technicians

Calibration
Qualification
Certificate according to ISO17025 and OIML Standards Minimum weight certificate according to USP
Service
Calibration
contracts Installation and repairs Customer training and seminars Applicative and technical support
Maintenance and service
www.mt.com/ServiceXXL
179
Automatic dosing
A quantum leap
Spatulas are yesterdays news

QUANTOS
P r ect Do ing
Automated dosing
Automatisches Dosieren
Professionel e Systemqua i izie ung und Vo lschu zse vice
Service von A bis Z fr Konformitt und Betriebssicherheit
QUANTOS service
Brochure describing our tailored range of services supporting conformity and operating reliability

180
www.mt.com/quantos
The first step in sample preparation for analytical methods, (such as HPLC), is precise and correct weighing of your substance using a spatula. This substance can be highly potent or harmful. A major challenge: the lab technician should fill the sample container with small quantities of substance without spilling and weigh correctly. Moreover, there is the danger of contamination, due to the formation of aerosols when repeatedly opening the substance storage container.
Weighing with a spatula is a slow, unsafe and expensive process.
181
Automatic dosing
Intelligent dosing heads
Today is QUANTOS
Spatulas were yesterday
METTLER TOLEDO revolutionizes your laboratory: QUANTOS the quantum leap in the lab automates dosing of small quantities of free-flowing substances. QUANTOS automatically doses to the target weight, without exceeding tolerances. On your marks Stored! Go!
Automated dosing
One click and the dosing head with powder storage bottle is attached to the dosing instrument and ready to operate.
182
The Radio Frequency Identification Chip (RFID) in the dosing head stores all information such as substance ID, quantity, date etc.
One touch of a button and QUANTOS directly, accurately and automatically doses into various vessels.
On target: Impressive results
Even the most skillful hands never achieve this level of precision: QUANTOS can reliably and reproducibly dose 1mg.
183
Automatic dosing
Quick, safe, economical
Automated dosing
Why QUANTOS?
Wherever small volumes of toxic and/or very expensive powders need weighing, QUANTOS displays its superiority over manual dosing. QUANTOS doses the samples more precisely, less substance is lost due to excess dosing and it guarantees more product safety (prevention of cross-contamination) and user safety (no risk of poisoning). Analytical methods and standard preparation QUANTOS is ideal when preparing samples for a wide range of analytical methods such as HPLC and GC-MS, when the purity, concentration and composition of the substances under analysis are important. These methods imply the use of known reference substances as a standard in order to gain traceable results from the evaluation. Standards must be added to samples with the greatest precision. And this is where QUANTOS comes into its own. Development of medicines Alongside the preparation of standards, QUANTOS is also used in the development of medicines when the toxicity of unknown active substances needs to be checked, e.g., in the preclinical phase of the development, and very small volumes of the substance need to be accurately weighed in order to achieve this. Filling toxic, expensive substances Wherever highly toxic or very expensive substances need filling in small
184
volumes, QUANTOS can be of great assistance. Highly toxic powders may only be filled in the glove box. Manually weighing powders of just a few mg in the glove box is a very difficult and very time-consuming job. QUANTOS can do this with much better precision and repeatability. Documentation of dosing processes is very important for expensive and toxic substances: QUANTOS documents all dosing processes and the remaining volumes in full and in a traceable manner. The QUANTOS solution The reference substances required are weighed once in the dosing head with QUANTOS and are then always available to prepare the standards. The dosing head required, filled with the reference substance, is inserted
in the QUANTOS dosing system for preparing standards. The target vessel (volumetric flask or vial) is positioned directly under the dosing head. Automatic dosing of the reference material is triggered via the touchscreen display once the target weight has been entered. QUANTOS not only reduces the volume of reference material you need, it also reduces the amount of solvent needed. QUANTOS doses the reference material to a tenth of the initial weight at the same precision as themanual initial weight.
QUANTOS is a combination of a micro balance and a dosing system for free-flowing powder. The dosing algorithm is self-learning and therefore automatically adapts to the properties of the respective powder. Pourability, grain size, morphology of the grains and moisture content are therefore automatically taken into account. The user doesn't need to undertake any additional settings.
Benefit from QUANTOS

Speed
Faster time to market thanks to sped up processes Less exposure of personnel to harmful substances Substance itself is less exposed to the environment Adherence to process timelines No unexpected additional costs due to OoS results Less substance needed for the same number of analyses "Green Chemistry" = smaller sample volumes
4 x lower operating costs
Safety
All samples are valid, no repeats required 8% less substance needed to achieve the same result
Savings
www.mt.com/quantos
QUANTOS is also ideal for capsule filling in preclinical studies.

185
Automatic dosing
Intelligent dosing heads
Automated dosing
Intelligent heads
The QUANTOS dosing head is unique: The integrated Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) chip stores all the information in a secure and traceable way.
Different versions are available depending on how many dosing procedures you need to undertake with a substance: with a maximum of 25, 75 or 250 procedures. This eliminates the risk of cross-contamination and abrasive wear on the dosing head. The unique mixer in the dosing head mixes the particles constantly to produce a homogeneous sample. QUANTOS will allow you to dose the majority of your substances quickly, safely and economically.
All information can be tracked
Unmistakable identification
Impact-resistant and sealed
The RFID stores all information (substance ID, volume, date etc.) for 75 error-free and traceable dosing procedures. Call up the information from the QB1 touchscreen display.
Whether you use labels with matrix codes, sample protocols or XML data: Each value can be clearly assigned.
Each head (and therefore your valuable sample) is fully protected thanks to the impact-resistant and sealed transport container. The transport container also prevents moisture from being absorbed.
186
Dosing heads
Standard equipment
1. Dosing head made from TPX and stainless steel (1.4305/1.4310) 2. RFID chip stores all information (substance ID, volume, date etc.) for 75 error-free and traceable dosing procedures
Long-lasting
Clean sealing
3. Adapter made of POM for holding all common glass bottles with a GL18 thread 4. Silica glass bottle, UV-resistant 5. Holder for safely positioning thehead on the lab bench 6. Protective cover for safely transporting
QH025B
Max. number of dosing procedures 25 Capacity Standard equipment 16 ml Pack of 10
Turn the QUANTOS transport container with the dosing head and place it in the storage cabinet. The sample falls back into the UV glass bottle and lasts for a long time.
After the dosing process the highprecision mechanics reliably and tightly seal the vessel. There is no risk of contamination when changing the head.
QH075B Max. number of dosing procedures 75 Capacity Standard equipment QH250L Max. number of dosing procedures 250 Capacity Standard equipment 120 ml Pack of 3 16 ml Pack of 10
187
Automatic dosing
Peak performance
Automated dosing
Dosing instrument
QUANTOS QB1
Compact dosing instrument
with measurement performance of 220 g x 0.005 mg found nowhere else in the world. Typical minimum weight of 10 mg in accordance with USP can be achieved. Safe and easy operation with the convenience of a touchscreen; trilingual, color-coded and with profiles which can be individually configured Full conformity thanks to integrated warning functions Motorized front doors, dimensioned for use in the glove box Can also be used as analytical balance for manual weighing
Find out more about QUANTOS.

Our specialists will be more than happy to advise you on-site and work closely with you to develop a tailored and optimal solution.
www.mt.com/quantos
241 mm
188
495 mm
Standard equipment
SmartScreen, color display for safe and simple operation. SmartSens, sensor for touchless operation. UserManagement for assigning access rights. MinWeigh warns you when the weight has fallen below the minimum weight. LevelControl warns you when the dosing instrument is not levelled. BalanceCheck, automatically prompts checks with external weights. ProFACT, totally automatic temperature and/or timecontrolled adjustment and linearization. Specific dosing and weighing applications with user guidance. RFID identification for unambiguous identification of substances from the QH075-B dosing head. Individual protocols, can be defined with up to 4 IDs.
Working
height: 178 mm, suitable for volumetric flasks of up to 200 ml Ethernet interface with external Ethernet/ RS232 converter with 4 RS232 interfaces draft shield doors are motorized shield can be fully dismantled for simple cleaning can be positioned at a location away from the dosing instrument cover over terminal
489 mm
Integrated All
Draft
Terminal
Protective
Technical data*
Balance
Maximum load Max. load of the fine range Readability Readability in the fine range Repeatability (1 250 mg) with 020 g preload Repeatability (1 250 mg) with 080 g preload Typical minimum weight according to USP (0.1%) Typical minimum weight (1%, 2sd) 220 g 81 g 0.01 mg 0.005 mg 0.003 mg 0.004 mg 10 mg 1 mg
Dosing
Substances that can be dosed Dosing repeatability of typical sample sizes (50 mg) Speed of dosing (50 mg) Min. dosing capacity Max. dosing capacity 8090% 1) < 2% 2030 s 1 mg 250 mg
QUANTOS QB1 antistatic kit The ionizer, fully integrated in the QB1 dosing instrument, produces positively and negatively charged ions. These immediately eliminate the disturbing electrostatic charge.
* Provisional details. Status 1.4.2008. Subject to technical changes. 1) Representative values of >200 tested active substances from the pharmaceutical and biotech industries.
189
670 mm
Automatic dosing
Automation & safety
Automated dosing
is more than a sum of its parts
The full solution

Service comes as standard with the full QUANTOS solution: Only regular on-site checks by the qualified and certified METTLER TOLEDO service team guarantees reliable results over the entire service life.
QUANTOS also provides obligatory system qualification and the full protection service. You benefit from all relevant IQ/OQ/PQ/MQ processes and the associated services as a complete package throughout the full service life. You have peace of mind with regard to compliance with dosing quantities, quality guidelines and customer requirements. Permanent availability for use and adherence to various quality standards such as ISO17025, ISO9001, IS10012 and GLP/GMP are fully guaranteed.
Scope of service integrated in QUANTOS: ServiceXXL

QUANTOS EQ-Pac system qualification
Reliability in the control of inspection, measuring and test equipment
QUANTOS full protection service

Fixed costs that can be planned over the entire service life without financial risk
Check
Documentation
on design qualification Production certificate Documented installation Initial qualification Initial calibration, including certificate User training Extensive SOPs for routine operation Definition of activities for requalification Definition of routine tests and frequencies
of basic settings cleaning Adjustments in line with manufacturer regulations Function test twice a year Original spare parts Work time and travel time Update and hotline service 17025 calibration certificate Minimum weight certificate
Function-related
The QUANTOS complete service package forms part of our overall solution, guaranteeing conformity and operating reliability at all times.
190
Complete workstation
METTLER TOLEDO provides you with a complete workstation for preparing samples. The ergonomically adapted safety booth gives QUANTOS allround protection. Sample labelling and data tracking included.
Click here to watch our movie on automated dosing
191
Chemistry in the clouds

The mechanism responsible for producing acid rain
Dr. Klaus Jrgen Wannowius
Pipettes
Introduction
When meteorologists talk of hydrometeors, they quite simply mean raindrops or all forms of precipitated water in the atmosphere. Clouds in turn are mixtures of water drops and particles and are very prone to reactions. For example, no less than a hundred chemical reactions take place in one drop of water. They often produce changes to the acidity of the precipitation and cause acid rain. In the 1990's Dr. Wannowius was a member of SFB233 'Dynamics and Chemistry of Hydrometeors' and was involved in explaining reactions between hydroperoxides and substances in atmospheric air. The preparation of solutions of various concentrations is a key task in the process described in this paper. This process usually involves preparation of the required reaction solutions and mixtures by pipetting from stock solutions (higher concentration). The key to this is using volume-measuring pipettes which are easy to use and offer high levels of accuracy.
Klaus Jrgen Wannowius studied chemistry at TU Darmstadt between 19661975. He has been involved in scientific work within the Chemistry department since 1972. He lectured chemists on the foundation course on stoichiometry for eight semesters. Around 150 scientific pieces of homework were produced by teaching students under his supervision. These all addressed preparative, analytical and kinetic questions. In the 1990's as a member of SFB233 'Dynamics and Chemistry of Hydrometeors' he was involved in explaining reactions between hydroperoxides and substances in atmospheric air. Since the spring of 1999 Dr. Wannowius has been responsible for contact with schools within the Chemistry department. He has designed a number of events for schoolchildren of every age and aptitude under the logo 'CHEMIE FR SCHLER' (Chemistry for schools) and run the events with the assistance of the technical department. He has been head of the MerckTU Darmstadt junior lab at TU Darmstadt since September 2008.

Introduction
Pipettes
Light source
Mixing chamber
I0
Stop syringe Stop with trigger contact
Pressure syringe
Vessel
Concave reticulated mirror
Diode array
Tips and tricks for correct pipette use can be found starting on page 524.
Data processing
Diagram 1: Structure of a 'Rapid-Scan-Stopped-flow' apparatus
194
Pure water in contact with 'normal' air has a pH of 5.6 and not 7 as a lot of people would say without giving it any further thought. And the same is true of rainwater. The natural level of CO2 ensures that the water responds acidly (1). (1)
(2) (3)
pH Fig. 1: pH profile for the speed constant k0 corrected for buffer share in the H2O2/S(IV) system (T=285K, I=0.5M (NaClO4)). Inset: Simulated curves for different values for speed constant for the water-catalyzed reaction channel.
As a result of these reactions, natural water (including rainwater) acts as acid. But this is not 'acid rain'. Inthe SO2 and HSO3 ion, sulfur has oxidation stage +IV. Through oxidation to stage +VI according to (4), hydrogen sulfate ions, HSO4, are produced (4). (4)
In the troposphere, oxygen, O2, ozone, O3 and hydrogen peroxide, H2O2, are the main substances available as oxidants for the reaction (4) in the aqueous phase (in the raindrop). However, oxidation with molecular oxygen requires a catalyst. Oxidation with ozone is important in an alkaline environment and oxidation with hydrogen peroxide (5) is the dominant reaction in the (initially) weakly acid raindrop. HSO 3 + H2O2

10g {k0 / (M1 s1)}
SO2, a non-metallic oxide, roughly half of which has natural origins (volcanoes) and the other half of which comes from man-made sources, can experience a similar reaction (3). Because of the very high Henry constants, virtually all of the SO2 (gas) which is initially in the gaseous phase, passes into the aqueous phase via SO2(aq) (2).
10g {kH / (M1 s1)}
HSO4 + H2O
(5)
pKa (ROOH) 2: Linear free enthalpy relationship for the speed of oxidation of sulfur(IV) in the HSO3/ROOH system via the protons (kH) and water (kP=kHOH[H2O]) catalyzed reaction channel (T=285K; I=0.5M (NaClO4); oxidants ROOH= H2O2 (i), CH3OOH (h), t-BuOOH (j), HC(O)OOH (c), CH3C(O)OOH (e), C2H5C(O)OOH (d), O3SOOH (f), HOCH2OOH (g), ,ONOOH (b), I=1.0M (Na2SO4), T=293K), O2NOOH (a).
As the hydrogen sulfate ion (pKa=2.0) is now an acid 105 times stronger than the hydrogen sulfite ion (pKa= 6.7), oxidation virtually results in an 'extra' proton being produced (6).
HSO3 + H2O2
2 SO4 + H3O+ (6)
This is the process that creates 'acid rain'.
10g {kp / (M1 s1)}
195

Introduction
The 2nd order speed constant k2 is catalyzed by 'general acids' HX (e.g. by the acid components of a buffer) (8). Only the two acids H3O+ and H2O, which enter the constant k0, are however of any relevance to the atmosphere (9). The pH dependence of the speed constants k0 (the so-called pH profile) is shown in Fig.1. Interestingly the 3rd order speed constant kH for the proton-catalyzed reaction of the HSO3 ion is virtually independent of the nature of the hydroperoxide ROOH, while the contribution of the water catalysis, kP = kHOH[H2O] in (9), increases the more acidic the hydroperoxide ROOH is (see Fig. 2). The speed equations found correlate with the following 3-stage mechanism in the HSO3 ion range ((10) (12)): (10) (11) (12) The reactions (10)(12) describe a condensation, an H+ion-catalyzed, intramolecular redox reaction and a hydrolysis. Steps (10) and (12) are fast and their speed is determined by the intramolecular redox reaction (11). J. Halperin and H. Taube [6] have already shown that when oxidizing HSO3 ions with 18O-marked hydrogen peroxide, H-18O-18O-H, sulfate ions are produced which contain the 18O atoms, [S(18O)2O2]2. The H+ catalysis shows that the species ROOSO2 initially results in the acid ROOSO2H in which the RO group moves from oxygen to sulfur. During the analyses of the mechanism behind the reaction at high concentrations (much higher than occur in the atmosphere) and with a constant pH value (buffer), the determination of numerical values for speed constants was undertaken at concentrations of relevance to the atmosphere. These measurements were taken at variable H+ concentrations. The measuring method used here was to track the change in conductivity (see reaction (6)). With an initial value in the range of pH=45, oxidation of HSO3 ions with hydrogen peroxide was first analyzed with an excess of S(IV) and secondly with an excess of H2O2.
Pipettes
kobsd / (M1 s1)
[H2O2], [SIV)] / M Fig. 3: The observed 2nd order speed constant kobsd is displayed versus the excess concentration of S(IV) or H2O2 (pH0=5.0; T=298 K; without any other add tives).
As a member of the special SFB 233 research department 'Dynamics and Chemistry of Hydrometeors', I worked with Ph.D. students Bruno Fecher [1], Christoph Drexler [2], Uwe Gtz [3] and Frank Maass [4] in the study group managed by Dr. Horst Elias on the mechanism responsible for hydrogen sulfite ions oxidizing with hydrogen peroxide and other hydro-peroxides ROOH, such as peroxynitrous acid, ONOOH, peroxynitric acid, O2NOOH, peracetic acid, CH3C(O)OOH and acetic acid, CH3OOH [5]. The 'Rapid-scan-stopped-flow' spectral photometry method was used. This allowed us to register entire absorption spectra (200620nm) at intervals of 1.3ms. Diagram 1 shows the basic principle of the apparatus. The reaction is of the first order with regard to hydroper-oxide ROOH and the S (IV) species (SO2, HSO3, SO32) (7). (7) (8) (9)
196
For the excess of S(IV), (13) applies when kobsd=kH x [S(IV)].
This results in the linear relationship shown in Fig. 3. The data gained by Frank Maass [4] was used in the meteorologists' computer program. kH=(9.7 0.6)x 107 M2s1 was obtained for the speed constant when T=298 K. When calculating weather events, knowing the dependence of the constants kH of the ion concentration Ic (i.e. of the salt content of the water) is extremely important because raindrops form around a cloud condensation nucleus. In maritime environments, the particles are common salt, that ultimately comes from seawater. In the interior, they are mainly particles which consist of ammonium sulfate that can form from diesel exhaust gases. A condensation equation (10) in a water solvent shouldn't be fostered. But it is the only chance the two reaction partners H2O2 and HSO3 ion have to approach one another before they enter the 'real' reaction in stage 11. The final hydrolysis (12) is naturally fostered again in water. The mechanism can be summarized as follows: meet react separate A mechanism can't get much more plausible than that. If a layman sees an equation like (5), he could be forgiven for thinking that there couldn't be anything simpler than transferring an O atom from hydrogen peroxide to a hydrogen sulfite ion. It only becomes clear that the process isn't that simple when you realize that the O atom has to 'be removed from a chain', H-O-O-H. Dr. Klaus Jrgen Wannowius
(13)
L terature: [1] B. Fecher Dissertation TU Darmstadt 1995. [2] C. Drexler Dissertation TU Darmstadt 1993. [3] U. Gtz Dissertation TU Darmstadt 1996. [4] F. Maass Dissertation TU Darmstadt 1999. [5] K . J. Wannowius 'Contribution to the Chemistry in Clouds: A Laboratory Study on the Kinetics and Mechanism of the Sulfur and N trogen Compounds by Hydroperoxides in Aqueous Phase' in 'Dynamics and Chemistry of Hydrometeors', Chapter 26, S. 468-527, Final Report of the Collaborative Research Centre 233 Dynamik und Chemie der Hydrometeore', Ruprecht Jaenicke, Ed., Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH, Weinheim 2001. [6] J. Halperin and H. Taube J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 74, 380-2 (1952).
197
When sterile isn't clean enough!
198
199
RAININ
BioClean pipette tips
P ip e tt es
Tip s
"Tip" manufacture
BioClean: 100% inert
For reliable results, pipette tips must be absolutely inert; they may have no influence whatsoever on samples. As such, simply using contamination-free tips is no longer sufficient. Tips also have to be free from any and all traces of bioactive components: They have to be BioClean. The selection of the raw material, production under clean-room conditions, comprehensive testing, and safe packaging are what RAININ BioClean tips are all about it's what makes them the cleanest and safest on the market. Although many products are advertized as "100% contamination-free" or "sterile", the latest publications [1] show that even these tips can impair the results of scientific research. Additives in the polypropylene (such as DiHEMDA detergent and oleamide releasing agent) which are used as standard by manufacturers of pipette tips can influence results significantly. RAININ BioClean pipette tips have been proven free from such components and, therefore, will have no impact upon results.
Pipettes
RAININ BioClean 100% clean, 100% pure

Internal quality checks and external audits can find no trace whatsoever of such additives or bioactive pollutants on RAININ BioClean tips. The absence of bioactive components in the materials combined with the lack of foreign pollutants (DNA, DNAse, RNAse, ATP, pyrogen or PCR inhibitors) during the production and packaging process ensures that the high-grade BioClean tips manufactured by RAININ are completely inert and, therefore, will not affect the results of experiments.
For more information, go to www.mt.com/bioclean
200
Maximum performance totally unimpaired

Not all tips are the same. Only tips which are of the best possible quality and 100% inert will deliver optimum performance and accurate experiment results. RAININ is absolutely committed to manufacturing pipette tips of the highest possible quality.
Internal tip test
High-purity material
High-purity polypropylene resin for RAININ tips in the form of granules with no additives or colorants whatsoever is bought in and tested exhaustively in compliance with CFR 21[2].
Clean-room production
Impeccable production and packaging

RAININ pipette tips are manufactured in a Class 100,000 clean room. The operations for processing and feeding the material are fully automated, from the point at which the material is injected directly from the silos into the tip machines through to subsequent packaging. Neither additives nor colorants are employed during this process. Accordingly, the tip material is and remains 100% pure. This means that as well as being able to offer absolute material purity, RAININ has production processes conforming to ISO 9001 which can guarantee to completely eliminate external pollutants.
Automatic processing prevents human contact.
Tested to the highest level

RAININ BioClean tips undergo complex testing. Methods such as qPCR and a test sensitivity of up to 10-9 Kunitz enable even the slightest traces of pollutants to be detected. The fact that these incredibly stringent test procedures apply to all possible pollutants (DNA, DNAse, ATP, PCR inhibitors, trace materials, organic micro pollutants at trace level) means that the inert BioClean tips are the safest on the market.
Tested pollutants RNase DNase DNA Pyrogens (LAL test) ATP
Reliability of test procedure 10-9 Kunitz units/l 10-7 Kunitz units/l < copy of human DNA 0.001 EU/ml < 10
-12 mg/l
[1] M cDonald, G., Hudson, A , Dunn, S., You, H., Baker, G., Whittal, R , Martin, J., Jha, A., Edmondson, D., and A. Holt. 2008. Bioactive Contaminants Leach from Disposable Laboratory Plasticware. Science 322 (5903): 917. [2] C FR Title 21 (2003) 177.1520 (a), (b), and (c) 1.1 Olefin polymers, Montell Polyolefins Datasheet
201
RAININ
BioClean More than just words

Inspection of RAININ pipette tips for evidence of contamination and traces of organic and inorganic substances
Pipettes
202
203
RAININ
Technical report
Highly sensitive analytical methods

Investigating RAININ pipette tips for contamination
qPCR is a powerful amplification and verification procedure used in highly sensitive analyses of genetic samples. RAININ was able to use this series of experiments to show that the quantitative verification method qPCR is an adequate means of demonstrating that the pipette tips manufactured and packaged at RAININ locations are indeed ultrapure. The results show that RAININ can prove that BioClean tips are contaminated with less than 1 copy of human template DNA. Furthermore, the highly sensitive gel-based assay demonstrated that RAININ pipette tips are not contaminated by RNase and DNase.
Pipettes
Of the many factors which can have a negative impact on molecular biology methods, contamination from DNA, DNase, and RNase is by far the most significant. To ensure that reaction batches such as PCR and qPCR remain unaffected by these factors, RAININ subjects every batch of pipette tips produced to a series of tests.
Material and methods

For all of the following tests, eluate was prepared from a tip. 10 tips from each batch are filled with 1,000l of ultrapure water free from molecular biological contaminants. The maximum volume is taken up into the tip; the tip is then emptied twice to ensure that any traces of contamination whatsoever are rinsed out.
DNA trace: Deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) is a component of virtually all working practices in the field of molecular biology. Each and every trace of external DNA can falsify test results. Quantitative PCR (qPCR) has been used as follows: An investigation of each reaction batch of 25 l found negative controls, various concentrations of DNA (human or bacterial) as well as the eluate from the pipette tip. This investigation was carried out with an ABI 7700 system and the Power SYBR Green Master Mix (ABI). The final concentration of the primer amounts to 250 nM per reaction batch. The following conserved sequences were used for human and bacterial primers: Primer for genomic human DNA: Forward primer: 5-AAGTGTCAAGGCCAGGAGTTTG Reverse primer: 5-TCCTTCAGCTGGGCTCTCTTAC Primer for bacterial DNA: Forward primer: 5-CCAGCAGCCGCGGTAAT Reverse primer: 5-TGCGCTTTACGCCCAGTAAT
www.mt.com/RAININ
204
Results
qPCR
All reactions are in triplicate. The Ct values are investigated to ensure that the eluate content from the RAININ tips is less than 1 pg. DNase trace: Deoxyribonuclease (DNase) is an enzyme which cleaves DNA. 10 l doses of a negative control, asample from the tips and a standard with a low threshold value of 1 x 10-7 Kunitz units of DNase I are incubated with DNA/buffer solution for 1 hour at 37C. The samples are then added to a 0.8% agarose gel and separated by means of electrophoresis. Afterwards samples are analyzed on the UV table. The results (which are recorded using imaging software) show that, unlike the DNA in the positive control, the DNA in the eluate from the tip and of the negative control have not been digested. RNase trace: Ribonuclease (RNase) is a stable enzyme which can cleave RNA completely. It is one of the most dangerous potential contaminants for qRT-PCR treatments. 10 l doses of a negative control, a sample from the tips and a standard with a low threshold value of 1 x 10-9 Kunitz units of RNase A are incubated with RNA/buffer solution for 1 hour at 37C. The samples are then added to a 1.0% agarose gel and separated by means of electrophoresis. Afterwards samples are analyzed on the transilluminator. The results (which are recorded using imaging software) show that, unlike the RNA involved in the positive controls, the RNA in the eluate from the tip and in the negative control have not been digested.
Figure 1: qPCR data for standard chart and test samples. Standard chart values from 0 to 10 g. RAININ test samples show a DNA content of less than 1 pg; in other words, contamination with less than 1 copy of human template DNA.
RNase
Figure 2: a: Product samples b: Pure RNA standard as negative control c: RNA standard with RNase as positive control
DNase
Figure 3: a: Product samples b: Pure DNA standard as negative control c: DNA standard w th DNase as positive control
205
RAININ
Technical report
Traces of organic and inorganic substances

Trace and analysis in pipette tips
Experiments carried out by independent external analysts show that the pipette tips manufactured by RAININ demonstrate no evidence of organic micro pollutants such as oleamide and DiHEMDA being present in sufficient quantities at trace level to act as contaminative inhibitors. The investigation into the effect of trace metal as a potential inhibitor carried out separately found values significantly below the levels which could affect the results of experiments.
A number of studies have shown that the occurrence of contaminative trace metals and organic micro pollutants at trace level can have a negative effect on the results of experiments. To prove that the pipette tips manufactured by RAININ do not contain sufficient quantities of contaminative inhibitors, a number of experiments were carried out by independent external analysts. The results of these experiments are shown here. The end product or eluate was then emptied out of the tip so that a quantitative trace metal calculation could be made. A total of 10 tips were tested in each volume capacity. Linearity standards were prepared from highpurity commercial standards for ICP-MS calibration and the device was calibrated with a 5-point characteristic (0, 2, 5, 10, and 20 ppb). The eluate from the tips was diluted with deionized ultrapure water to an acidity level of 3% before being injected into the VG's high-resolution Axiom ICP-MS system. Trace level calculation of organic micro pollutants: A random selection of newly manufactured and packaged pipette tips with a volume of 1,000 l was removed from stock for investigations using two methods. 1) GC-MS: The samples were prepared by rinsing 15 pipette tips per sample with 1.5 ml of a 3:1 methanol/toluol solution. A number of tips were rinsed with a lower volume of the same solvent (0.75 ml) to increase the oleamide concentration in the solution. GC-MS test conditions: An aliquot of the rinse sample was analyzed in an Agilent 6890 GC-MS in SIM (selected ion monitoring) mode with an MSD (mass selective detector) 5973. Ions 59, 72, and 281 were investigated
Pipettes
206
Material and methods

Analysis of trace metal: A random selection of newly manufactured and packaged pipette tips with volumes of 10, 250, 300, and 1,000 l was removed from stock for investigation. All experiments were carried out in a laminar flow cabinet fitted with HEPA filters. All containers used for the experiment were cleaned with concentrated nitric acid to exclude the risk of cross-contamination. "Optima Grade" nitric acid (Fisher Scientific) with a trace metal content of less than 100 ppt was used to rinse the pipette tips. The test tips were treated with concentrated nitric acid as follows: A suitable pipette was used to take up the maximum volume with each tip; this volume was retained in the tip for 5 minutes. The acid was then emptied into a container and a new tip was fitted to the pipette. The same acid was then taken up again and retained in each new tip to be tested for 5 minutes.
in SIM mode. The necessary chromatographic separation was performed with a ZB-5 MS w/ 5 m precolumn (30 m x 0.25 mm x 0.25 m film). 2) LC-MS: The samples were prepared in the same way as for GC-MS; 15 pipette tips were rinsed per sample but with 1.5 ml of a solution comprising 50% HPLC water and 50% acetonitrile (0.2% formic acid) as an eluant. LC-MS test conditions: The samples and blank value were injected into an Agilent 1100 HPLC system connected to an LC/MSD trap mass spectrometer (ion trap). The mass spectrometer used electrospray ionization (ESI) as an ionization source for sample injection.
Separation was performed with a 30 x 4.6 mm Cadenza CD-C18 column with 3 m particles and water/acetonitrile as an eluant. The analyses were carried out in positive ionization mode and with an injection volume of 50 l.
Results
Analysis of trace metals
Element Typical values (ng/l)
The following results (in ng/l) were typical for the tips investigated:
Al <0.003 Cr <0.00005 Mn <0.00005 Fe <0.0007 Ni <0.0002 Cu <0.00015 Zn <0.001 Cd <0.00002 Hg <0.00004 Pb <0.000025
The results show that even under strict experimental conditions, the quantity of trace metal released from the pipette tips neither blocks nor impairs in any other way the results of such experiments.
Trace level analysis of organic micro pollutants

The results of the GC-MS analysis, where potential contaminants should be shown up by the oleamide releasing agent, are illustrated in Figure 1. A standard was compared with the eluate from the RAININ tips.
Abundance
Abundance
Time
Time
Figure 1: Calculation of the limit of detection (LOD) with an oleamide standard 10.8 g/ml (GC-MS, SIM mode), batch 3:1 methanol/ toluol mixture left. On the right is a GC-MS chromatogram (SIM mode) for a sample of RT-L1000LR pipette tips showing no evidence of contamination by oleamide-releasing reagents. The results of the LC-MS investigation match those of the investigation with GC-MS. No traces of DiHEMDA contamination could be found.
207
RAININ
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Top tips
RAININ What good tips are all about
BioClean production Zero contamination
To ensure high-quality lab results, the tips have to be free from DNase, RNase, DNA, pyrogens, and adenosine triphosphate (ATP). Therefore, we set great store by BioClean production, which avoids human contact with the tips wherever possible.
Pipettes
Environmentally-friendly design
Innovative packaging design for refilling tip racks reduces waste plastic at source.
Contamination-free
As presterilized BioClean tips and filter tips are sterilized with gamma rays, the packaged products are free from biological contamination.
Faultless production sequences Perfect tip geometry

RAININ tips owe there impeccable geometry to state-ofthe art production facilities and the use of high-quality, untreated polypropylenes. Zero deformation, zero breaks, zero kinks ... just perfectly formed. This is the basis upon which absolute consistency and optimum performance can be assured in every pipetting cycle.
High quality
RAININ tips are made from pure polypropylene with no additives and are BioClean-certified.
The very best selection

The wide range of available sizes, packaging options, and technical variants is bound to be able to provide the ideal tip for any application.
FinePoint Thin walls for optimum performance

Continuous tapering and thin-walled construction make FinePoint tips more flexible and softer than traditional or beveled tips. Since drops stick to surfaces, the thickness of the wall at the orifice of a tip has a decisive role to play. Although this is of particular importance where small quantities are concerned, it also increases precision in the case of larger volumes and in multidispensing.
Light and quick

The cylindrical LTS LiteTouch tips can be loaded and ejected efficiently and with little effort.
Precise
Better results thanks to FinePoint tips.
208
Tip quality is just as dependent upon surface characteristics. A rough surface, an irregular orifice, excess plastic or material deposits will significantly impair precision.
Certification
The tips are tested both in-house and by an external laboratory and their scope of supply includes a certificate attesting that they are "guaranteed free from DNase, RNase, DNA, pyrogens, and ATP". A test report is also included in every package.
Quality tip
High-quality production
BioClean
tips and packaging: 100% free from contamination Tip geometry which is second to none
Cross-sectional view of material deposits
Innovative design
LTS-LiteTouch FinePoint:
system Thin walls for the best results
A wide range of tips

Custom
designs for specific applications Volume ranges Packaging options
Coaxial distortion
Incorrect pipetting
209
RAININ
Pipettes
BioClean: Tips for RAININ pipettes

Tips in racks with removable cover
Cat. no. RT-L10 RT-L10S RT-L10F RT-L250 RT-L250S RT-L200F RT-L250W RT-L250WS RT-L300 RT-L300S RT-L300F RT-L1000 RT-L1000S RT-L1000F RT-L1000W RT-L1000WS RT-L1200 RT-L1200S RT-L1200F RT-L2000 RT-L2000S RT-L2000F RT-L5000 RT-L5000S Order no. 17002930 17002929 17002928 17002932 17002931 17002927 17007102 17007101 17002935 17002934 17002933 17002922 17002921 17002920 17007100 17007099 17006421 17006420 17006419 17002926 17002924 17002923 17002937 17002936 Description 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 480 tips in 8 racks 480 tips in 8 racks 480 tips in 8 racks 192 tips in 8 racks 192 tips in 8 racks Max. Volumetric capacity 20 l 20 l 20 l 200 l 200 l 200 l 200 l 200 l 300 l 300 l 300 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 1,200 l 1,200 l 1,200 l 2,000 l 2,000 l 2,000 l 5,000 l 5,000 l Fits LTS pipettes 2, 10, 20 2, 10, 20 2, 10, 20 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 300 300 300 1,000, 1,200 1,000, 1,200 1,000 1,000, 1,200 1,000, 1,200 1,200, 1,000 1,200, 1,000 1,200, 1,000 2,000 l 2,000 l 2,000 l 5,000 l 5,000 l
LiteTouch system
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Type Presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized Wide orifice Wide orifice, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized Wide orifice Wide orifice, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized
SpaceSaver
Cat. no. GPS-L10 GPS-L10S GPS-L250 GPS-L250S GPS-L300 GPS-L300S GPS-L1000 GPS-L1000S Order no. 17005091 17005090 17005093 17005092 17005095 17005094 17005089 17005088 Description 960 tips in 10 layers 960 tips in 10 layers 960 tips in 10 layers 960 tips in 10 layers 768 tips in 10 layers 768 tips in 10 layers 768 tips in 10 layers 768 tips in 10 layers
Max. Volumetric capacity 20 l 20 l 200 l 200 l 300 l 300 l 1,000 l 1,000 l
Fits LTS pipettes 2, 10, 20 2, 10, 20 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 300 300 1,000, 1,200 1,000, 1,200
Type Presterilized Presterilized Presterilized Presterilized
210
Low-retention tips
Cat. no. RT-L10LR RT-L10SLR RT-L10FLR RT-L250LR RT-L250SLR RT-L200FLR RT-L1000LR RT-L1000SLR RT-L1000FLR Order no. 17007955 17007956 17007957 17007959 17007960 17007961 17007952 17007953 17007954 Description 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 768 tips in 10 racks 768 tips in 10 racks 768 tips in 10 racks
Max. Volumetric capacity 20 l 20 l 20 l 200 l 200 l 200 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 1,000 l
Fits LTS pipettes 2, 10, 20 2, 10, 20 2, 10, 20 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 1,000, 1,200 1,000, 1,200 1,000, 1,200
Type Low retention Presterilized, low retention Fi ter, presterilized, low retention Low retention Presterilized, low retention Fi ter, presterilized, low retention Low retention Presterilized, low retention Fi ter, presterilized, low retention
Extra-long tips
Cat. no. Order no. RT-L250X 17008814 RT-L250XS 17008815 RT-L200XF 17008887 RT-L1000X 17008817 RT-L1000XS 17008818 RT-L1000XF 17008819
Description 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks
Max. Volumetric capacity 200 l 200 l 200 l 1,200 l 1,200 l 1,200 l
Fits LTS pipettes Type 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 Extra long 50,100, 200 Fi ter, presterilized, extra long 1,000, 1,200 1,000, 1,200 Presterilized, extra long 1,000, 1,200 Fi ter, presterilized, extra long
Mix and save!
Tips can be combined at will to get the best possible price for every order.
211
RAININ
Pipettes
LiteTouch system
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
GreenPak
Cat. no. GP-L10 GP-L10S GP-L10F GP-L250 GP-L250S GP-L200F GP-L1000 GP-L1000S GP-L1000F GPR-L10 GPR-L250 GPR-L1000 Order no. 17002424 17002430 17002429 17002425 17002431 17002428 17002423 17002427 17002426 17001865 17001863 17001864
Max. Volumetric Fits LTS pipettes capacity Type Description 960 tips in 10 layers 20 l 2, 10, 20 960 tips in 10 layers 20 l 2, 10, 20 Presterilized 960 tips in 10 layers 20 l 2, 10, 20 Fi ter, presterilized 960 tips in 10 layers 200 l 50,100, 200 960 tips in 10 layers 200 l 50,100, 200 Presterilized 960 tips in 10 layers 200 l 50,100, 200 Fi ter, presterilized 768 tips in 8 layers 1,000 l 1,000 768 tips in 8 layers 1,000 l 1,000 Presterilized 768 tips in 8 layers 1,000 l 1,000 Fi ter, presterilized Empty racks/Covers for all GP/GPS 10-l refill packs, red, pack of 10 Empty racks/Covers for all GP/GPS 250-l refill packs, green, pack of 10 Empty racks/Covers for all GP/GPS 1000-l refill packs, blue, pack of 8
StableRak in double-96 racks Individual

Cat. no. SR-L10 SR-L10S SR-L10F SR-L250 SR-L250S SR-L200F SR-L300 SR-L300S SR-L300F SR-L1000 SR-L1000S SR-L1000F SR-L1200 SR-L1200S SR-L1200F Order no. 17005862 17005861 17005860 17005864 17005863 17005859 17005867 17005866 17005865 17007083 17007082 17007081 17007086 17007085 17007084 Description 960 tips in 5 racks 960 tips in 5 racks 960 tips in 5 racks 960 tips in 5 racks 960 tips in 5 racks 960 tips in 5 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks Max. Volumetric capacity 20 l 20 l 20 l 200 l 200 l 200 l 300 l 300 l 300 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 1,200 l 1,200 l 1,200 l Fits LTS pipettes 2, 10, 20 2, 10, 20 2, 10, 20 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 300 300 300 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,200, 1,000 1,200, 1,000 1,200, 1,000 Type Presterilized Fi ter, presterilized Presterilized Fi ter, presterilized Presterilized Fi ter, presterilized Presterilized Fi ter, presterilized Presterilized Fi ter, presterilized
212
StableStak in double-96 racks Stacked

Max. Volumetric capacity 20 l 20 l 200 l 200 l 300 l 300 l 1,000 l 1,000 l Fits LTS pipettes 2, 10, 20 2, 10, 20 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 300 300 1,000 1,000
Cat. no. SS-L10 SS-L10S SS-L250 SS-L250S SS-L300 SS-L300S SS-L1000 SS-L1000S
Order no. 17005873 17005872 17005875 17005874 17005877 17005876 17007090 17007089
Description 960 tips in 5 layers 960 tips in 5 layers 960 tips in 5 layers 960 tips in 5 layers 768 tips in 4 layers 768 tips in 4 layers 768 tips in 4 layers 768 tips in 4 layers
Type Presterilized Presterilized Presterilized Presterilized
Bulk tips
Cat. no. RC-L10 RC-L10/10 RC-L250 RC-L250/10 RC-L300 RC-L1000 RC-L1000/10 RC-L1200 RC-L2000 RC-L5000 RC-L10ML RC-L10MLS RC-L20ML RC-L20MLS Order no. 17001128 17000504 17001118 17000506 17001132 17001129 17000498 17006324 17001130 17001133 17001119 17005940 17001131 17005941 Description 1,000 tips in 1 bag 1,000 tips in 1 bag 1,000 tips in 1 bag 1,000 tips in 1 bag 1,000 tips in 1 bag 1,000 tips in 1 bag 1,000 tips in 1 bag 1,000 tips in 1 bag 1,000 tips in 1 bag 1,000 tips in 1 bag 200 tips in 1 bag 75 tips individ. packaged 100 tips in 1 bag 50 tips individ. packaged Max. Volumetric capacity 20 l 20 l 200 l 200 l 300 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 1,200 l 2,000 l 5,000 l 10 ml 10 ml 0.68 fl oz 0.68 fl oz Fits LTS pipettes 2, 10, 20 2, 10, 20 50,100, 200 50,100, 200 300 1,000 1,000 1,200,1,000 2,000 l 5,000 l 10 ml 10 ml 0.68 fl oz 0.68 fl oz Type
Presterilized Presterilized
213
RAININ
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Fits all
Traditional shaft
Pipettes
BioClean: For all manufacturers
Racks with removable cover

Cat. no. RT-10 RT-10S RT-10F RT-10G RT-10GS RT-10GF RT-20F RT-100F RT-250 RT-250S RT-200F RT-1000 RT-1000S RT-1000F RT-2000 RT-2000S RT-2000F RT-5000 RT-5000S Order no. 17002896 17002905 17002904 17002908 17002907 17002906 17002917 17002903 17002916 17002913 17002912 17002902 17002901 17002897 17002911 17002910 17002909 17002919 17002918 Description 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 768 tips in 8 racks 480 tips in 8 racks 480 tips in 8 racks 480 tips in 8 racks 192 tips in 8 racks 192 tips in 8 racks Max. Volumetric capacity 10 l 10 l 10 l 10 l 10 l 10 l 30 l 100 l 250 l 250 l 200 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 2,000 l 2,000 l 2,000 l 5,000 l 5,000 l Fits traditional Pipettes 2, 10 2, 10 l 2, 10 2, 10 2, 10 2, 10 20, 25 100 l 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 200, 250 l 1,000 1,000 l 1,000 2,000, 2,500 l 2,000, 2,500 l 2,000 l 5,000 l 5,000 l Type Presterilized Filter, presterilized ShaftGard ShaftGard/Presterilized ShaftGard/Filter Filter, presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized
SpaceSaver
Cat. no. GPS-10G GPS-10GS GPS-250 GPS-250S GPS-1000 GPS-1000S Order no. 17005085 17005084 17005087 17005086 17005083 17005082 Description 960 tips in 10 layers 960 tips in 10 layers 960 tips in 10 layers 960 tips in 10 layers 768 tips in 8 layers 768 tips in 8 layers Max. Volumetric capacity 10 l 10 l 250 l 250 l 1,000 l 1,000 l Fits traditional Pipettes 2, 10 2, 10 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 1,000 1,000 Type ShaftGard ShaftGard/Presterilized Presterilized Presterilized
214
GreenPak
Cat. no. GP-10 GP-10S GP-10F GP-10G GP-10GS GP-10GF GP-20F GP-100F GP-250 GP-250S GP-200F GP-1000 GP-1000S GP-1000F GPR-10 GPR-10G GPR-250 GPR-1000 Order no. 17002419 17002415 17002414 17002418 17002417 17002416 17002422 17002413 17002409 17002421 17002420 17002412 17002411 17002410 17001860 17001862 17001861 17001859 Max. Volumetric Fits traditional Type Description capacity Pipettes 960 tips in 10 layers 10 l 2, 10 960 tips in 10 layers 10 l 2, 10 Presterilized 960 tips in 10 layers 10 l 2, 10 Filter, presterilized 960 tips in 10 layers 10 l 2, 10 ShaftGard 960 tips in 10 layers 10 l 2, 10 ShaftGard/Presterilized 960 tips in 10 layers 10 l 2, 10 ShaftGard/Filter 960 tips in 10 layers 30 l 20, 25 Filter, presterilized 960 tips in 10 layers 100 l 100 Filter, presterilized 960 tips in 10 layers 250 l 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 960 tips in 10 layers 250 l 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 Presterilized 960 tips in 10 layers 200 l 200 Filter, presterilized 768 tips in 8 layers 1,000 l 1,000 768 tips in 8 layers 1,000 l 1,000 Presterilized 768 tips in 8 layers 1,000 l 1,000 Filter, presterilized Empty racks/Covers for all GP-10 products, pack of 10 Empty racks/Covers for GP-10G-, GPS-10G products, red, pack of 10, for ShaftGard Empty racks/Covers for GP-250-, GPS-250 products, green, pack of 10 Empty racks/Covers for GP-1000-, GPS-1000 products, green, pack of 10
215
RAININ
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Pipettes
Traditional shaft
StableStak
Cat. no. SS-250 SS-250S SS-300 SS-300S SS-1000 SS-1000S Order no. 17005869 17005868 17005871 17005870 17007088 17007087 Description 960 tips in 5 layers 960 tips in 5 layers 768 tips in 4 layers 768 tips in 4 layers 768 tips in 4 layers 768 tips in 4 layers Max. Volumetric capacity 250 l 250 l 300 l 300 l 1,000 l 1,000 l Fits traditional Pipettes 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 300 l 300 l 1,000 l 1,000 l Type Presterilized Presterilized Presterilized
StableRak
Cat. no. SR-20F SR-100F SR-250 SR-250S SR-200F SR-300 SR-300S SR-300F SR-1000 SR-1000S SR-1000F Order no. 17005858 17005851 17005854 17005853 17005852 17005857 17005856 17005855 17007080 17007079 17007078 Description 960 tips in 5 racks 960 tips in 5 racks 960 tips in 5 racks 960 tips in 5 racks 960 tips in 5 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks 768 tips in 4 racks Max. Volumetric capacity 30 l 100 l 250 l 250 l 200 l 300 l 300 l 300 l 1,000 l 1,000 l 1,000 l Fits traditional Pipettes 20, 25 100 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 200 300 300 300 1,000 1,000 1,000 Type Filter, presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized Presterilized Filter, presterilized
216
Specialty tips
Cat. no. GT-10-2 GT-10-4 GT-10-6 GT-060 GT-250-2 GT-250-4 GT-250-6 RC-250W HR-250W HR-250WS HR-1000W HR-1000WS Order no. 17002375 17002377 17002380 17002374 17002376 17002378 17002379 17001127 17005716 17005715 17005714 17005713 Description 200 tips in 1 rack 200 tips in 1 rack 200 tips in 1 rack 480 tips in 5 racks 200 tips in 1 rack 200 tips in 1 rack 200 tips in 1 rack 1,000 tips in bags 960 tips in 10 racks 960 tips in 10 racks 1,000 tips in 10 racks 1,000 tips in 10 racks Max. Volumetric capacity 10 l 10 l 10 l 250 l 250 l 250 l 250 l 250 l 250 l 250 l 1,000 l 1,000 l Fits LTS pipettes 2, 10 2, 10 2, 10 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 1,000 1,000 Type Gel-Well, 0.01 in Gel-Well, 0.01 in Gel-Well, 0.57 mm Gel-Well, 0.02 in Gel-Well, 0.01 in Gel-Well, 0.01 in Gel-Well, 0.57 mm Wide orifice Wide orifice Wide orifice/presteril. Wide orifice Wide orifice/presteril.
Bulk tips
Cat. no. RC-10 RC-10G RC-250 RC-1000 RC-2000 RC-2500 RC-5000 RC-10ML RC-10MLS Order no. 17001124 17001123 17001116 17001121 17001125 17001126 17001117 17001122 17005939 Max. Volumetric capacity Description 1,000 tips in bags 10 l 1,000 tips in bags 10 l 1,000 tips in bags 250 l 1,000 tips in bags 1,000 l 1,000 tips in bags 2,000 l 1,000 tips in bags 2,500 l 1,000 tips in bags 5,000 l 200 tips in bags 10 ml 75 tips individ. packaged 10 ml Fits LTS pipettes 2, 10 2, 10 20, 25, 100, 200, 250 1,000 2,000, 2,500 l 2,500 l 5,000 l 10 ml 10 ml Type ShaftGard
10MLS, presterilized
217
RAININ
Environmentally-friendly packaging
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Stacker units
BioClean Tips in environmentally-friendly packaging avoiding waste at source
Many labs are doing all they can to be more environmentally friendly. RAININ has been championing this cause for many years. With its innovative packaging for refilling and restacking tip racks, RAININ is able to reduce waste plastic at source.
Pipettes
Reducing waste
218
Protecting the environment

219
RAININ
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Think green
SpaceSaver
The SpaceSaver is the environmental solution for LTS tip-rack refilling thats fast and fun. Best for reducing waste and saving space.
Pipettes
Contamination-free
SpaceSaver refill racks protect tips from exterior contamination.
Fast
The outer sleeve functions as a dispenser; refilling takes just seconds.
Less space required

1 SpaceSaver takes the place of 10 conventional tip racks.
Less waste
SpaceSaver packaging uses 85% less plastic than traditional packaging methods.
www.mt.com/SpaceSaver
Reduce your waste generation by 85%

The entire SpaceSaver system is packaged inside a PET sleeve (Code 1). This recyclable material is also used to make PET drinks bottles. You can simply take it to your nearest recycle point!
220
GreenPak
GreenPaks consist of individually packaged and wrapped refill packs for our LTS tip racks. They are particularly useful for Filter Tip users, where the popular SpaceSaver is not available. Protected Each refill is completely sealed. No contamination. Clean During loading, the hands never touch the tips. Ecological Recyclable PET. 75% less than in conventional packaging.
1,000 l 10 l
250 l
www.mt.com/GreenPak
Racks
Easy and practical
Removable-cover racks are the easy and practical way to store and load your LTS tips. They are stable, reusable, and protect your tips. Fast loading Robust racks make tip loading easy. Protective Safe from dirt and contamination. Autoclavable Vent position of the cover for efficient sterilization.
www.mt.com/Racks
Bulk tips
For small budgets
If you want to use LTS tips but your budget is tight, these bulk tips are ideal. The same top BioClean quality, but packaged in a resealable bag with a zipper fastening. For refilling racks manually. Up to 1,000 tips in each bag.
www.mt.com/bulk-tips
221
RAININ
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Durable
Maximum stability when working with multichannel pipettes
The double-96 racks have been designed for multichannel pipettes and laboratory environments with high throughput rates. 192 LTS tips can easily be loaded from each layer, while rubber feet prevent skidding. StableRak is ideal for Filter Tip users.
Pipettes
StableStak
These racks have been designed for multichannel, high-production environments. 192 LTS tips can easily be loaded from each layer, while rubber feet prevent skidding. 960 tips per StableStak, using little space and generating 60% less waste! Multilayer design Five layers of 192 tips (960 tips) or 4 layers (768 tips). Saves time No refilling required Simply remove one layer and you are ready to use a new layer of 192 tips. Stable Flat trays with anti-skid feet for easy and even tip loading. Less space, less waste One StableStak (960 tips) can replace ten 96-racks! 60% less plastic.
www.mt.com/StableStak
StableStak
222
StableRak
Individual high-performance racks
StableRaks consist of an individual rack with 192 LTS tips in one layer. Sturdy and easy to use, they have been designed specifically for high-production environments. They are particularly useful for Filter Tip users, where the popular StableStak is not available. Ready to use Each box contains 192 tips ready to be used. Non-slipping Non-skid feet keep racks in place. Less space, less waste 2 regular racks in 1! 35% less plastic.

StableRak
www.mt.com/StableRak
223
Specialty tips
Specialty pipette tips Accessories for your research operations
RAININ
Specialty pipette tips
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Clean as a whistle
Aerosol-resistant tips Preventing contamination of samples and pipettes
The hydrophobic filter stops contamination
The hydrophobic filter forms a barrier against aerosols and liquids. It prevents the potential contamination of samples or pipettes, which may compromise test results.
Wit hout filter
Plunger
Wit h filter
Pure, untreated polythene, without additives

The filters in RAININ's aerosol-resistant tips consist of a particularly chemically inert matrix made from pure untreated polythene which does not flocculate and is free from particle contamination. No additives which might contaminate the sample are used. The average pore size of 20 microns forms an ideal barrier against aerosols but does not restrict air flow.
Pipette shaft
Aerosolfree Filter
Aerosols
Sample
Available in LTS and traditional designs.
Certificate
As presterilized BioClean tips and filter tips are sterilized with gamma rays, the packaged products are guaranteed free from biological contamination. Every production batch is tested for the properties listed opposite and the tips' scope of supply includes a certificate attesting that they are "guaranteed free from DNase, RNase, DNA, pyrogens, and ATP". A test report is included in every package.
226
Long and lean

LTS tips For pipetting in narrow tubes
102 mm long
RAININ extra-long LTS tips are able to reach right to the bottom of blocks, tall bottles, 100 mm tubes, etc.
250 l LTS tips Standard Extra-long
1,000 l LTS tips (tips in actual size) Standard Extra-long
Small diameter
Thanks to their small outer diameter, the tips are able to penetrate septa 8 mm thick. They can reach the bottom of these vessels easily, without the pipette shaft touching the wall and becoming contaminated.
Practically packaged
Extra-long LTS tips are available in handy ranks in standard and presterilized versions, and with an aerosolresistant filter. The RT-L1000X series holds a full 1,200 l volume.
Only available in LTS design. Only works with LTS pipettes.
227
RAININ
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Smooth operators
Low-retention tips For pipetting proteins, enzymes, and DNA
Ultra hydrophobic tips
RAININ low-retention tips are extremely smooth and entirely even: The high-grade tip is polished to meet the most stringent of quality standards. The polypropylene tips are modified by creating a trifluoromethyl surface on their interior and exterior walls. This highly inert fluorocarbon polymer, which is not compromised by autoclaving, provides a surface with very low levels of energy. As such, it is able to repel liquids.
Pipettes
Low-retention tip
Traditional tip
Low-retention tips improve performance

RAININ low-retention ultra hydrophobic tips ensure higher pipetting accuracy and reproducibility, even when working with viscous liquids. Increased pipetting accuracy means less waste of your valuable samples.

Adhesion of viscous liquids with traditional tips
Minimum adhesion of liquids
www.mt.com/RAININ-Tips
228
Size matters
For large volumes Maximum precision for large volumes
Macro FinePoint tips provide a means of pipetting large volumes with the same accuracy as smaller volumes. 2,000 l tips are available in removable-cover racks as standard tips, presterilized tips, and tips with aerosol-resistant filters. 5,000 l tips are also available in removable-cover racks in both standard and presterilized versions. 20 ml tips (LTS only) have graduation marks. 10 ml and 20 ml tips are available presterilized, individually wrapped, and in bulk.
2,000 l
5,000 l
10 ml 20 ml
250 l
1,000 l
250 l
1,000 l
With wide orifice Ideal for sensitive samples

Ideal for sensitive samples containing mammal cells or DNA. The wide orifice (1.5 mm) minimizes shearing forces and flow resistances in the case of sensitive samples and viscous liquids respectively.

229
RAININ
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Pipettes
Ultimate protection
ShaftGard 10 l tips The best protection against cross-contamination
ShaftGard 10 l tips Standard 10 l tips
Shaft and tip ejectors are protected against contamination from the walls of the vessel.
Shaft and tip ejectors can be contaminated by t he walls of t he vessel.
For RAININ, Pipetman, and other pipettes with traditional conical shafts
Protecting shaft and tip ejector Both the shaft and the tip ejector slot into the ShaftGard tip, where they are protected against accidental contamination. The pipette shaft or tip ejector does not need to be decontaminated or sterilized as frequently after processing biological, radioactive or other hazardous samples. Contamination-free tip ejectors Most pipette tips are ejected from the tip ejector by pressing on the top edge of the tip. With ShaftGard tips,
230
the tip ejector is enclosed by the neck of the tip and the tip is ejected by pressing on the "shoulder" inside the tip affording further protection against contamination. Perfect for microcentrifuge tubes ShaftGard tips are significantly longer than standard micro-10 l tips for easier access into microcentrifuge tubes and PCR sample containers. Suitable for use with 2 and 10 l pipettes with traditional conical shafts.
Gel-Well Gel loading in next to no time

RAININ Gel-Well tips have been designed for dispensing samples into the narrow wells of electrophoretic slab gel apparatus. This is useful when taking samples or if high accuracy is needed at low volume ranges. The flexible, ultra-thin micro capillary ends are ideal for nucleic acid (DNA) sequencing and protein separation. Autoclave cycles are possible at 1 bar and 121C for up to 15 minutes without the capillaries suffering significant shrinkage or wear and tear.
Available
High-speed devices
10 l flat 10 l round 250 l flat 250 l round 250 l round
with flat or round tip RNase/DNase-free
Guaranteed
Only available in traditional design.
For RAININ, Pipetman, and other pipettes with traditional conical shafts
www.mt.com/RAININ-Tips
231
RAININ
Pipetting 360
S Easy
P ip e tt e s
Pipettes
and kind to your hands

232
Tip s
The world of RAININ

233
RAININ
Pipetting 360
Pipettes
Tip-top performance
Pipetting 360 Added value you can really feel
Designed as a powerful, integrated system Improves pipette performance Makes conforming to standards easier Reduces overall running costs Facilitates straightforward and effortless
management of your entire pipette stock
Offers the most comprehensive selection of
pipettes, pipette tips, and related services
Of course, it takes more than just a good pipette to achieve perfect pipetting. Pipetting is one of the key activities of lab work; it requires highly precise and accurate pipettes, high-grade and contamination-free tips, and services such as maintenance, training, quality assurance, and processes for continuous improvement (CIP).
All these elements must be harmonized if the very best pipetting performance is to be achieved. It is for this reason that RAININ created its "Pipetting 360" system, the world's only holistic solution for optimum pipetting. As a leading manufacturer of highgrade pipettes and tips with a worldclass service organization, we are
the only supplier able to offer you a comprehensive solution. The result is optimum pipette performance with overall running costs the competition simply cannot better. Quick, easy and problem-free.
234
eittP eis p P P ip
Tip s
eit tes p P ip P
Tip s
P P ip e tt e s P ip
Tip Tips Tips s
Perfect performance service
A comprehensive service offer including maintenance, calibration, training, quality control, management of pipette stock, and continuous improvement processes (CIP).
235
Hand-friendly pipettes
The world's largest selection of high-quality pipettes with innovative, ergonomic design and patented LTS LiteTouch-System.
BioClean tips
A wide selection of pipettes which are error-free and 100% free from contamination. Available in a variety of sets with different features, different volume ranges and packing formats.
RAININ Integrated Comprehensive High grade
www.mt.com/RAININ
RAININ
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Largest selection in the world

High grade High quality Unique
Multichannel pipettes Single-channel pipettes
RAININ single-channel pipettes offer maximum flexibility. The vast choice of manual and electronic pipettes, including the revolutionary E-Man, means that you will always be able to find the right tool for a given application. Loaded with both ergonomic and performance-enhancing features, such as the innovative LTS LiteTouchSystem, they are the ideal choice for just about every pipetting task. RAININ multichannel pipettes offer a hassle-free way to enjoy the benefits of using multiple channels. Thanks to the LTS LiteTouch-System, their most prominent feature, they are able to ensure absolutely consistent sample loading on all channels. LTS tip and shaft design provides an excellent seal without using nozzle o-rings. The LTS tips are easily mounted and ejected, increasing productivity with absolutely consistent sample loading.
Pipettes
Specialty pipettes
While RAININs vast selection of pipettes and tips cover just about every application, there are special cases where a specialized pipetting system can deliver even better performance. From very viscous liquids to high vapor pressures, from large-scale multi-dispensing to serological tubes, this range can provide ideal pipetting solutions for these non-standard applications.
236
Accessories
RAININ accessories have been

designed not only to facilitate the use of pipettes, but also to protect these high-performance instruments. From a variety of complementary storage options through charger stations for electronic pipettes to practical reservoirs and shaft filters, this range of accessories is able to cater for the majority of pipettes.
237
RAININ
LTS LiteTouch system
Pipettes
The world champion

LTS LiteTouch tip ejection system Setting the best standard
The LTS cylindrical design produces a reliable, consistent seal without excessive force. LTS tips are thin-walled and incorporate a small, well-defined seal area and a positive stop. The positive stop lets you know exactly when the seal is made no need to "jam" or pound the shaft into the tip.
In many labs, pipetting is the task which is repeated most often: Many researchers regularly spend two to four hours
a day pipetting
Many researchers suffer from symptoms of fatigue in their hands, the consequences of which are far-reaching: Less accuracy during pipetting Reduced productivity P ain and tendosynovitis
Pipetting is an activity that involves a high level

of force
Conventional plunger forces can amount to more

than 4 kg
Conventional tip ejection forces can amount to more

than 4 kg
238
Traditional pipetting
High tip ejection forces
Large sealing surface results in high friction surface in the case of conical tips
Conical shaft fits in conical tip; no positive stop
LTS tip system

Low tip ejection forces
Cylindrical tip with small sealing area
Positive stop prevents over-insertion
239
RAININ
Tip s
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
240
RAININ's "handy" solution

Top precision Top for ergonomics
RAININ pipettes enhance lab performance and help reduce time-to-market by guaranteeing highest accuracy and repeatability. Innovative ergonomic designs, including the patented LTS LiteTouch-System, minimize fatigue and injuries, hence reducing operator errors and inaccuracies.
High-quality materials
For efficient, reliable, and safe pipetting.
State-of-the-art manufacturing processes

Ensuring that RAININ provides durable and reliable pipettes that greatly diminish mechanical drift.
Wide selection
The wide selection of pipetting options ensures that scientists and lab technicians will always have the ideal application-specific instrument to hand.
241
RAININ
LTS LiteTouch system
One fell swoop

Multichannel pipettes with LTS
LTS pipettes eliminate the usual problems associated with multichannel pipettes. With RAININ multichannel pipettes you can load tips in just two seconds. There is no need to move the tip this way and that or press it on by hand, and reliability increases.
Tip s
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Sealed
Cylindrical LTS tips fit perfectly on the LTS shaft, creating a reliable seal. There is no need to adjust the fit by retightening by hand.
Fast
It takes just 2 seconds to load RAININ multichannel pipettes with tips. Whether 8 or 12 channels, the process is equally straightforward.
Consistent
LTS facilitates absolutely consistent and reliable sample loading. Essential for high-value samples and reagents.
Cylindrical LTS shaft/tip system

LTS reduces tip ejection forces by 85%. Traditional conical shaft/tip designs can require tip ejection forces of up to 10 kg (4 kg on average). With LTS, average tip ejection forces are 0.6 kg.
Tip ejection forces
Cylindrical LTS Tip and shaft design Traditional conical tip and shaft design
1.32 lb 8.82 lb 0 1 2 3 4
Thumb forces (kg)

Recommended 30% max. force for women = 2.1 kg Recommended 30% max. force for men = 3.0 kg
www.mt.com/RAININ
RAININ
Technology
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
TechZone
RAININ's "TechZone" provides an overview of the various technologies supported by RAININ pipettes and tips.
From the very beginning, RAININ has been at the forefront of innovative pipette technology, from inventing the first electronic pipette to the first ergonomic pipette. Over the years, we have developed a series of innovations and technologies to make pipetting more productive and more comfortable. This is a strategy to which we continue to be committed.
Pipettes
Combining performance with easy handling

Stepper motor for precise movement
RAININ electronic pipettes are driven by a stepper motor. Its virtually-controlled, consistent movement ensures the kind of optimum accuracy which traditional systems are unable to match. Volumes can be set with unrivalled precision to 1/1,000 of the nominal value.
Easy volume setting for speed and reliability

The user-friendly design means that volumes can be set in next to no time, even if you are wearing gloves. The clearly legible display enables users to set volumes quickly and accurately, thereby preventing setting errors. Once the volume has been set, it can then be fixed by turning the locking ring slightly, preventing the risk of the volume being altered accidentally.
Rugged housing design for sustainable performance

The rugged high-grade polyvinyl-chloride housing guarantees long-lasting performance while keeping maintenance costs low.
Automatic linearity correction for ultimate consistency

RAININ's electronic pipettes feature innovative automatic linearity correction, which uses a correction factor to automatically compensate inherent errors caused by the physical characteristics of liquids. This patented correction method has a defined correction value for each volume stage. As a result, the EDP3 is the only pipette with true linearity across the entire volume range.
Tip ejector can be removed quickly for easy cleaning

The tip ejector can be removed easily by pressing lightly on the ejector tab. The snap-in mechanism locks the ejector securely in place. All volume ranges have a tip ejector which can be removed quickly for easy cleaning.
244
Real-time measurement
The position of the plunger is continuously updated and is displayed on the LC display in real time. This facilitates highly precise, four-digit volume settings.
Silicone shock absorber

Once pipetting is complete, the shock absorber on the tip ejector cushions the force when the tips are ejected. This provides additional protection for the thumbs and enables tips to be ejected softly and smoothly.
Adjustable spacers on multichannel pipettes

Additional flexibility giving users themselves the freedom to adjust tip spacing.
Magnetic Assist
A magnet assists the thumb and enables users to really feel the zero setting of the plunger so that they can position their hands better. This reduces the significant distance between loading and dispensing springs. The tension of both springs can be reduced considerably, with the result that 50% less force needs to be exerted to move the plunger. Since it enables users to really feel the zero setting, Magnetic Assist also increases accuracy and repeatability, thereby ensuring that exactly the same amount of sample it taken up every time.
Ergonomic shape
The ergonomic shape of the pipette with its convenient fingerhook prevents the risk of fatigue during pipetting. The pipette fits comfortably in the hand for operation and combines maximum accuracy with a soft but safe grip. The fingerhook allows the hand to relax during pipetting steps. The symmetrical design means that the pipette is suitable for use in either hand. During long days at work, users can easily switch between hands when pipetting.
www.mt.com/RAININ-TechZone
245
RAININ
Manual single-channel pipette
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
The marathon pipette

Pipet-Lite Avoids tired hands
Every feature of the RAININ Pipet-Lite has been designed to make it the most ergonomic manual pipette on the market. From the design of the handle to the reduction of plunger forces to an absolute minimum, this pipette ensures light and smooth operation even after hours of pipetting.
Pipettes
Ergonomic design
Lightweight, ergonomically shaped, with fingerhook
Easy volume adjustment

Including volume lock
Low force plunging

Up to 70% less force thanks to "Magnetic Assist"
Tip ejector can be removed quickly

Makes maintenance easy

Extra thumb protection
Low tip ejection forces

Up to 80% less force thanks to LTS LiteTouch-System (also available as standard version)
www.mt.com/RAININ-PipetLite
246
Pipet-Lite with LTS

Cat. no. Order no. L-2 17003635 L-10 17003636 L-20 17003641 L-100 17003638 L-200 17003642 L-300 17007314 L-1000 17003639 L-2000 17003643 L-5000 17003644 L-10ML 17003637 L-20ML 17003640 L-START 17006444 Starter Kit: L-20, L-200, L-1000, and accessories Volume range 0.1-2 l 0.5-10 l 2-20 l 10-100 l 20-200 l 20-300 l 100-1,000 l 200-2,000 l 5005,000 l 1-0.34 fl oz 220 ml Starter Kit
RAININ LTS pipettes can only be used with LTS tips.
Pipet-Lite (SL) with traditional conical shaft

Cat. no. Order no. Volume range SL-2 17003606 0.1-2 l SL-10 17003609 0.5-10 l SL-20 17003619 2-20 l SL-100 17003613 10-100 l SL-200 17003622 20-200 l SL-300 17007313 20-300 l SL-1000 17003616 100-1,000 l SL-2000 17003624 200-2,000 l SL-5000 17003626 5005,000 l SL-10ML 17003611 1-0.34 fl oz SL-START 17006694 Starter Kit Starter Kit: SL-20, SL-200, SL-1000, and accessories
Our supersize XXL

Also available for up to 10 or 20 ml. Ideal for preparing solutions.
247
RAININ
Manual pipettes
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
The workhorses
Fixed-volume Pipet-Lite Ideal for your routine tests
Ideal for dispensing a large number of samples or reagents with fixed volumes for standardized applications. Since volumes cannot be altered unintentionally, the risk of sampling errors is excluded.
Fixed-volume single-channel pipette with LTS shaft

Cat. no. FL-2 FL-5 FL-10 FL-20 FL-25 FL-50 FL-100 FL-200 FL-250 FL-400 FL-500 FL-1000 FL-2000 FL-5000 FL-10ML Order no. 17006370 17006629 17006363 17006369 17006625 17006628 17006362 17006368 17006624 17006626 17006627 17006361 17006367 17006372 17006347 Volume range 2 l 5 l 10 l 20 l 25 l 50 l 100 l 200 l 250 l 400 l 500 l 1,000 l 2,000 l 5,000 l 10 ml
Fixed-volume single-channel pipette with traditional conical shaft

Cat. no. FSL-2 FSL-5 FSL-10 FSL-20 FSL-50 FSL-100 FSL-200 FSL-250 FSL-400 FSL-500 FSL-1000 Order no. 17006685 17006689 17006680 17006682 17006688 17006679 17006681 17006683 17006686 17006687 17006678 Volume range 2 l 5 l 10 l 20 l 50 l 100 l 200 l 250 l 400 l 500 l 1,000 l
Tips for good pipetting practice can be found in the reference section starting on page 524.
248
Pipet-LiteMultichannel pipette only available with LTS.
Fixed-volume multichannel pipette with LTS

Cat. no. 8-channel FL8-10 FL8-20 FL8-200 FL8-300 FL8-1200 12-channel FL12-10 FL12-20 FL12-200 FL12-300 Order no. 17006374 17006378 17006377 17006355 17006375 Volume range 0 l 20 l 200 l 300 l 1,200 l
17006364 17006365 17006349 17006366
10 l 20 l 200 l 300 l
Can be supplied in customerspecific volumes please indicate the volume you require. RAININ LTS pipettes can only be used with LTS tips.
249
RAININ
Manual pipettes and Starter Kits
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
BioClean Starter Kits

Pipet-Lite
If you haven't used hand-friendly pipettes and BioClean tips in your lab before, there couldn't be a better way of getting started.
LiteTouch system
Pipettes
Pipet-Lite Starter Kit

3 Pipet-Lite pipettes with LTS: L-20, L-200, L-1000 3 racks with RAININ LTS tips: RT-L10, RT-L250, RT-L1000 3 Hang-Ups (HU-M3)
Traditional shaft
Pipet-Lite Starter Kit

3 Pipet-Lite with traditional shafts: SL-20, SL-200, SL-1000 3 racks with traditional RAININ tips: RT-200F, RT-250, RT-1000 3 Hang-Ups (HU-M3)
250
The ideal solution

Everything you need in one box
Ideal for new labs

Optimized, application-specific pipetting system
Save money!
Buy the three most popular Pipet-Lite models, tips, and accessories in one handy kit!
Starter Kits for manual pipetting

Cat. no. L-START SL-START Order no. 17006444 17006694 Description Pipet-Lite Starter Kit, LTS Pipet-Lite SL Starter Kit, traditional shaft
251
RAININ
Manual single-channel pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Because you know what you are doing...

E-Man Hybrid Precise volume display
E-Man Hybrid is the only pipette in the world to feature unique and innovative real-time technology. Furthermore, E-Man Hybrid is incredibly ergonomic and its lightweight design will sit comfortably in your hand. Real-time volume control and first-class ergonomics in a single product.
Pipettes
252
Absolutely precise volume
adjustment
Practical four-digit display
Real-time measurement
Continuous volume control
Cycle counter
Tracking progress
Maintenance checks
Conforming to GMP/GLP
Technical assistance
Eliminates irregularities caused by the user
Hand-friendly
Ergonomic design with LTS-LiteTouch-System
253
Manual pipette
254
with advanced functions
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
RAININ
Manual single-channel pipettes
E-Man Hybrid
CC cycle counter mode
The easy-to-operate cycle counter shows a summary of the loading, dispensing and blowing-out steps to provide you with an up-to-date record of completed pipetting cycles.
Track mode
In Track mode, the volume of the sample in the tip is displayed in real time so that users can measure unknown samples accurately an innovation for manual pipettes.
Maintenance for control

The built-in GMP/GLP functions (e.g., calibration data and warnings when service is required) have been designed to ensure optimum performance at all times and conform to the most exacting of regulatory requirements.
Titrate mode
In Titrate mode, the quantity of liquid dispensed from the tip is displayed, thereby facilitating exact titration experiments another innovation for manual pipettes.
Technical assistance
To prevent possible inaccuracies as a result of user actions, the unique "technical warning mode" generates a visual warning in the event of a technical problem. Suboptimal pipetting cycles are indicated by a warning signal. As well as increasing precision, this supports users by helping them to learn the best possible pipetting technique.
Pipet mode
In this mode, E-Man functions like a normal manual pipette.
E-Man Hybrid with LTS

Cat. no. H-2 H-10 H-20 H-100 H-200 H-300 H-1000 H-2000 Order no. 17009086 17009082 17009087 17009083 17009088 17009091 17009084 17009089 Volume range 0.1-2 l 0.5-10 l 2-20 l 10-100 l 20-200 l 20-300 l 100-1,000 l 200-2,000 l Cat. no. SH-2 SH-10 SH-20 SH-100 SH-200 SH-300 SH-1000 SH-2000
E-Man Hybrid with traditional shaft

Order no. 17009844 17009845 17009846 17009847 17009849 17009850 17009851 17009852 Volume range 0.1-2 l 0.5-10 l 2-20 l 10-100 l 20-200 l 20-300 l 100-1,000 l 200-2,000 l
RAININ LTS tips have to be used with LTS pipettes.
255
RAININ
Electronic single-channel pipette
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Comfort
comes as standard
EDP3 electronic pipette Ultimate comfort and maximum precision
The RAININ EDP3 electronic pipette has been designed to master the challenges of todays most demanding pipetting tasks. Its microprocessor-controlled stepper motor eliminates user-based variance and ensures maximum precision at all times.
Pipettes
256
257
RAININ
Electronic single-channel pipette
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Getting the best out of linear pipetting

Ultimate comfort
Designed for operation with one hand. Ergonomically designed so that operation with either hand is equally easy, the EDP3 is simple to use even with gloves. The innovative LTS LiteTouch-System reduces pipetting forces by 95%, making this pipette unique on the market. The easy-to-read display and the 4 intuitive buttons further enhance user comfort.
Pipettes
Precision
The microprocessor in EDP3 pipettes increases accuracy and precision by making plunger movements operatorindependent. A high-precision micro stepper motor moves the plunger to exactly the right position at the right speed, whatever the operating conditions and nature of the sample. EDP3 pipettes self-calibrate by resetting the plunger's zero position at the end of each dispensing sequence.
Viscosities manager
The EDP3's "automatic linearity correction" function uses a correction factor to automatically compensate inherent errors caused by the physical characteristics of liquids. This patented correction method has a separate correction factor for each volume stage. As a result, the EDP3 is the only pipette with true linearity across the entire volume range.
258
Pipetting Multi-dispensing Dilution Titration Manual GLP Speed Mixing Series pipetting Cycle counter Sound Preprogrammed pipetting
Volume adjustment via up/down buttons; release buttons for loading and dispensing samples Enables the aliquot to be dispensed to be determined automatically (or manually) based on the volume loaded. Diluting agent and sample are taken up one after the other separately in an air bubble and then dispensed together. Portioned dispensing via the dispenser up to the required end point, display of total volume dispensed. Measures unknown volumes and supports manual pipetting. Supplies user data such as cycles, date, user ID. Up to 10 stages for each operating mode. Alternate drawing up and ejection of the liquid with the release button held down. Loading and dispensing of up to 16 preset volumes in pipetting, dilution, and multi-dispensing mode. Indicates the number of samples dispensed up to a maximum of 999. Audible signals to indicate readiness for sample loading and when the sample has been dispensed completely. Loading and dispensing of up to 6 preset volumes.
EDP3 with cylindrical LTS shaft

Cat. no. E3-10 E3-20 E3-100 E3-200 E3-300 E3-1000 E3-2000 E3-5000 E3-10ML E3-20ML Order no. 17001743 17001749 17001745 17001750 17007243 17001746 17001751 17001752 17001744 17005842 Volume range 0.5-10 l 2-20 l 10-100 l 20-200 l 20-300 l 100-1,000 l 200-2,000 l 5005,000 l 1-0.34 fl oz 220 ml Cat. no. SE3-10 SE3-20 SE3-100 SE3-200 SE3-300 SE3-1000 SE3-2000 SE3-5000 SE3-10ML
EDP3 with traditional shaft

Order no. 17001735 17001739 17001737 17001740 17007162 17001738 17001741 17001742 17001736 Volume range 0.5-10 l 2-20 l 10-100 l 20-200 l 20-300 l 100-1,000 l 200-2,000 l 5005,000 l 1-0.34 fl oz
259
RAININ
Tip s
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
260
More channels
More performance More comfort
Enjoy the benefits of using multiple channels with RAININ multichannel pipettes. Thanks to the LTS LiteTouchSystem, their most prominent feature, they are able to ensure absolutely consistent sample loading on all channels.
261
RAININ
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Taking the pressure off!

The world's best multichannel pipette concept ensures consistent sample loading without O-rings.
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Pipettes
Consistent sample loading

Consistent sample loading LTS requires no O-rings
LTS cylindrical tips provide a leak-free and reliable seal without hand tightening.
No O-rings, no breakage, no maintenance, no sample contamination - no problems.
262
Increased productivity
Super-fast tip loading
With RAININ's multichannel pipettes, it takes just two seconds to load tips. There is no need to move the tip this way and that or press it on by hand, and reliability increases.
The unique LTS system ensures consistent sample loading and increases accuracy and precision.
Exact sealing for multichannel
pipettes quick, reliable, and safe

The cylindrical LTS shaft and tip system with small sealing area ensures excellent sealing without O-rings.
No hand-tightening, no inconsistencies, no hassle: pure performance.
12-channel pipettes easier than 8-channel pipettes

RAININ 12-channel pipettes are even easier to use than traditional 8-channel pipettes.
263
Consistent sample loading
RAININ
Manual multichannel pipettes
Tip s
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Manual devices
Pipet-Lite multichannel pipette Easy and consistent
Every feature of the RAININ Pipet-Lite has been designed to make it the most ergonomic manual pipette on the market. From the design of the handle to the reduction of plunger forces to an absolute minimum, this pipette ensures light and smooth operation even after hours of pipetting.
Ergonomic design
Lightweight, ergonomically shaped with fingerhook
Top consistency
Absolutely consistent sample loading on all channels
Low-force plunging
Up to 70% less force thanks to "Magnetic Assist"
Low-force tip ejection

80% less force thanks to LTS LiteTouch-System

Extra thumb protection
Easy volume adjustment

Including volume lock
264
Pipet-Lite Adjustable Spacer Fits every time!

This pipette is ideal if you are working with microcentrifuge tubes or microwell plates with 24, 48 or 96 wellplates. A simple turn is all that is needed to space the tips. Absolutely ideal for routine applications in genetics, proteomics, tissue and cell cultures.
Spacer settings
Change between maximum and minimum spacing in next to no time
Spacer markers
The easy-to-read spacer markers ensure that settings are made correctly there's no need to waste time on trial and error
Pipet-Lite with LTS

Cat. no. 8-channel L8-10 L8-20 L8-50 L8-200 L8-300 L8-1200 12-channel L12-10 L12-20 L12-50 L12-200 L12-300 L12-1200 Order no. 17003631 17003632 17006820 17003633 17003634 17005847 Volume range 0.5-10 l 2-20 l 5-50 l 20-200 l 20-300 l 100-1,200 l Cat. no. 6-channel LA6-300 LA6-1200 8-channel LA8-50 LA8-300 LA8-1200
Pipet-Lite Adjustable Spacer with LTS

Order no. 17010055 17010057 Volume range 20-300 l 100-1,200 l
17010658 17010656 17010058
5-50 l 20-300 l 100-1,200 l
17003627 17003628 17006817 17003629 17003630 17006816
0.5-10 l 2-20 l 5-50 l 20-200 l 20-300 l 100-1,200 l
16-channel (2x8) L2X8-20 17006819 L2X8-100 17006818 24-channel (2x12) L24-20 17006443 L24-100 17006442
2-20 l 10-100 l
2-20 l 10-100 l
265
RAININ
Electronic multichannel pipettes
Tip s
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Fits every time!

Electronic too
EDP3 Adjustable Spacer
The EDP3 Adjustable Spacer features all the established and user-friendly functions of the EDP3 electronic pipette, e.g., automatic linearity correction, multi-dispensing, titration, dilution, volume sequencing, and a long battery life.
Stop wheel for end position

For precise spacer settings
Spacer markers
The easy-to-read spacer markers ensure that settings are made correctly there's no need to waste time on trial and error
Spacer settings wheel

Change between maximum and minimum spacing in next to no time
Consistent results
Samples are consistent and the tips can be loaded and ejected easily with LTS
266
Includes long-life rechargeable lithium-ion battery. An AC power pack (E3-WPS/17001603) or a high-speed charger (E3-RCS/17001596) has to be included in your order so that you can recharge the EDP3 battery.
EDP3 Plus Multichannel with LTS

Cat. no. 8-channel E8-10 E8-20 E8-50 E8-200 E8-300 E8-1200 12-channel E12-10 E12-20 E12-50 E12-200 16-channel (2x8) E2X8-20 E2X8-100 24-channel (2x12) E24-20 E24-100 Accessories* E3-WPS E3-RCS Order no. 17001734 17001753 17006770 17001754 17005841 17005840 Volume range 0.5-10 l 2-20 l 5-50 l 20-200 l 20-300 l 100-1,200 l Cat. no. 6-channel EA6-300 EA6-1200 8-channel EA8-50 EA8-300 EA8-1200
EDP3 Adjustable Spacer Multichannel with LTS

Order no. 17009213 17009215 Volume range 20-300 l 100-1,200 l
17010659 17009214 17009216
5-50 l 20-300 l 100-1,200 l
17001733 17001747 17006767 17001748
0.5-10 l 2-20 l 5-50 l 20-200 l
Accessories* E3-WPS E3-RCS
17001603 17001596
AC power pack High-speed AC power pack
RAININ LTS tips can only be used with LTS pipettes.

17006769 17006768 2-20 l 10-100 l
17006343 17006342
2-20 l 10-100 l
17001603 17001596
AC power pack High-speed AC power pack
267
RAININ
Electronic multichannel pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Channeling your energy

Electronic solutions with 8 and 12 channels
RAININ pipettes for accurate and safe working
EDP3 The ideal solution for production-intensive microwell-plate applications
The RAININ EDP3 electronic pipette has been designed to master the challenges of todays most demanding pipetting tasks. Its microprocessorcontrolled stepper motor eliminates user-based variance and ensures maximum precision at all times. Thanks to the LTS LiteTouch-System, these pipettes are not only hand-friendly but offer an absolutely consistent sample loading on all channels. Pure performance.
Pipettes
268
Ultimate Precision
Eliminating user variance
Ultimate consistency
Top linearity thanks to "Automatic Linearity Correction"
Ultimate comfort
Ergonomic design and up to 95% force reduction with LTS LiteTouch-System (also available in standard version)
Ultimate performance
Powerful battery for up to 3,000 cycles on one charge
269
RAININ
Specialty pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Right every time

Our specialties
While RAININs vast selection of pipettes and tips cover just about every application, there are special cases where a specialized pipetting system can deliver even better performance. From very viscous liquids to high vapor pressures, from high-throughput large-scale multi-dispensing to serological samples, here are a number of specialty tools for these non-standard applications.
Pipettes
270
271
RAININ
Specialty pipettes/Custom solutions
Tip s
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Ergonomic positive displacement pipette

Ideal for pipetting "problematic" liquids: The Pos-D has been designed specifically for liquids with high densities, viscosities or vapor pressures. Given the disposable capillaries and plungers, positive displacement absolutely eliminates cross-contamination from aerosols, samples or the pipette.
AutoRep
AutoRep dispensers speed up long pipetting series. They are precise and do not tire the hands. The flexible volumes and wide selection of easy-to-exchange tips ensure optimum performance for any given volume from 1 l through 50 ml.
www.mt.com/Pos-D
www.mt.com/AutoRep
272
The right tool for every task
RAININ Liquidator96
Liquidator96 is a manual pipetting system which is easy to use and does not require programming. 96 well-plates can be filled in less than 20 seconds. Also suitable for re-pipetting 96 and 384 well-plates.
Digital peristaltic pump

RAININ's RP-1 digital peristaltic pump has been designed specifically to meet high requirements with regard to precision, consistent flow rates, and minimal pulsation. State-of-the-art microprocessor and stepper motor technology is used to control the pump speed.
www.mt.com/RAININ
www.mt.com/PeriPumps
273
RAININ
Specialty pipettes
Pipettes
Jack-of-all-trades
RAININ Pos-D Ergonomic positive displacement pipette
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Ergonomic design for convenient and productive pipetting
Ideal for pipetting "problematic" liquids: The Pos-D has been designed specifically for liquids with high densities, viscosities or vapor pressures. Given the disposable capillaries and plungers, positive displacement absolutely eliminates crosscontamination from aerosols, samples or the pipette.
Easy grip
With fingerhook
Comfortable feel
Ergonomic design
Volume control
Display is always visible
Easy to load
Pre-assembled tips in racks
Positive
displacement prevents aerosol contamination

The absence of air between the solution and the plunger stops aerosol generation. As a result, solutions are protected against possible contamination.
274
Pos-D: Presterilized capillaries and plungers, all sizes pre-assembled in racks

Capillaries and plungers stop
sample carryover
Disposable capillaries and plungers ensure full protection against cross-contamination
Presterilized using electron irradiation

Provide total protection with presterilized capillaries and plungers
Easy to load and eject

Capillaries and plungers are assembled and packaged in an automated process with no human contact whatsoever. Easy to load and eject
Pos-D pipettes
Cat. no. MR-10 MR-25 MR-50 MR-100 MR-250 MR-1000 Order no. 17008575 17008576 17008577 17008578 17008579 17008580 Quantity 0.5-10 l 3-25 l 20-50 l 10-100 l 50-250 l 1001,000 l
www.mt.com/Pos-D
Capillaries and Pistons for Pos-D

Cat. no. C-10 C-25 C-50 C-100 C-250 C-1000 Order no. 17008604 17008605 17008606 17008607 17008608 17008609 Quantity 3 racks of 60 tips each, presterilized 3 racks of 60 tips each, presterilized 3 racks of 60 tips each, presterilized 3 racks of 60 tips each, presterilized 3 racks of 60 tips each, presterilized 3 racks of 60 tips each, presterilized
Note: For use with Pos-D and Gilson Microman pipettes.
275
RAININ
Specialty pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
A robot that fits in your hand

AutoRep E Adjustable electronic repeating pipettes
AutoRep pipettes speed up long pipetting series. They are precise and do not tire the hands. The flexible volumes and wide selection of easyto-exchange tips ensure optimum performance for any given volume from 1 l through 50 ml.
Pipettes
Three operating modes for increased flexibility

Dispensing to multi-dispensing: A step counter displays every volume selected. No more wasting time calculating and converting! Auto-dispensing Memorizes the average time interval between the first three dispensing steps and continues to run automatically at the same pace. Time intervals do not have to be programmed. Pipetting operation like a positive displacement pipette.
Rechargeable battery avoids downtimes

The charger takes just 2.5 hours to recharge the AutoRep E; the battery on its own takes 3.5 hours. The maintenance-free NiMH battery pack without memory effect can be charged on the same unit and a different pack used during the charging period.
AutoRep M2 Manual dispenser
276
Electronic and manual AutoRep

Cat. no. Order no. AR-E1 17000725 AR-BA 17003233 AR-M2 17000728 Description AutoRep E Add tional NiMH battery pack AutoRep M
Encode tips
Volumetric capacity Cat. no. Order no. Quantity Type ENC-100 17007399 0.1ml 100 ENC-100S 17007400 0.1ml 100 Sterile ENC-500 17001871 0.02 fl oz 100 ENC-500S 17001872 0.02 fl oz 100 Sterile ENC-1250 17001873 0.04 fl oz 100 ENC-1250S 17001874 0.04 fl oz 100 Sterile ENC-2500 17001877 0.08 fl oz 100 ENC-2500S 17001878 0.08 fl oz 100 Sterile ENC-5ML 17001883 0.17 fl oz 100 ENC-5MLS 17001884 0.17 fl oz 100 Sterile ENC-12ML 17001875 0.42 fl oz 100 ENC-12MLS 17001876 0.42 fl oz 100 Sterile ENC-25ML 17001879 0.85 fl oz* 50 ENC-25MLS 17001880 0.85 fl oz* 25 Sterile ENC-50ML 17001881 50 ml* 25 ENC-50MLS 17001882 50 ml* 25 Sterile ENC-SET 17001885 Set of encode tips, non-sterile, 20 of each: 0.5, 1.25, 2.5, 5, 12.5 ml ENC-10ADP 17000546 Adapters for 25 ml and 50 ml, non-sterile, pack of 10 ENC-ADPS 17000547 Adapters for 25 ml and 50 ml, sterile, individually packaged, 5er-Packung *Includes an adapter. Sterile tips are endotoxin-free, individually packaged.
Includes battery pack, charger station, AC adapter, and one of each of the following encode tips: 0.5, 1.25, 2.5, 5, 12.5 ml.
www.mt.com/AutoRep
277
RAININ
Liquidator96
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
96 in one go
RAININ Liquidator96 if it takes longer to program a pipetting robot than it does to complete pipetting ...
Pipettes
278
Technical data
Accuracy (mean value of a number of full plates): 200 L: 1.0% 100 L: 1.0% 20 L: 2.0% 5 L: 5.0% Precision: 200 L: 0.5% 100 L: 0.8% 20 L: 1.5% 5 L: 3.5%
www.mt.com/Liquidator
279
RAININ
Liquidator96
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Liquidator96 96 well-plates at high throughput rates

The Liquidator96 manual pipetting system is a powerful personal research tool for all laboratories. Accurate and efficient, Liquidator96 is designed to maximize workflow, without the need for complicated programming or dedicated technician time. Liquidator96 adds outstanding quality features to high throughput pipetting, with many applications. It also impresses with extremely high speeds.
Flexible
Works with 96-well plates and 384-well plates
Minimal footprint
Fits any lab bench or laminar flow cabinet
Replicating/dispensing plates
For expression profiling or in yeast two hybrid systems
Filling, washing, mixing plates

ELISA, protein crystallization, screenings
Dispensing buffers,
master mixes
PCR, dilution series, assays
Removing liquids from
multi-well plates
Changing media of cell cultures
www.mt.com/RAININ
280
Efficiency in your laboratory

Simple to use No programming
Liquidator96 is simple to operate it works like a conventional manual pipette. No complicated software, no programming. A personal benchtop pipetting system, Liquidator 96 is always ready to use by everyone in the lab.
Save time and money

The 96-channel head dramatically boosts your lab's throughput and even outperforms many robotic systems with speed and convenience. 96 well-plates can easily be filled in less than 20 seconds and 25 plates filled or replicated in less than 10 minutes. Your investment in Liquidator96 will be paid back in just a matter of months through faster throughput, fewer errors (no missed rows), and its many varied applications, e.g.: Mother-daughter replication Reformatting from 96 to 384 well-plates or Washing and diluting sequences
Flexible and familiar operation

Flexible and powerful, Liquidator96 speeds up your daily lab workflow. Manual pipetting is easy, from any kind of multi-well plate, reservoir, or deep-well container into 96 and 384 well plates. Its minimal footprint means that it will fit on any bench or inside any laminar flow cabinet.
Technical data
Volume
LIQ
Liquidator96 Requires Liquidator LTS tips

Description Liquidator96 benchtop system*, 5-200 l
Cat. no. Order no. LIQ-96-200 17010335 Liquidator LTS tips LQR-200 17010645 LQR-200S 17010647 LQR-200F 17010646 Accessories LIQ-AP 17010396 LIQ-384-PA 17010394 LIQ-TRAY 17010582 Service LIQ-SVC
* ** *** ****
range from 5-200 l in 1-l steps operating positions for SBS-format plates Adjustable insertion depth for any position Small footprint just 0.25 m2 Weight 14 kg Dimensions 38 x 41 x 33 cm
Three
Liquidator96 tips**, 200 l Liquidator96 tips** sterile, 200 l Liquidator96 tips** sterile with filter, 200 l
Liquidator96 LTS tips

RAININ
Height-adjustable stands*** 384 adapter for well-plates Pack containing 5 deep-well plates****
BioClean tips: Eliminating contamination straight, and impeccable tips Small sealing area, positive stop for leak-free seal Absolutely consistent tip loading on all channels Sterile or non-sterile, with or without filter
Perfect,
Maintenance and calibration costs, annual inspection
Requires Liquidator LTS tips Package containing 10 racks w th BioClean 200 ul tips 4 in each package Each with 8 longitudinal compartments per plate
Accessories
Cat. no. LIQ-AP LIQ-384-PA LIQ-TRAY Order no. Description 17010396 Height-adjustable spacers 17010394 384 adapter for well-plates 17010582 Deep-well reagent reservoirs
Important for
time-critical ELISA assays: All 96 reactions can be started and stopped at the same time!
281
RAININ
Specialty products
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Pump it
RAININ RP1 The peristaltic pump for steady flow rates
The RAININ RP-1 digital peristaltic pump has been designed specifically for applications with exacting requirements with regard to precision, consistent flow rates and minimum pulsation. State-of-the-art microprocessor and stepper motor technology is used to control the pump speed.
Consistent
Flow rates are precise and consistent thanks to state-of-the-art microprocessor and stepper motor technology.
Pipettes
Quiet
The pump runs quietly at pressures up to 4.6 bar.
External control
The pump can be integrated into a system and controlled via external contacts or RS-232.
Minimal pulsation
10 stainless steel rollers minimize pulsation.
No wear and tear

Cam-operated adjustment of the tubing compression permits extremely fine adjustment and greatly reduces wear and tear.
282
www.mt.com/PeriPumps
283
RAININ
Specialty products
Tip s
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Individual channels can be adjusted independently
Tubing can be installed without stopping the pump
Stepper motor technology

At the heart of the RP-1 peristaltic pump is an electronically controlled high-torque stepper motor. The pump head, which is connected directly to the motor, rotates at a continuously adjustable speed between 0.01 rpm and 48 rpm clockwise and counterclockwise.
Less wear and tear thanks to cam-operated adjustment of tube compression

A thumbscrew on each channel moves a cam, which compresses an arm onto the tubing. This provides for extremely fine adjustment and greatly reduces tubing wear and failure. Service life increases and the risk of failure is reduced. Adjustments are made independently for individual channels different diameters of tubing can be used on each channel.
Ten stainless steel rollers minimize pulsation.

Ten stainless steel precision rollers facilitate increased pressure at minimum pulsation rates five rollers are in contact with the tubing at all times at a counter pressure of up to 4.6 bar.
Interchangeable heads
Interchangeable pump heads with one, two, four or eight channels can be installed in less than a minute. PVC, Silicone, or Viton tubing with diameters from 0.25 mm ID to 4 mm ID can be used to produce precise flow rates from 0.5 l/minute to more than 25 ml/minute.
284
RP-1 peristaltic pump used in vacuum chromatography
Pump
Cat. no. 7103-051 7103-052 7103-054 7103-058 7103-061 7103-062 7103-064 7103-068 7103-050 Order no. 17001572 17001573 17001574 17001575 17004532 17004533 17004534 17004535 17000619 Description Single-channel pump, complete Two-channel pump, complete Four-channel pump, complete Eight-channel pump, complete Single-channel head Two-channel head Four-channel head Eight-channel head Separate drive module
Tubing
Cat. no. Order no. Silicone (14-inch) pack of 6 39-660 17005560 39-661 17005561 39-662 17005562 39-663 17005563 39-664 17005564 39-665 17005565 39-666 17005566 39-667 17005567 PVC (14-inch) pack of 12 39-620 17005549 39-621 17005551 39-622 17005552 39-623 17005554 39-624 17005555 39-625 17005556 39-626 17005557 39-627 17005558 39-628 17005559 ID (mm) (ml/min) 0.25 0.38 0.50 0.63 0.76 1.52 2.29 2.80 0.26 0.60 0.95 1.5 2.0 7.4 15.4 20.6 Max. Flow rate Color code Orange/blue Orange/green Orange/yellow Orange/white Black Yellow/blue Purple/black Purple/white
Every complete pump is supplied ready for first commissioning with test tubing (1x 39-621, 1x 39-625, 1x 39-628).
Tubes made from Viton are available on request. Viton is a registered trademark of DuPont Dow Elastomers.
0.25 0.38 0.50 0.63 0.76 1.52 2.29 2.80 3.16
0.33 0.66 1.13 1.6 2.2 8.3 17.2 24.6 28.2
Orange/blue Orange/green Orange/yellow Orange/white Black Yellow/blue Purple/black Purple/white Black/wh te
285
RAININ
Accessories
Pipettes
Accessories
Ergonomic design and materials which are up to the challenges of laboratory work. RAININ accessories do not disappoint. RAININ accessories have been designed not only to facilitate the use of pipettes, but also to protect these high-performance instruments. From a variety of complementary storage options through charger stations for electronic pipettes to practical reservoirs and shaft filters, you are bound to find what you are looking for in this range of accessories.
RAININ
Accessories Manual pipettes
Nice and neat

Reagent reservoirs
Sterile reagent reservoirs made from polypropylene for use with single-channel and multichannel pipettes. The reservoirs are sturdy can be stacked one on top of the other. They are available with or without covers. Minimum capacity 75 ml, with easy-toread scale.
Pipettes
Available with or without cover
Adapter for Hang-Ups and carousel stands

Ideal for multichannel and electronic EDP3 pipettes, the adapter fits easily into a Hang-Up (HU-M3) or a carousel stand (CR-7). Set of 3.
Carousel stands Adapter in Hang-Up
288
Hang-Ups
Stable holder for RAININ pipettes; also suitable for Pipetman, Ultra, Microman, and Distriman. Available in two designs.
HU-M3
Individual holder with magnets including self-adhesive disks for mounting on non-metallic surfaces. Set of 3.
HU-S3
Shelf Hang-Ups without magnets. Can be mounted on a shelf with a clamp or screws. Set of 3.
Pipette stands
Pipette rack GR-3
Holds three RAININ pipettes with fingerhook as well as the Pipetman.
RAININ carousel stands CR-7

For seven Pipet-Lite, Pipet-Plus, RAININ Classic, Pos-D, Pipetman, Microman, and Distriman pipettes. Holder for ED3 pipettes with adapter (HU-A3, page 26). Rotates for easy access. Stable base, no risk of tipping over.
Cat. no.
Reagent reservoirs
RV-L25 RV-050
Order no. 17007543 17007544
Description 25 x 75 ml reservoirs with cover; presterilized, packaged in 5 bags of 5 50 x 75 ml reservoirs without cover; presterilized, packaged in 10 bags of 5
Hang-Ups, carousel stands, and adapters

HU-A3 HU-M3 CR-7 17006638 17003024 17001255 Adapter Hang-Ups Carousel stands
289
RAININ
Accessories Electronic pipettes
Fully charged
High-speed chargers/AC power packs
EDP3
Pipettes
High-speed charger
Up to three pipettes can be connected to and charged in turn by the high-speed charger. The device can sit on a lab bench or be mounted on a wall. Every highspeed charger is supplied with an AC power pack (E3-WPS220V).
AC power pack
The AC power pack takes approximately one hour to fully charge the EDP3. You can use the EDP3 pipette while it is charging or even directly via the AC power pack, bypassing the battery.
has to be
included in your order so that the EDP3 battery can be recharged.
An AC power pack or a high-speed charger
Accessories
Cat. no. 6101--047EX E3-RCS E3-WPS Order no. Description 17004294 Charger 17001596 Charger for 3 pipettes 17001603 AC power pack
290
Filters for large-volume pipettes
Spick and span

volumes. 5, 10 ml 5, 10 ml 0.68 fl oz 0.68 fl oz
Filters for large-volume pipettes

Cat. no. 6190-164 6190-165 6190-221 6190-222 Order no. 17001944 17001945 17001951 17001952 Description 100 filters for E3, SE3, L, SL, R 1,000 filters for E3, SE3, L, SL, R 100 filters for E3, SE3, L, SL, R 500 filters for E3, SE3, L, SL, R
291
RAININ
Service packages
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
Serv
Regular pipette maintenance is vital if measured data is to be correct.
Weekly/Every 4 weeks (by lab personnel) Cleaning and care of pipettes by lab personnel Checking that the levels of liquid being taken up are correct Annually (by external service) Inspection of pipette for operational faults Replacement of seal Calibration in acc. with manufacturer's specifications/SOPs Every 3 5 years (by external service) Replacement of plunger Replacement of shaft
292
Pipettes
ice
Calibration and preventive maintenance are a to ensure pipette reliability.
must
Tips for good pipetting practice can be found in the reference section starting on page 524.
293
RAININ
Service for pipettes
Pipettes
P ip e tt e s
Tip s
On-site or send-in service

Our service for you...
As every pipette is subject to wear, errors can go unnoticed. Leaks, wear affecting moving parts, etc. can affect the pipette result and lead to serious errors. We will check this and calibrate your pipettes (whether single-channel or multichannel) on-site. Or, if you wish, you can of course send your pipettes to one of our Service Centers. We would be delighted to provide you with a quotation for this service.
294
Pushbutton Tip ejector button
Micrometer
Basic Standard Advanced GxP
Visual and pressurized leak test Thorough cleaning and possible degreasing Internal and external performance test "As found" data (& service/calibration history) Preventive maintenance Replacement of seals, shafts and plungers 2) Adjustment in line with manufacturer's specifications
Cap nut
Plunger module
Plunger Lifting spring Seal & O-ring
Calibration conforming to ISO 8655 specifications Gravimetric evaluation in line with manufacturer's specifications ISO 8655 calibration certificate Label with due date "As returned" data (& service/calibration history) Temperature- and moisture-controlled environment METTLER TOLEDO Service Laboratory 1) One-year service and spare parts warranty
Tip ejector Shaft
1) On-site calibration is available for orders > 50 pipettes. 2) Seals are checked on every inspection (plungers and shafts every 3 years). See price list for details.
Maintenance Replacement of seals, shafts and plungers Cleaning & degreasing of pipettes Leak test under pressure
Benefit Prevents malfunctions Ensures smooth and ergonomic operation Ensures seals are intact
www.mt.com/RAININ-Service
295
Prof. Dr. Dr. Reinhold Carle, Dr. Dietmar R. Kammerer

Introduction
pH measurement
Natural colors
The pH value is everything!

Whether consciously or subconsciously, colors determine our lives. They are important to the manufacturers of clothes and car manufacturers just as they are to the producers of food products. Food producers use coloring to lend processed foods a fresh and natural appearance. Great importance is attached to the precise determination of the pH value when using pigments. The findings of modern food research may have brought existing practices to an end but they have also revealed a variety of new approaches.
Gray no thanks!
Color is one of the most important properties of plantbased foods and along with taste, texture and economic considerations has a major role to play in consumers' buying patterns. Put simply, we can summarize consumers' expectations as follows: Bright and colorful = heathy, fresh, agreeable. Synthetic dyes have always been added to processed foods in order to recreate the original color of a food, i.e., to compensate for loss of color resulting from food processing, counterbalance fluctuations in the color of the original products and enhance the colors of unattractive foods. However, consumers are increasingly rejecting their use because of health concerns. Toxicological findings have resulted in a ban on some substitutes (e.g., butter yellow), but there are plenty of others which are still authorized for use in food products. Natural pigments, including anthocyanins in particular, have proved to be promising alternatives. Food producers are therefore trying to make these natural dyes suitable for processing in food products.
296
Dietmar R. Kammerer studied food chemistry at the universities of Stuttgart and Hohenheim. After obtaining his doctorate in 2005 under Prof. Carle, he spent a year on post-doctoral research at the Horticulture and Food Research Institute of New Zealand Ltd. in Auckland, New Zealand. Since returning to Germany in 2006 he has been working as an assistant professor at the chair of foods of plant origin at the Institute for Food Science and Biotechnology at the University of Hohenheim.
In 1979 Reinhold Carle was awarded a doctorate after studying biology, chemistry and pharmacy at the University of Tbingen. Between 1982 and 1994 he was head of the Pharmaceutical Development of Natural Materials department at ASTA Medica AG. In 1993 he became a professor in Pharmaceutical Biology at the University of Regensburg. Between 1994 and 1996 he was principal and professor at the Federal Institute for Drugs and Medical Devices in Berlin. Since 1996 he has held the professorship for food of a plant-based origin at the Institute for Food Science and Biotechnology at the University of Hohenheim.

Introduction
pH measurement
Colorful and healthy

This trend has mobilized food researchers. Nature provides a wide range of bright colors produced by various classes of substance. Chlorophyll for example is responsible for the luminous green of many leaves, carotenoids make carrots, tomatoes and water melons attractive oranges and reds, betalaines give beetroot its deep color, and anthocyanins, which are very common in the plant kingdom, give a luminous red to strawberries, grapes, currants and cherries. Scientific literature has described the health-promoting effects of many of these compounds which according to the latest results of the Southampton study further promotes their use as a substitute for synthetic pigments. For decades anthocyanins have been extracted, for example, from the skins of grapes, in order to obtain a natural food dye (E 163). In order to improve the yield, anthocyanin is usually obtained through the use of sulfite because when added this reacts with the pigments to produce compounds which are more soluble. The extracts are then heated to remove the sulfite. However, itcannot be fully removed which is seen as something of a problem because the use of sulfite in food products is generally considered as harmful to health.
There's more to Champagne than first meets the eye

It was against this background that the chair of foods of plant origin started looking for sulfite-free alternatives to the extraction process described. Grape pomace, the residue left in presses when preparing wine, was selected as the source of anthocynanins. This basically consists of grape skins and seeds. The anthocyanins which are found in the skins are hardly ever extracted when producing ros wine and champagne (blanc de noir!). The pomaces are therefore usually very rich in anthocyanins and are perfectly suited to obtaining natural food dyes. The process also means that full use is made of every grape. The researchers in Hohenheim developed an innovative process that is based on the enzymatic decomposition of the grape cell walls using pectinolytic and cellulolytic enzyme preparations. In this process the pomaces are suspended in water and treated with a cocktail of enzymes once the grape skins have been mechanically crushed. The enzymatic decomposition of the cell wall matrix means that the anthocyanins are released better and therefore increases the yield of extraction because the cell walls are the key hurdle to be overcome during extraction. Comparable studies have shown that this enzyme-supported extraction process can produce just as high a yield of anthocyanins as the sulfite process butwithout its negative effects. The pomace extracts gained in this way are processed using adsorber technology in a subsequent stage. The natural pigments can be cleaned and concentrated using adsorber resins suitable for food products such that highly-enriched anthocyanin preparations can be obtained for food dyeing (Fig. 1). Given their antioxidant potential, anthocyanins may also have health-promoting properties which have attracted more and more interest since the discoveries surrounding the 'French Paradox'. This is another reason why obtaining anthocyanins from plant-based raw materials for use in food products is very worthwhile.
Fig. 1: Lyophilized grape pomace extract
298
Storing dyes at different pH values

(20C, protected from light and oxygen)
Fig. 2: pH dependency of the color of extracts containing anthocyanin and a synthetic dye and color stability during the course of storage (from: Cevallos-Casals & Cisneros-Zevallos (2004) Stability of anthocyanin-based aqueous extracts of Andean purple corn and red-fleshed sweet potato compared to synthetic and natural colorants. Food Chemistry 86, 69-77).
299

Introduction
pH measurement
Colors depending on pH
However one major disadvantage of anthocyanins is the pH dependency of their color and stability. They change their color like a chameleon depending on whether they are in an acid, neutral or alkaline medium. This is considered highly undesirable in the food production industry. Anthocyanins can therefore only be used for dyeing in acid products as this is the only pH condition in which they produce their bright red colors (Fig.2). This is because the pigments change structurally depending on their pH which results in a change in color (Fig. 3). As pH increases, the red color which occurs in a very acid environment initially changes and becomes colorless. It then produces a purple/blue as the pH increases further. This clearly shows how food scientists are reliant more than ever on reliable methods for precisely determining pH.
Food processors who want to stabilize the color of pH neutral products have to use other classes of pigment if they want a red colored product. If they were to use an extract containing anthocyanins to dye a strawberry yogurt, they could only produce purple to blue colors because of the product's pH which would make it look like a blackcurrant yogurt. The betalaine pigment class is commonly used for such cases. These can be gained from beetroot or cactus fruits for example. These are components which produce a yellow to red shade depending on structure. Unlike the anthocyanins these colors are stable in a much wider pH range and can also lend weakly acid and pH neutral products an attractive red color. A strawberry yogurt dyed with betalaines will therefore actually remain red.
This class of pigments has also been scrutinized by the chair of foods of plant origin and scientists have been able to show that both classes of pigments, i.e., anthocyanins and betalaines, can cover the entire pH spectrum of relevance to food products.
Prof. Dr. Dr. Reinhold Carle Dr. Dietmar R. Kammerer
300
OH OH HO O HO O OH
OH OH
OR OH OH
OR
pH 4 5 colorless
pH < 1 red
OH O HO O
The color of anthocyanins is dependent on pH!

OH pH 6 7 purple
OR
OH OH O OH OR OH O O O
OR OH O OH
pH > 8 yellow (chalcone)
pH 7 8 deep blue
Fig. 3: The pH dependency of the anthocyanin structure determines its color.
302
Excellent
pH Multimeter
303
SevenMulti
Benchtop instruments
pH/multimeter
304
Versatile
Modern data management Simple integration Improved efficiency
SevenMulti Master of modularity

Modular system for pH value, conductivity,
ion concentration and ISFET Greater efficiency thanks to numerous automation options Modern data management with 1,000 GLP measurement points, 400 GLP calibration points and 40 methods Simple integration into LIMS solutions
The extension units for n pH n conductivity n pH/ions and n ISFET are quick and easy to swap over.
Automation improves efficiency

Efficiency is greatly improved with peripheral devices like sample changers and barcode readers and not just in applications with a high throughput. Calibrations and dual-channel measurements can be automated with the Rondolino sample changer.
305
SevenMulti
pH/multimeter
Can be extended at any time through addition of modules

An ingenious concept, based on precise electro-chemical measurement technology, combined with the latest solutions for your lab requirements. The modular design of the device allows practical plug-in extension units to be added at any time to extend the scope. For example, it can be easily converted into a dualchannel device. Overcome the challenges of today and tomorrow with the sophisticated complete SevenMulti concept.
Flexible printing formats

You can select from three different print formats. The GLP print-out exports all data via the interface with the time and date of the last calibration. The standard print-out contains all data of relevance to the measurement. The short format only contains the measuring result and temperature.
LabX direct pH
The user-friendly PC software archives your results quickly and securely. It allows user-defined data to be transferred from Seven Easy, SevenMulti and SevenGo pro to an application like MS Excel. The values can be automatically displayed in the Excel templates provided.
pH extension unit included
Additional options for extensions
Example S40
The extension unit
SevenMulti METTLER TOLEDO
pH
Conductivity
pH/ions
ISFET
The extension unit can be removed and replaced with any combination. Exception: Two conductivity units cannot be used at the same time.
306
SevenMulti Measuring devices for pH value, conductivity, ions and ISFET

GLP-compliant USP Can Electrode RS232C Powerful
conformity (conductivity meter)1) be upgraded at any time data management help menu buffer recognition
arm, freestanding or fitted on device interface for PC/printer memory, 1,000 measurements/channel keypad LabX direct pH
Secure
Intelligent Automatic
Alphanumeric Includes
www.mt.com/pHlab
Model S40 S40-K S40-KS S50 S50-K S70 S70-K S47 S47-K S47-KS S80 S80-K S80-KS
1)
Parameter pH/mV/redox/C
Measuring range -2,000...19,999 pH -30.0...130.0C 1.00E-9-9.99E+9 conc. -2,000...19,999 pH 0.001 S/cm...1,000 mS/cm -30.0...130.0C See S40 and S70
Ion/pH/mV/redox/C Cond./TDS/ Sal./resistance/C pH/mV/cond./C TDS/sal./resistance Ion/pH/mV/redox/C
1.00E-9-9.99E+9 conc. -2,000...19,999 pH -30.0...130.0C
InLab electrode None Expert Pro Routine Pro None Expert Pro None 730 None Expert Pro Routine Pro None Expert Pro Routine Pro
Channels 1
1 1 2
Order no. 51302807 51302808 51302864 51302867 51302868 51302809 51302810 51302813 51302814 51302865 51302811 51302812 51302866
Conformity with the latest USP/EP standards for ultra pure water
Extension units * (a SevenMulti measuring device is required before the extensions are purchased)
pH Conductivity pH/ion ISFET pH/mV/Redox/C Cond../TDS/sal./resistance/C pH/mV/ions/redox/C pH/mV/C -2,000...19,999 pH, 1,999.9mV, errorlimit 0.002 0.001 S...1,000 mS/cm, 0.1 mg/L...1,000 g/L 1.00E-9... -9.99E+9 conc., -2,000...19,999 pH 0.00...14.00 pH 51302821 51302822 51302823 51302824
Seven accessories
RS-P42 printer - alphanumeric (dot matrix) Cable - for RS-P42 printer or PC on Seven device LabX direct pH PC software Protective cover Electrode arm - complete USB com module SevenEasy and SevenMulti SevenEasy and SevenMulti SevenEasy, SevenMulti and SevenGopro SevenMulti SevenEasy and SevenMulti SevenMulti 00229265 51302125 51302876 51302819 51302820 51302826
307
SevenMulti
pH/multimeter
308
SevenMulti
Sensor monitoring Electrode test
An integrated pH-electrode test tests the slope, offset, drift and response time of your electrodes without changing your current calibration.
Calibration reminder
This useful function allows you to define an interval after which it reminds you that calibration is due. The device can also be locked for measurements if the interval is exceeded locked until calibration is undertaken.
Automatic detection
SevenMulti automatically detects a newly installed module so you can change quickly and easily from one parameter to another.
Tips and tricks for measuring pH can be found starting on page 540.
309
SevenMulti
Good things come in small packages

Bestseller
SevenEasy
Intuitive operation for routine work in the lab Improved measurement quality using automatic functions Extensive service package with IQ/OQ/PQ Excellent reproducibility using
pH/multimeter
310
METTLER TOLEDO sensor technology
311
SevenMulti
pH/multimeter
SevenEasy
Battery
Measuring devices for pH and conductivity

or power supply operation function
Self-diagnosis Automatic 3-point Editable
buffer detection
calibration (pH)
cell constant (conductivity) to third decimal point
Resolution Automatic
temperature compensation (can be deactivated for conductivity measurement) arm, freestanding fitted Resolution to third decimal point on device
Electrode
Model Parameter Range S20 pH/mV/redox/C 0.00...14.00 pH -5.0...105.0C 0.01 S/cm...500 mS/cm -5.0...105.0C S20-K S30 S30-K Cond../TDS/sal./ Resistance/C
InLab electrode
Order no. 51302803 51302804 51302863 51302805 51302806
None Expert Pro Routine Pro None 730
Individual devices included:
S20-KS
easuring device, electrode arm, protective M cover (SevenMulti only), cal bration certificate, declaration of conformity Note: Electrode is NOT included
Kit versions (K) include:
As above, plus suitable electrodes and buffer solutions
www.mt.com/SevenEasy
312
Find the electrode you need at
www.electrodes.net
SevenEasy Electro-chemical instruments at your service Both SevenEasy pH and Seven Easy Conductivity have an integrated interface for exchanging data SevenEasy pH (S20) and Seven Easy Conductivity (S30) are intuitive, easy to use and suitable for numerous applications. They feature state-of-the-art automatic functions and an integrated interface for exchanging data. the calibration processes and avoids unnecessary error messages. Choose from 1-, 2- or 3-point calibration.
Self-diagnosis
Like the SevenEasy S20 device, the S30 also has a self-diagnosis program. The user can use the device to test the hardware and software via an interactive dialog. This gives you the peace of mind that everything is working as it should be.
Mobility
Both SevenEasy devices (pH and conductivity) can be connected to the power supply or battery-operated. 4 AA batteries can make your SevenEasy independent of the power supply.
Clearly 'easy'
The clear, high-contrast display with its large digits allows you to read measurement results and other relevant information easily. Neither a program menu nor operating instructions are needed.
4 ways of measuring
The SevenEasy S30 provides you with various ways of measuring and various units: Conductivity, TDS, resistance and salinity. So there's no need for manual calculations.
Electrode status
You can quickly and easily see whether your electrode is in good condition or not. Does it need cleaning or replacing? A pictogram immediately puts you inthe picture.
Automatic buffer detection

This function allows you to define the order of the pH buffers during routine calibrations. This speeds up
313
Portable measuring devices
For pH, O2 and conductivity
pH/multimeter
Easily portable
Watertight Dustproof
314
SevenGo Ergonomic handling

Portable measuring devices for pH, conductivity,
oxygen and ion analysis

Robust measuring system for use under difficult
conditions
Efficiency thanks to unique ergonomic design
and user friendliness

Revolutionary accessories and advanced sensor
technology
Good for practical exercises, easy to use
315
pH/multimeter
The giant among dwarves

SevenGo Duo pro
SevenGo Duo pro SG68 pH/ion/oxygen meter (IP67) for the highest demands
Portable Portable
dual-channel measuring device for determining pH, mV, rel. mV, ion concentration and dissolved oxygen 5-point pH calibration with selection from 7 predefined and one user-defined buffer set Data Data storage for 500 GLP data records with date/time, sensor ID and serial number, user and sample ID Contact-free IR communication Intelligent sensor management (ISM)
An end to confusion
The user interface shows all menu and system settings as well as error and warning messages in full words and sentences. And all this in 10 selectable languages.
SevenGo Duo pro SG68 pH mV (rel. mV) Ions (units) mg/L, mmd/ L, mol/L Temperature Saturation Temperature Oxygen (mg/L, ppm) Pressure pH sensor inputs DO sensor inputs Outputs Energy supply Operating conditions Size/weight
Measuring range -2,000 ... 19,999 -1,999 ... 1,999 0.000 ... 999.9% 0.000 ... 9,999 ppm 1.00E-9 ... 9.99E+9 -5.0 ... 130.0C (ATC) -30.0 ... 130.0C (MTC) 0.0 ... 600% 0.0 ... 60.0C 0.00 ... 99.00
Resolution 0.001 0.1
Accuracy 0.002 0.1 0.5% 0.2C 0.5% 0.1C 0.5% max. 0.03 1
0.1C 0.1 ... 1 0.1C 0.01
500 ... 1100 mbar 1 BNC (>1012 ohms); NTC 30 K (both IP67) BNC (>1012); NTC 22 K (both IP67) IR to printer or PC, via RS232 or USB 4 AA batteries 1.5 V or NiMH rechargeable batteries 1.3 V 0 ... 40C, 5 ... 85% rel. humidity (no cond.) 220 x 90 x 45 mm/368 g (without batteries)
O2
Order info SG68-B SG68-ELK SG68-FK2 SG68-FK5
Standard equipment Measuring device Electrode kit with InLabExpert Pro-ISM and InLab605-ISM (both IP67, 1.8 m cable) Field kit with InLabExpert Pro-ISM and InLab605-ISM (both IP67, 1.8 m cable) Field kit with InLabExpert Pro-ISM and InLab605-ISM (both IP67, 5 m cable)
Order no. 51302610 51302611 51302612 51302613
316
www.moreabout7.com
SevenGo Duo pro SG78 pH/ion/conductivity meter (IP67) for the strictest demands
Portable
dual-channel measuring device for determining pH, mV, rel. mV, ion concentration, conductivity, TDS (total dissolved solids), salinity and specific resistance 5-point pH calibration with selection from 7 predefined and one user-defined buffer set Data storage for 500 GLP data records with date/time, sensor ID and serial number, user and sample ID Contact-free IR communication Intelligent sensor management (ISM)
Tremendous service package

The two SevenGo Duo pro measuring devices SG68 and SG78 combine maximum measurement accuracy and an excellent range of functions with user-friendly operation and exceptional safety. With all the outstanding features of the entire SevenGo family, SevenGo Duo pro also offers extra revolutionary safety functions. Thanks to ISM the right and most recent calibration of the sensor connected is always used for the measurement.
SevenGo Duo pro SG78 pH mV (rel. mV) Ions Conductivity TDS Specific resistance Salin ty Temperature pH sensor inputs LF sensor input Outputs Energy supply Operating conditions Size/weight
Measuring range -2,000 ... 19,999 -1,999 ... 1,999
Resolution 0.001 0.1
Accuracy 0.002 0.1
0.01 S/cm ... 1000 mS/cm 0.01 0.5% 0.01 mg/L ... 600 g/L 0.01 ... 1 0.5% 0.00 ... 100.00 Mcm 0.00 ... 80.00 ppt 5.0 ... 130.0C (ATC) -30.0 ... 130.0C (MTC) 0.1C 0.2C BNC (>1012 ohms); NTC 30 K (both IP67) LTW 7 pin (IP67) IR to printer or PC, via RS232 or USB 4 AA batteries 1.5 V or NiMH rechargeable batteries 1.3 V 0 ... 40C, 5 ... 85% rel. humid ty (no cond.) 220 x 90 x 45 mm/325 g (w thout batteries)
Order info SG78-B SG78-ELK SG78-FK2 SG78-FK5 SG78-USP/EP
Standard equipment Measuring device Electrode k t w th InLabExpert Pro-ISM and InLab738-ISM (both IP67, 1.8 m cable) Field kit with InLabExpert Pro-ISM and InLab738-ISM (both IP67, 1.8 m cable) Field kit with InLabExpert Pro-ISM and InLab 738-ISM (both IP67, 5 m cable) As SG78-ELK but with different electrodes: InLab Pure Pro-ISM, 2 m ISM cable and InLab742-ISM
Order no. 51302620 51302621 51302622 51302623 51302625
317
pH/multimeter
SevenGo pro
SG6 dissolved oxygen Professional dissolved oxygen meter (IP67) for the strictest demands
Manual
or automatic air pressure compensation O2 sensor Comprehensive range of accessories Data memory for 200 GLP data points Backlit display (with all SevenGo pro models)
High-performance SG6
Saturation Temperature (C/F)
Measuring range
0.0...600% 0.0...60C
Resolution
0.1...1 0.1C
Accuracy
0.5% 0.1C 0.5%, max. 0.03 2
mg/L, ppm 0.00...99.00 0.01 Pressure Inputs 500...1,100 mbar BNC (>1012 ohms); NTC 22 K (both IP67) 1
Kit
SG6-ELK SG6-FK2 SG6-FK10 SG6-ASK
Description and sensor

Electrode k t w th InLab605 (IP67)
Field kit with InLab605 (IP67), 1 8 m cable, case for field use Field kit with InLab605 (IP67), 10 m cable, case for field use
Order no.
51302561 51302562 51302563 51302564
Assistant kit with InLab605 (IP67), case and ErGo
Totally dustproof and watertight

What does IP67 mean? The IP standard (ingress protection) consists of two digits: 6 means that SevenGo is totally dustproof; 7 means that SevenGo remains watertight for 30 minutes if submerged in 1 meter of water.
www.mt.com/pHlab
318
SG7 conductivity Professional conductivity measuring device (IP67) for the strictest demands
Calibration
with user-defined standard or cell constant Linear or non-linear temperature compensation Measurement of purified water according to USP Data memory for 200 GLP data points Extensive GLP functions with sensor and sample identification
SG7
Conductivity Temperature (C/F) TDS Resistance Salin ty Sensor inputs
Measuring range
0.01 S/cm... 1000 S/cm... -5.0...105C 0.01 mg/L...600 g/L 0.00...100.00 Mcm 0.00...80.00 ppt LTW 7 pin (IP67)
Resolution
0.01 0.1C 0.01
Accuracy
0.5% 0.5C 0.5%
Kit
SG7-ELK SG7-FK2 SG7-FK10

Electrode kit w th InLab737 (IP67)
Field kit with InLab737 (IP67), 1.8 m cable, case for field use Field kit with InLab737/10 m (IP67), 10 m cable, case for field use
Order no.
51302571 51302572 51302573
SG8 pH/ion pH value/ion measuring devices (IP67) for the strictest demands
Simple
determination of ion concentration Time interval-controlled measurement with automat. recording of measurement data Data memory for 200 GLP data points Segmented or linear calibration 5-point calibration with selection from 6 predefined and one user-defined buffer set
SG8
pH mV (rel. mV) Temperature (C/F) Sensor inputs
Measuring range
-2,000...19,999 -1,999...1,999 -5.0...130.0 ATC 30.0...130.0 MTC BNC (>1012 ohms); NTC 30 K (all IP67)
Resolution
0.001 0.1 0.1C
Accuracy
0.002 0.1 0.2C
Kit
SG8-B SG8-ELK SG2-FK SG2-ASK SG7-ASK

Measuring device only
Field k t w th InLab413 SG (IP67), case for field use Field k t w th InLab413 SG (IP67), case for field use Assistant k t w th InLab413 SG (IP67), case and ErGo Assistant k t w th InLab737 (IP67), case and ErGo
Order no.
51202581 51202582 51202583 51202584 51302574
319
pH/multimeter
SevenGo
SG2 pH pH measuring device (IP67) for routine work
Clear
display of measurements and settings electrode and battery status display Automatic end point detection and buffer detection as well as temperature compensation Data memory for 30 GLP data points 3-point calibration with predefined and user-defined buffers
Continuous SG2
pH mV Temperature Sensor inputs
Measuring range
0.00...14.00 -1,999...1,999 -5.0...105C BNC (>1012 ohms); NTC 30 K (both IP67)
Resolution
0.01 1 0.1C
Accuracy
0.01 1 0.5C
ErGo
Order no.
51302521 51302522 51302523 51302525
Kit
SG2-B SG2-ELK SG2-FK SG2-ASK

Measuring device only Electrode k t w th InLab413 SG (IP67)
Field kit with InLab413 SG (IP67), case for field use Assistant kit with InLab413 SG (IP67), case and ErGo
the useful assistant

The ErGo field assistant is synonymous with perfect convenience in the lab or in field use. ErGo can be set in a continuously variable manner and can be used for many functions.
SG3 conductivity Conductivity measurement for everyday use

Automatic
end point detection and temperature compensation standards 84 S/cm, 1,413 S/cm or 12.88 mS/cm Data memory for 30 GLP data points Clear display of measurements and settings Complete range of electrodes
Predefined SG3
Conductivity Temperature TDS Resistance Salinity Sensor inputs
Tips and tricks for measuring pH can be found starting on page 540.
Measuring range
0.10 S/cm... 500 S/cm... 5.0...105C 0.01 mg/L...300 g/L 0.00...100.00 Mcm 0.00...80.00 ppt LTW 7 pin (IP67)
Resolution
0.10...1 0.1C 0.01...1
Accuracy
0.5% 0.2C 0.5%
Kit
SG3-ELK SG3-FK2 SG3-FK10 SG3-ASK

Electrode k t w th InLab737 (IP67)
Field kit with InLab737 (IP67), 1 8 m cable, case for field use Field kit with InLab737/10 m (IP67), 10 m cable, case for field use
Order no.
51302531 51302532 51302533 51302534
Assistant kit with InLab737 (IP67), case and ErGo
320
SevenGo Duo SG23 pH/conductivity meter (IP67) for routine use

Dual-channel
Routine tasks for SevenGo and SevenGo Duo

The two SG2 SevenGo pH and SG3 SevenGo conductivity single-channel measuring devices feature all basic functions essential for routine measurements and are a low-cost alternative to the SevenGo pro devices. The SG23 SevenGo Duo pH/mV/ conductivity device, that also includes intelligent sensor management (ISM), is best suited to parallel routine measurements in dual-channel mode.
measuring device for the determination of pH, mV, conductivity, TDS (total dissolved solids), salinity and specific resistance 3-point pH calibration with predefined and user-defined buffers Intelligent sensor management (ISM) Data memory for 99 GLP data records
SG23
SG23-B
Standard equipment
Measuring device
Order no.
51302600 51302601 51302602 51302603
SG23-ELK Electrode k t with InLabExpert Pro-ISM and InLab738-ISM (both IP67, 1.8 m cable) SG23-FK2 Field k t with InLabExpert Pro-ISM and InLab738-ISM (both IP67, 1.8 m cable) SG23-FK5 Field k t with InLabExpert Pro-ISM and InLab738-ISM (both IP67, 5 m cable)
For specifications, see SG2 and SG3 (Only exception: 357 g weight without batteries)
Special tasks for SevenGo pro

The SevenGo pro pH/mV/ion (SG8), conductivity (SG7) and dissolved oxygen (SG6) measuring devices are the ideal choice for measurements requiring the greatest measurement accuracy. They are operated using softkeys with interactive function fields on the display which makes for flexible and user-friendly menu navigation. Important GLP functions such as date/time and sensor and sample IDs are saved for each measurement and appear in each print-out if requested.
321
pH/multimeter
Overview of functions and features

Model pH value measurement mV measurement SG2
SevenGo SG3 SG6
SevenGo pro SG7 SG8
Relative mV Concentration (ISE) Conductivity TDS Resistance Salinity
Dissolved oxygen Air pressure Temperature
1 5 6
Conductivity: Linear temperature compensation
Conductivity: Non-linear temperature compensation Calibration points Buffer sets User-defined standards 3 1 2
Manual entry of cell constant Automatic and manual Determination of measurement 200
200
200
Time interval-controlled measurement Display lighting Infrared interface Routine and expert operating modes Softkey-based menu guidance GLP data storage Use of ErGo Watertight according to IP67
Power supply: 4 AA batteries 4 NiMH
30
30
For all SevenGo and SevenGo pro models

Outputs (SG6/7/8 only) Energy supply Packaging size/weight, ambient conditions Packaging size/weight IR interface to printer or PC via RS232 or USB 4 AA batteries (1.5 V) or NiMH rechargeable batteries (1.3 V) -5C...40C, 5%...80% rel. humidity (no conductivity) 220x90x45 mm/325 g (without batteries)
322
7 good reasons to use the SevenGo meter

Extremely Maximum Large
easy and intuitive to operate measurement accuracy watertight and robust
and clear display practical accessories intelligent sensor management
Ergonomic, Extensive Modern
GLP data management
Revolutionary
323
FiveEasy FiveGo
Benchtop and portable devices
pH/multimeter
324
Give me 5
Splash-protected and portable
FiveEasy and FiveGo Getting started with pH measurements
Compact benchtop devices and splash-protected portable measuring devices for measuring pH and conductivity. Very simple operation thanks to self-explanatory keypad and large display. The kit versions include robust electrodes and useful accessories. pH measurements made easy
Use 'Read' to start a measurement and 'Cal' to start a calibration. Automatic end point detection, automatic temperature compensation and calibration with automatic buffer detection reduce possible operating errors to a minimum.
Ergonomic design
The compact benchtop device requires just a small space; the portable design is also ideal for users with small hands and offers IP54 protection from the ingress of dust and water.
At a glance
As well as displaying the measurement value and temperature at the same time, several useful symbols tell you about the status of your electrode and whether a measurement is still being taken or the reading is already stable.
FiveEasy FiveGo
Benchtop and portable devices for pH and conductivity measurements.
325
FiveEasy FiveGo
Benchtop and portable devices
pH/multimeter
Select the right device for pH, ion, conductivity or ISFET measurements
pH/conductivity/ions/ISFET SevenEasy, SevenMulti, FiveEasy
The standard and extendable measuring devices of this product range cover all application needs. We also offer a wide range of electrodes, buffer solutions and accessories.
FiveEasy
Portable
pH/conductivity/dissolved oxygen/ ion measurements on the go with SevenGo, FiveGo
Our range of portable handheld devices offers the same reliability and precision as lab devices in field applications.
FiveGo
326
Useful accessories like the electrode clip, armband and a laminated 'quick guide' are supplied with each measuring device. The field kit also contains a practical carrier bag. FG2 FiveGo pH FE20 FiveEasy pH
Measuring range 0.00...14.00 pH -1,999...1,999 mV 0C...100C (32F...212F) Resolution 0.01 pH 1 mV 0.1C Error limits 0.01 pH 1 mV 0.5C Calibration Memory Power supply FiveGo FiveEasy Size/weight FiveGo FiveEasy Display Inputs Temperature compensation reference temperature IP protection class (FiveGo) Housing IP54 ABS/PC-reinforced 2 points 3 predefined buffer groups 30 measurements (FiveGo) Current calibration 4 x AAA > 500 operating hours 100-240 V/50-60 Hz, 9 V DC 169 x 82 x 36 mm/0.18 kg (without batteries) 200 x 175 x 52 mm/0.6 kg Liquid crystal BNC, impedance > 10e + 12 Cinch, NTC 30 k ATC + MTC
www.mt.com/pHlab
FG3 FiveGo conductivity FE30 FiveEasy conductivity

0.0 S/cm...199.9 mS/cm 0.1 mg/l...199.9 g/l (TDS) 0.00...19.99 psu (salinity) 0C...100C (32F...212F) Automatic range 0.00...19.99 psu 0.1C 0.5% of measurement value 0.3C 1 point 3 predefined standards 30 measurements (FiveGo) Current calibration 4 x AAA > 250 operating hours 100-240 V/50-60 Hz, 9 V DC 169 x 82 x 36 mm/0.18 kg (without batteries) 200 x 175 x 52 mm/0.6 kg Liquid crystal Mini DIN Linear: 0.00%/C...10.00%/C 20 + 25C IP54 ABS/PC-reinforced
327
Electrodes
Solution
At hand Can be refilled
InLab Solutions
Electrodes
Solution
Buffer solutions and standards
Buffer solutions from METTLER TOLEDO can be traced to the primary standards of the NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology, USA). The buffer solutions come with a quality test certificate. This guarantees the values stated and ensures traceability.
pH buffer
pH buffer solution
2.00 2.00 4.01 4.01 4.01 7.00 7.00 7.00 9.21 9.21 9.21 10.00 10.00 10.00 11.0 11.0 Color clear clear clear red red clear green green clear blue blue clear clear clear clear clear Container 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml bottles 30x20 ml pouch 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml bottles 30x20 ml pouch 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml bottles 30x20 ml pouch 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml bottles 250 ml bottle 6x 250 ml bottle 30x20 ml pouch 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml bottles Order no. 51340055 51319010 51302069 51340057 51340058 51302047 51340059 51340060 51302070 51300193 51300194 51340056 51340231 51302079 51340063 51319018
Storing and refilling pH and redox electrodes

Correct electrode care means cleaning and storing in suitable solutions. This makes them ready for use whenever you need them and cuts response times. Electrodes with a filler opening can be refilled. Calibration should be undertaken with clean electrodes and suitable buffer solutions.
Rainbow box
4.01/7.00/9.21 4.01/7.00/10.00 30x20 ml pouch 30x20 ml pouch 51302068 51302080
pH buffer solutions NIST and DIN 19266 pH0.015

4.006 4.006 6.865 6.865 9.180 9.180 10.012 clear clear clear clear clear clear clear 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml bottles 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml bottles 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml bottles 250 ml bottle 51340039 51319004 51340041 51319005 51340042 51319007 51340044
DKD-certified buffer solutions

4.01 7.00 9.21 10.00 red green blue clear 250 ml bottle 250 ml bottle 250 ml bottle 250 ml bottle 52118093 52118094 52118095 52118096
www.mt.com/buffer www.mt.com/msds
You can download your detailed test certificate here Safety data sheet
330
Spare parts and refill solutions for ISE and GSE electrodes
Ion NH3 GSE Ammonium ISE* Barium ISE* Bromide ISE* Cadmium ISE* Calcium ISE* Chloride ISE* CO2 GSE Copper ISE Cyanide ISE* Fluoride ISE* Borofluoride ISE* Iodide ISE* Lead ISE Lithium ISE* Magnesium ISE* Nitrate ISE * NOx GSE Potassium ISE* Sulfide ISE* Tenside Thiocyanate ISE Membrane set Order no. 51340013 51340012 51107688 51340006 51107686 51340009 51340007 51340015 51107692 51107695 51340008 51107690 51107694 51107874 51107687 51107698 51340011 51340014 51340010 51107689 51107669 51107871 Refill solution Order no. 51340036 51340035 51107892 51340029 51107891 51340032 51340030 51340038 51107889 51107893 51340031 51107890 51107898 51107875 51107881 51107885 51340034 51340037 51340033 51107894 51107899 51107872
Buffer solutions and standards

Conductivity standards
84 S/cm 1413 S/cm 1413 S/cm 1413 S/cm 12.88 mS/cm 12.88 mS/cm 12.88 mS/cm 500 ml bottle 30x20 ml pouch 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml bottles 30x20 ml pouch 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml bottles Order no. 51302153 51302049 51300138 51300259 51302050 51300139 51300260
Redox buffer solutions. E(Ag/AgCl) 25C

220 mV UH= 427 mV 220 mV UH= 427 mV 250ml bottle 6x250 ml bottle 51340065 51340081
Storing and refilling

electrolytes for reference electrodes
KCl 3 mol/l KCl 3 mol/l, AgCl-saturated Friscolyt-B storage solution for InLab413-pH electrode 1M KNO3 fill solution 250 ml bottle 250ml bottle 250 ml bottle 250 ml Order no. 51340049 51340045 51340053 51340047
* Membrane k t contains solution, membrane and ID ring
Cleaning solutions
Pepsin-HCl for cleaning junctions contaminated w th protein, treatment time of approx. 1 hour. Pepsin-HCl Thiourea solution for cleaning junctions contaminated with silver sulfide. Treat until clean Thiourea solution Reactivation solution for regenerating glass end electrodes, treatment time of approx. 1 min. 250 ml bottle 6x250 ml 51340068 51340069
250 ml bottle 6x250 ml 25 ml bottle
51340070 51340082 51340073
The quality of the pH measurement basically depends on the quality of calibration

Regular calibration with standard buffer solutions ensures that the measurements determined in the sample and read off the measuring device's display are correct. In order to minimize contamination or changes to the standards caused by environmental influences, we offer 'single-use solution' buffer solutions in practical side sealed bags.
331
SevenGo sensors
The right every

SevenGo sensors
Robust IP67 sensors for pH, conductivity and oxygen applications Sensors with integrated chip for intelligent sensor management (ISM) Integrated temperature sensor for automatic temperature compensation (ATC) Easy to clean, low-maintenance, durable
Electrodes
332
sensor for situation
The electrode finder
www.electrodes.net
333
Electrodes
Electrode finder
pH meter
Find the electrode you are looking for in just 4 clicks
www.electrodes.net
334
335
Electrodes
Crossfinder
pH meter
Do you want to replace the pH electrode of any supplier with one from Mettler Toledo? Here are the two steps for finding the right electrode:
http://crossreference.mtanainfo.com/
1. Select manufacturer (producer) 2. Select designation (cat. number) The corresponding METTLER TOLEDO model appears with a direct link to our homepage. Here you will find specifications, areas of use and much more.
336
337
SevenGo sensors
Electrodes
Probes for portable measuring devices

Four tried-andtested sensors
The SevenGo devices are fitted with high-performance electrodes as standard. All four sensors are based on products combining robustness with precise measurement technology, thousands of which are already in successful use. When used in combination with these sensors, the IP67 protection of the SevenGo devices is fully guaranteed.
pH InLab Order number 1.8 m cable 5 m cable 10 m cable Expert Pro-ISM 51344102 51344103 51344104 413 SG 51340288 51340297 51340289 738-ISM 51344110 51344112 51344114
Conductivity 738 51344120 51344122 51344124 0.001 to 500 S/cm 0 to 100C NTC 30 k 742-ISM 51344116 51344118 742 51344126 51344128
Dissolved oxygen 605-ISM 51343611 51343612 51343613 605 51340291 51343298 51340292
Measuring range Temperature range Temperature sensor Membrane glass type Membrane resistance (25C) Diaphragm type / cell type Reference system / electrolyte Nominal Shaft material Shaft length Shaft diameter Mounting IP67 Connections
0 to 14 pH 0 to 100C NTC 30 k U <250 M Open connection ARGENTHAL/XEROLYT polymer
0.01 to 1000 mS/cm 0 to 100C NTC 30 k
0 to 200%, 0 to 20 mg/L 0 to 60C NTC 22 k
4-pin graphite
2-pin steel
0.57 cm-1 PEEK 120 mm 12 mm FRISCOLYT-B Yes Fixed cable: LTW Epoxy 120 mm 12 mm Dry Yes Fixed cable: LTW
0.105 cm-1 Steel V4A 120 mm 12 mm Dry Yes Fixed cable: LTW PPS 120 mm 12 mm Dry Yes Fixed cable: BNC/RCA (cinch)
338
Quality sensors with outstanding properties

InLab 413 SG & InLab Expert Pro-ISM pH sensors Low-maintenance XEROLYT polymer electrolyte Two open connections are in direct contact with the measurement solution Robust, chemically resistant PEEK shaft Durable ARGENTHAL reference system Robust 2-pin cell made from steel for lower conductivity levels Precise measurements down to 0.001 S/cm Maximum linearity
InLab 738 conductivity sensor

Conductivity
More outstanding sensors with or without ISM

METTLER TOLEDO offers pH electrodes for all conceivable applications. The most important electrodes are also available with ISM. It goes without saying that all other InLab sensors from our wide range can also be connected to the SevenGo devices.
cell for medium and higher conductivity levels Minimum sample carryover 4-pin cell made from graphite with maximum linearity InLab 605 oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor, based on precise process analysis Interchangeable DO membrane Robust, chemically resistant PPS shaft
InLab Order number with ISM Order number without ISM pH range Temperature range Temperature sensor Membrane glass type Membrane resistance (25C) Diaphragm type Reference system Reference electrolyte Shaft material Shaft length Shaft diameter Mounting IP67 Electrode cable
Science Pro 51344072 51343071 0 to 12 0 to 100C NTC 30 k A41 <600 Mcm Mobile glass grinding ARGENTHAL with Ag+ lock 3 mol/L KCl Glass 170 mm 12 mm 3 mol/L KCl No
Routine Pro 51344055 51343054 0 to 14 0 to 100C NTC 30 k HA <600 Mcm Ceramic ARGENTHAL with Ag+ lock 3 mol/L KCl Glass 120 mm 12 mm 3 mol/L KCl No
Power Pro 51344211 51343111 0 to 12 0 to 100C NTC 30 k A41 <600 Mcm Ceramic SteadyForce DPA gel Glass 170 mm 12 mm 3 mol/L KCl No
Pure Pro 51344172 51343171 1 to 11 0 to 80C NTC 30 k LoT <50 Mcm Fixed glass grinding ARGENTHAL with Ag+ lock 3 mol/L KCl Glass 170 mm 12 mm 3 mol/L KCl No
Solids Pro 51344155 51343154 1 to 11 0 to 80C NTC 30 k LoT <250 Mcm Open connection ARGENTHAL XEROLYTPLUS polymer Glass 25 mm 6 mm FRISCOLYT-B No
Micro Pro 51344163 51343162 0 to 14 0 to 100C NTC 30 k U <300 Mcm Ceramic ARGENTHAL with Ag+ lock 3 mol/L KCl Glass 130 mm 12 mm 3 mol/L KCl No
When using ISM, the ISM electrode cable 51344291 (2 m) or 51344292 (5 m) must be used. When not using ISM, the electrode cable 52300009 (1.2 m) or 51340290 (2.5 m) must be used.
339
pH & ORP electrodes
InLab
Quality
Tried and tested for 60 years
Electrodes
Your personal electrode

Ingold electrodes from METTLER TOLEDO have been synonymous with quality for more than 60 years. Our product range covers virtually all applications in both the lab and field use. Take a look at our product range. You are guaranteed to find the right electrode for your application.
340
Polymer electrolyte
These black sensors are highly insensitive to impurities. The reference electrode in these sensors is in direct contact with the measurement solution thanks to two open connections, ruling out the possibility of blocking.
Find the right electrode online
www.electrodes.net
341
pH & ORP electrodes
InLab
Electrodes
InLab Economymultipurpose electrodes
Do
you want to determine the pH value of buffers? Are you taking measurements in concentrated bases or acids? Do you need to determine the pH value of solutions containing protein? Are you taking measurements in suspensions, emulsions, paints or adhesives at high temperatures? There is an optimum electrode for every application. Use our electrode finder available at: www.electrodes.net
Premium InLab pH-special electrodes
342
Name
Type
Properties/description
Plug
BNC cable
Order no.
InLabeconomy electrodes
InLabVersatile Economy 2-in-1 Interchangeable junction, can be refilled BNC included InLabVersatile Pro Economy 3-in-1 Interchangeable junction, can be refilled, ATC sensor BNC/RCA included InLabEasy Economy 2-in-1 Gel-filled, polysulfone shaft S7 52300004* InLabEasy DIN Economy 2-in-1 Gel-filled, polysulfone shaft DIN, 1.2 m --- InLabEasy PT1000 Economy 3-in-1 Gel-filled, polysulfone shaft, PT1000 DIN, 1.2 m InLabBasic DIN Economy 2-in-1 ARGENTHAL with AG+ ion traps DIN, 1.2 m --- InLabBasic PT1000 Economy 3-in-1 Argenthal, PT1000 DIN, 1.2 m Multi-purpose pH electrodes made from glass InLabRoutine Pt1000 Mu ti-purpose 3-in-1 ARGENTHAL with Ag+ ion traps Mu tiPin included InLabRoutine Pro Mu ti-purpose 3-in-1 ATC sensor (TRIS-compatible) Mu tiPin 5230 0009* InLabScience Mu ti-purpose 2-in-1 Movable glass cover S7 52300004* InLabScience Pro Mu ti-purpose 3-in-1 Movable glass cover, ATC sensor Mu tiPin 52300009* 51343030 51343031 51343010 51343012 51343015 51343021 51343023
51343056 51343054 51343070 51343071
pH electrodes with polymer electrolyte

InLabExpert InLabExpert DIN Premium-3-in-1 Premium-3-in-1 Open junction, PEEK shaft, 0100C Open junction, PEEK shaft, PT1000 S7 52300004
DIN&4mm, 1.2 m ---
51343100 51343103
Premium InLab electrodes with pressurized electrolyte

InLabPower InLabPower Pro InLabViscous Premium2-in-1 Premium 3-in-1 Premium 2-in-1 Pressurized reference system SteadyForce ATC sensor, 170 mm long, SteadyForce SteadyForce, thin special tip S7 Mu tiPin S7 52300004* 52300009* 52300004* 51343110 51343111 51343150
InLab-pH special electrodes InLabSemi-Micro Specialist 2-in-1 6 mm shaft diameter S7 52300004* InLabSemi-MIcro-L Specialist 2-in-1 200 mm long, 6 mm shaft diameter S7 52300004* InLabMicro Specialist 2-in-1 3 mm shaft diameter S7 52300004* InLabReach Specialist 2-in-1 300 mm long S7 52300004* InLabSurface Specialist 2-in-1 Flat membrane, polysulfone shaft S7 52300004* InLabSolids Specialist 2-in-1 Needle tip S7 52300004* InLabSolids Pro Specialist 3-in-1 Needle tip, ATC sensor Mu tiPin 52300009* InLabCool Specialist 2-in-1 FRISCOLYT-B electrolyte, -30...80C S7 52300004* InLabHydrofluoric Specialist 2-in-1 Special HF-resistant membrane S7 52300004* InLabReach Pro Specialist 3-in-1 400 mm long, ATC sensor Mu tiPin 52300009* InLabPure Specialist 2-in-1 Dirt-repellant PTEE junction, gel electrolyte S7 52300004* InLabPure Pro Specialist 3-in-1 Three-way junction, ATC sensor, electrolyte bridge Mu tiPin 52300009* InLab490 Specialist 3-in-1 ISFET sensor with driTEK reference Mini DIN included ORP/redox electrodes InLabRedox ORP half cell Platinum ring S7 52300004* InLabRedox Au ORP half cell Gold ring S7 52300004* InLabRedox Ag ORP half cell Silver ring, KNO3 electrolyte S7 52300004* InLabRedox Pro ORP half cell Platinum ring, movable PTFE cover S7 52300004* Pt805-S7/120 ORP half cell Platinum ring S7 59902392*
* BNC cables must be ordered as extras.
51343165 51343161 51343160 51343060 51343157 51343153 51343154 51343174 51343176 51343061 51343170 51340255 51302305
51343200 51343204 51343205 51343201 59904377
Temperature sensors
InLabNTC 30 k temperature sensor in glass shaft for use in labs (cable not included) (120 x 12 mm), incl. quality certificate InLabPt1000 temperature sensor in glass shaft for use in labs (cable not included) (120 x 12 mm), incl. qual ty certificate
NTC 30 k temperature sensor in stainless steel (cable included) PT1000 temperature sensor in stainless steel (cable included) 2-in-1 combination electrode: Reference and pH half cell in one electrode. 3-in-1 combination electrode: With temperature sensor, reference and pH half cell fitted.
51343310 51343312 51300164 51300165
343
InLab
ISE
Electrodes
Determination rich in content

Ion-selective half cells (exception: Sodium-sensitive electrode) consist of two elements: the shaft and the membrane module. While the shaft is identical in all half cells, the module makes the half cell ion-specific. Gas-sensitive electrodes (GSE) allow the concentration and/or activity of gases to be determined in the simplest of ways. Costs both in terms of apparatus and work are very low when analyzing with gas-sensitive electrodes.
Modular and versatile

METTLER TOLEDO has one of the largest ranges of ion-selective and gassensitive electrodes anywhere in the world. The ion-selective electrodes (ISEs) can be combined with a titrator or ion measuring device. Our service team will gladly provide more information, including information about applications.
Ion-select ive half cells
Perfect quality
Every ion-selective electrode (ISE) and every membrane module is individually checked (using wet chemical method). The strict requirements of various direct measurements and a typical titration application have to be satisfied. Each ISE has its own serial number and quality certificate.
Gas-sensit ive electrodes
344
Ion-selective electrodes (ISE) are used to determine the concentration of one particular ion in a concentration range of approx. 105mol/l to 1mol/l. However other ions, known as interfering ions, sometimes impact on the determination of concentration with ISE. The ion-selective electrodes can be combined with a titrator or ion measuring device. Our product specialists will gladly help you find the optimum solution for your application.
Ion-selective half cells and gas-sensitive electrodes (GSE)

Name Ion Membrane type NH3 GSE Ammonia Polymer matrix DX218-NH4+ Ammonium # Polymer matrix DX337-Ba2+ Barium # Polymer matrix DX280-Br- Bromide # Solid DX312-Cd2+ Cadmium # Polymer matrix DX240-Ca2+ Calcium # Polymer matrix CO2 GSE Carbon dioxide Polymer matrix DX235-Cl- Chloride # Solid DX264-Cu2+ Copper # Solid DX226-CN- Cyanide # Solid DX219-F- Fluoride # Solid DX287-BF4- Borofluoride # Polymer matrix DX327-I- Iodide # Solid DX407-Pb2+ Lead # Polymer matrix DX207-Li+ Lithium # Polymer matrix DX262-NO3- Nitrate # Polymer matrix DX239-K+ Potassium # Polymer matrix DX223-Na+ Sodium # Glass DX232-S2- Sulfide (silver sulfide) # Solid DS500 Tenside DX258-SCN- Thiocyanate # Solid # Reference electrode required See below. NOx GSE CO2 GSE Nitrogen oxides Carbon dioxide
Cable for titrator Cable for ions/pH measuring device 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004* 089601* 52300004*
Order no. 51341000 51340900 51107674 51340300 51107672 51340600 51341200 51340400 51107678 51107681 51340500 51107676 51107680 51107873 51107673 51340800 51340700 51340263 51107675 51107670 51107870
NH3 GSE 51341000 + NOx electrolyte 51340037 NH3 GSE 51341000 + CO2 electrolyte 51340038
Half cells and reference electrodes

Name InLabMono InLabreference InLabReference Pro Type Properties/description Plug pH half cell pH glass electrode S7 Reference electrode Ceramic junction S7 Reference electrode Teflon cover, electrolyte bridge S7 Reference electrode Matt glass cover, DX200 for titration electrolyte bridge S7 *Cables must be ordered as extras. For further information, please see page 348. Cable for titrator 089601* 52300015* 52300015* 52300015* BNC cable 52300004* 52300016* 52300016* 52300016* Order no. 52000127 52000128 52000129 51089935
Ion-selective combi electrodes

Name Ion Membrane type Cable for titrator Cable for ions/pH measuring device DC218-NH4+ Ammonium Polymer matrix 089601* 52300004* DC280-Br- Bromide Solid 089601* 52300004* DC240-Ca2+ Calcium Polymer matrix 089601* 52300004* DC235-CI- Chloride Solid 089601* 52300004* DC219-F- Fluoride Solid 089601* 52300004* DC262-NO3- Nitrate Polymer matrix 089601* 52300004* DC239-K+ Potassium Polymer matrix 089601* 52300004* *Cables must be ordered as extras. For further information, please see page 348. Order no. 51340910 51340310 51340610 51340410 51340510 51340810 51340710
345
InLab
Conductivity sensors
Electrodes
Small but miraculous conductivity

The conductivity cells InLab710 to 740 are primarily intended for use in the lab. A temperature sensor is integrated in each cell to allow the measurement result to be corrected to the desired reference temperature. Allconductivity cells are shipped ready for measuring and are equipped with plug and cable. The InLab730 general purpose conductivity cell covers a large number of applications in aqueous samples above 10 S/cm. Cells made of glass and platinum, such as InLab710 or InLab720, are the preferred choices for samples containing solvent. The InLab740 high-performance cell measures samples down to 0.001 S/cm.
Conduct ivity sensors
One sensor does it all

The sensors in our InLab700 range of electrodes feature a temperature sensor and will automatically undertake temperature compensation. InLab741 easily satisfies the strict requirements for conductivity measurements set by the United States and European Pharmacopoeia (USP/EP).
When measuring conductivity in pure water or if the conductivity level is low, we would recommend using a flow cell to prevent the result being distorted by carbon dioxide. (Order no. 51302257)
346
Conductivity is measured in many industrial and analytical applications. The result is a measurement for the total amount of released ionic material in the sample. In the food industry conductivity is used to determine salt content in quality assurance. Determination of conductivity also plays a major role wherever ultra pure water is used and its quality has to be checked.
Name InLab710 InLab720 InLab731(kit electrode) InLab738 InLab741(USP/EP) InLab742 Type 4 platinum pins, glass shaft 2 platinum pins, glass shaft 4 graph te pins, shaft made from epoxy resin 4 graph te pins, shaft made from epoxy resin 2 steel pins, shaft made from V4A steel 2 steel pins, shaft made from V4A steel Measuring range 10 S/cm to 500 mS/cm 0.1 S/cm to 500 S/cm 0.01 mS/cm to 1000 mS/cm 0.01 mS/cm to 1000 mS/cm 0.001 S/cm to 500 S/cm 0.001 S/cm to 500 S/cm Cell constant Connections 0.80 cm-1 Mini DIN 0.06 cm-1 Mini DIN 0.57 cm-1 Mini DIN 0.57 cm-1 IP67 LTW 0.105 cm-1 Mini DIN 0.105 cm-1 IP67 LTW Order no. 51302256 51302255 51344020 51344120 51344024 51344126
Find the electrode you need at
www.electrodes.net
347
InLab
Cable and plug
Electrodes
METTLER TOLEDO pH, redox, ion-selective and reference electrodes are not manufacturer-specific and can be easily connected to various instruments from other manufacturers. Select the right cable for this purpose. You can pick from a wide range of cable lengths and plug combinations. This is how it works:
1. Find the Mettler Toledo pH electrode to suit your needs, for example using the crossfinder. (see page 336) 2. This electrode either has a MultiPin or S7 connection. (1st column in table) 3. Now select the socket on the instrument (5th column). This depends on the manufacturer. 4. You can now choose from various lengths for some cable models.
Socket on instrument Order number
Connection
Cable length
Description
Plug
MultiPin
1.2 m 2.5 m
BNC/RCA (cinch) BNC/RCA (cinch)
52300009 51340290
1.2 m
BNC/1x4 mm
52300011
1.2 m
DIN/RCA (cinch)
52300007
1.2 m 5m DIN 19262/1x4 mm DIN 19262/1x4 mm 52300005 52300139
1.2 m
Lemo 00/2x4 mm (Metrohm)
59902371
S7 gray
1.2 m
BNC
52300004
1.2 m
DIN 19262
52300001
1.2 m
DIN 19262
52300036
1.2 m
Radiometer type 7
52300013
1.2 m
US standard
52300014
1.2 m
BNC (IP67)
52300046
1.2 m
w thout device plug
52300025
5.0 m 5.0 m
DIN 19262 hard gold plated w thout device plug
52300037
52300002
348
Electrode looking for connection

Connection Cable length Description Plug Socket on instrument Order number
For reference electrodes and temperature sensors
1.2 m
4 mm banana
52300015
1.2 m
2 mm banana
52300016
1.2 m
RCA (cinch)
51343314
S7 red
1.0 m
BNC
59902392
1.0 m
DIN 19262
59902382
1.0 m
4 mm banana
59902434
1.0 m
Radiometer type 7
59902390
1.0 m
Lemo 00 (Metrohm)
59902398
3.0 m
BNC
59902417
3.0 m
DIN 19262
59902408
3.0 m
Radiometer type 7
59902416
3.0 m
Lemo 00 (Metrohm)
59902409
3.0 m
without device plug
59902414
5.0 m
BNC
59902427
5.0 m
DIN 19262 hard gold plated
52300037
5.0 m 10.0 m
DIN 19262 Can be removed without device plug
59902425
59902431
349
Online analytics
Intelligent Sensor Management
Intelligence begins in the head

ISM technology is a new pioneering technology from METTLER TOLEDO for process monitoring, which can considerably reduce maintenance costs for measuring points while simultaneously increasing the reliability of the production process.
Online analytics
351
ISM
Online analytics
Signal processing in the sensor head

Digital communication with transmitters
Plug and Measure Quick and easy installation
The
Optimized sensors
Reference
sensors are recognized immediately on installation The measuring point is available for operation in just seconds Measuring systems with ISM detect the manufacturer, sensor, type, serial number, order number and time of last sensor calibration Calibration report supports trend analysis
electrode monitoring with integrated "Solution Ground" checks for the most common causes of problems associated with pH measurement A system with three electrodes for oxygen sensors improves drift behavior
Dynamic Lifetime Indicator (DLI) Optimized maintenance with sensor wear indicator
Measurement
The ISM solution

What makes the new pH and O2 ISM sensors so special? Signal processing is implemented directly in the sensor head. Digital communication with the transmitter enables low-impedance signal transmission with a digital communication protocol in accordance with IEEE and ensures error-free data exchange, which is not sensitive to disruptive interference and thus increases process reliability. ISM sensors for pH and dissolved oxygen operate in conjunction with the M300 transmitter.
and diagnostic data is monitored continuously Preventive diagnostic information with sensor wear monitoring for pH and oxygen sensors The operating hours of each sensor are recorded The Adaptive Calibration Timer (ACT) monitors the time until the next calibration process DLI makes it possible to estimate the remaining service life of an electrode/sensor in real time
Precalibration of pH electrodes and oxygen sensors in the lab

Sensors
Function overview for all ISM electrodes and sensors

Maximum
and electrodes can be precalibrated in the lab with the iSense Asset Suite
sensor performance for pH electrodes with "Solution Ground" Maximum sensor performance for oxygen sensors with 3-electrode system IP68 digital connection "Plug and Measure" function Enhanced sensor diagnostics CIP/SIP counter
iSense Asset Suite
METTLER TOLEDO ISM sensor range: Sensors for pH and dissolved oxygen
353
Electrodes
Digital pH sensors
Online analytics
Maximum performance, maximum accuracy

ISM pH sensors InPro 3253i
The low-maintenance pH/temperature electrodes in the InPro 3250 family with pre-pressurized liquid electrolyte are ideal for demanding inline measurements. The rugged design is suitable for use under harsh chemical process conditions and of course meets the strict requirements for sterile biotech applications in which CIP and SIP processes are used. The durable electrodes are the ideal choice for fast and precise measurement results. Their high level of performance is maintained even following repeated autoclave or sterilization cycles at 140C. To reduce measurement errors caused by ground potential, the InPro 3250SG version has an integrated platinum auxiliary electrode. This also enables redox measurement as well as enhanced sensor diagnostics.
www.mt.com/InPro3253
354
Equipment features at a glance

Can
Specifications for InPro 3253i

Features pH range 0 - 12 pH Temperature range 0 to 100C (continuous operation) Up to 140C (for sterilization) Pressure range 0 to 4 bar (overpressure at 140C) Connector VP (IP68), Pg 13.5 thread Reference system Argenthal with silver-ion trap Diaphragm Ceramic Reference electrolyte Pre-pressurized liquid electrolyte Length 120 to 425 mm Shaft diameter 12 mm Temperature sensor Integrated Sterilizable Yes Autoclavable Yes Certificates Quality certificate, Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC, ATEX: EEx II 1/2 G IIC T6/T5/T4/T3
be fully autoclaved or sterilized in-situ electrolyte reduces maintenance costs
Pre-pressurized
Typical applications
Biotechnology Fermentation
InPro 3253 electrodes with sterilization-resistant glass

Electrode InPro 3253i/SG InPro 3253i/SG InPro 3253i/SG InPro 3253i/SG Connection Digital Digital Digital Digital Cable length 120 mm 225 mm 325 mm 425 mm Order no. 52005377 52005378 52005379 52005380
AK9 coaxial cables for ISM pH electrodes

Cable socket AK9 AK9 AK9 Cable end Tinned ends Tinned ends Tinned ends Cable length 1m 3m 5 m Order no. 59902167 59902193 59902213
355
Sensors
For dissolved oxygen
Online analytics
Peak performance
ISM oxygen sensors InPro 6850i
The 12 mm InPro 6850i oxygen sensor offers maximum accuracy and optimum cleanability for containers with restricted space or smaller volumes.
The sensor operates according to the proven amperometric principle and is equipped with digital ISM technology. The 316L stainless steel construction enables CIP procedures, steam sterilization or autoclaving to be performed locally, while the high sensor finish prevents contamination of the process. The Teflon/silicone membranes have an integrated steel mesh that makes the membrane more rugged and dramatically increases membrane life. In the innovative 3-electrode system, anodes and reference electrodes are separated, which keeps sensor drift to a minimum.

Can
be fully autoclaved or sterilized in-situ easily replaceable membrane
Durable,
Hygienically Service Low
perfect thanks to the high finish (N5; Ra = 0.4m) can be performed in just a few minutes detection limit of 6 ppb measurement with short response times
Precise
Biotechnology Chemical Food
processes
and drinks industry
356
ISM technology
ISM technology is available in a wide range of METTLER TOLEDO sensors and is based on additional sensor identification and status data, which is stored directly in the sensor head. Each sensor has its own data sheet, as well as calibration and diagnostic information, which is updated continuously and is available in the transmitter.
Quicker
12 mm InPro 6850i
Sensor InPro 6850i InPro 6850i InPro 6850i InPro 6850i Connection Digital Digital Digital Digital Length 120 mm 220 mm 320 mm 420 mm Order no. 52 206 119 52 206 120 52 206 121 52 206 122
AK9 coaxial cables for ISM oxygen sensors

Cable socket AK9 AK9 AK9 Cable end Tinned ends Tinned ends Tinned ends Cable length 1m 3m 5m Order no. 59902167 59902193 59902213
replacement of precalibrated sensors at the measuring point thanks to the "Plug and Measure" function Real-time monitoring of sensor aging using the sensor wear monitor Determination of the next maintenance cycle using the autoclave counter and by checking for membrane and inner body changes Digital documentation of the measuring point by the electronic sensor data sheet Where necessary, ISM supports the switch to flexible maintenance. This results in lower maintenance costs and greater system availability.
357
Transmitters
For pH, redox and dissolved oxygen
Online analytics
Reliable
M300 for pH, redox and oxygen
M300 transmitters for measuring pH, redox and dissolved oxygen and conductivity combine robustness and ease of operation. During the development of these versatile transmitters, there was particular focus on providing optimum ease of operation: from the large display through the easily accessible connection terminals to the plain text interface and "Quick Setup" function for fast startup. Thanks to the innovative USB connection, the M300 is also well equipped for the future for remotecontrolled configuration and startup. The M300 version for ISM also offers the "Plug and Measure" function.
Specifications
Features of M300 pH/redox (4-conductor) Measurement parameters pH, mV and temperature mV range (pH, ORP) -1500 to 1500 mV pH range -1 to 15 pH Resolution 0.01 pH; 1 mV Relative accuracy 0.03 pH; 2 mV Temperature input Pt1000 (Pt100 with adapter) Temperature compensation Automatic/manual Temperature measuring range -30 to 150C Temperature resolution 0.1C Temperature measurement deviation 0.25C Calibration 1 or 2-point calibration, process calibration
Features of M300 O2 (4-conductor) Measurement parameters O2 saturation or concentration and temperature 25 to 130 nA at 25C, 1 bar O2 measuring current (air) Meas. range: 0 to 500% air saturation O2 saturation Meas. dev.: 0.5% of the total measuring range Resolution: 30 pA Meas. range: 0.00 to 20.00 ppm (mg/l) O2 concentration Meas. dev.: 0.5% of the total measuring range Resolution: 30 pA Temperature input NTC 22 kW Temperature compensation Automatic Temperature measuring range -10 to 80C Calibration 1-point calibration (slope or offset) Process calibration (slope or offset)
ISM transmitters
Device version M300 ISM, 12 DIN, single-channel version, multiparameter M300 ISM, 12 DIN, two-channel version, multiparameter Order no. 52 121 355 52 121 357
www.mt.com/M300
358
INTELLIGENT SENSOR MANAGEMENT

Single
or two-channel version available (for conventional or ISM sensors) with two input channels: each channel can be user-configured for pH, redox and oxygen relays (two-channel version: 6 relays) tools for configuration and startup via the USB 2.0 connection process controller with pulse duration, pulse frequency or analog control password protection to prevent unintentional parameter modifications
Specifications
General features Power supply Frequency for AC Current output Digital communication Display Languages Ambient temperature Relative humidity Protection PID process controller HOLD input CONTROL input Alarm contact M300 for ISM 100 to 240 V AC or 20 to 30 V DC 50 to 60 Hz 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA, 22 mA alarm USB connection LCD with backlighting, 4-line e, g, f, i, sp, port, russ, jap -10 to 50C 0 to 95%, non-condensing 14 DIN: IP65 (front); 12 DIN: IP65/NEMA 4X Yes Yes Yes Yes (alarm switch-on delay 0 to 999 sec.) "Plug and Measure" function
Version
Software
PID
Multistage
359
Turbidity sensors
Precise turbidity
360
measurement
361
Turbidity sensors
Turbidity/optical density
Online analytics
Limitless
InPro 8100 single-fiber turbidity sensors are designed for media with a high particle concentration and offer reliable measurements over a wide linear range. The InPro 8100 is available in stainless steel and is used for measurements in biotech applications (cell culture monitoring, pharmaceutical production) or industrial processes.
InPro 8100 turbidity sensors
Specifications for InPro 8100

Features Measuring principle 1-fiber Measuring range 10 to 4000 FTU 0 to 250 g/l (diatomaceous earth as reference) Shaft material Stainless steel (316L) Shaft lengths 120, 205, 297 or 407 mm Sensor diameter 12 mm Surface finish N5 (Ra = 0.4 m) Fiber optic cable 3 m, fixed Sterilizable Yes, steam sterilizable (130C) Autoclavable Yes Certificates ATEX EEx II 1/2 G T6/T5/T4 3.1
362
Autoclavable sensor

Backscattered The
Other highlights
Small Pg
light technology
12 mm diameter saves space fiber optic cable
high sensor finish with no mechanical slots considerably reduces deposits and maintenance measuring range range of applications measuring accuracy
13.5 threads for connection to housing selection of sensor lengths
Integrated Large
Wide
Broad High
InPro 8100
InPro 8100 InPro 8100 InPro 8100 InPro 8100 Length 120 mm 205 mm 297 mm 407 mm Shaft material Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Order no. 52 800 205 52 800 206 52 800 207 52 800 208
363
Turbidity sensors
Turbidity/optical density
Online analytics
Versatile
Trb 8300 For backscatter sensors
The Trb 8300 turbidity transmitter is a versatile, user-friendly measuring instrument with maximum performance. The Trb 8300 is designed for use with InPro 8100 turbidity sensors, which operate according to the backscatter principle to determine the particle concentration. Thanks to its wide measuring range, enhanced equipment features and high level of functionality, the transmitter currently offers the most attractive price/ performance ratio on the market.
Specifications for Trb 8300
Features Measuring principle Backscatter fiber optics Light source LED (Light Emitting Diode) Light wavelength 880 nm Selectable measuring units FTU, NTU, EBC, g/l, %, ppm Measuring range With InPro 8100 10 FTU to 4000 FTU (Formazin Turbidity Units) 0 to 250 g/l suspended solids (diatomaceous earth) Resolution 0.01 FTU Parameter sets Three (A, B and C), can be stored and retrieved via the software menu or remote access Calibration Three operating modes: manual, process or multipoint calibration (1 to 5 points) General features Power supply 100 to 240 V AC, 25 W maximum, 47 to 63 Hz or 20 to 32 V DC, 25 W maximum Number of outputs 4 x 0/4 to 20 mA Alarm contact Relay contact, mechanical SPDT, floating Alarm switch-on delay 0 to 600 sec. Wash contact Relay contact, mechanical SPDT, floating Limit contacts 2 relay contacts, mechanical SPDT, floating HOLD input Yes CONTROL input Yes Security Password-protected menu access Display Backlit LCD, 20 alphanumeric characters x 4 lines
364

Various Three
Other highlights
RS232
calibration options independent parameter sets for measurement in various media or at different calibration points Choice of several measuring units: FTU, NTU, EBC, g/l, % and ppm Backlit display with menucontrolled text Four 0/4 to 20 mA current outputs for scalable measuring ranges Multistage password protection
interface for digital data output Easy installation, low maintenance
www.mt.com/Trb8300
Transmitter
Trb 8300 (100 to 240 V AC) Order no. 52800204
365
Titration in restoration
Working with Government collections
366
Titration
Introduction: Cristina Mazzola and Peter Albert
Under the umbrella of the KUR Program to Preserve and Restore Mobile Cultural Assets, Cristina Mazzola (pictured) and Peter Albert, restorers of archeological cultural artifacts, have been working on the "Mass Finds in Archeological Collections" project at the Bavarian State Archeological Collection, Munich, since 2008. Their main focus is on iron.
The Bavarian State Archaeological Collection, Munich (ASM) is responsible for collecting, preserving and exhibiting Bavarian objects dating back to pre- and early history. In the ASM's restoration department, conservation and restoration work is carried out on all archeological object groups and materials, which are in varying states of preservation. Some of the artefacts on the workbench include early medieval iron swords, Celtic artifacts urns and Roman glass goblets.
367
Introduction
Cristina Mazzola and Peter Albert
Titration
Medieval wooden artifact preserved original and the reconstruction
What to do with all these artifacts?

Major archaeological excavations and the closure of intermediate repositories for branches of the State Office for Historical Monuments mean that an even greater number of finds have recently had to be accommodated as good as possible and placed into storage in repositories in order to slow down progressive disintegration. It is mainly the iron and wood material groups that are at great risk, since they are prone to very rapid deterioration and even total loss, which could mean that these valuable "records" of the past would be lost forever. The number of finds is exceptionally high; new entries alone in the ASM's collection include over 30,000 iron objects from early medieval graves
(5th to 7th century). Although the material culture of this period is well known, many of these objects could reveal important new aspects that may shed light on the origins of our own early history. In addition to iron finds from the early medieval period, the ASM is entrusted with a large number of finds from the Roman and Celtic period. These include objects from the Celtic settlement of Manching near Ingolstadt, which is one of Europe's largest and most important Celtic settlements and has been excavated for several decades by the Roman Germanic Commission. Numerous objects from these excavations are the property of the Federal Republic of Germany and have been entrusted to the care of the ASM. The preservation of these 25,000 or so iron objects from Manching and the care of the anti-
cipated objects from forthcoming excavations are among the key tasks of the Bavarian State Archeological Collection, Munich.
Problem areas: iron and wood

In order to manage this situation, the ASM together with the RomanGermanic Central Museum of Mainz (RGZM) applied to the Federal Cultural Foundation (KUR) for a research project focusing on "Mass Finds in Archeological Collections". The aim is to develop efficient and effective methods and processes for handling large numbers of iron and wooden objects. The results should, in future, contribute to the long-term and appropriate preservation of archeological cultural artifacts. One main aspect of the project is research into the corrosion pheno-
368
Early medieval iron buckle with silver inlay Original state, X-ray and final state
mena of iron objects. Here, the Restoration department uses a Mssbauer spectroscopic system for scientific analysis. Another area of focus is the desalinization of iron objects in an alkaline sodium sulfite solution, as chloride in conjunction with moisture and oxygen causes disintegration.
Titration for optimum desalinization

In order to optimize the implementation of this proven method in restoration and conservation, it is essential that the desalinization process can be tracked as accurately as possible. This is achieved by means of repeated determination of the chloride content in the desalinization solution using titration with silver nitrate: as soon as the salinity starts to stagnate, the bath solution must be
changed. The concentration gradient between ambient liquid and object is therefore essential for this method. Process control can thus be improved and ideal timing ensured. The conserved quality of archaeological wet wood can be attributed to the fact that the wood has been preserved under water for hundreds or even thousands of years. Although the wood's external appearance has been preserved, its cell stability has not. Conservation work must be carried out to fill these affected vacuoles. This is achieved by long-term treatment in thermostatable impregnation tanks in water-soluble polyethylene glycol (PEG) baths where the water is gradually replaced by the conservation material. The correct concentration of the baths is ensured by determining the water content using Karl Fischer titration. The wood is
then freeze-dried. To determine the chloride and water content of the different treatment baths, the ASM uses a Mettler Toledo T90 titrator from the Excellence Line, and for exact sample preparation for titration, a Mettler Toledo XP204S precision balance.
Cristina Mazzola and Peter Albert
369
Excellence titrators
Titration
Is there something in there?

370
371
T50, T70 and T90
Milestone
One Click Titration by METTLER TOLEDO
A new milestone for simple, efficient and secure titration integrated in the T50, T70 and T90 titrators of the Titration Excellence line. It offers intuitive and easy operation, maximizes efficiency in routine tasks and prevents potential operator errors. With a modern interface, "Hot Plug & Play" function for peripheral devices and comprehensive method editor, the entire spectrum of everyday through to complex titration tasks can be easily carried out.
Titration
372
Modular Custom-tailored
The modular platform of the Titration Excellence line meets optimum requirements, enabling you to also overcome future challenges. The option of implementing a custom-tailored hardware and software expansion at any time protects your investment.
Efficient Simple Secure

373
T50, T70 and T90
Titration
Efficient
Shortcuts can be set up individually on the home screen. Manual or automatic tasks can thus be started with a single keystroke. Thanks to the Plug & Play feature, sensors, burettes, dispensing units, sample changers, balances, etc., are immediately ready for connection and use. Installation errors are thus eliminated.
Simple
The intuitive user guidance of the bright color touchscreen make operation extremely user-friendly. Thanks to intelligent navigation features, task buttons that display the current analysis information and the unique home screen, users will quickly become familiar with the device.
Secure
Dual Mode operation enables work to be carried out from the terminal or the LabX PC (or both). The analysis results are stored in the LabX database via the network. Network integration of the titrators is incredibly easy thanks to the integrated Ethernet connection. The Titration Excellence line combines security with flexibility.
374
Clever head
Reliable resource monitoring, automatic peripherals checks e.g., on Plug&Play sensors and burettes before starting an analysis, as well as flexible user management maximize security and minimize expensive errors. The sensor chip of the new pH and metal electrodes, which is safely integrated in the electrode head, stores all the relevant sensor data. The sensor is clearly recognized by the Excellence titrator.
Sensor chip
You can therefore always be sure that the right electrode is used in the right state.
375
T50, T70 and T90
Titration
We are family
Simple and secure
T50 The entry level device in the Excellence line The ready-to-go system can be operated immediately and offers all the necessary features for titrations. Users who require a simple, rugged and easy-to-comprehend titrator to perform routine tasks quickly and efficiently can choose between two versions. T50 M terminal: Manual titration stand and terminal as control unit T50 A terminal: Rondolino auto-titration stand and terminal as control unit
Tips and tricks for titration can be found in the reference section starting on page 548.
Flexibility for the future

T70 The all-round device Multitasking, flexible method concept, extendable structure (additional sensor and conductivity board or T90 functionality) and method loops for combining various methods T70 is a flexible and extendable system that can be easily adapted to current and future requirements.
Unlimited possibilities
T90 Maximum flexibility Parallel titration, conditional method functions (if...then decision, which is used to continue the analysis) and serial sequences that can be used to combine individual sample series for different methods a titrator that offers maximum flexibility when developing methods for performing complex analyses and automation tasks.
www.mt.com/titration
Software for instrument control for titrators from METTLER TOLEDO can be found starting on page 142.
Starting on page 394.

376
Comparison table for Titration Excellence line

Features Titration modes T50 T70 T90 Yes Yes Yes Yes 12 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 (internal) +7 external Acid/base, argentometric (Cl, Br, etc.), redox, complexometric and photometric t trations Yes Yes pH-stat, pH, ion-selective and conductivity direct measurement Yes Yes Two-phase titrations Yes Yes Conductivity titrations Yes Yes One Click Titration Shortcuts per user 12 12 Hot Plug & Play Burette recognition with titrant and titer Yes Yes Plug & Play sensor recogn tion Yes Yes Dispensing unit Yes Yes Rondo sample changer Yes Yes Rondolino automatic titration stand Yes Yes USB printer Yes Yes Memory stick Yes Yes USB barcode reader Yes Yes
Dispensing units Max. number to t trate and dose 1 (internal) 1 (internal) +3 external Max. number to dose only +3 external Methods and series
Control and evaluation
Learn titration for automatic optimization of the t tration parameters used in the method Number of method functions per method Number of loops per method: combination of multiple t trations in one method "If...then" decision within the method functions Express sample can be inserted into the current series Series sequences: combination of individual sample series for various methods Number of samples per series Preprogrammed METTLER TOLEDO methods for key applications Max. number of methods End point t tration (EP) w th continuous dynamic t trant addition Equivalence point titration (EQP) with dynamic or incremental titrant add tion Five different curve evaluations for EQP titrations: standard, asymmetrical, segmented, min., max.
Yes 15 1 120 >30 120 Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 Yes 1 2/2 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/0
Yes 60 3 Yes 120 >30 120 Yes Yes Yes Yes 40 10 7 Yes To T90 2/1 4/2 2/1 2/1 2/1 2/0
Yes 120 6 Yes Yes 10 120 >30 120 Yes Yes Yes Yes 40 30 8 Yes Yes 3/1 6/2 3/1 3/1 3/1 3/0 *T90 terminal
Predefined formulas for the most frequently used calculations and freely definable calculation formulae Number of calculations per method Task list Number of tasks Number of tasks running in parallel Online help Parallel titration Can be extended Sensor boards Analog or conductiv ty (optional/standard) Sensor inputs Potentiometric (optional/standard) Polarized (optional/standard) Reference (optional/standard) Temperature PT1000 (optional/standard) Conductivity (optional/standard) Order no.
*T50 M terminal *T70 terminal *T50 A terminal
* T50 M terminal: 51109001 (with terminal, 10 ml burette and k t with manual t tration stand)
T50 A terminal: 51109002 (w th terminal, 10 ml burette and kit w th Rondolino automatic t tration stand) T70 terminal: 51109011 (including terminal) T90 terminal: 51109013 (including terminal)
377
Automation solutions
Rondo
Titration
378
All-around solution
Rondo automation for direct titrations Highest level of flexible automation
379
Automation solutions
Rondo
Titration
Rondo 30
The Rondo 30 system in combination with T50, T70 or T90 Excellence titrators enables fully automatic direct titration of 12, 15, 20 or 30 samples in different sample containers with optimum ease of use with just a single click. Modularity for maximum application flexibility
Can be extended at any time with intelligent accessories for automatic sample preparation (pumps, DH100 heating system, magnetic stirrer), a second tower for separating different titrations, as well as kits for CSB and KF titrations the system can grow to meet your requirements.
Order no.
Rondo 12 Rondo 15 Rondo 20 Rondo 30
for 12 samples in 250 ml PP titration beakers (MT), standard beakers 400 ml (low form) or 600 ml (high form)
51108001
for 15 samples in standard beakers 150 ml (low form) or 250 ml (high form) for 20 samples in 100 ml PP titration beakers (MT) for 30 samples in 80 ml PP titration beakers (MT)
51108002 51108003 51108004
Quality assurance through intelligent automation

No risk of carry-over thanks to the highly efficient PowerShower rinsing unit and samples in the rack are protected against contamination from the surrounding air by the CoverUp attachment.
380
Rondo 60 and 60 plus

Maximum sample throughput The Rondo system in combination with T70 or T90 Excellence titrators for fully automated sampling and high sample throughput.
Safety and reliability

Maximum precision in sample aliquotation using sample loops of up to 10 ml with the SU24 sampling unit.
Efficient processing
Fully automated pH measurements directly in test tubes, fast and precise aliquotation of 20 to 80 ml sample volumes, high sample throughput (up to 120 samples), divided between two Rondo sample changers, which are processed in parallel by a T90 titrator.
Order no. 51108005 51108006
Rondo 60
for sampling 60 samples in standard test tubes
for direct pH measurement and sampling of 60 samples in standard test tubes
Rondo 60 plus
381
Karl Fischer titrators
How much H2O?
Titration
V20/V30 KF volumeters / C20/C30 KF coulometers
Karl Fischer titration

Karl Fischer titration is the specific standard method for determining water content and delivers reliable and precise results in minutes. With the volumetric and coulometric Karl Fischer titrators, the operator just has to press a key to start the water content determination process.
Titration
In 1935,Karl Fischer developed a method for the quantitative determination of water, which is still used today and is based on the redox reaction of iodine with SO2 in anhydrous methanol and with pyridine as the buffer reagent. The mode of action of the Karl Fischer reagent is based on the fact that iodine and SO2 only react with one another in the presence of water:
I2 + SO2 + 3B + CH3-OH + H2O 2 BH+ I- + BH+ CH3OSO3Pyridine or imidazole are used as base B, the maximum reaction rate is pH 5.5 - 8. Volumetric or, for smaller quantities of water, coulometric analysis can be carried out, where the end point of titration is indicated by the presence of excess iodine. Water content determination is carried out on many substances/substance mixtures, such as petroleum, solvents, cosmetics, foods, fats and oils, etc.
Suitable for all samples

The V20 and V30 compact volumetric Karl Fischer titrators determine water in concentrations of 100 ppm to 100% in a wide range of liquid, solid and gaseous samples.
A V20 or V30 volumetric titrator is used to determine water content of up to 100%.
Tips and tricks for water determination according to Karl Fischer can be found in the reference section starting on page 552.
385
V20/V30 KF volumetric titrators / C20/C30 KF coulometers
Titration
One Click
For very low water content
C20 and C30 compact coulometric Karl Fischer titrators provide very fast and precise titration of samples with a low water content of 1 ppm to 5%.
A C20 or C30 coulometer is used to determine water content of 1 ppm to 5%.
386
Just a simple touch of a key activates numerous routines on the volumetric titrators and coulometers.
Rinse burette
Press the shortcut to rinse the burette.
Solvent change
Press the shortcut to change the solvent or reagent.
Method start
Press the shortcut to start the corresponding method.
Series start
Press the shortcut to start a predefined sample series.
387
V20/V30 KF volumetric titrators / C20/C30 KF coulometers
Hot stuff
Efficient titration with Stromboli
Automatic Karl Fischer titrators offer numerous advantages such as greater reproducibility and simplified operational procedures. The Stromboli oven sample changer further increases analysis efficiency. It can be used to analyze up to 14 samples without operator action. Since the sample has no direct contact with the reagents, it is also suitable for products that trigger side reactions with Karl Fischer reagents. Stromboli can be used with V30 and C30 titrators.
Titration
KF volumetric titrators and coulometers

One Click Titration Hot Plug & Play C20X* C30D* Shortcuts per user on user-specific 4 12 start screen Solvent or reagent control Solvent Manager Burette recogn tion with titrant and t ter USB printer Stromboli oven sample changer Homogenizer TTL "Expert routine" user groups External extraction/resolution Number of samples per series 120 120 120 120 120 Pre-programmed 11 8 METTLER TOLEDO methods Max. number of user methods 5 120 5 5 120 English/German/French/Spanish/Italian/Chinese/Russian/Polish/Korean Connectivity for LabX t tration LabX Pro FDA 21 CFR Part 11 supported Starter package 51105500 51105505 51105510 51105512 51105515 Volumetric V20 4 V30 12 Coulometric C20D* 4 C30X* 12 120 8 120 51105516
Automation User management Methods and series
Languages PC software
Order number
* X = Cell without diaphragm D = Cell with diaphragm
388
The easy solution

The DO308 manual Karl Fischer drying oven supports simple oven applications with single samples as samples can be added manually. It can be operated with the C20 and C30 coulometric Karl Fischer titrators or the V20, V30, T70 and T90 volumetric Karl Fischer titrators.
Stromboli
Order no. Stromboli DO308 oven 51105200 51371200
Accessories
Sample vials, 25 ml, 46 pcs Closure caps for sample containers, 46 pcs Seals for sample containers (aluminum), 144 pcs Gas drying unit Stromboli tube set for drying un t Drying tube, bent Purge gas tube Teflon stoppers Gas inlet Gas tube set Stromboli/t trator connection cable Air pump unit for Stromboli Stop valve Heated transfer tube Aluminum inserts for determining drift (2 pcs) 1 bottle molecular sieves Silica gel, 1 kg
Order no. 51108691 51108692 51108693 51108660 51108666 51108639 51108837 51108668 51108669 51108695 51190589 51108673 51108688 51108836 51105246 00071478 00105080
Convenient coulometry
For the majority of samples, the diaphragmless cell is more user-friendly, as a catholyte is not required and the anolyte can be changed using the Solvent Manager in One Click.
Safe handling of chemicals

The Solvent Manager fills, empties and replaces reagents. Control is by means of the titrator while complete safety is ensured by the fill level sensor in the collector bottle.
389
General titrators
Entry level DL15, DL22 F&B, DL28
For simple tasks

DL22 F&B The food and beverage analyzer
The DL22 F&B analyzer is specially designed for analysis in the food and beverage industry. It includes the methods most commonly used in this industry, with predefined parameters, making life as easy as possible.
Titration
390
Everything about titration

Comprehensive and additional information about titration can be found in the reference section on page 548.
391
General titrators
Entry level DL15, DL22 F&B, DL28
Titration
DL15 3 steps to your result

The DL15 is ideal for end-point titrations or pH measurements. The DL15 is most often used to determine the acid and base content (acidity and alkalinity).
DL22 F&B The food and beverage analyzer

The DL22 F&B analyzer is specially designed for the food and beverage industry. It includes the methods most commonly used in this industry, with predefined parameters, making life as easy as possible. Three predefined options are available for selecting the control parameters for titration.
392
DL28 More flexibility

The DL28 is an easy-to-use, compact end-point and equivalence point titrator. If required, you can access all titration parameters for fine-tuning. This increases flexibility and enables you to constantly further optimize methods.
Functions and specifications

Titration modes
Acid/base, pH Argentometric (Cl, Br, etc.), redox, complexometric, photometric, pH measurements, ion-selective measurements DL15 DL22 F&B DL28
Methods and databases

Predefined METTLER TOLEDO methods Memory for user-defined methods 3 23 31
Control and evaluation

End point titration (EP) Equivalence point titration (EQP) Predefined, selectable parameters (fast, normal or cautious) for titrant addition and measured value transfer Open parameters
Display and user guidance

Online curve Alphanumeric input w th special characters, indices and exponents
Documentation
GLP-compliant printout
Dosing
1, 5, 10, 20 ml replaceable burettes
Peripheral devices
Parallel printer connection (OKI B4400, HP-compatible; PCL3 emulation) Serial printer connection (RS-P42) Rondolino automatic titration stand Order no.
51109352
51109350 51109351
393
Accessories
Titration
Titration
Accessories
Description Terminal (with connection cable and protective cover) Protective cover for the terminal Conductivity sensor board pH sensor board Dispensing unit (for dispensing and t tration) Barcode reader with USB interface and power cable T70 -> T90 upgrade set External power supply unit 6-pin CAN cable, 20 cm 6-pin CAN cable, 60 cm USB cable A-A, 180 cm Y cable for parallel pump and stirrer connection Electrode holder set, complete, includes:
Electrode holder, fastening screw, electrode sleeve
V20 and V30

Order no. 51109017 11132570 51109840 51109818 51109030 51191725 51109960 51109806 51109874 51109886 51191689 51109889 51109195 Description External power supply unit (100 - 240 V) Protective cover for touchscreen Threaded ring Cover O-ring Titration beaker Fastening screw (for load cell) Magnetic stirring rod Drying tube holder Drying tubes w th cover (3 pcs) Seal (drying tube of titration stand) Solvent Manager 1 l brown glass bottle 2 flat gaskets (minimum order quantity: 5 pcs) Screw cap (for bottles) 2 suction/dispensing tubes Adapter for permanent suction DM143-SC double pin platinum electrode SC-LEMO 72 cm triaxial cable 250 g molecular sieve Order no. 51105795 51105567 51107459 51107462 51190366 51107463 51107474 51191159 23915 23961 51107492 51105600 71296 23981 23937 51107481 51105594 51109299 89601 71478
Manual titration stand, complete, includes: Titration stand, fastening screw, spacer ring, clamping ring, threaded ring, titration beaker (2 pcs), stopper set, taper joint adapter, electrode sleeve Manual titration k t, complete, includes: Manual t tration stand, compact stirrer, propeller stirrer (2 pcs) Autom. titration kit, complete, includes:
51109190 51109220 51109221 51109118 51109084 51190362 51109169 51108016 51108065 51108780 51107453 0655073 101229 023842 025652 025653 025654 51107065 51105605
Electrode holder (complete), compact stirrer, propeller stirrer
Manual titration stand, without accessories Fastening screw Titration Excellence connection cable - RS-P26 Adapter for dispensing tube SP250 perista tic pump OE06 output expander for additional auxiliary devices DH100 240 V heating system DV705 KF titration stand Micro propeller (for compact stirrer) Propeller stirrer (for compact stirrer) Spacer ring for man. titration stand Threaded ring for man. titration stand Clamping ring for man. titration stand Electrode holder Bottle holder, for two 1-liter bottles Tx Karl Fischer k t
Accessories for sample handling

Adapter for KF volumeters
Visco Spoon (sample addition for viscous samples)
Order no.
51107668
All information regarding titration can be found starting on page 548.
Rondo sample changers

Rondo 30 upgrade set Rondo 60 upgrade set Rondo 60 plus upgrade set Rondo CSB set Rondo KF set CoverUpTM attachment SU24 sampling unit 20 ml aliquotation container 80 ml aliquotation container 51108225 51108017 51108112 51108014 51108015 51108470 51108018 51108314 51108161
394
395
Accessories
Titration
Titration
C20/C30
Accessories
External power supply unit (100 - 240 V) Protective cover for touchscreen Coulometer load cell Fastening screw (for titration beakers/load cell) Sample stoppers (PTFE) w th septum Septum (12 pcs) Generator electrode with diaphragm with straight drying tube Generator electrode without diaphragm with straight drying tube Cable for generator electrode DM143-SC double pin platinum electrode SC-LEMO 72 cm triaxial cable Tip holder Magnetic stirring rod Seal (drying tube of titration stand) Solvent Manager set Suction tube 1 l brown glass bottle 250 g molecular sieve Silicon grease
Burettes
Order no. 51105795 51105567 51108732 51108752 51108741 51108740
51108751 51108753 51107830 51109299 51109183 23960 51191159 51107492 51105600 23936 71296 71478 71300
DV1000 Plug & Play burettes

DV1001 PnP interchangeable burette, 1 ml DV1005 PnP interchangeable burette, 5 ml DV1001 PnP interchangeable burette, 10 ml DV1020 PnP interchangeable burette, 20 ml Plug & Play burette upgrade (for Dv10xx)
Order no. 51107503 51107500 51107501 51107502 51109117
Accessories for burettes*

Centering ring, 5 ml Centering ring, 10 ml Centering ring, 20 ml Glass cylinder, 1 ml Glass cylinder, 5 ml Glass cylinder, 10 ml Glass cylinder, 20 ml Piston, 1 ml Piston, 5 ml Piston, 10 ml Piston, 20 ml Clamping screw 51107518 Operating instructions Stopcock, ceramic valve disc for reagents with crystallization tendency Stopcock, PFTE valve disc Brown glass bottle, 1 liter, for reagents, solvent and waste Burette holder Connection tube 51107129 Dispensing tube with siphon tip (70 cm) Dispensing tube with siphon tip (100 cm) Drying tube with cover Holder for drying tube Seal for screw caps, 23937 Light protection tube (UV) Molecular sieve, 3 A, 250 g Set of labels Siphon tips (5 pcs) NS 14.5 stopper Suction tube (83 cm) Tip holder for burette tip * Burettes with calibration certificate available on request
Order no. 51107519 51107520 51107521 51107533 51107100 51107101 51107102 51107535 51107115 51107116 51107117 51709784 51107525 51107537 071296 023645 025687 025961 023961 023915 023981 023644 071478 51107506 023240 023646 025688 023960
DO308
Accessories
Glass sample vessel Gas drying unit with flow meter Piston rod GL37 screw cap for sample tube Stop valve Aluminum inserts for sample vessels, 50 pcs Sample tube Tube set Transfer tube NS14.5 silicone stopper (10 pcs) Three-hole adapter with stopper for volumetric titrations Gas inlet stopper for DL32/DL39 Air pump, optional Silicon grease
Order no. 51108657 51108660 51371101 51191129 51191130 51108649 51371206 51108676 51108837 00023276
00023982 51108761 51108670 00071300
396
Titration beakers
PP t tration beaker (100 ml), 1400 pcs PP t tration beaker (250 ml), 500 pcs PP t tration beaker (100 ml), PP t tration beaker, colored (red), 100 ml, 1400 pcs Two-phase titration beaker for surfactant titrations Cover (plastic), for 80 ml titration beaker, 16 pcs Glass titration beaker, 80 ml, 20 pcs PP t tration beaker (80 ml) for Rondo 30, 30 pcs Glass titration beaker, 150 ml (DL18/35 closure ring #23901 required) Glass titration beaker, 250 ml (DL18/35 closure ring #23902 required) Glass titration beaker, 250 ml, 10 pcs Semi-micro glass titration beaker, 5 - 20 ml Thermostatable glass titration beaker, 100 ml Thermostatable glass titration beaker, 150 ml for DV705/DL31/38 Thermostatable glass titration beaker, 150 ml for DL18/35 Including closure ring #23902 Titration beaker, 250 ml total, 180 ml usable volume for DV705/DL31/38 Order no. 101974 023829 025777 51107655 101448 101446 51108030 023917 023918 023515 023516 023517 51107497 023976 51107463
Adapters for reagent bottles

Diameter 40.5 mm; height 3.5 mm (Germany/Merck) Diameter 37.5 mm; height 5 mm (USA/Fisher) Order no. 023774 023787
Printer
Why is burette calibration important?

Even the best titration curve is no use if the burette used is not calibrated regularly. Calibration ensures that the displayed volume matches the actual dispensed volume exactly. You can therefore be sure that the results are accurate. We calibrate your burettes with optimum reliability!
Order no. RS-P42 alphanumeric printer,cable not included 00229265 RS-P42 cable for DL31/32/38/39/15/22/28 51190362 Paper for RS-P42/GA42 (5 pcs) 072456 Ribbon cassette for GA42 and RS-P42 (5 pcs) 065975 USB-P25 including cable 11124301 Paper roll (2 pcs) 12120799 Ribbon cassette 12120798 OKI B4400 laser printer (cable supplied with titrator) EU version 51191608
397
Accessories
Titration
Titration
398
Intelligent heads
Sensitive for titration

Electrode cables
SC-LEMO 60 cm cable, for Plug & Play and conventional sensors SC-LEMO 100 cm cable, for Plug & Play and conventional sensors SC-LEMO 160 cm cable, for Plug & Play and conventional sensors MultiPin cable LEMO/Pt1000 70 cm, for DG117-Water/DGi117-Water MultiPin cable LEMO/Pt1000 100 cm, for DG117-Water/DGi117-Water Y cable (for connecting the DP5 to the power supply connection and t trator) Order no. 00089601 00089602 51108034 51109296 51109297 51109905
Conventional reference electrodes for pH/ISE/surfactant half cells

DX200 glass reference electrode DX202-SC plastic reference electrode
Order no. 51089935 51109295
Plug & Play, combined metal electrodes with sensor chip

DMi101-Mini semi-micro platinum ring electrode, ceramic diaphragm for redox titrations for small sample volumes and Rondo 30 sample changer DMi102-SC semi-micro silver ring electrode, ceramic diaphragm for argentometric titrations for small sample volumes and Rondo 30 sample changer DMi140-SC platinum electrode ring, for redox titrations (3M KCI, saturated with AgCI) DMi141-SC silver ring electrode, for argentometric t trations (1M KNO3) DMi144-SC platinum electrode ring, for redox titrations with the Rondo CSB kit DMi145-SC silver ring electrode with movable easy-to-clean sleeve junction, for argentometric titrations, contaminated or viscous samples DMi147-SC platinum ring electrode, for argentometric titrations without pH change, pH glass electrode as reference, no ceramic frit DMi148-SC silver ring electrode, for redox t trations without pH change, pH glass electrode as reference, no ceramic frit
Order no.
51109523
51109533 51109520 51109530 51109521
Adapters/spare parts for electrodes
Order no. SC-DIN 65 cm cable for DL21/25 089603 SC-DIN 100 cm cable for DL21/25 089604 SC banana cable for DM143 to DL18/35 51108061 SC-LEMO ISE electrode cable (banana plug) 51089954 Adapter, DIN-LEMO 089600 Replacement mirror cap for DP550/660/DP5 (complete) 022684 DS500 membrane k t 51107669 DS800 TwoPhase electrolyte solution 51109452 DS800 TwoPhase emulgator 51109453
51109531
51109522
51109532 Order no. 00089598 00089599 51107699
Plug & Play, combined pH glass electrodes with sensor chip
Order no. DGi101-SC pH micro electrode, for small titration beakers and Rondo 30 sample changer, for aqueous solutions. 51109507 DGi102-Mini pH micro electrode, for small titration beakers and Rondo 30 sample changer, for aqueous solutions. 51109508 DGi111-SC pH glass electrode 51109500 DGi112-Pro pH glass electrode, with movable easy-to-clean sleeve junction for cr tical samples 51109501 DGi113-SC pH glass electrode, with movable easy-to-clean sleeve junction for non-aqueous titrations 51109502 DGi114-SC pH glass electrode, with movable easy-toclean sleeve junction for aqueous solutions 51109503 DGi115-SC pH glass electrode w th easy-to-clean sleeve junction 51109504 DGi116-Solvent pH glass electrode, with movable easy-to-clean sleeve junction for non-aqueous media 51109505 DGi117-Water pH glass electrode with integrated temperature sensor (PT1000) 51109506
Conventional metal electrodes

DMi140-SC combined platinum electrode ring, for redox titrations (3M KCI, saturated w th AgCI) DMi141-SC combined silver ring electrode, for argentometric t trations (1M KNO3) DM143-SC double pin platinum electrode
DM405-SC combined, sulfidized silver billet electrode (Ag2S) with ceramic ring frit for argentometric titrations 51109291
Photoelectrodes
DP5 Phototrode, selectable wavelength 520, 555, 590, 620 and 650 nm, including LEMO connection cable Adapter for use with DL21/25
Order no.
51109300 51109907 Order no. 51109828 51108032 Order no. 51107670 51109540 Order no. 51302401 51340266
Temperature sensors
DT1000 - PT 1000 DT1000 adapter for Rondolino and Rondo
Conventional, combined pH glass electrodes
Order no. DG111-SC pH glass electrode 00089596 DG113-SC pH glass electrode, with movable easy-to-clean sleeve junction for non-aqueous titrations 00089632 DG115-SC pH glass electrode with easy-to-clean sleeve junction 00089806 Order no. 51109286
Surfactant electrodes
DS500 for aqueous surfactant titrations DS800 TwoPhase for two-phase surfactant t trations
InLab717 4-pole glass cell, 10 S/cm...500 mS/cm, for conductivity titrations InLab718 2-pole glass cell, 0.1...200 S/cm, for low-conductivity titrations
Conventional half cell

DG300-SC pH half cell pH half cell in association with DX200 reference electrode
399
Density measurement and refractometry
400
401
DE/RE/DR line
Density measurement & refractometry

402
Simultaneous, successive
Density & refractive index
The days of manual measurements with pycnometers, hydrometers and optical Abbe refractometers are a thing of the past. Digital instruments from METTLER TOLEDO determine the density and refractive index easily, with a high degree of accuracy and with some instruments even simultaneously.
RE refractometer nD, Brix and concentrations

Simply insert the sample and press a key! When measuring the refractive index using the RE refractometer, incorrect readings for light/dark transitions are a thing of the past.
www.mt.com/density
403
DE/RE/DR line
Select the right density meter or refractometer

Benchtop instruments Fast and reliable measurements DE/RE line Our DE density meters and RE refractometers are fast, accurate and reliable, and are equipped with integrated thermostats. DR line Compact DR combined meters are ideal for the simultaneous determination of the density and refractive index. SC1/SC30/LiQC Save time and money with our automation solutions for benchtop density meters, refractometers and combined instruments. Densito/Refracto Our PortableLab series of portable instruments includes the Densito density meter and Refracto refractometer for mobile use; both are GLP-compliant. Quick-Brix Handy Quick-Brix refractometers measure Brix values quickly and reliably.
Combined instruments
Simultaneous determination accelerates analysis Automatic increase in productivity
Automation
Portable instruments
Measurements for mobile use
DE density meter
Density, Brix or API can be determined quickly and easily DE density meters determine the density of liquid samples (flexural resonator principle) quickly and easily. The result is displayed directly as density, specific weight or other units such as Brix or API degree. The DA-100M density meter is a compact system with three decimal places. It is equipped with a Peltier thermostat and an air pump for drying the measuring cell.
404
DR combined meter
The density and refractive index can be determined simultaneously Determine the density and refractive index simultaneously using the DR combined meter. Measurements are quicker, easier and more accurate.
DeltaRange density oscillation cells In many cases, measurement accuracy of five decimal places over the entire measuring range is not required because the density of many organic solvents and alcohol solutions is less than 1g/cm3. The new DE45 DeltaRange density meter and the DR45 DeltaRange combined meter from METTLER TOLEDO offer tailor-made solutions for these types of applications at an attractive price/performance ratio.
Density meters, refractometers and combined meters

Built-in Two
Peltier thermostat
user levels provide protection against unauthorized modifications to measuring methods and instrument settings scanners for the quick input of user names and sample IDs
Barcode
Density measurement
Model DA-100M DE40 DE45 DeltaRange DE51 Accuracy 0.001 g/cm3 0.0001 g/cm3 0.000021)/0.00005 g/cm3 0.00002 g/cm3 Repeatability 0.001 g/cm3 0.0001 g/cm3 0.00001 g/cm3 0.00001 g/cm-3 Temperature range 15 - 40C 4 - 90C 4 - 90C 4 - 70C Order no. 51320001 51320300 51320360 51320302
Measurement of refractive index

RE40D RE50 0.0001 (nD) 0.00005 (nD) 0.0001 (nD) 0.00001 (nD) 15 - 70C 15 - 50C 51320403 51320401
Measurement of density and refractive index2)

DR40 DR45 DeltaRange
1) 2)
0.00005 g/cm3 0.0001 (nD) 0.000021)/0.00005 g/cm3 0.00005 (nD)
0.00001 g/cm3 15 - 50C 0.0001 (nD) 0.00001 g/cm3 15 - 50C 0.00001 (nD)
51320501 51320502
In the range 0-1 g/cm3/15-20C SC1 or SC30 sample delivery and cleaning un t required
405
Automation
SC1, SC30

406
4 in 1 go
Maximum reliability Minimum effort
LiQC system
Smooth, automatic multiparameter analysis
High resolution instruments alone are no guarantee for accurate measurements. Results can still be affected by the user or by the character of the sample. Automation is therefore not only the best way to ensure quick amortization, it also helps to prevent measurement errors.
LiQC revolutionizes quality control tests for liquid samples through its seamless and smooth automation approach. The system increases productivity and data security. Questionable measurement results are filtered automatically. The system checks automatically whether results are within the tolerances. In addition, LiQC can be integrated into any information and management system in the lab without problems. LiQC is available in twoversions: LiQC Standard transforms your PC into a high-performance system for remote control and data acquisition for automatic measuring systems, based on a DE density meter, an RE refractometer or a DR combined meter. LiQC Standard is equipped with a fingerprint reader for biometric user identification. This patented technology replaces laborious user and passwordmanagement, and also increases data and system security. LiQC Multi-device enables the additional connection of a SevenEasy pH meter and/or a color measurement instrument. LiQC Multi-device can even be used to combine a DE density meter and an RE refractometer in an automated measuring system. The full barcode functionality also simplifies automatic sample data input and method selection based on the product. The SC30 sample changer can even be combined with an SC30BC barcode scanner, which scans in all sample information directly from the barcode labels on thebottles fully automatically!
More information about density measurement, the measuring principle and determination of the refractive index, can be found in the reference section starting on page 556.
www.mt.com/density
407
Automation
SC1, SC30
Multi-talent
Who could ask for more?
408
Less work, more reliability

Sample delivery and cleaning units SC1 and SC30
Reduce work when determining the density and refractive index. In addition, the most frequent error sources (air bubbles) for density and refractive index measurements are detected automatically.
You benefit from
More reliable results. Fully automatic measuring cycle. Only small sample quantities required
(3 ml for DE/RE, 6 ml for DR). Automatic sample traceability. Suitable for high viscosity or sticky samples.
To maximize performance, SC1 and SC30 devices can be equipped with a Power Purge Unit (PPU). This external pump ensures the shortest possible cycle times by considerably reducing the time required for the cleaning and drying process.
Heating options for samples that are solid at ambient temperature

For samples that are solid at ambient temperature, the SC1 and SC30 can be equipped with a heating option for density determination.
409
Traceable standards
Accessories
Certified
New combined standard reference materials from METTLER TOLEDO reduce measurement uncertainty and sample transfer, which tends to be timeconsuming and error-prone, and enable a fully automatic performance test.
Traceable standards
Traceable standards
Checking your meters regularly with certified standards is an absolute must, in order to ensure the accuracy of your measurements. METTLER TOLEDO offers the right standards for various measuring ranges choose the safe option!
410
411
Traceable standards
Accessories
Standards
Always the same
No manual handling no errors caused by impurities
The combined standard reference materials are supplied in bottles and can be used directly for SC1 and SC30 devices syringes are not required. This reduces work and prevents errors caused by impurities.
Two parameters in one fewer standard reference materials required

The four new combined standard reference substances are certified for density and refractive index at three different temperatures. They can therefore be used for certification or testing of both parameters. For users of DR combined meters, the option of testing two measuring cells in a single step is an important advantage.
Barcode certificates easier and more effective testing

All certificate information about a standard reference material is recorded in a barcode. Users of the LiQC system can simply scan the barcode, and the system does the rest. Manual data input is not required.
Standard reference materials

Water Dodecane 2.4-dichlorotoluene Density [g/cm3] at 20C 0.998.. 0.749.. 1.250.. Refractive index Uncertainty1) nD at 20C [g/cm3] 0.00003 0.00003 0.00003 0.00003 0.00003 0.001 1.333.. 1.422.. 1.546.. 1.658.. - - Certified at Uncertainty1) [C] nD 0.00002 0.00002 0.00002 0.00002 - - 15,20,25 15,20,25 15,20,25 15,20,25 20 20 Quantity 9 ml 9 ml 9 ml 9 ml 2 x 10 ml 10 x 3 ml Order no. 51338010 51338012 51338013 51338014 51338011 51325005
1-bromonaphthalene 1.481.. Water Water

1)
0.998.. 0.998..
Typical values. May vary from batch to batch without prior notice.
412
Accessories
Printers, barcode scanners and software for DE/RE/DR

RS-P42 compact strip printer Cable for RS-P42 compact strip printer and connection to PC (DE/RE/DR) Heron G D130 barcode scanner (also suitable for LiQC Multi-device) Cable for Heron G D130 barcode scanner LabX direct software for dens ty and refractometry
Order no. 00229265 51190362 21901297 21901340 51324103
LiQC system for DE/RE and DR

LiQC Standard (software, fingerprint reader) LiQC Multi-device (software, fingerprint reader, LiQC Device Controller, connection cable SC30BC barcode scanner for automatic operation with SC30 SevenEasy S20 pH meter pH flow cell (complete, including pH electrode, cable and tubes) pH electrode (replacement) SevenEasy S30 conductiv ty meter Conductivity connection set (complete, including electrode, cable and tubes) Connection set for Lovibond colorimeter (complete, including flow-through cell, cable and tubes)
Order no. 51327317 51327315 51327316 51302803 51327305 59902917 51302805 51327404 51327406
Accessories for DA-100M density meter

ASU-100 automatic sampling unit RS-P42 compact strip printer Cable for RS-P42 printer (DA-100M)
Order no. 51321400 00229265 51328094
Accessories for DE40/45/51 density meters

Protective cover for instrument keypad (3 pieces) Air pump (required unless PSU-DE, SC1 or SC30 is used) PSU-DE sampling pump (must be installed in the instrument) only suitable for samples with low viscosity
Order no. 51107667 51321502 51321700
Accessories for RE40D/RE50 refractometers

Protective cover for instrument keypad (3 pieces) Moisture trap cover (for easily liquefiable samples)
Order no. 51107667 51322114
Accessories for SC1/SC30 sample delivery and cleaning units

PU Power Purge Unit (for quick cleaning and drying of measuring cells) P SC-RE connection kit (required for the connection of RE refractometers) Sampling needle made from Hastelloy C22 alloy (for highly aggressive samples) Electric heating for SC1 (only su table for DE) Electric heating for SC30 (only suitable for DE) 20 ml sample bottles (148 pieces, bottles only) Screw caps w th seal (148 pcs) 9 ml sample bottles (1860 pcs) 6 ml sample bottles (1860 pcs) Adapters for small sample bottles (30 pcs)1) Seals for small sample bottles (2000 pcs)1) Screw caps for small sample bottles (3000 pcs) 1) Required for 6 ml and 9 ml sample bottles
Order no. 51327365 51322068 51327323 51326301 51327300 51322310 51322319 51322312 51322313 51322304 51322305 51322306
413
Portable meters
Densito, Refracto
Mobile measurement
Densito 30PX
The portable professional density meter
The Densito portable professional density meter is easy to use immerse the sampling tube, pull up a sample and measure. The temperature is compensated automatically and the result is displayed in the desired unit in just a few seconds.
414
Portable
In compact dimensions, portable density meters and refractometers offer exactly the same features as you would expect from a benchtop instrument: various configuration options for perfect adaptation to your application, minimal keystrokes for carrying out measurements, and even the option of transmitting measured data to a printer or PC.
LabX direct for density and refractometry

PC software for easy data transfer to a PC: LabX direct supports the download of the entire result memory from the portable Refracto and Densito meters and records measurement results, adjustments and performance tests, which are carried out using DE, RE and DR benchtop instruments. The data can be transferred directly to all Windows applications such as Microsoft Excel or saved as an ASCII text file.
415
Portable meters
Densito, Refracto, Quick-Brix
Ready to go!
Open the PortableLab lid to access your lab!
Densito and Refracto are available in a convenient carrying case, which contains everything you need to take measurements. Our portable instruments offer all the features required for field measurements:
Automatic
temperature compensation Direct display of results in desired unit Documentation via printer or PC LabX direct is included as standard Built-in clock for complete GLP-compliance
416
Portable density meter

Model Dens to 30PX Measuring range 0 to 2 g/cm3 Accuracy 0.001g/cm3 Temp. range 5-40C Order no. 51324450
Portable refractometer
Refracto 30PX 1.32 to 1.50 (nD) 0 to 85% Brix 0.0005 (nD) 0.1% Brix 10-40C 51324650
Portable high-end refractometer

Refracto 30GS 1.32 to 1.65 (nD) 0 to 85% Brix 0.0005 (nD) 0.1% Brix 10-40C 51324660
Accessories
Infrared adapter (data transfer to PC or printer) Adapter for external syringe (Densito) Cleaning cloths, set of 10 Dens ty standards, set of 10 51325006 51324402 51325003 1325005
Refracto 30PX/30GS Reliable refractive index

Refracto works quickly and without errors simply place a few drops of the sample onto the cell or immerse the cell in the sample, press a key and in a few seconds the refractive index is displayed with digital temperature display. The 30GS offers a larger measuring range and responds to the temperature even faster than the 30PX.
Quick-Brix for sweetness

Quick-Brix refractometers are splash-proof, fit in a jacket pocket and are therefore the ideal tools for quick quality control at any location. Quick-Brix is available in two versions: Quick-Brix 60 has a measuring range of 0-60% Brix, a resolution of 0.1% Brix and an accuracy of 0.2% Brix. This device is ideal for determining the optimal harvesting time for fruits and vegetables, such as grapes, berries or tomatoes. Quick-Brix 90 has a measuring range of 0-90% Brix, a resolution of 0.1% Brix and an accuracy of 0.1% Brix. This device is ideal for raw material analysis, process and quality control in the production of juices, lemonades and food. Portable Brix meter
Model Quick-Brix 60 Quick-Brix 90
Measuring range 0 to 60% Brix 0 to 90% Brix
Resolution 0.1% Brix 0.1% Brix
Accuracy 0.2% Brix 0.1% Brix
Order no. 51324800 51324900
417
Purity determination of biochemicals
Testing isolates from renewable raw materials
418
Ingredients for further processing in the chemical industry or pharmaceuticals and cosmetics are commercially obtained from renewable raw materials. Some of these familiar products include short-chain fatty acids, which are isolated from the vegetable fats of oil seed.
Thermal analysis
Introduction Dr. Claus Otto
Claus Otto is the Managing Director of the Prignitzer Institut fr Thermoanalytik (PIT e.V. - Prignitz Institute for Thermal Analysis), which was established in 2007. The Institute was founded by companies based in Prignitz, the University of Cottbus, Neubrandenburg Technical College, and the Universities of Applied Sciences of Sachsen-Anhalt, Potsdam and Wildau. The Prignitz Institute acts as an interface between the fields of research, education and training, and production. Its special role is to promote knowledge of the possibilities afforded by thermal analysis through academic education and professional training in research and product control. Dr. Otto coordinates the interfaces between technical colleges, industry and the Chamber of Commerce and Industry. He initiates R&D projects and is actively involved in scientific work.
Introduction
Dr. Claus Otto
Thermal analysis
DSC instrument technology at the Prignitz Institute for Thermal Analysis
"To determine the purity of biochemicals by means of DSC, here at the PIT we use DSC instrument technology from Mettler Toledo with great success. Combined with its userfriendly software, we have achieved excellent results in this area. The METTLER TOLEDO thermal analysis instruments (DSC and TG) are also used for professional development courses with the Chamber of Commerce and Industry, as well as academic teaching, and are a great example of the quick and high-quality performance of the Mettler Service team when it comes to carrying out standard repairs. Through close cooperation with Mettler Toledo, the Prignitz Institute for Thermal Analysis is able to perform demanding tasks and offer high-quality qualification in the field of thermal analysis." Dr. Claus Otto
Determining the purity of a fatty acid (DSC evaluation)
In each case, the isolation procedure for these types of products involves a multitude of individual steps, while at the same time it must be possible to determine the quality of the relevant isolate and the quality (purity) of the finished product. Purity is usually tested using chromatographic methods (gas chromatography, highpressure liquid chromatography). The Prignitz Institute for Thermal Analysis (PIT) is now working in cooperation with companies in the fat-chemical industry to find alternative methods for determining the purity of these biochemicals. The focus of this work is the systematic testing of differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) to determine thepurity of these biochemicals. In collaboration with the Brandenburg University of Technology (BTU) Cottbus, Faculty of Environmental Sciences and Process Sciences, Department for Refining Biogenic Raw Materials, the methods for purity determination using the DSC method are also used to determine the purity of bio fine chemicals and the results are compared with those obtained using conventional methods.
420
Prof. Dr. Ing. Stollberg (BTU Cottbus) and Dr. Otto (Managing Director of the PIT) believe that the DSC method for determining the purity of biochemicals and bio fine chemicals is significantly more straightforward than chromatographic methods, yet has the same informative value. "The DSC method for determining the purity of a bioproduct may be a real alternative to established chromatographic methods for the manufacturers of these products. The DSC method measures the substance directly, thus eliminating any other necessary preparative steps for analysis. The advantages in terms of costeffectiveness are clear." Based on previous tests on saturated fatty acids with a low chain length (C6 to C12) and by comparing the results that were obtained using chromatographic methods, it is evident that comparable purity is achieved using DSC. At present, the Institute for Thermal Analysis is conducting further work into determining the purity of an isolated resin acid (pimaric acid). Dr. Claus Otto
Isolated biochemicals (pimaric acid, C8 fatty acid) with high purity
421
Thermal analysis
Hot stuff for cool heads

Thermal values and thermal analysis
422
423
Thermal values Excellence
Thermal analysis
424
Melt away
Automatic melting point determination
High-quality sample monitoring

MP70 features imultaneous measurement of 4 samples S RT 350C 6x magnification Color video recording time of up to 300 minutes Manual determination of 2 evaluation points 12 One Clicks per user Memory for up to 20 user-defined methods 5 substances in reference database
Click here to watch our movie on the MP series
For more information, see MP application data sheets
www.mt.com/one-click-melting
425
Thermal analysis
for optimum sample information
Excellent sample monitoring

aximum information is obtained by playing back M high-resolution videos Maximum reliability of results through simultaneous measurement of up to 4 samples Quick to learn, easy to operate thanks to the One Click feature and unsurpassed ergonomics For all materials: wide temperature range from RT to 350C
Watch each individual crystal melt

High-resolution color videos enable you to also investigate the melting effect for colored or decomposing substances. Thermochrome effects can also be detected. Thanks to the > 6x magnification, the system provides detailed information about the behavior of even the smallest sample quantities. This is a huge advantage, especially in the research and development of fine and specialty chemicals and characterization of new active pharmaceutical ingredients. For teaching, the large video display on the VGA touchscreen also enables large groups to view sample changes live on the instrument.
Application table
Application Melting point Melting range Purity determination Decomposition temperature Desolvation Sublimation Alteration in the crystal structure Sintering point Color change Thermochromism
Suitable
MP70
426
427
Drop by drop
Hot stage microscopy, thermooptical analysis, dropping point, cloud point, differential thermal analysis
Thermal values for all requirements
n Objective n Durable
Thermal analysis
428
results through automatic detection thanks to the rugged design n Future-proof thanks to the modular structure n For all materials: wide temperature range from -60C to 400C
More information about melting point determination and thermooptical analysis can be found in the reference section starting on page 576
Maximum flexibility
An FP90 controller can be used to connect various measuring cells (FP81C - FP85), depending on requirements.
429
Thermal analysis
All for one

Your application finder
FP81C Melting point Melting range Melting and solidification behavior Crystallinity, crystallization Cloud point Boiling point Pur ty Eutetic melting Ph. transition, polymorphism Decompos tion temperature Oxidation stability Glass transition Reaction enthalpy Melting heat and heat of transition Dehydration Curing Dropping point Softening point of pitch, asphalt FP82HT FP83HT FP84HT FP85
FP90 FP81C FP82HT FP84HT FP83HT FP85HT
Universal control and evaluation unit for all FP modules Cloud point Thermooptical analysis (hot stage microscopy) Dropping point, softening point Differential thermal analysis
Accessories
Set of boiling point tubes Set of boiling point capillaries Set of sample carriers Set of cover glass Set of sample beakers, 2.8 mm Set of sample beakers, 6.35 mm Container (collector sleeve, beaker holder) Set of aluminum crucibles for FP85HT, 100 pcs Set for crucible transport Order no. 00018572 00018574 00018646 00070191 00018732 00018127 00017725 00027331 00119091
www.mt.com/fp
430
FP82HT
Heat your sample under a microscope, observe the physical processes and measure the thermal behavior at the same time using the FP82HT or FP84HT.
The FP83HT enables fully automatic determination of dropping and softening points. The FP81C module can be used to reliably measure cloud points.
431
The STAR Excellence system
Hot oven
Thermal analysis
The term thermal analysis collectively describes analytical methods which can be used to measure the physical and chemical properties of substances or substance mixtures as a function of temperature and time. The sample is subjected to a defined temperature program. Thermally triggered processes, such as melting, evaporation, expansion, etc. (see overleaf) are simultaneously recorded as proportional, electrical values using one or more sensors. In addition, thermodynamic values, such as the heat capacity can be measured as a function of temperature. For over 40 years, METTLER TOLEDO has been supplying scientists with innovative instruments for state-of-the-art material characterization:
Thermal analysis
Patented MultiSTAR sensors provide maximum

sensitivity and resolution with 56 (FRS5) and 120 (HSS7) thermocouples respectively.
Differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) Thermogravimetry (TGA) T hermomechanical analysis (TMA) D ynamic mechanical analysis (DMA)
The latest MultiSTAR high-performance sensors are the result of many years of experience in the development of sensors. Thanks to the multiple thermocouples, a large raw signal is measured which results in outstanding resolution and sensitivity over a temperature range from -150C to 1600C.
432
www.mt.com/ta
433
Thermal analysis
Extremely broad range of applications

With its versatile measuring methods, thermal analysis is an integral part of modern material characterization.
Organic substances Chemicals Intermediates Technology Composition Content Purity Content and effect of fillers Inorganic substances Minerals Ceramics Metals Effects of moisture Storage stability Safety investigations Process control Chemical changes Decomposition Pyrolysis Oxidation Stability Petrochemicals Oils Fats Bitumen Plastics Course of the reaction, enthalpy and kinetics Hardening Vulcanization
TA can be used to find the answers to questions in research and development, as well as quality control. This list gives you an idea of the number of possible applications in which thermal analysis can be used, as well as concrete examples for a few applications.
Pharmaceuticals Active ingredients Formulations Additives
Phase transitions Melting/crystallization Evaporation Drying Absorption Polymorphism Crystal transformations Glass transition Liquid-solid phase transitions Physical properties Specific heat capacity Coefficient of expansion and expansion behavior Viscoelastic behavior Young's modulus
Thermoplastics Elastomers Thermosets Foodstuffs Fats Proteins Carbohydrates Materials Composites Adhesives Coatings
www.mt.com/ta
434
Fully automatic
The rugged, optional sample robot easily handles all types of sample crucibles around the clock!
The METTLER TOLEDO Thermal Analysis Excellence line offers tailored solutions for all problem areas. Properties and advantages at a glance:
Maximum measurement performance enables

measurement of previously undetected sample effects Modular structure the right solution is always available for current and future tasks. For example, sample robots, a gas switching box, cooling options, FTIR/MS gas analysis and software options for special investigations can be retrofitted at any time Rugged design durable systems and error free operation thanks to Swiss-made quality components Outstanding expertise and support comprehensive training courses and application literature are at your disposal
Your application finder

Inorganic products Organic products Pharmaceuticals
Click here to watch our movie on DSC
Plastics
Foods
Physical properties
Specific heat Coefficient of expansion, shrinkage behavior Elasticity
Phase transitions
Melting/crystallization Evaporation/drying Solid-solid polymorphic transformation Glass transition, softening Polymorphism Liquid proportion Liquid crystal transitions Crystallinity Melting enthalpy Purity
Chemical reactions
Decomposition, pyrolysis Oxidation, oxidation stability Content determination, additives Dehydration, moisture Reaction profile, kinetics Degree of curing, vulcanization Safety investigations Reaction enthalpy
DMA
TMA
DSC
TGA
435
Thermal analysis
436
Hot stuff for cool heads

Differential scanning calorimetry DSC 1
Evidence of even the smallest sample effects thanks to maximum sensitivity Clear separation of overlapping effects due to unrivalled resolution Investment security by adapting to future measurement requirements thanks to the modular design Additional sample information through the use of enhanced measurement technologies: photo calorimetry, measurements under vacuum, chemiluminescence, and by means of high heating rates (up to 300 K/min) and temperature-modulated technologies (see TOPEM) For all materials: wide temperature range from -150 to 700C
Breakthrough in DSC sensor technology Unrivalled sensitivity and outstanding resolution
There is no room for compromise when it comes to the "heart" of your DSC solution. METTLER TOLEDO MultiSTAR sensors combine essential characteristics that simply cannot be achieved with conventional sensors. These include extremely high sensitivity, excellent temperature resolution, flat baseline and outstanding robustness. Sensitivity This is determined by the number of thermocouples and their arrangement. Thanks to a quantum leap in sensor technology, we offer the highest sensitivity by far on the market, which means that even the weakest thermal effects can be detected. Temperature resolution This is achieved by the time constant of the sensor, which should be as small as possible. It determines how well thermal effects that occur close together can be measured separately. Here too we have set new standards. Baseline The revolutionary star-shaped arrangement of thermocouples on the sample and reference side enables possible temperature gradients to be fully compensated. Flat baselines and reproducible measurement results are thus guaranteed. FRS5 With its 56 thermocouples, the FRS5 full range sensor provides excellent sensitivity and unsurpassed temperature resolution. It is the ideal choice for most applications, for high heating rates and demanding peak separation. HSS7 The HSS7 high sensitivity sensor is used for very weak thermal effects, small sample quantities and low heating rates. With its 120 thermocouples, it features excellent temperature resolution as well as outstanding sensitivity.
TAWN test Each DSC sensor undergoes testing in the form of the globally recognized TAWN test, which confirms the outstanding sensitivity and high temperature resolution of the HSS7 and FRS5 sensors.
437
Thermal analysis
TOPEM
Innovative temperature-modulated DSC measurement technology

TOPEM is a brand new generation of temperature-modulated (TMDSC) measurement technologies. It reflects state-of-the-art technology, in which sample properties can be obtained as a function of time and temperature over a wide frequency range in just a single measurement. With this new development, TOPEM represents cutting-edge technology for the precise measurement of heat capacity values, separating reversing and non-reversing processes and for investigating small energetic transitions.
Properties and advantages

O ne measurement
Simultaneous determination of sample properties as a function of time and temperature over a wide frequency range
S impler curve interpretation

Frequency-dependent effects (e.g. glass transition) can be very easily distinguished from non-frequencydependent effects (e.g. moisture loss)
A utomatic cp adjustment
Enables very accurate determination of frequency-dependent heat capacity values based on a single measurement
S imultaneous high sensitivity and high resolution

Enables measurement of small or close-lying temperature-dependent effects
S eparation of sensible and latent heat flow

The heat capacity can also be determined in the event of overlapping effects
www.mt.com/topem
438
Application example
An example for polymers (PET) is shown below. Here, the dependence on frequency aids in interpreting the molecular origin of the individual, thermally induced effects (glass transition and crystallization). Although glass transition is dependent on frequency, this is not true in the case of crystallization. With this in mind, it is then possible to develop materials with the desired properties.
More information about thermal analysis with application examples, plus tips and tricks, can be found in the reference section starting on page 564.
439
Thermal analysis
440
Made to measure
Thermogravimetry TGA/DSC1
More information thanks to MultiSTAR sensor technology Proof of even the smallest sample effects with the integrated ultra-microbalance (up to 0.1 g) with internal adjustment weights Simplified result interpretation through the analysis of gaseous products using FTIR and MS link For all materials: wide temperature range from RT to 1,600C
Mettler "inside" Our TGA instruments use the world's best METTLER TOLEDO micro and ultra micro balances. Thanks to the internal adjustment weights, this balance provides unrivalled measuring accuracy and reliability. The balance can also be calibrated and adjusted using external calibration weights.
Unique sensors at the heart of each instrument

MultiSTAR sensor amplification technology The DSC sensor is based on the unique MultiSTAR sensor amplification technology. The multiple thermocouples enable a larger raw signal to be measured, which considerably improves the signal-to-noise ratio. On all three sensors types, the heat flow is determined based on the calculated or measured temperature difference. Easy to clean sensors The sensors can be replaced and cleaned very easily. High temperature precision The sample temperature sensor, which is fitted directly to the crucible holder, detects temperature deviations of 0.25 K. Adjustment is by means of the exact melting point of pure metals, and no longer using the inaccurate curie temperature.
SDTA sensor comprises a platinum contact surface with a thermocouple that measures the sample temperature.
DTA sensor, which measures the sample and reference temperature. The contact surface is made from platinum. Errors are reduced thanks to differential measurement (inphase suppression).
DSC sensor, comprising 6 thermocouples, which are located under a protective ceramic plate, measures the sample and reference temperature multiple times.
441
Thermal analysis
442
Length counts
Thermomechanical analysis
TMA/SDTA840 & TMA/SDTA841e
roof of even the smallest sample effects thanks to the patented, mechanical design P I nvestment security by adapting to future measurement requirements thanks to the modular
design

Additional sample information through the use of the SDTA signal and enhanced measurement technologies: decomposition analysis using FTIR and MS For all materials: wide temperature range from -150 to 600C (TMA/SDTA841e) and RT to 1,000C (TMA/SDTA840)
www.mt.com/tma
Deformation modes
Various measuring probes and sample holders are available for conducting measurements on solids, foam, film and fibers. 1) Bending mode 2) Tension mode 3) Expansion mode 4) Penetration mode In addition, measurements in liquids (e.g. swelling processes) can also be studied.
Bending measurement
Tension measurement
Expansion measurement Penetration measurement
Measuring probes and sample holders made from quartz glass

The following measuring probes are available: M easuring probe with ball tip (3.0 mm) M easuring probe with flat end (1.1 and 3.0 mm) A different sample holder is required depending on the sample: Standard sample holder Film clamping device Fiber clamping device Bending device Both the measuring probes and sample holders can be replaced veryeasily.
443
Thermal analysis
Good vibrations
Dynamic mechanical analysis
DMA/SDTA861e
External sample preparation using unique sample holders Measurement under real conditions using frequencies from 0.001 Hz to 1000 Hz Accurate modulus calculation by measuring path and force Measurement of very soft and very tough samples thanks to an extensive force range of up to 40 N For all materials: wide temperature range from -150C to 500C
www.mt.com/ta
444
Dynamic mechanical analysis

The DMA provides information about viscoelastic properties, including the mechanical modulus, the attenuation behavior and the glass transition temperature. In addition, oscillating force is applied to the sample material while it is simultaneously heated to a defined temperature.
445
Crucibles and accessories
Thermal analysis
Small and fine

Crucibles
Crucibles are used as containers for samples during thermal analysis measurements. The choice of crucible greatly affects the quality of the results. Important system properties of a DSC measuring cell are influenced by the crucible used. Steps taken prior to measurement often save a lot of time later when interpreting the measurement results.
Influencing factors for crucible selection
Crucible volume Crucible material
Temperature range Atmosphere DSC, TGA or SDTA
Sample Sample changer
Crucibles
Order no.
Crucible preparation set, complete, includes: Funnel Tweezers Standard needle Fine needle (0.35 mm) Crucible stand 51142765 00026783 51191865 00029772 51140833 51142312
446
Description Aluminum crucible, light Aluminum crucible, standard Aluminum crucible, standard Aluminum crucible, standard Aluminum crucible, medium Aluminum crucible, large Aluminum lid, standard Aluminum lid, pierced 50 m Aluminum perforating lid Copper crucible Platinum crucible, small Platinum crucible, medium Platinum crucible, large Gold crucible Medium-pressure crucible Medium-pressure crucible Seal for medium-pressure crucible High-pressure crucible, reusable HP crucible, gold-plated, reusable Bursting washer for HP crucible High-pressure crucible High-pressure crucible High-pressure crucible High-pressure crucible Bursting washer for HP crucible Sapphire crucible, medium Alumina crucible, small Alumina crucible, medium Alumina crucible, large Alumina crucible, large Glass crucible
Max. temperature C
Crucible overview
Max. overpressure MPa Delivery quantity Weight [mg] Without pins Volume l
Without lid
With pins
With lid
Order no.
100 100 400 100 400 40 400 400 400 100 4 4 4 6 25 25 30 3 3 60 25 25 1 1 1 4 20 20 20 4 50
20 40 40 40 100 160
20 50 50 50 80 100 16 16 16
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
640 51119810 640 00026763 640 51119870 640 00027331 640 51119872 640 00027811 640 51119871 640 51140832 640 51119873 750 51140407 1,600 51140842 1,600 51119654 1,600 00024126 750 00027220 250 00026929 250 00029990 230 00026933 750 51140404 350 51140405 51140403 750 00026732 750 00026731 750 00650072 750 00650066 750 00027216 2,000 51140845 2,000 51140843 2,000 00024123 2,000 00024124 2,000 51119960
40 30 70 150 40 120 120 30 30 40 40 270 500 70 30 70 150 900 100
70 220 285 480 380 0.25 300 300 650 650 1500 1500 2200 2600 220 70 181 380 840 15 15 10 10 15 15 2 2
400
500 00027812
447
Crucibles and accessories
Thermal analysis
Keep a lid on it
Crucible sealing press for standard Al crucibles
Order no. 51140547
Order no. 00119410 incl. 00027809 and 00027386
Order no. 00027809 and 00027386
Order no. 00119428
Just turn the handle to seal standard Al crucibles and other suitable crucibles. Under the pressure of the plunger the crucible is cold welded hermetically with the lid. After changing the plunger and die, you can use the press for other crucibles.
448
Order no. 51119915
Crucible sealing tool for reusable high-pressure crucibles

The crucible sealing tool for reusable high-pressure crucibles consists of a lower part to hold the hexagonal crucible and an upper part with turning head that fits onto the crucible lid. Seal the crucible with the bursting washer by turning the turning head clockwise until it will go no further. Following measurement, open the crucible using the same tool.
www.mt.com/ta
449
Introduction
Prof. Dr. Peter Hofmann
"Accelerators and mediators"

Interdisciplinary cutting-edge research in the field of catalysis in Heidelberg
AutoChem
The figure shows the molecular structure of an intermediate product, illustrated using singlecrystal x-ray diffractometry. The intermediate product plays an important role in the nickelcatalyzed synthesis of starting products for commercial nylon production from butadiene and hydrocyanic acid (dissertation by M. Tauchert, Heidelberg 2009).
The development of catalysts is one of the key future technologies of the 21st century. As catalysts, active molecules or solids have properties that are absolutely in demand. They minimize energy consumption in chemical manufacturing processes, prevent by-products and waste products and thus support economical and ecological synthetic chemistry. The research undertaken by Heidelberg chemist Prof. Dr. Peter Hofmann in the fascinating field of modern catalysis is pioneering. Using the latest equipment, his work is carried out at the cutting edge of international research. InJune 2008, he was awarded the Emil Fischer Medal by the German Chemical Society.
Peter Hofmann remained close to his home town of Nuremberg to study chemistry at the FriedrichAlexander University of ErlangenNuremberg. He graduated in 1974 and in 1977 completed a research post at post-doctoral level with the 1981 Nobel prize-winning chemist Roald Hoffmann at Cornell University. Since 1995 he has been a professor in Erlangen, Berkeley and at the TUMnchen (Munich University of Technology) and a director at the Institute for Organic Chemistry at the University of Heidelberg. He is actively involved in interdisciplinary cooperation in modern organic and organometallic basic research.
Dr.Markus Adamczyk from METTLER TOLEDO interviews Prof. Hofmann about his research and the significance of the "Excellence Initiative" for Germany as a research location.
Introduction
AutoChem
Fig. 1: ReactIR 45m with flexible fiber optic probe Dr. Markus Adamczyk: Prof. Hofmann, you are the initiator and representative of the SFB 623 special research department at the University of Heidelberg, where you are pioneering basic research into molecular catalysts. Can you describe briefly the plans and significance of your research? Prof. Hofmann: In my professorship (www.akph. uni-hd.de) and in the entire SFB 623 special research department for "Molecular catalysts: Structure and functional design" (www.sfb 623. uni-hd.de), we are carrying out
experimental and theoretical basic research into molecular chemistryrelated catalysis, which is of a broad and interdisciplinary nature. The SFB covers the entire scope of this key technology, from biocatalysis in the living cell to commercial catalytic synthesis of base chemicals. We are focused primarily on explaining the operating principles of catalytically active, organometallic molecules of a defined structure, i.e. with organic molecules, which contain transition metals and which could be efficient synthesis machines in atomic dimensions. Without being consumed themselves, even in the smallest
concentrations they ensure that the desired products are created selectively at tailored metal centers from starting materials by a process that saves both energy and resources. A single perfectly designed catalyst molecule can, under ideal conditions, generate hundreds of thousands of target molecules in a short period of time. We are particularly interested in the optimization of familiar, technically relevant catalyst systems based on mechanistic and quantum chemical knowledge as well as the search for brand new reactions for innovative catalytic chemistry by combining experimen-
452
Fig. 2: ReactIR 4000 with conventional fiber optic system and pressure reactor
tal and theoretical procedures. In our research, modern methods for the identification and investigation of elementary steps and short-life intermediate stages in catalytic reactions are particularly important. setting up special research departments known as SFBs, the DFG (Deutsche Forschungsgemeinschaft, German Research Foundation) supports complex and long-term research projects at universities. To what extent does your work benefit from the support provided? The support in terms of personnel,
By
investment and consumables that the DFG has provided to SFB 623 since July 2002, combined with additional finance from the University of Heidelberg, the Federal Ministry of Science in Stuttgart and BASF SE, have created working conditions, which are ideal for internationally competitive catalysis research. In terms of the entire SFB, this includes the provision of large items of equipment as well as comprehensive financial support for postgraduates and postdocs in about 20 working groups in the institutes involved, from the fields of chemistry and other faculties. Our particular work was only made possible by the additional finance for equipment and personnel provided by the DFG. Along-term outlook, which successful catalysis research requires, and which is ensured by the DFG together with other donors, is essential for our research. In addition, we and other SFB groups benefit from the international prominence ensured by this generous SFB support, and this enables us to recruit highlyqualified scientists from all over the world. The support provided to the SFB hasalso enabled us to set up cooperation agreements with leading US catalysis research centers at the University of California, Berkeley, and Northwestern University, Evanston, and to hold joint symposia. Last but not least, the SFB funding has been used to finance regular guest scientists and external speakers as well as the internationally renowned "Heidelberg Forum of Molecular Catalysis" together with BASF every two years, which provides a platform for leading global catalysis research.
are also Scientific Director of CaRLa (Catalysis Research Laboratory), a joint project between the University of Heidelberg and BASF. How important are these types of cooperation? CaRLa (www.carla-hd.de) is a very special innovative research facility with a model structure, which was founded as part of the "Industry on Campus" initiative of the successful Excellence Initiative at the University of Heidelberg. It was jointly financed as a public/private partnership between the university, the Federal Ministry of Science in BadenWrttemberg and BASF. In a shared lab in CaRLa, 12 PhD-level scientists, a technician and a lab director from BASF work on basic research into molecular catalysis. The research in CaRLa is led by Chemistry professors from Heidelberg University (from the SFB) and colleagues from the BASF Research department. The advantages of CaRLa are clear: the cooperative concept creates a new, intensive interaction between researchers from both sides. This team spirit creates synergies and scientific stimulation, which ensure almost automatic technology transfer, from basic knowledge through to applicationspecific implementation. The simple bilateral organization of CaRLa ensures transparent use of research results, as well as a simple balance of interests of the parties involved.
You
453
Introduction
AutoChem
is the importance of a modern, equipped lab in terms of the success of your research, from an international point of view? To be internationally competitive, which refers to the quality of experimental (and theoretical) basic research, and is of course the aim of my working group, of the SFB and of CaRLa, having the latest equipment is extremely important. This does not just mean in comparison with Western industrial countries, because countries such as China and India are also competitors with their research potential, which is growing very quickly in terms of both quality and quantity. extensive experience, you have recently equipped your institute with a second ReactIR system from METTLER TOLEDO. In your view, what are the advantages of the in-situ FTIR method for your research and also for other areas of operation? Since we are working intensively on explaining the reaction mechanisms of catalytic processes, it is essential that we have access to spectroscopic methods, which provide us with a direct insight into the sequence of reactions at molecular level and in real time. With in-situ FTIR equipment, which is provided by ReactIR systems, we can achieve this easily, not just for applications under normal pressure in standard glass apparatus (Fig. 1), but also for pressurized reactions in steel autoclaves (Fig. 2) and depending on the temperature.
After
What
This offers us a convenient and efficient way of using characteristic vibration bands to track the disappearance and appearance of educts and products, to determine how to characterize species occurring as intermediates and therefore to gain an insight into the mechanistic details of catalysis cycles. A general and more trivial application, which is completely independent of our special field, but which saves considerable work in daily lab practice, is the use of ReactIR probes when monitoring synthesis steps, i.e. when determining reaction end points or optimizing reaction conditions. your opinion, what are the keys to success in terms of scientific excellence? I think it's important here to differentiate between the keys to success for scientific excellence in terms of people and for scientific excellence in terms of institutions such as universities, faculties, institutes, etc., which of course can only be excellent overall if a large number of their members are excellent. Decisive factors for developing excellent research personalities are strongly performance-related, selective and competitive, but also financially attractive promotion of young researchers, which leads as early as possible to scientific autonomy (with rewarding future prospects). Research curiosity, perhaps even scientific drive, combined with goaldriven staying power and passion for a subject are just as essential as being a team player, organizational skills, openness to other disciplines
In
and communication skills. Personal excellence will only really be developed if complete scientific freedom is assured: without bureaucratic restraints, without the restrictive predefinition of research goals and without a forced focus on "applicational relevance". In turn, the scientific excellence of institutions depends in a trivial way primarily on the selection of the right individuals to work there, which means for example that a good hiring policy is a decisive in my view the most decisive factor. However, an excellent hiring policy requires the right conditions, in order to bring in the best people in an internationally competitive market. These conditions include adequate support (in terms of personnel, finance and equipment) at all levels and a guarantee of autonomy in terms of research decisions. "Networking", which is often an artificially forced criterion and condition of finance for research, may make sense in certain areas but in basic research in many disciplines it often becomes a hindrance, which does not promote excellent research with the ability to innovate and a wealth of ideas.
454
important is the "Excellence Initiative" for promoting scientific growth in Germany? It is extremely important because the postgraduate schools, excellence clusters and elite universities that have come from the Excellence Initiative attach value to the promotion of young researchers and the suitable instruments for this. However, a decisive factor will be the continuation of the Excellence Initiative in a second round, because otherwise all the valuable scientific initiatives and promotion measures will not be able to demonstrate long-term effects.
How
ReactIR instruments in organometallic catalysis research

A typical example of the successful use of our ReactIR instruments in organometallic catalysis research is given here (from the dissertation by R. Tompers, Heidelberg 2007). Within the framework of our studies of the mechanism of highly n-selective Rh-catalyzed low-pressure hydroformylation of 1-olefins with a new type of ligand class of the bisphosphane type, the aim was to verify the reaction sequence (illustrated below, assumed from theoretical deliberations) as part of the entire catalysis cycle by means of experimentation (Fig. 3).
Fig. 3: Partial sequence of the catalysis cycle for hydroformylation with a Rh-bisphosphane
Thank you for talking to us.
If the equilibrium mixture of both of the Rh-acyl carbonyls on the left, manufactured as solvent in THF, is placed at room temperature under an atmosphere of hydrogen, as well as the CO bands of carbonyl ligands around 2,000 cm 1 and acyl CO fluctuations at about 1,650 cm 1, the carbonyl group of ethanal is detected quite clearly in the IR spectra recorded using the in-situ time-dependent ReactIR. This arises after oxidative addition of the H2 at the metal through reductive elimination under regeneration of the dicarbonyl hydride shown on the right (the resting state of the reaction) (Fig. 4). In the same way, under quite different reaction conditions other elementary reactions and single steps of the catalytic reaction sequence with their intermediates can be tracked in terms of quality and, in some cases, quantity (kinetics).
Fig. 4: Time-resolved in-situ tracking of the reaction sequence displayed in Fig. 3 using ReactIR
In-situ analysis
Synthesis/laboratory reactors Reaction calorimetry
Simply better
We support your chemistry
FTIR in-situ analysis for the detection of reactive intermediate stages and intermediates helps to illustrate reaction mechanisms quickly and clearly. Concentration profiles provide information about the start, end point and kinetics of reactions as well as possible side reactions. The in-situ particle characterization provides considerable insights into the dynamics of particle processes such as crystallization, polymerization, grinding or granulating processes. Synthesis tools and laboratory reactors from METTLER TOLEDO accelerate the tests and ensure the best possible reproducibility. The RC1e reaction calorimeter provides heat flow data for the first time in real time to determine reaction kinetics and for safety studies.
AutoChem
www.mt.com/ReactIR
458
AutoChem
In-situ analysis
Catching intermediates
In-situ reaction tracking ReactIR
The ReactIR FTIR-based reaction analyzer offers a means of tracking the composition of reaction mixtures in real time. This enables, for example, the detection of reactive species for illustrating reaction mechanisms or catalysis cycles. The concentration profiles of the relevant components, which are already available in real time, provide important kinetic information about the start, progress and end point of a reaction. The method is genuine in-situ technology, it is non-invasive under reaction conditions and eliminates the need for sampling. Probe options
Probe model
Probe diameter Probe length Sensor material Fiber length Temperature range Maximum pressure Measuring range
AgX fiber - 6.3 mm AgX fiber - 9.5 mm AgX fiber - 9.5 mm Comp ATR (K6 conduit)
6.3 mm 254 mm & 406 mm Diamond 1.5 m & 2 m -40C - 120C 69 bar 1950 cm-1 - 650 cm-1 9.5 mm 254 mm & 406 mm Diamond 1.5 m & 2 m -80C - 180C 69 bar 1950 cm-1 - 650 cm-1 9.5 mm 254 mm & 406 mm Silicon 1.5 m -80C - 180C 69 bar 2900 cm-1 - 650 cm-1 16 mm 178 mm, 299 mm, 362 mm Diamond, silicon N/A -80C to 200C (300C on request) 7 bar, 100 bar (350 bar on request) 4000 cm-1 - 650 cm-1*
Sentinel (K4 conduit)

25.4 mm 28.6 mm (other lengths on request) Diamond, silicon N/A -80C to 200C (300C on request) 7 bar, 100 bar (350 bar on request) 4000 cm-1 - 650 cm-1*
* Diamond absorbs between 2300 cm-1 - 1950 cm-1
Important information about reaction tracking using in-situ FTIR spectroscopy can be found in the reference section starting on page 583.
459
The in-situ analysis of the change and dynamics of particle dimension and form using FBRM and PVM enables scientists to better understand and optimize the processes in which the particles are involved.
More information about particle analysis can be found in the reference section starting on page 590.
460
AutoChem
In-situ analysis
The particles are everything

In-situ particle characterization FBRM and PVM
Application Crystallization Precipitation Formulation/granulation Decompos tion behavior Emulsions Grinding Information/benefit Nucleation, seed protocol, growth, wear Particle growth, wear, agglomeration End point, agglomeration, growth Disintegration, release kinetics Drop formation, coalescence End point detection, optimization
FBRM and PVM technology enables particle characterization without sampling and sample preparation. The patented wiper mechanism of the new Lasentec C35 enables optimal analysis even for particle systems, which tend to be cohesive.
www.mt.com/Particle
461
Synthesis/laboratory reactors
Synthesis made easy

EasyMax reactor system
n The latest generation of
AutoChem
462
reactor systems
n Specially designed for the
synthesis lab and synthetic organic chemistry

n Easy operation n Maximum reproducibility n Valuable process knowledge
over a wide spectrum
Transparency for your chemistry lab

EasyMax offers compact dimensions and requires only minimal infrastructure. The system includes two containers, which operate fully independently of one another. Operation is easy and all functions can be controlled manually at any time. Automatic data acquisition and storage ensures reproducible tests. EasyMax is equipped with a wide range of accessories to offer maximum flexibility during operation.
www.mt.com/EasyMax
463
Synthesis/laboratory reactors
Marathon runners
Automatic laboratory reactors MultiMax and LabMax
Our automatic laboratory reactors are ideal for use in synthesis and in process development for ranges from milliliters to liters. MultiMax and LabMax systems operate under similar process conditions and enable chemists and process engineers to work with greater success.
AutoChem
464
www.mt.com/alr
465
Reaction calorimetry
How hot can it get?

Reaction calorimetry RC1e with RTCal
METTLER TOLEDO offers comprehensive solutions for chemical synthesis, development and process analysis technology. Scientists and process engineers can therefore accelerate the development of new chemical substances from product development through scale up, to starting production. One example of this is the innovative RTCal calorimetry mode of the RC1e reaction calorimeter. The patented RTCal measurement mode provides reliable calorimetric data for a reaction in real time without calibrations and interpolations, which tend to be time-consuming and error-prone. This heat data can be used for safety studies, kinetic investigations and scale up.
AutoChem
Online science
METTLER TOLEDO webinars provide short online audiovisual presentations from well-known experts from academia and industry. Each webinar ends with a discussion. www.mt.com/webinars
466
The RC1e reaction calorimeter guarantees safe scalable heat data from chemical processes and reactions. The new RTCal measurement mode increases reliability while saving valuable resources and materials.
More information can be found in the reference section starting on page 578 or: www.mt.com/alr www.mt.com/rc1 www.mt.com/rtcal
467
Synthesis/software
AutoChem
96 in one go
Parallel synthesis MiniBlock
MiniBlock is a flexible user-friendly tool, which increases the productivity of synthesis chemists considerably.
The MiniBlock system supports fluid and solid-phase synthesis in up to 96 reaction vessels. It is the only compact synthesizer, which enables synthesis over the solid or solution phase and work-up on the same platform. The format used is compatible with standardized microwell plates.
The filters integrated in the reaction vessels and the 48 easily-closed bottom valves offer convenient filtering on a standardized microwell plate.
The consistent microwell plate format of the reactor blocks ensures a high degree of compatibility, e.g. with vacuum evaporators.
www.mt.com/MiniBlock
468
D2i Data to Information

iC software integrates the entire test workflow and the resulting data, which simplifies the visualization and interpretation of results as well as report generation. Itsupports spectroscopy, the characterization of particle systems, precise reactor control and calorimetry.
iC Software software solutions
iC software converts data into information. The additional process knowledge speeds up the development of rugged commercial procedures.
www.mt.com/iCSoftware
469
Reference
470
Our reference section has been designed to complement our comprehensive "World of Wonders" catalog. It contains practical tips which both beginners and professionals working in laboratory environments will find useful. I'm Tina, METTLER TOLEDO's coach for excellent research. I'll be popping up on the following pages to provide you with essential knowledge and tips for day-to-day laboratory tasks.
You can find out all about METTLER TOLEDO's Academia Initiative online at www.mt.com/academia
471
Balances
Reference section
The right way to weigh
Proper weighing with laboratory balances

Justus von Liebig once said: "The balance, this incomparable instrument which records every observation and discovery, vanquishing doubt and bringing the truth to light, showing us that we have erred or that we are on the right path." However, before setting about the joys of weighing, it is advisable to bring to mind the most frequently encountered problems and sources of error.
Experience Better weighing Error-free operation Precise results
472
www.mt.com/academia
Weighing is one of the most common tasks in the laboratory. Advanced micro, semi-micro, analytical and precision balances have now been perfected to such a degree that, in general, no special weighing rooms are needed.
Technological advances in electronics have considerably simplified the operation of balances, drastically cut weighing times, and made the balances so adaptable that they can now be integrated directly into a production process. The risk inherent in this progress, however, is that not enough care will be taken to prevent disturbing influences from the surrounding area. These usually involve physical effects which are measurable for micro, semi-micro and analytical balances, and which analytical balances cannot suppress because they result in measurable weight changes (e.g. through slow evaporation, moisture uptake), or forces which act on the weighing pan and weighing sample (e.g. magnetism, electrostatics) and which are interpreted by the balance as weight changes. The purpose of these instructions is to explain the most important points to be noted when working with micro, semi-micro and analytical balances if high-quality results are required. After some brief pointers concerning the location and proper operation of the balances, the disturbing influences on weighing will be discussed in detail. Most of these influences are recognizable by a slow change in the weight display (drift). Since correct interpretation of the technical data is also of immense importance in the assessment of a weighing result, the most common technical terms are explained at the end.
Our comprehensive range of balances is shown on pages 16197.
Our tip
The 253-page English balances dictionary published by Springer is bursting with information. For more information please contact your local representative.
473
Balances
Reference section
Location of the Balance

The precision and reproducibility of weighing results is closely associated with the location of the balance. To ensure that your balance can work under the best conditions, please observe the following guidelines:
Weighing bench
Stable
(lab bench, lab table, stone bench). Your weighing bench should not sag when work is carried out on it and should transfer as few vibrations as possible. (no steel plate). against electrostatic charges (no plastic or glass).
Antimagnetic Protected Wall
or floor installation The weighing bench should be fixed either to the floor or on the wall. Mounting the bench on both places at once transfers vibrations from wall and floor. for the balance.
Reserved
The place of installation and the weighing bench must be stable enough that the balance display does not change when someone leans on the table or steps up to the weighing station. Do not use soft pads underneath, such as writing mats. It is better to position the balance directly over the legs of the bench, since the area is subject to the fewest vibrations.
Work room
Vibration-free Free
from drafts
Place the weighing bench in a corner of a room. These are the most vibration-free areas of a building. Ideally, the room should be accessed through a sliding door to reduce the influence of door movements.
474
www.mt.com/academia
Temperature
+ 30 C max. Optimal - 5 C min.
Keep
the temperature of the room as constant as possible. Weighing results are influenced by temperature! (Typical drift: 1-2 ppm/C). Do not weigh near radiators or windows. METTLER TOLEDO balances with FACT (fully automatic motorized selfadjustment) can compensate virtually all the remaining temperature drift. For this reason, FACT should always be switched on.
m Range 20 - 8 0% imu x Ma
Atmospheric humidity
Ideally,
the relative humidity (% RH) should be between 45 and 60%. Balances should never be operated above or below the measuring range of 20 to 80% RH.
Constant monitoring is advisable with micro balances. Changes should be corrected whenever possible.
Light
If
possible, place the balance on a window-free wall. Direct sunlight (heat) will influence the weighing result. Place the balance a significant distance from lighting fixtures to avoid heat radiation. This especially applies to light bulbs. Use fluorescent tubes.
Air
Do
not place the balance in the air flow of air conditioners or devices with ventilators, such as computers or large laboratory devices. Place the balance a sufficient distance from radiators. In addition to the potential temperature drift, strong currents of air could interfere with operation of the balance. Do not place the balance next to a door. Avoid places with high traffic. Passersby will usually create a draft at the weighing location.
475
Balances
Reference section
Operation of the Balance

ge Ultra Micro, Micro, W Semi-micro, Analytical and Precision Balances are measuring e Mil le precision. The following points will help you obtain instruments of the highest reliable weighing results.
ust. Int.
We recommend a different warm-up time for each balance when it is first connect to the power supply. These are:
Up
to 12 hours for micro balances 6 hours for semi-micro and analytical balances Approximately 3 hours for precision balances
Approximately
Apart from these guidelines, always observe the minimum times specified in the operating instructions.
Switching on
Do
not disconnect the balance from the power supply and always leave it switched on. This allows the balance to reach thermal equilibrium. When you switch the balance off, use the display key (on older models the tare key). The balance is now in standby mode. The electronics are still energized and no warm-up period is necessary.
To ensure and document that the balance is correctly leveled every time for example, to comply with GxP1) we recommend the Excellence Plus family of balances with the built-in automatic warning function LevelControl.
1)
GxP Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) or Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP)
476
www.mt.com/academia
Adjustment
Adjust the sensitivity of the balance regularly, especially
1.00005 mg 1.00000 mg
when you operate the balance for the first time when you change the location of the balance after leveling the balance after major changes in temperature, humidity or air pressure.
If a fully automatic calibration following, for example, a temperature change is important to you, it would be worthwhile to acquire balances with FACT, which calibrate automatically. These models also allow you to extend the time interval for routine checks.
Reading
Check
that the balance displays exactly zero at the start of each weighing. Tare, if needed, to avoid zero errors. Read off the result only after the small round circle in the upper left of the Mi balance display has faded. The weighing result is released through this stability detector.
W Ste gen ve Mil ler

ge
The Excellence Plus line offers an advanced stability detector. These balances display unstable measurement values in blue. Once stability is regained, the display immediately changes to black and the circle in the upper left disappears. This allows you to identify a stable weighing result faster, safer and more reliably.

ge
477
Balances
Reference section
Weighing pan
Always
place the weighing sample in the middle of the weighing pan. This will prevent corner load errors. With micro and semi-micro balances, the weighing pan should first be loaded once briefly after a relatively long pause (> 30 min) to deactivate the initial weighing effect.
Weighing vessel
Use Avoid
the smallest possible weighing vessel. weighing vessels made of plastic when atmospheric humidity is below 30-40%. These conditions increase the risk of electrostatic charge.
Materials with a high degree of electrical insulation, such as glass and plastic, can become electrostatically charged. This can drastically distort the weighing result. For this reason, make sure you take the appropriate corrective measures (for more, see page 483: Electrostatics) The weighing vessel and the sample it contains should have the same temperature as the surroundings. Temperature differences can lead to air currents that distort the weighing result (see page 481: Temperature). After removing the weighing vessel from a drying oven or dishwasher, allow it time to cool before placing it on the balance.
If
The ErgoClip Basket tare container holder.
possible, do not use your hands to place the weighing vessel in the weighing chamber. You could alter the temperature and atmospheric humidity of the weighing chamber and the weighing vessel, which would have an adverse effect on the measurement process.
Different taring container holders offer optimal conditions for error-free and safe weighing (see illustrations).
478
www.mt.com/academia
Tip
To make weighing simpler and more precise, even under the most challenging conditions, we recommend specific accessories for our Excellence and Excellence Plus families of balances. These balances will yield the best results, even when you are weighing extremely small samples with narrow tolerances under unfavorable ambient conditions. Our special draft shield MinWeigh Door, for example, is designed to be perfect for use in weighing cabinets. But it also offers advantages for normal weighing conditions. It can improve the repeatability of the net reading by a factor of about two! Using SmartGrid, a weighing pan with a special grid structure, stabilizes weighing so well that the draft shield doors for 4-digit analytical balances can normally be left open during weighing.
SmartGrid
MinWeigh Door
479
Balances
Reference section
Care of the balance

Keep Use
the weighing chamber and weighing pan clean. only clean vessels for weighing.
The
balance can be cleaned with conventional window-cleaning fluid. not use cloths that contain fusel oil. not brush contaminants into potential openings. cleaning, remove all removable parts, such as the weighing pan.
M Ta inEin wa Bru ra age tto
Do Do
Before
On Excellence and Excellence Plus analytical balances, each of the draft shield panes can be removed for cleaning in a dishwasher.
Jus t in t
Physical Influences
If the weight display does not stabilize, the result slowly drifts in one direction, or quite simply if wrong values are displayed, this is often due to undesired physical influences. The most frequent causes are:
Influences Influences Moisture
of the weighing sample on the balance from the surrounding area charged weighing samples or vessels
gain or loss by the weighing sample weighing samples or vessels
Electrostatically Magnetic
480
www.mt.com/academia
Temperature
Problem
The weight display of a weighing sample drifts in one direction.
Possible reasons
The balance has not been connected to the power supply long enough. There is a temperature gradient between the weighing sample and the surroundings that leads to air currents along the weighing vessel. The air flowing along the side of the vessel generates a force in an upward or downward direction that falsifies the weighing result. This effect is called dynamic buoyancy. The effect does not die away until a temperature equilibrium is established. The following applies: A cold object appears heavier, a warm object lighter. This effect can lead to problems, especially in differential weighings with semi-micro, micro and ultra-micro balances.
Example
You can test the dynamic buoyancy with the following experiment: Weigh a conical or similar flask and record the weight. Hold the flask in your hand for about one minute and repeat the weighing. Because of its higher temperature and the temperature gradient that developed, the flask appears lighter. (The perspiration on your hand plays no role in this effect. Otherwise the sample would have become heavier).
Corrective measures
Never
weigh samples taken directly from a dryer or refrigerator weighing sample to the temperature of the lab or weighing chamber sample containers with tweezers put your hand in the weighing chamber sample vessels with a small surface area
Acclimatize Hold
Never
Choose
481
Balances
Reference section
Problem
The weight display of a weighing sample permanently drifts in one direction.
Moisture gain/evaporation
Possible reasons
You are measuring the weight loss of volatile substances (e.g. the evaporation of water) or weight increase of hygroscopic weighing samples (atmospheric moisture gain).
Example
You can reproduce this effect with alcohol or silica gel.
Corrective measures
Use clean and dry weighing vessels and keep the weighing pan free from dirt and water drops. Use vessels with narrow necks and mount covers or stoppers. Do not use cork or cardboard supports for flasks with a circular base. Both can gain or lose a considerable amount of water. Metal triangular holders or the ErgoClips for the Excellence and Excellence Plus family of balances are neutral in this regard.
Using a weighing vessel with a larger opening increases the risk of measuring errors through evaporation or condensation.
482
www.mt.com/academia
Electrostatics
W Ste gen ve Mi ler

age
The "ErgoClip Basket" taring container holder does an excellent job of eliminating electrostatics, thereby effectively preventing the described problems with tubes and test glasses.
Problem
Each weighing shows a different result. The weight display is unstable. The repeatability of the result is poor.
Corrective measures
Increase
Possible reasons
Your weighing vessel or the sample has become electrostatically charged. Materials with low electrical conductivity such as glass, plastics, powder or granulates cannot or can only very slowly (over hours) drain away electrostatic charges. This charging occurs primarily through stirring or rubbing during the handling or transport of containers or materials. Dry air with less than 40% relative humidity increases the risk of this effect. The weighing errors arise through the electrostatic forces that act between the weighing sample and the surroundings. These electrostatic charges can be measured by micro, semi-micro and analytical balances and lead to the weighing errors described.
the atmospheric moisture. Electrostatic charging is particularly a problem in winter in heated rooms. In air conditioned rooms, setting the air conditioning to increase the humidity (45-60% relative humidity) can help. Screen electrostatic forces. Place the weighing vessel in a metal container. Use other weighing vessels. Plastic and glass charge quickly and are therefore unsuitable. Metal is a better material. Use antistatic guns. The commercially available products, however, are not effective in all situations. Use external or internal antistatic kits from METTLER TOLEDO.
Example
A clean glass or plastic vessel that has been gently rubbed with a woolen cloth shows this effect quite clearly.
The balance, and hence the weighing pan, should always be grounded. All METTLER TOLEDO balances with three-pin power plugs are automatically grounded. Antistatic accessories start on page 152.
483
Balances
Reference section
Problem
The weight of a weighing sample depends on its position on the weighing pan. The repeatability of the result is poor. But the display remains stable.
Magnetism
Possible reasons
You are weighing a magnetic material. Magnetic and magnetically permeable objects exert a mutual attraction. The additional forces that arise are wrongly interpreted as a load. Practically all objects made of iron (steel) are highly permeable to magnetic forces (ferromagnetic).
Corrective measures
If possible, demagnetize the magnetic forces by placing the weighing sample in a vessel made of Mu Metal film, for example. Since the magnetic force decreases with increasing distance, the sample can be distanced further from the weighing pan by using a non-magnetic support (e.g. beaker, aluminum stands). The same effect can be achieved by means of a hanger. This belowthe-balance setup is built in as standard with most METTLER TOLEDO micro, semi-micro, analytical and precision balances. Wherever possible, METTLER TOLEDO uses non-magnetic materials to keep this effect to a minimum.
MPS
To weigh average- and large-sized magnets with precision balances we recommend an MPS Weighing Pan (Magnetic Protection System). For analytical balances, we recommend using a triangular holder, which increases the distance between the magnets and the weighing pan. For balances in the Excellence and Excellence Plus lines, we offer special ErgoClips for this purpose.
ErgoClip Flask tare container holder for balances in the Excellence and Excellence Plus lines.
484
www.mt.com/academia
Static buoyancy
Effect
A weighing sample weighed in air and in a vacuum does not have the same weight.
Reason
A body experiences a loss in weight equal to the weight of the medium it displaces (Archimedes principle). This principle provides an explanation of why ships float, a balloon rises, or why the weight of a sample is affected by atmospheric pressure. The medium that surrounds our weighing sample is air. The density of the air is approximately 1.2 kg/m (depending on the temperature and atmospheric pressure). The buoyancy of the weighing sample (body) is thus 1.2kg per cubic meter of its volume.
Example
If we place a 100 g calibration weight in a beaker on a beam balance and then add water to an identical beaker on the other weighing pan until the weighing beam is in equilibrium, the two weighing samples, weighed in air, have the same weight. If we then enclose the beam balance with a bell jar and generate a vacuum in it, the weighing beam will tilt to the side with the water, since the water displaces more air owing to the larger volume, and has hence experienced a greater buoyancy. In vacuum there is no buoyancy. Therefore, in the vacuum, there is more than 100 g of water on the right side.
Weight in air Density Volume Buoyancy Weight in vacuum Referenzgewicht 100 g 8000 kg/m3 12.5 cm3 15 mg 100.015 g Water 100 g 1000 kg/m3 100 cm3 120 mg 100.120 g
Corrective measures
The sensitivity of the balance is adjusted with reference weights of density 8.0 g/cm. In the weighing of samples of different density, an air buoyancy error arises. In weighings with high measurement accuracy, the displayed weight should be corrected accordingly. In weighings on different days (differential weighings, comparative weighings), check atmospheric pressure, atmospheric humidity and temperature, and calculate the air buoyancy correction as follows: (next page)
485
Balances
Reference section
The right way to weigh Procedure to determine the mass of a weighing sample:
1. Calculate air density

P h t air density in kg/m3 atmospheric pressure in hPa (= mbar) (use weighing station pressure) relative atmospheric humidity in % temperature in C
2. Determine the mass of the weighing sample (correct air buoyancy)
m a c W
mass air density in kg/m3 density of the weighing sample conventional body density (8,000 kg/m3) weighing value (balance display)
Example
Balance display 200,000 g Atmospheric pressure 1,018 hPa Relative atmospheric moisture 70% Temperature 20C Density of weighing sample 2,600 kg/m
486
www.mt.com/academia
Gravitation
Effect
The weighing values are different when the weighing height changes. For example, the weight display changes when the weighing is performed 10m higher (e.g. moving from the first floor to the fourth floor of a building).
Reason
To determine the weight of a body, the balance measures the weight force, i.e. the force of attraction (gravitational force), between the earth and the weighing sample. This force depends essentially on the latitude of the location and its height above sea level (distance from the center of the earth).
The following holds: 1. The further a weight is from the center of the earth, the smaller the gravitational force acting on it. It decreases with the square of the distance.
2. The nearer a location is to the equator, the greater the centrifugal acceleration due to the rotation of the earth. The centrifugal acceleration counteracts the force of attraction (gravitational force). The poles are the greatest distance from the equator and closest to the earths center. The force acting on a mass is therefore greatest at the poles.
Example
In the case of a 200 g weight that shows exactly 200.00000 g on the first floor, the following weight results on the fourth floor (10 m higher):
Corrective measures
Level and adjust the balance whenever it is moved or before using it for the first time.
Balances with built-in FACT (fully automatic motorized self-adjustment) perform this adjustment automatically. METTLER TOLEDO balances of the Excellence and Excellence Plus line come standard with FACT.
487
Balances
Reference section
Technical Terms
Readability
The readability of a balance is the smallest difference between two measured values that can be read on the display. With a digital display this is the smallest numerical increment, also called a scale interval.
Standard readabilities (or scale intervals) for various balance types Ultra-micro balances Micro balances Semi-micro balances Analytical balances Precision balances
1)
1d 1) = 1d = 1d = 1d = 1d
0.1 g 1 g 0.01 mg 0.1 mg = 1 g to 1 mg
= 0.0000001 g = 0.000001 g = = 0.00001 g 0.0001 g
7-dig t 6-dig t 5-dig t 4-dig t 0 to 3-dig t
= 1 g to 0.001 g
1d = 1 digit = one numerical increment
DeltaRange and DualRange balances feature two different types of readability, which makes them an attractive alternative in terms of price.
Accuracy
Qualitative name for the degree to which test results approximate the reference value, which can be the correct or expected value, depending on the definition or agreement [DIN1) 55350-13]. Or in short: How close the balance display comes to the actual weight of a weighing sample.
Accuracy classes of test weights

Summary of various weight pieces in the same accuracy classes. The recommendation of the weight class according to OIML2) R111 ensures that the error limits with regard to the weight classification are observed and that the material and surface quality correspond to this international recommendation. www.oiml.com As part of control of inspection, measuring and test equipment, quality management standards require that balances be calibrated or adjusted at particular intervals with traceable weights. Certified weights with a corresponding accuracy class must be used for this purpose.
1) 2)
www.oiml.com
DIN German Inst tute for Standardization OIML International Organization of Legal Metrology
488
www.mt.com/academia
Sensitivity
Change in the output variable of a measuring instrument divided by the associated change in the input variable ([VIM] 5.10)1). For a balance, the change in the weighing value W divided by the load variation m
The sensitivity is one of the most important specifications of a balance. The specified sensitivity of a balance is generally understood to be global sensitivity (slope), measured over the nominal range.
Sensitivity between weighing value W and load m, on the example of a balance with a nominal range of 1 kg. The middle line shows the characteristic curve of a balance with correct sensitivity (slope). The upper characteristic curve is too steep (sensitivity too high, exaggerated for reasons of illustration), while the lower curve is not steep enough (too little sensitivity).
Temperature coefficient of the sensitivity

Sensitivity is temperature-dependent. The degree of dependence is determined via the reversible deviation of the measured value owing to the influence of a temperature change in the surroundings. It is given by the temperature coefficient of the sensitivity (TC) and corresponds to the percentage deviation of the weight display (or sample weight) per degree Celsius. With an XP balance, for example, the temperature coefficient of the sensitivity is 0.0001%/C. This means that for a temperature change of 1 degree Celsius, the sensitivity changes by 0.0001% or one millionth. The temperature coefficient can be calculated as follows:
In this equation, S is the change in sensitivity and T the temperature change. The sensitivity change S is equal to the result change R divided by the weighing load m, or after taring by the sample weight. With this information the deviation of the measuring result at a specified temperature change can be calculated by rearranging the above equation. For the display value we can then obtain:
1)
VIM International Vocabulary of Basic and General Terms in Metrology
489
Balances
Reference section
If you weigh a load (sample weight) of 100 g on the XP/XS analytical balance, and the ambient temperature in the laboratory has changed by 5C since the last calibration, this can lead to the following maximum result change R (with the temperature coefficient of the XP of 0.0001%/C) in the worst case scenario:
If, on the other hand, the load were only 100 mg, that is 1000 times less, the maximum deviation would also be correspondingly less and amount solely to 0.5 g.
FACT
Time
Abbreviation for Fully Automatic Calibration Technology (FACT). Automatic adjustment of the sensitivity, depending on the type and linearity of a balance. The adjustment is triggered whenever a predetermined temperature change is exceeded. During production, internal weights are traceably connected to international measuring standards by means of primary calibration. In this process, the mass of the internal weight is determined by placing a certified weight on the balance and storing the value in the balance.
proFACT
Abbreviation for Professional Fully Automatic Calibration Technology (proFACT). Professional automatic adjustment of sensitivity.
The Excellence and Excellence Plus family of semi-micro and analytical balances has two internal weights. This means that, during calibration, the balance tests not only the sensitivity but also the non-linearity.
490
www.mt.com/academia
Linearity (Non-linearity)
The linearity expresses how well the balance is capable of following the linear relation between the load m and the displayed value W (sensitivity). Here, the characteristic weighing curve is imagined as a straight line between zero and maximum load (see: Sensitivity). On the other hand, the non-linearity defines the width of the band within which a positive or negative deviation of the measured value from the ideal characteristic curve can occur. For the METTLER TOLEDO Excellence Plus Analytical Balance XP205DR, for example, the deviation from the linear course of the characteristic curve is maximum 0.15 mg over the entire weighing range of 200 g.
Repeatability
Repeatability is a measure of the ability of a balance to supply the same result in repetitive weighings with one and the same load under the same measurement conditions ([OIML1) R 76 1] T.4.3). The series of measurements must be carried out by the same operator, by the same weighing method, in the same location on the same pan support, in the same installation location, under constant ambient conditions, and without interruption. The standard deviation of the measurement series is a suitable measurement for expressing the value of the repeatability. Particularly with high resolution balances, the magnitude of the repeatability is a property that depends not only on the balance. Repeatability is also affected by the ambient conditions (drafts, temperature fluctuations, vibrations), by the weighing sample, and in part by the skill of the person performing the weighing.
The following example shows a typical series of measurements, performed on a semi-micro balance with a readability of 0.01 mg.
x1 x2 x3 x4 x5
= = = = =
27.51467 g 27.51466 g 27.51468 g 27.51466 g 27.51465 g
x6 x7 x8 x9 x10
= = = = =
27.51467 g 27.51467 g 27.51466 g 27.51468 g 27.51467 g
1)
OIML International Organization of Legal Metrology
491
Balances
Reference section
Let us now determine the mean value and the repeatability of this series of measurements. Mean value:
xi = i-th result of the series N: Number of measurements (weighings), usually 10 The mean value is x = 27.514667 g.
The standard deviation s is used as a measure of the repeatability t. Consequently, the repeatability of the measurement series is s = 0.0095 mg. The uncertainty in the measurement result is around two to three times the repeatability u 2s... 3s i.e. the true result x lies within the interval x-u<x<x+u In our series of measurements is u 2 s 2 x 0.01 mg = 0.02 mg, so that we can specify the weighing result by x u = 27.51467 g 0.02 mg. The very lowest measured value to be expected for this load with the balance used in the above series of measurements is thus 27.51465 g and the largest is 27.51469 g, which agrees well with the series of measurements.
Traceability
The property of a measurement result, via an unbroken chain of comparative measurements with stated measurement uncertainties, relative to suitable nationally or internationally applicable standards ([VIM]1) 6.10). The normal weight pieces used for mass measurements are traced to the superordinate standards.
1)
VIM International Vocabulary of Basic and General Terms in Metrology
492
www.mt.com/academia
Leveling
Setup of a balance in its reference position (as a rule, horizontally), i.e. setting up its direction of action parallel to the perpendicular orientation of the balance. As a rule, this is the same as setting up the housing of the balance horizontally. The result is distorted by the cosine of the angle of inclination. Corrective measures: All balances offer the option of leveling by using adjustable feet. The Excellence Plus balance has LevelControl, a fully automatic level monitoring function. LevelControl automatically warns you and documents when the balance is not leveled, which increases measuring reliability and eliminates the risks inherent in visual control, such as when using a measuring cabinet.
Corner load
1. Deviation of the measurement value through off-center (eccentric) loading. The corner load increases with the weight of the load and its removal from the center of the pan support. If the display remains consistent even when the same load is placed on different parts of the weighing pan, the balance does not have corner-load deviation. For this reason, with high-precision balances, it is important to make sure the weighing sample is always placed exactly in the middle. The official designation for corner load is: off-center loading error.
Reproducibility
The degree of approximation between the measurement values of the same measured variable, even though the individual measurements are carried out under different conditions (which are specified) with regard to:
t he
measuring process t he observer t he measuring device t he measuring location t he conditions of use t he time
493
Balances
Reference section
Accuracy
Qualitative term as a judgement regarding the systematic deviation of measurements. The closeness of agreement between the expected value (mean value) of a series of measuring values and the true value of the object being measured ([ISO1) 5725] 3.7). Remarks The accuracy can be evaluated only when there are several measurement values, as well as a recognized correct reference value.
Precision
Qualitative term as a judgement regarding the mean variation of measurements. The closeness of agreement between independent measurement values obtained under stipulated conditions ([ISO1) 5725] 3.12). Precision depends only on the distribution of random errors and does not relate to the true value of the measurement variable (accuracy). Example The ability of a measuring instrument to supply measurement values that seldom deviate. Remarks Precision can be evaluated only when there are several measurement values.
Measurement uncertainty
A parameter, associated with the result of a measurement, that characterizes the dispersion of the values that could reasonably attributed to the measurement variable ([VIM]1) 3.9). This parameter, i.e. the measurement uncertainty, is generally expressed by the standard uncertainty u or the expanded measurement uncertainty U (confidence interval). GUM2) contains instructions on determining measurement uncertainty. According to GUM, the measurement uncertainty is obtained by totaling the quadratic errors when these are not mutually influential.
In most countries, METTLER TOLEDO Service offers these measurement uncertainty calculations on-site, at the customers request.
Note There are a variety of methods for calculating measurement uncertainty. In the pharmaceutical industry the reference content is often determined according to the U.S. Pharmacopeia. Otherwise, measurement uncertainty is often determined based on ISO3) 17025. The latter corresponds to the GUM method.
ISO International Standards Organization VIM International Vocabulary of basic and general terms in Metrology
1) 1) 2)
3)
GUM Guide of Uncertainty of Measurement ISO International Standards Organization
494
www.mt.com/academia
Minimum initial weight value

The value below which the relative deviation of a measuring result is too large.
METTLER TOLEDO balances in the Excellence Plus line offer superior weighing technology for successfully weighing the very smallest of weighing samples.
Calibration
Determining the deviation between the measurement value and the true value of the measurement variable under specified measuring conditions.
1.00005 mg
METTLER TOLEDO Excellence and Excellence Plus balances document each error on the display or send it to an external software program or printer.
Adjustment
Determining the deviation between the measurement value and the true value of the measurement variable under specified measuring conditions. A correction should then be made. METTLER TOLEDO Excellence and Excellence Plus balances document each error by showing it on the display or sending it to an external software program or printer. For software, we recommend using LabX balance with integrated inspection, measuring and test equipment in accordance with METTLER TOLEDO Good Weighing Practice
1.00005 mg 1.00000 mg
www.mt.com/GWP
495
Balances
Reference section
GWP Good Weighing Practice

1. Evaluation
5. Routine Operation
2. Selection
4. Calibration
3. Installation The GWP planetary system

With Good Weighing Practice (GWP), METTLER TOLEDO offers you the perfect solution. If you decide to opt for GWP, you will have an expert team on hand at all important stages of the weighing process for evaluation and selecting the most appropriate weighing solution, during commissioning, calibration, and even routine operation. With GWP, METTLER TOLEDO is offering the first globally valid guideline for weighing systems. This guideline is the starting point for a package of measures that is tailored to customer applications. And by tailored we mean: The most economical yet safest weighing solution. Detecting a deviation too late or not at all? This is probably something you want to avoid. Good Weighing Practice represents risk-free weighing, as it guarantees the safety and quality of your products. Click here to watch our GWP movie
496
www.mt.com/academia
The GWP triangle

Routine
operation How should my balance be tested? How often should tests be conducted? How can I minimize the required time and expense? Regular maintenance of your laboratory balance by an authorized service technician is recommended to ensure that your weighing remains accurate for years to come. Regular maintenance will also extend the life of your balance.
Independent service technicians test and document the correct functioning of the balance using accredited calibration processes.
Balances with FACT require fewer routine tests. Intelligent balance functions reduce the time and expense of testing and offer additional qual ty assurance.
The user periodically performs short tests and immediately knows whether the balance is weighing within process tolerances.
Between maintenance intervals, it is a good idea to use certified external weights to check the balance yourself to identify any measurement errors immediately.
It is important to use suitable test weights for these routine tests. With the CarePac weight sets, METTLER TOLEDO offers the user worry-free testing. Tailored to the GWP guideline, these weight sets contain the correct weights, testing tolerances, weighing tweezers, gloves and testing instructions.
You can find more detailed information on Good Weighing Practice at www.mt.com/GWP
With the CarePac weight sets, you are always on the safe side.
497
Balances
Reference section
What does Ex actually mean?

Ex is an abbreviation for ATEX Product Directive 94/9/EC. It is often unofficially referred to as "ATEX 95" on account of the corresponding Article 95 of the EU treaty on free trade on which it is based.
ATEX 95 for equipment and protective systems intended for use in hazardous areas (Ex Zone 2) sets out regulations for the putting into circulation of products used in hazardous areas. Hazardous describes chemical substances categorized as "potentially explosive" within the legal framework of the Dangerous Substances Directive. The aim of this Directive is to assure user safety at all times. Accordingly, the equipment in a hazardous environment must fully meet the applicable guidelines without exception.
Everything you need to know about our balances for use in hazardous areas starts on page 76.
Robust
The dirt-resistant housing makes surfaces easy to clean. The rugged design offers complete overload protection.
498
www.mt.com/academia
Touchscreen display
Safe and easy operation via touchscreen with graphical user interface.
Stand for terminal

Save space and avoid soiling the terminal by using an optional stand.
Excellence XS Ex2 balances enable efficient weighing in ATEX Zone 2 environments.
ErgoSens
The freely positionable and individually configurable ErgoSens enables handsfree operation of the balance.
499
Moisture Analyzers
Reference section
Moisture Determination
Moisture determination:
When a Moisture Analyzer, when Karl Fischer?
Moisture
A generally accepted definition of the term moisture does not exist. The definition of the term often affects the physical measuring principle used for moisture determination. This section describes moisture as encountered in conjunction with thermal (dry) analytical methods.
Selecting a suitable measuring method

The selection of a suitable measuring method is essentially determined by the following variables:
Requirements
The moisture of a material includes all those substances which volatilize when heated and cause the sample to lose weight. The loss of weight is detected with a balance and interpreted as moisture content. In addition to water, therefore, this definition of the term moisture also covers other losses in mass such as organic solvents which evaporate, alcohol, fats, oils, aromatic components, and decomposition and combustion products.
with regard to accuracy, measuring range, repeatability, and sensitivity Type of water retention Required information: Water or moisture content Measuring rate Sample quantity Physical characteristics of the sample (e.g. decomposition temperature) Budget Simplicity (with regard to operation or functionality) Legal requirements (reference method) Options for automation Calibratability
500
www.mt.com/academia
For information about moisture analyzers for moisture determination, see page 104 onwards; Karl-Fischer titrators for determining water content start on page 382.
Why measure water or moisture content?

Most natural products contain moisture. Water content is seldom of interest in itself. In fact, it indicates whether a product has certain characteristics with a decisive role to play in terms of commerce and production. These include:
Shelf
life
Formation
of lumps in powders Microbiological stability Flow characteristics, viscosity Dry-substance content Concentration or purity Commercial quality (compliance with quality agreements) Nutritional value of the product Legal conformity (national food regulations) The dry-substance content of commercial goods is of interest from the point of view of commerce and industry. The water in a product is taken into account when prices are set. Legal requirements, along with product declarations, define the difference between natural moisture and moisture added to a product.
Moisture Analyzers
Reference section
Moisture determination methods
Moisture content affects the physical characteristics of a substance. These include its weight, density, viscosity, refractive index, and electrical conductivity, to name but a few. Over time, a number of different methods have been developed to measure these physical quantities and express them as moisture content.
Thermogravimetric measuring methods

e.g. infrared drying
Principle Instead of hot air circulation, this method uses direct infrared radiation to dry the sample. The infrared radiation is absorbed by the sample. The energy that is absorbed heats the substance. Advantage The main advantages of this method are the simple operating principle and short drying time. Measurement results are available in a matter of minutes. Disadvantage As is generally the case with all thermal methods, sample decomposition is possible. Substances other than water canalso evaporate.
e.g. halogen drying

Principle This method was developed from infrared drying. The radiator technology is based on the halogen radiator principle. Advantage Thanks to their compact design, the halogen radiators are able to reach the required operating temperature incredibly quickly and can be precisely controlled. As a result, measurement duration is usually shorter than with conventional methods and the heat is more evenly distributed across the sample. The combination of consistent heat irradiation of the sample with precise temperature control produces measurement results with extraordinarily good reproducibility. METTLER TOLEDO's halogen moisture analyzers are fitted with a radiator featuring this technology. Dependent on the nature of the sample and the moisture content, these analyzers can produce accurate measurement results within 3 to 10 minutes. Disadvantage Substances other than water can also evaporate.
The measuring methods logically divide into major techniques as follows: Thermogravimetric measuring methods
Infrared and halogen drying, for example.
Chemical measuring methods

Karl Fischer titration, for example.
The section on moisture analyzers starts on page 104.
502
www.mt.com/academia
Chemical measuring methods

e.g. Karl Fischer titration
Principle The Karl-Fischer technique is used as a reference method for many substances. It is a chemical analytical technique involving the oxidation of sulfur dioxide by iodine in a methanol-based solution. In principle, thefollowing chemical reaction takes place:
H2O + I2 + SO2 + CH3OH + 3RN [RNH]SO4CH3 + 2[RNH]I

Titration can be volumetric or coulometric. In volumetric titration, a KarlFischer solution containing iodine is added until the first trace of excess iodine appears. A burette is used to determine how much iodine has reacted from the KarlFischer solution containing iodine. In the coulometric method, the iodine involved in the reaction is produced directly in the titration cell by means of electrochemical oxidation of iodide until, similarly, a trace of non-reacting iodine is detected. Faraday's Law can then be applied to calculate the amount of iodine produced on the basis of the current required. Application Karl-Fischer titration is a water-specific moisture determination method which can be used for samples with a high moisture content (volumetric analysis) as well as for samples with water content in the ppm range (coulometric analysis). Although originally conceived for non-aqueous liquids, it is also suitable for solids, as long as these are soluble or if water can be drawn from them by heating them up in a gas stream or using extraction. Advantages A precise reference method. Coulometric analysis is also suitable for trace analyses and water detection. Restriction Work techniques have to be tailored to the sample being measured.
METTLER TOLEDO is a leading manufacturer of Karl Fischer titration equipment, offering a comprehensive range of instruments, software, and accessories. These are shown in this catalog starting from page 382.
Moisture Analyzers
Reference section
Halogen heating for optimum results

METTLER TOLEDO was the first company to launch innovative halogen heating technology. The low mass of the halogen lamp heats up without delay. The round halogen radiator ensures uniform warming of the samples. In this way, reproducible results are achieved in just a few minutes, from the very first measurement.
www.mt.com/academia
Strengths and weaknesses of drying methods
Method
Infrared drying
Strengths
Typical measurement duration 5 to 15 mins. Initial weighing of large sample quantities is possible. Easy to handle, simple method, compact solution.
Weaknesses
Decomposition of the sample is possible. Substances which evaporate along with water.
Halogen drying
Fast; typical measurement duration 2 to 10 mins. Initial weighing of large sample quantities is possible. Easy to handle, simple method, versatile, compact solution.
Decomposition of the sample is possible. Substances which evaporate along with water.
Coulometric
A precise reference method. Suitable for trace analyses, water detection
Work techniques have to be tailored to the sample being measured.
Volumetric
A precise reference method, water detection
Work techniques have to be tailored to the sample being measured.
For information about moisture analyzers for moisture determination, see page 104 onwards; Karl-Fischer titrators for determining water content start on page 382.
505
Mass comparators
Reference section
Weight determination
Comparator Maximum traceability

The main users of mass comparators for weight determination are national standards mass laboratories, legal metrology services, in-house calibration laboratories, and weights and measures offices. These applications require an extremely high weighing resolution.
The comparator technique

Mass is always determined by comparing a standard and a test specimen. On traditional mechanical balances, this is achieved by using levers and springs. Electronic balances compare the weighing signal generated by a test specimen (weighing sample) with a "scale". As part of an adjustment procedure, the scale is set to the correct sensitivity by the weighing signal generated by a standard. Comparator balances compare weighing signals from substitution weighing procedures.
Maximum accuracy is achieved with the substitution principle.

The substitution balance is a balance on which the weighing sample and the weights are located on the same side of the lever arm. When the pan is empty, the weights and the constant counterweight are bal-
anced. When the weighing sample is added to the pan, the corresponding mass is removed from the weight set in the form of a weight (dialing weights). The principle of substitution (physical weighing principle) has the advantage over the two-arm balance in that the sensitivity of the balance does not alter as the weight of the sample in the pan increases because there is virtually no change in the system's center of gravity on account of the virtually constant load of the lever arm. In this way, the nominal load can be compared. A mass comparison comprises at least two weighing procedures; it compares the gravitational force to which the objects are exposed. To safeguard the statistical accuracy of the results, the weighing procedures are normally repeated several times for each object. To put it another way, a reference weight is placed on the comparator balance and compared with the test specimen.
Mass comparators: Weight determination from 0.1 g up to 6,000kg

With 52 million points, mass comparators have an extremely high resolution and also offer maximum repeatability. These two features allow weight comparison between a known reference weight and an unknown test specimen, even with a minimal weight difference. Manual mass comparators are used for all metrological applications which require maximum accuracy. These include determination of mass, weight calibration, and quality control. Manual mass comparators from METTLER TOLEDO cover a weighing range from 1 mg to 6,000kg.
506
www.mt.com/academia
Comparator balances start on page 96.
In an automated mass comparator, the fitting of several weights prior to the weighing process and the removal of the weights at the end of the process is a single step in each case. No manual intervention is required during the automated measurement process, which increases the quality, accuracy, and efficiency of comparison weighing. As well as manual and automated mass comparators, there are also comparators for determining the density, volume, and magnetism of solid bodies.
a_comparator
For automatic determination of test weights, by comparing a test weight with a standard or through downwards/upwards calibration. Systems in the a_comparator line comprise a comparator balance with high resolution, a weight magazine and a 3-axis robot, as well as the housing and controller.
507
Balances
Reference section
Automated precision weighing
Our range of weighing platforms and load cells starts on page 80.
AutoChem
in-situ analyses
That's what load cells are for

An ever-increasing product portfolio for automated precision weighing applications is tailored to the needs of mechanical and systems engineers and geared towards instruments and devices with integrated precision weighing technology.
508
www.mt.com/academia
Liquid handling
Flexible integration into fully automatic liquid handling platforms thanks to the ultracompact dimensions of the weighing sensor and with a resolution of up to 1 g.
Material characterization
Highly precise and automatic weight or force measurement for material characterization with outstanding long-term stability.
Filling/Dosing
Optimum dosing processes are assured thanks to 38 updates per second and flexible configuration options, along with monitoring functions integrated in the sensor with digital outputs.
X platforms with industrial terminals
100% Quality control and process control

100% in-process precision weighing which is integrated in a compact and direct format at the critical process stage automatically adjusts the relevant parameters immediately. What's more, weighing times are incredibly short and parameter settings are flexible. In many processes, mass or weight continues to be a central measured variable for process control and for quality control. Weight determination which is fast and automatic, yet highly precise, is opening up entirely new dimensions in many areas of factory and laboratory automation. Whether simple weighing, precision dosing, specific material characterization, efficient fill quantity control or quality control: Precision weighing modules are the order of the day wherever weighing has to be quick, precise, and automatic, with a direct link to the process.
Automatic precision weighing

Fast yet highly precise weight determination in micrograms and milligrams in fractions of seconds and this seamlessly integrated into automatic processes.
Statistical quality control (SQC)

Periodic weight measurement of defined samples for the purposes of statistical quality control and assuring traceability facilitate efficient offline process control.
509
Balances
Reference section
Software solutions
LIMS
A LIMS supports all operational procedures in the laboratory; it sees the laboratory as an independent service unit to be integrated into the overall organization. Order processing and invoicing, operational issues and CRM (customer relationship management) can, therefore, be implemented in a LIMS in just the same way as raw data archiving and robot-based automation. Interfaces with other IT systems ensure that operational procedures in the laboratory are fully integrated with business processes.
Laboratory Information Management System
This category of software system is used for data processing in laboratories specializing in the fields of chemistry, physics, biology or medicine. In principle, we could be talking about any laboratory, but LIMS is not necessarily the term used by all the above sectors.
For software, see page 138 onwards.
Office
510
www.mt.com/academia
A LIMS is usually made up of two different strands: The measurement strand (measuring devices, capture and storage of measured values from sensors, etc.) The control strand (mathematical processing and evaluation of measured data, sample management, invoicing, etc.) Accordingly, a LIMS will comprise the following two basic modules at the very least: measured-value acquisition and measured-value evaluation. Other modules are used to link hardware to the measurement strand and to interface with ERP systems, controlling software, the data back-up infrastructure, databases, process management logic, etc. Every LIMS is charged with ensuring a seamless process sequence from registration of receipt of a sample through control and monitoring of the entire measurement process and ultimately to the analysis of the experiment in financial terms. Quite often, they cannot do this alone. A LIMS can also be set up as a distributed system if, for example, measuring containers are used externally or mobile measuring systems are employed. A significant number of today's laboratory information management systems are able to simulate many parts of a laboratory or production unit. To achieve this, static data and dynamic data are treated separately.
A particular challenge faced by the systems in this regard is the interfacing of the analytical instruments and/or their software in a laboratory.
, METTLER TOLEDO's software for weighing systems and titrators, captures the analytical data (raw data, metadata, results) then acts as a translator and control station for higher-level systems. A user-defined link (which can also be bidirectional) to a LIMS can be set up via a programmable interface (API), enabling not just the required data and results to be transferred to the LIMS on completion of the analyses, but also permitting analyses to be started from the LIMS. In a configuration such as this, LabX controls all the functions of the measuring instrument, captures all data in a traceable format, and can forward such data selectively to the LIMS so that it does not get flooded with information.
LabX
IT
Quality Control
Laboratory
511
Balances
Reference section
Density and how it is determined

The density of a material is defined as the mass it contains in grams per 1 cm3. It is represented by the Greek letter (rho). Density states mass per volume and is a characteristic property of a material which is not dependent on shape or size. The material can be a solid, a liquid or a gas.
Density is dependent on temperature and pressure. Water (free-flowing), for example, is most dense at 3.98C. Asit gets cooler, it expands (a reduction in density results in volume expansion: V = m/); this is the reason for frost, for example. In frozen lakes, for example, the water which is at a temperature of 3.98C is found on the lake bed, while the colder, less dense water rises. This is how life is able to survive, despite the freezing conditions. Bodies in a liquid whose density is lower than this will rise (they float). Accordingly, bodies whose density is higher will sink down. This explains why ice floats on water. During this process, the volume of water which has exactly the same mass as the ice is displaced. Gaseous substances behave in a similar way. A balloon filled with helium will float in the air because helium has a lower density than air at the same pressure and the same temperature. Density is commonly specified in terms of the relative density (specific density), which is obtained by comparing with a standard. Water which is in a standard state at 3.98C and the density of dry air under normal conditions (0C and 1013.25 mbar = 1.2931 kg/m) are suitable standards.
Use the density kit from METTLER TOLEDO for analytical and precision balances to determine density. Perfectly suited for solid, liquid, porous, and viscous substances.
512
www.mt.com/academia
See page 134 onwards for density determination accessories.
The following methods can be used to determine density.

Archimedes' Pycnometer
principle
Density determination of solid objects by measuring the volume of liquid displaced.

Isotope
method Density determination by means of radiation absorption. vibration Density determination by means of vibration measurement.
Flexural
According to Archimedes' principle ...

Any object, wholly or partly immersed in a fluid, is buoyed up by a force equal to the weight of the fluid displaced by the object. Two measurements have to be taken to determine the two unknown quantities density and volume. If a random object with a volume VK is immersed completely in two liquids or gases with known densities 1 and 2, it will be exposed to two different resulting forces FG1 and FG2. The resulting forces can be measured using a balance.
513
Balances
Reference section
Electrostatic charges
Antistatic
Antistatic describes materials or solutions which are used to prevent objects from becoming statically charged or to minimize such phenomena.
Electrostatic describes idle electric charges, charge distributions, and the electrical fields of charged bodies or the forces electric charges exert upon each other.
Electrostatic charge is one of the main reasons why weighing results become distorted.
Non-conductive materials such as plastic or glass take very little time to become electrostatically charged and can generate electrostatic forces. These forces make weighing results unstable; in other words, the value displayed changes constantly and does not stabilize As well as being unstable, the weighing result can actually be incorrect, since electrostatic forces can cause weighing errors of plus or minus several milligrams. Electrostatic charge scatters samples in powder form or presses them against the tare container. As well as making the samples difficult to handle, this also introduces the risk of cross-contamination. In the case of toxic substances or substances which are hazardous to health, this can be dangerous for the user.
U electrode in use on an older METTLER TOLEDO balance model (AX series)
Antistatic kits (mountable ionizer) can solve this problem. The ionizer can be mounted on the draft shield in 6 different positions and activated either manually or automatically in response to the opening of the draft shield. The ionizer generates positive and negative ions in equal quantities. Its high voltage enables electrostatically charged samples and tare containers to be neutralized within seconds.
See page 152 of the catalog for antistatic kits.
514
www.mt.com/academia
Tip
In addition to the use of a universal antistatic kit (U ionizer), ErgoClips also provide an effective means of reducing the effect of electrostatic charge.
+ + + + + - - + + + ++ + + + + - - - - - - + + + + + - - -
How electrostatic affects the balance

Since the balance is not able to identify the source of the forces acting upon the weighing pan, electrostatic force is interpreted as mass. Dependent on the shape and size of the weighing sample, this can lead to seriously inaccurate measured values being displayed. (0.1 g is not unusual on analytical balances.)
Our unique ErgoClips start on page 122.
Balances
Reference section
Pipette testing
Gravimetric testing of pipettes

Pipettes are one of the most important tools found in laboratory environments.
The quality of research results is very much dependent upon their precision and accuracy. To ensure long-term precision in the range from 1 l to 1,000l in particular, pipettes have to be tested and calibrated from time to time. Due to the inevitable wear and tear associated with daily use and in particular after repairs or repeat autoclaving, pipettes have to be checked regularly for accuracy. Gravimetric lab-based testing is the method of choice for testing pipettes in accordance with the calibration requirements of standard ISO8655. This standard sets out requirements with regard to the legibility and accuracy of the required balance in conjunction with the selected volume of the pipette to be tested.
Set volumes of the device according to test volume 1 l V 10 l 10 l < V 100 l 100 l < V 1,000 l 1 ml < V 10 ml 10 ml < V 200 ml
Balance readability 0.001 mg 0.01 mg 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 1 mg
For practical reasons, the nominal volume of the pipette can be used to select the balance. The weighing values obtained from gravimetric testing are mass values of the specified volume. During gravimetric pipette testing, the use of what is known as a evaporation trap is recommended to minimize evaporation of the liquid on the balance.
How does an evaporation trap work?

The liquid taken up by the pipette is weighed on a suitable balance in a special container. The volume is calculated from the weight and density of the liquid and compared with the nominal volume of the pipette. The evaporation trap keeps the air humidity in the lab constant at around 90%, thereby preventing the liquid from evaporating. This stops liquid being lost from the storage vessel. The balance records the correct weighing value.
Evaporation trap in use on the XP205 analytical balance

516
www.mt.com/academia
Balances for gravimetric pipette calibration are dealt with starting on page 114. For everything you need to know about our pipettes, go to page 198. Information about our pipette calibration starts on page 292. Tips on good pipetting practice start on page 524.
Balances
Reference section
Minimum weight determination
MinWeigh
MinWeigh defines the lowest possible weight at which the weighing result will still conform to process requirements.
Initial weighing often only uses between 1% and 10% of a balance's weighing capacity. However, it is precisely in this range that the greatest relative measurement uncertainties occur. If the weighed value is less than the minimum weight, there is no guarantee that the weighing result will conform to process requirements. In a regulated environment, the measurement series must then be repeated or valuable substances might be lost. In the worst-case scenario, production will stop and significant financial losses will be incurred. The minimum weight is set by the provisions of the applicable regulations. (USP regulations*, for example, require accuracy to be better than 0.1% with three standard deviations.) The MinWeigh function on balances stores the permissible minimum weight in accordance with your requirements. The minimum weight is set in the actual working environment in which the balance has been installed. If a value below the specified minimum weight is used, this will appear in red on the display, warning you that the current value is outside the prevailing tolerance limits.
MinWeigh has to be activated by a certified service engineer on site. Once the balance has been programmed, the service engineer issues a "MinWeigh certificate" documenting the test measurements and tolerances along with the corresponding tare and minimum initial weight values.
* USP: United States Pharmacopeia
518
www.mt.com/academia
Balances
Reference section
Weights
The right weight

Weights are designed to provide the best possible support for routine testing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Routine tests carried out by users have significant advantages:
High
process accuracy and limited out-of-process tolerance risk Sensitivity test with two weights on the upper and lower sections of the balance Defined weights for testing the weighing data of your balance model External factors can affect the sensitivity and sometimes also the linearity of electronic balances, thereby leading to differences between displayed and actual values. Routine tests of balances are carried out with highprecision, high-quality weights which conform to the requirements of OIML recommendation R111. The Organisation Internationale de Mtrologie Lgale (OIML, The International Organization of Legal Metrology) is an international organization which was founded in Paris on October 12, 1955 to regulate metrological matters in the field of legal calibration.
METTLER TOLEDO offers weights in OIML accuracy classes E1, E2, F1, F2, M1, M2, and M3, with calibration certificates for the range from 1 mg through 2,000 kg.
The section about weights starts on page 166.
520
www.mt.com/academia
OIML accuracy classes Maximum permissible error for weights ( in mg)

Class E1 5,000 kg 2,000 kg 1,000 kg 500 kg 200 kg 100 kg 50 kg 20 kg 10 kg 5 kg 2 kg 1 kg 500 g 200 g 100 g 50 g 20 g 10 g 5g 2g 1g 500 mg 200 mg 100 mg 50 mg 20 mg 10 mg 5 mg 2 mg 1 mg 25 10 5 2.5 1 0.5 0.25 0.1 0.05 0.03 0.025 0.02 0.016 0.012 0.01 0.008 0.006 0.005 0.004 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 1,600 800 300 160 80 30 16 8 3 1.6 0.8 0.3 0.16 0.1 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.025 0.02 0.016 0.012 0.01 0.008 0.006 0.006 0.006 Class E2 Class F1 25,000 10,000 5,000 2,500 1,000 500 250 100 50 25 10 5 2.5 1 0.5 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.16 0.12 0.1 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.025 0.02 0.02 0,02 Class F2 80,000 30,000 16,000 8,000 3,000 1,600 800 300 160 80 30 16 8 3 1.6 1 0.8 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.16 0.12 0.1 0.08 0.06 0.06 0.06 Class M1 250,000 100,000 50,000 25,000 10,000 5,000 2,500 1,000 500 250 100 50 25 10 5 3 2.5 2 1.6 1.2 1 0.8 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 Class M2 800,000 300,000 160,000 80,000 30,000 16,000 8,000 3,000 1,600 800 300 160 80 30 16 10 8 6 5 4 3 2.5 2 1.6 Class M3 2,500,000 1,000,000 500,000 250,000 100,000 50,000 25,000 10,000 5,000 2,500 1,000 500 250 100 50 30 25 20 16 12 10
Information: OIML tolerances according to R 111 E1 w eights with the lowest measurement uncertainty are used by national institutes such as the PhysikalischTechnische Bundesanstalt (PTB, Federal Inst tute of Physics and Technology) in Braunschweig. E2 weights are used by regional calibration bodies. F1 and F2 weights are used for tests in scientific and industrial environments. A further distinction is drawn between Premium and Standard Line weights. Premium Line weights consist of a high-grade steel monobloc. Standard Line weights have an integrated chamber for adjusting the weight.
521
Balances
Reference section
Balance Calibration
Balance calibration
is also known as the "routine test to determine the sensitivity of balances".
Measuring instruments have to be checked regularly to determine whether daily use has changed the quality of their measuring results. The user should carry out these tests at defined intervals. Balances are tested by placing an external weight on them. The test weight must have a valid calibration certificate issued by an accredited calibration laboratory. The results of the tests should be documented in a format which ensures traceability.
The routine test with calibrated weights

This
test meets the minimum requirement for a traceable reference set out in ISO9001. Straightforward test Proof of correct function of FACT (automatic adjustment using a built-in reference weight) Proof of compliance with tolerance at one or more points of use Results can be analyzed in the form of graphs and statistics Routine tests can be carried out at various points of use and for different initial weights. For each test point, the balance is set to the typical point of use with a "preload weight" and then tested with a "test weight" corresponding to a typical initial weight.
522
www.mt.com/academia
Detailed information about balance calibration appears on page 496. Information about our balance service options starts on page 176.
Always remember...
It is only the external calibrated test weight that makes a balance a "measuring instrument". The routine test does not replace regular balance maintenance andcalibration.
523
Pipettes
Reference section
Dispenser
The pipette
Dispenser and volumetric measuring device
The pipette is the instrument used to dispense small to extremely small volumes in the absence of connections to storage containers. Pipetting is a method by which a specific volume of liquid is transferred from one container to another with maximum accuracy and precision. Pipettes work according to the displacement principle. When a movable piston is compressed, the air column below the piston is pushed down, when released the air column is drawn up. The liquid to be pipetted is transported in the attached pipette tip.
Detailed information about our pipettes and tips can be found starting on page 198.
524
www.mt.com/academia
Air-cushion system
Pipettes that operate according to the air-cushion system are suitable for aqueous, low-viscosity solutions. The piston is a fixed part of the pipette.
Shaft Piston Plunger
Shaft Disposable piston
Direct displacement system

Pipettes that operate according to the principle of direct displacement require special pipette tips with a built-in piston, which comes into direct contact with the medium and is not a fixed part of the pipette. This option can be used to pipette highviscosity solutions, and liquid, radioactive or corrosive samples. Using the direct displacement principle with disposable capillary and piston prevents any cross-contamination from aerosols, samples or the pipette itself.
Disposable capillary Air cushion Ejectable tip
Sample
Sample
Air-cushion system
Direct displacement system
Pipettes are available with fixed or variable, adjustable volumes. A distinction is made between manual single and multi-channel pipettes and electronically-controlled single and multi-channel pipettes. Selecting the right pipette depends on the application and the pipette behavior. Manual, regular pipetting requires force due to the piston and tip ejection forces that are applied.
Multi-channel pipettes have 8 or 12 simultaneously operated channels. The channels are arranged in a grid of microwell plates (8 rows by 12 columns) so as to enable fast operation. Electronic pipettes are particularly suitable for repetitive tasks, as they reduce long-term strain on the hands to a minimum and can ensure ultimate precision.
525
Pipettes
Reference section
Tip system
Tip ejection systems

Traditional shaft Tips and shaft are conical LiteTouch tip ejection system (LTS) Efficiency through cylindrical tips and shafts
Undefined
sealing area tips
Thick-walled
Efficient defined seal Reliable at small volumes Tip stop ring Low ejection forces
High ejection forces Entire arm used for pushing E jected with plunger force
Traditional shaft
Typical conventional ejection forces
Cylindrical LTS shaft/tip system
Large sealing area
Cylindrical tip with small sealing area
Positive stop prevents jamming Conical shaft fits into conical tip with no positive stop
Tip ejection forces

Cylindrical LTS tip and shaft design Conventional conical tip and shaft design
0
0.6 kg 4 kg
1 2 3 4
Plunger forces (kg) (recommended)
30% max. force for women = 2.1 kg 30% max. force for men = 3 kg
526
www.mt.com/academia
Pipetting quality
Accuracy Systematic error of measurement*
is the deviation of the dispensed volume from the nominal volume or the selected volume. *ISO/FDIS 8655
Precision Random error of measurement*

is the variation of the dispensed volumes around the mean value of the dispensed volumes. *ISO/FDIS 8655
Precise, but not accurate Accuracy:

Deviation of the mean value from the target value should not exceed approx. 1%.
Accurate, but not precise Precision:

Variation of individual measurement values around the midpoint should not exceed approx. 0.5%.
Accurate and precise
Tolerances according to DIN/EN/ISO 8655

Nominal volume l 2 10 200 1,000 Error limits for syst. error of measurement +/% l 4.0 1.2 0.8 0.8 0.08 0.12 1.6 8.0 Random error of measurement +/% l 2.0 0.04 0.8 0.008 0.3 0.6 0.3 3.0
The error tolerances for multi-channel pipettes
are double The error limits based on the nominal volume apply for the total useful
volume of the pipette, i.e. for a useful range of 10-100 l the error limit for systematic errors of measurement is +/- 0.8 l for each measured volume.
527
Pipettes
Reference section
nents so as not to adversely affect measurement results. Tips that come into contact with samples must be free from RNase, DNase, pyrogen and adenosine triphosphate (ATP). The choice of raw material, production under clean-room conditions and extensive testing in each process stage indicate the quality of the tips.
Pipette tips
Pipette tips
Pipettes have interchangeable plastic tips and are ideal for tasks involving frequently changing samples or substance concentrations. Pipette tip selection affects the measurement result. For Life Science research in particular, high-purity polypropylene must be used for the production of tips. The material must be free from any bioactive compo-
The following tip types are available:

Non-sterile Sterile Filter
(irradiation) (protection for
tip
DNase/RNase-free
DNA and RNA)

DNA/RNA-free Pyrogen-free ATP-free
(important for PCR)
(highly inflammable)
(important for pyrogen
Tip forms
tests)
The tip quality is also highly dependent on the surface properties. A rough surface, an irregular opening, excess plastic or material deposits have a significant effect on the precision.
Standard tip
"Beveled" tip
Fine PointTM tip
Quality tip
Material deposit in cross-section
Coaxial deformation
Faulty injection process
528
www.mt.com/academia
Typical contamination of tips By process contamination:

From melting/injection process Mold release agent Detergent Metals
Contamination from the air:

From the packaging process Human (bacterial), fungal, viral DNA DNase, RNase Pyrogen
Typical forms of contamination and their possible impact

Contamination DNase Molecule Enzyme Source Human contact, saliva Impact Breaks down DNA Result Breaks down DNA into small fragments. Can produce false positive and/or false negative results. RNA only exists for a short time, RNase breaks down RNA false negative results. Can produce false positive and/or false negative results. Toxin can block individual cells, e.g. in cell based assays. ATP contamination provides false positive results in kinase and can add excessive ATP to PCR reactions. Can block certain enzymes and produce negative results. Can block a certain enzyme and produce false negative results.
RNase
Enzyme
Human contact, oil Breaks down RNA from the hands, face, arms and hair All living organisms DNA is added to the reaction Toxin is added to the reaction
DNA Pyrogen
Nucleic acid
Lipopolysaccharide Cell wall toxin of bacteria, from the air, water, ground and human contact Nucleotide All living organisms
ATP (adenosine triphosphate)
ATP is added to the reaction
Trace metals
Metal
Original polymers, manufacturing/ molding Manufacturing process
Impedes enzyme reactions Impedes specific reactions
Organic trace elements
Various organic materials
529
Pipettes
Reference section
BioClean
BioClean tips what are they?

For reliable results, pipette tips must be absolutely inert and therefore have no interfering effect on the sample. Not only must they be free from contamination, but they must also be free from any bioactive components. This state is known as BioClean. Many tips on the market are advertised as being 100% contamination-free and sterile, however tests have shown that this is not always the case.
BioClean tips are:
Pure
Thanks to excellent raw material selection (high-purity polypropylene)
Produced and packaged under clean-room conditions
Clean
Tested
530
Guaranteed careful testing
www.mt.com/academia
BioClean
More information about BioClean can be found starting on page 200.
Photo: panthermedia | Olivier Le Queinec
531
Pipettes
Reference section
Pipetting techniques
Pipetting techniques
For low-viscosity solutions Forward pipetting
"Forward pipetting" is recommended for standard solutions such as water, buffer solutions, diluted saline solutions or diluted acids and bases. Press the pipetting button to the first stop then immerse the tip a few millimeters and release the button. The liquid in the tip is dispensed by pressing to the first stop. Press down to the second stop to dispense all the liquid.
Press pipetting button to the first stop
Immerse tip, release pipetting button
Dispense liquid, blow-out stroke
Forward pipetting
532
www.mt.com/academia
For viscous solutions Reverse pipetting

"Reverse pipetting " is recommended for viscous solutions, solutions with high vapor pressure or very wet liquids. Press the pipetting button to the second stop, then immerse the tip a few millimeters and release the button. Press the button to the first stop to dispense the liquid. Pipetting results can be easily influenced by user technique. To get the best results, a good pipetting technique is essential.
Press pipetting button to the second stop
Immerse tip, release pipetting button
Dispense liquid to the first stop
Reverse pipetting
533
Pipettes
Reference section
are achieved in the narrower, optimized volume range of 35 to 100%. The best results are achieved at 50% of the nominal volume.
Pipetting practice
Good pipetting practice

Consistency
When depressing and releasing the piston, maintain a consistent rhythm, speed and technique. Excessively fast sampling can lead to contamination of shaft and piston due to splashing and aerosols, and even loss of the sample volume. Through consistent handling, the accuracy of results can be increased by up to 5%.
Handling and volume setting Correct aspiration and dispensing

The pipette should always be held upright when aspirating, otherwise the liquid column is smaller than calibrated and too much liquid will be aspirated as a result. When dispensing, the pipette should be at a slight angle to the container wall to ensure good sample release.
Correct tip filling

Even though tips usually have a recommended (nominal) volume range of 10 to 100% of the maximum capacity (nominal volume) of the tip, the best results
Immersion angle of the tip
Incorrect angle
Correct angle Holding the pipette upright increases accuracy by 1-5%.
www.mt.com/academia
Immersion depth and dispensing technique punctuation. Not too deep and not too little
The immersion depth is especially important when using micro-volume pipettes. If the tip is immersed too far, the pressure in the tip will increase and liquid can penetrate the tip before pipetting is actually started. The deeper it is immersed, the greater the risk of "carry-over" on the outside of the tip. If the tip is not immersed far enough, air can be drawn in. This results in air bubbles in the sample and inaccurate volume.
Pipette size 2 and 10 l 20 and 100 l 200 and 1000 l 5,000 l and 10 ml
Immersion depth 1 mm 2-3 mm 3-6 mm 6-10 mm
Depth
Using the specified immersion depth increases accuracy by 1-3%
535
Pipettes
Reference section
Pipetting practice
Clean dispensing
Slide the tip up the side wall Recommendation of DIN EN ISO 8655 (length 8-10 mm) For most applications, it is recommended to dispense with the end of the tip resting against the container wall. Good dispensing of the sample is ensured and unintentional aspiration after dispensing the sample is prevented. Another technique is to dispense directly onto the sample liquid surface. The use of a thin-wall tip is critical here. If dispensing directly into the sample liquid, reverse pipetting is recommended in order to prevent sample pick-up after dispensing.
Flawless liquid dispensing increases accuracy by up to 3%
Constant room temperature

Pipetting should be carried out at constant room temperatures. The ideal temperature is 21.5C, the same as used for calibration. Prevent significant and sudden temperature changes, as the air in the pipette cannot adapt quickly enough and the volume of the sample may be affected (up to 5% better measurement results).
Pre-rinsing
Ideally, pre-rinse pipette tips twice before pipetting. This compensates the liquid on the inside of the tip. Pre-rinsing also helps to neutralize capillary effects for micro-volume pipettes and equalizes the air temperature inside the pipette to the sample temperature, which is particularly important for macro-volume pipettes. Pre-rinsing provides identical contact surfaces for all samples. Two pre-rinses already provide up to 0.2% greater accuracy when used with aqueous liquids.
Always store upright

Do not not lay pipettes flat in drawers or on the work bench. This may damage the shaft and cause leakage. Moreover, residual liquid can flow into the shaft and contaminate the pipette. Correct storage of pipettes in specially designed stands prevents incalculable errors and helps protect the instrument.
536
www.mt.com/academia
Exceptions to pre-rinsing
Exceptions when pre-rinsing is not recommended are: When pipetting very cold solutions (e.g. ice bath) When pipetting warm solutions (37C or more)
Immersion time
When aspirating a sample into the tip, the time of immersion in the sample is a critical factor in good pipetting practices. After releasing the piston button slowly, it is necessary to pause briefly before withdrawing the tip from the sample ensuring that the full volume of sample is drawn into the tip. For larger volumes as well as viscous substances it is better to wait longer before withdrawing as it takes about a second for the pressure in the pipette air chamber to equalize.
Overview Influencing factors for pipetting

Optimum volume range Volume setting Immersion angle and depth Pre-rinsing Aspiration rate Temperature differences Method of operation, ergonomics Wiping technique
Aspiration rate
The aspiration rate of a pipette can vary and therefore can have a considerable impact on the precision and accuracy of the results. The piston button of the pipette should always be released in a smooth and controlled way. Probably the most common effect of a too quickly released piston button is that aerosols can enter the pipette shaft where they damage internal components of the pipette. Even more serious is the case of liquid splash up. If this liquid is corrosive, it can cause damage to the shaft of the pipette and consequently cause crosscontamination of samples.
Reverse pipetting
Aspirating and dispensing viscous and dense liquids with accuracy and precision while using a pipette has always been a problem for scientists. A good option is to use reverse pipetting. On pick-up of the sample, the piston is pressed down to the blow-out position. The selected volume of a liquid plus a small excess is aspirated into the pipette tip. Then, when dispensing, the piston is pressed down only to the zero position. In this way, liquid remains inside the tip when dispensing. For biological, viscous or foaming liquids, reverse pipetting improves the results.
More information about our pipettes can be found starting on page 198
537
Pipettes
Reference section
Pipette testing techniques
Gravimetric testing
Volume
Service
Accuracy and reliability

Directives and international standards require the testing of pipettes
Regular pipette maintenance is essential for accurate measured data. (by lab personnel) Cleaning and maintenance of pipettes by lab personnel Checking the accuracy of liquid aspiration with calibrated tips (by external Service team) Pipette inspection for functional errors Replacement of the seal Calibration to manufacturer specifications or SOPs (Standard Operating Procedures) 3 - 5 years (by external Service team) Replacement of piston Replacement of shaft
Every Annual Weekly/4-weekly
calculation based on the weight and density of the pipetted liquid ISO 8655 Part 6 and DIN 12650 Part 6 describe these methods
Photometric testing
Pipetting
of an absorbed reagent in a cell and calculation of the volume based on the absorption differential Suitable for very small volumes, rather expensive ISO 8655 Part 7 and NCCLS
To guarantee the reliability of pipettes, calibration and preventive maintenance are essential
Calibration to ISO 8655 involves determining the relationship between the dispensed volume and the nominal volume or selected volume of the instrument. Calibration does not require any intervention that would alter the instrument. The calibration certificate documents the calibration result. GxP standards require users of instruments that are used with foods and pharmaceutical products as well as medical and biological products to calibrate, clean and maintain their instruments at regular intervals.
Important information about calibrating pipettes can be found on pages: 116 - 121, 157 and 292 - 295
Test reports created with software support
538
www.mt.com/academia
Procedure for testing

Test liquid
Distilled or deionized water Grade 3 according to ISO 3696, degassed or equalized with air. Before testing, the instrument to be tested and the test liquid must have stood in the test room for at least two hours in order to equalize with the room conditions (8655-6 6.2).
Number of measurements
As part of conformance testing or design approval, at least 10 measurements must be taken per test volume. The interval/frequency of tests depends on: Frequency of use Number of users who use the piston stroke instrument Aggressiveness of the liquid to be dispensed The error limits defined by the user
Test volume
For instruments with variable volume, three volumes must be tested. 1. Nominal volume 2. 50% of the nominal volume 3. The lower limit of the useful volume (usually 10 %)
Carrying out testing
Preventive maintenance
Moisten tip once
Never exceed pipette

Determine tare weight (or tare)
Moisten pipette tip 5 times (saturation of air cushion) Change tip Calculate volume (V = m*z) Determine mean value, calculate systematic and standard deviation X repetitions per test volume
Pipette test volume Determine measurement value
z = correction factor (Conversion factor from mass to volume. z is dependent on the temperature, air pressure and density: water here)
limits Regularly check and clean piston Clean immediately following accidental aspiration of liquid Re-grease according to manufacturer's specifications Replace seals every year Replace piston and shaft every three years
pH measurement
Reference section
pH value
The pH value
or the power of the proton men
by Prof. Dr. Jrgen Brickmann
Physical structure of the water molecule

Illustration: Benjah-bmm27
www.mt.com/academia
In pure water, only every ten-millionth water molecule is dissociated in ions. Over 6 billion people live on the planet. Assuming that a third of them, i.e. 2 billion, live in committed relationships, there are approximately 1 billion couples. If we interpret these couples as water molecules comprising one H+ man and one OH woman then taking the same proportion of all of these couples only 100, that is one ten-millionth, would live apart quite a statistic. Multiplying the H+ men living apart with the OH women who are single gives 100 x 100 = 10,000. This number must be maintained to keep the balance.
If we now add just 1,000 molecules of hydrochloric gas HCl to our 1 billion water molecules, these molecules react spontaneously with water and form hydrochloric acid. In our image, the peaceful association of water molecules is interrupted by couples, which announce separation as soon as they arrive. The proton men spurned by the Cl women look for other partners, i.e. the more scarce, but ready-to-pair OH women are drasti-cally reduced. The entire process can be calculated. When balanced, about 1,010 proton men and about 10 OH women, plus of course the 1,000 Cl women who do not want to pair, are left over. The balance is thus created: there are the same number of women and men who are single, and multiplying the number of proton men and OH women results in 10,000. The proton men who are free to run around represent about one millionth of all water pairs: 106. According to the above definition, this corresponds to pH = 6. The determination of the pH value therefore involves nothing more than counting proton men.
HCl + H2O H30+(aq) + Cl(aq)
541
pH measurement
Reference section
pH value
Our sense of taste can detect the qualities such as bitter, sweet, umami (savory) and salty, which combine with the sense of smell to provide "taste". Every food is intentionally or unintentionally analyzed by the sense of taste, and provides qualitative and individual taste sensations. The ions and molecules on which this is based can be identified using modern analytical methods. pH electrodes can be used to reproduce and quantitatively measure the acid content and, for example, to compare different foods objectively.
CHEESE
LEMON
BEER
MILK
7
COFFEE
MEAT
542
MINERAL WATER
COLA
www.mt.com/academia
For diluted solutions, the hydrogen ion concentration (cH O ) measures the acidity of a solution. It is expressed by the pH value (potentia hydrogenii = power of hydrogen). SRENSEN defines it as the negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration cH O :
3 + 3 +
pH = log cH O
3
For concentrated solutions, activities instead of concentrations must be considered. The pH scale is based on the dissociation of the water. Concentrations of the ions cH O and cOH have a fixed relationship with the ion product I of the water:
3 +
Acid
I = cH O x cOH =10 14
3 +
Neutral
For pure water, the pH = 7, because cH O is about 107 mol/l. Acid solutions have pH values < 7, alkali pH values > 7.
3 +
Base (alkali)
pH 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
H+ conc. (mol/L) 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 0.00000001 0.000000001 0.0000000001 0.00000000001 0.000000000001 0.0000000000001 0.00000000000001
OH conc. (mol/L) 0.00000000000001 0.0000000000001 0.000000000001 0.00000000001 0.0000000001 0.000000001 0.00000001 0.0000001 0.000001 0.00001 0.0001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1
The pH scale is only valid for water, other solvents have other scales. For instance, in aniline the pH value ranges from pH=0 to pH=28. The neutral point (pH = 7) of water is temperaturedependent because the ion product of the water itself depends on the temperature.
Neutral point at different temperatures

pH neutrality: [H+] = [OH] Temperature-dependence of the ion product of the water
T I > 10 14
25C
I = 10 14
I < 10 14
The neutral point of the pH scale is temperature-dependent
543
pH measurement
Reference section
Potentiometry
Reference electrode Measuring electrode Refill opening Electrolyte Inner buffer
pH value
Potentiometry is an electrochemical process and uses the concentration dependence of electromotive force (EMF). To measure the pH value, two electrodes are required in a measuring chain: the reference electrode and the glass electrode. The potential difference DE of these two electrodes is measured with high resistance and is a function of the pH value of the measurement solution:
EMF = Eglass Ereference = f(pH)

The two electrodes in the measuring chain can also be combined in one electrode as a single-rod measuring chain. It comprises an inner and an outer tube. The outer tube acts as the reference electrode and comprises a silver electrode, silver chloride and an electrolyte solution (KCl). The inner tube contains the measuring electrode of silver, AgCl, KCl solution and a buffer. Itis connected to the solution to be measured via a glass membrane, theouter jacket with a diaphragm.
Diaphragm
Glass membrane/ source layer
Maintenance
Measuring electrodes must be carefully maintained and cleaned because the service life of each pH electrode is limited. One of the reasons for this is the aging of the pH-sensitive glass. This is associated with a change in the source layer, which becomes thicker over time. Most problems during pH measurement are caused by the diaphragm, and impurities are the most common cause of measurement problems.
Cleaning and reactivating electrodes

Symptom Contamination with silver sulfide Contamination with proteins Aged membrane, increased membrane resistance, long response times Action Treatment with thiourea solution Treatment with pepsin-HCl solution Treatment with hydrofluoric acid*
*Caution:
After cleaning/reactivation, conditioning by soaking in electrolyte solution and recalibration/adjustment isrequired.
Hydrofluoric acid is highly corrosive. Wear protective goggles and protective gloves, work under the fume cupboard, do not inhale vapors.
544
www.mt.com/academia
Redox measurements
In redox reactions, reaction partners exchange electrons. In the reaction
2Na + Cl2 2 Na+ + 2 Cl

the two sodium atoms each give up one electron, while the two atoms of the chlorine molecule accept these two electrons. The reaction can be broken down into two partial equations:
1) 2 Na 2 Na+ + 2 e 2) Cl2 + 2 e 2 Cl
Reaction 1 is referred to as oxidation, reaction 2 as reduction. Oxidation is therefore associated with giving up electrons, reduction with receiving electrons. Both partial reactions are linked, no oxidation can occur without simultaneous reduction and vice versa. A redox reaction therefore always involves two corresponding redox pairs. A reducing agent gives up electrons and is itself oxidated. An oxidizing agent receives electrons and is itself reduced.
Reduction Oxidation Reducing agent Oxidizing agent Receiving electrons Giving up electrons Gives up electrons Receives electrons
When setting up redox equations, the number of atoms and the number of charges must be the same on the left and right of the equation. They can therefore be treated like mathematical equations. It is helpful to use oxidation numbers (= oxidation stage).
1)
The right electrode can be found starting on page 332 or on the Internet at www.electrodes.net All information about our pH meters can be found starting on page 302.
545
pH measurement
Reference section
pH value
Redox measuring chains

Electrochemical series
Zn/ZN2+ -763 mV Fe2+/Fe3+ 771 mV Cl-/Cl2 1360 mV
AI/AI3+ -1662 mV
Fe/Fe2+ -400 mV H2/H+
Ag/Ag+ 799 mV
Au/Au3+ 1498 mV
2V
REDUCTION
OXIDATION
Selection of a few standard potentials The electrochemical series is an arrangement of redox pairs according to their standard electrode potential. Since individual potentials cannot be measured in absolute values, the redox pair H++eH2 has been specified arbitrarily as the reference point with a potential of 0 mV. The potentials of all other corresponding redox pairs refer to this reference point.
Many measurement problems are caused by kinetic inhibitions. This leads to incorrect results due to insufficient setting of the thermodynamic equilibrium and/or low exchange current densities. For example, the concentration of dissolved oxygen could be detected using a redox measurement. However, this fails at the kinetic inhibition of the reaction O2 + 4H+ 2H2O.
546
www.mt.com/academia
763 mV H+ ox dates Zn
1100 mV Cu2+ ox dates Zn
799 mV H2 ox dates Ag+
H2/H+ Cu/Cu2+ Ag/Ag+
462 mV Ag+ ox dates Cu
EOx > ERed

The corresponding redox pair, which provides the oxidizing agent, must therefore have a higher potential than that of the corresponding reducing agent. The potential of a corresponding redox pair can be calculated using the Nernst equation.
337 mV H2 ox dates Cu2+
1562 mV Ag+ ox dates Zn
In order for a reaction to run in the considered direction, the following must be true:
Zn/ZN2+
-763 mV
0 mV 337 mV 799 mV
Oxidation/reduction
In redox measuring chains, the redox partners exchange electrons via the metal of the measuring electrode. The metal electrode thus taps the redox potential of the redox partners present in the solution. The display value E results from the difference in redox potential of the measurement solution E and the reference system EB:
E = E EB
EB = 207 mV Eh
ARGENTHAL
ENWE = 0 mV Eh = E + 207 mV
H2/H+
If the reference for the measurement value is the standard hydrogen electrode (SHE), then the potential of the reference system should be added to the measurement value.
547
Titration
Reference section
Titrimetric analysis the right way
Titration
Titration is a method for quantitative determination of a chemical compound in a sample. This is achieved through controlled addition of a reagent (titrant) of known concentration using a glass burette with stopcock, dosing equipment or a titrator. The subsequent chemical reaction between the compound (analyte) and reagent (titrant) must be quantitative, selective and rapid, and should follow basic stoichiometry. It is also important to ensure that the reaction end point can be clearly recognized. This can be achieved, for example using an indicator, which indicates the end of a reaction by means of color change.
Burette Titrant Color change = End point Calculate result
Burette
Titrant
Indicator (sensor)
Sample
548
www.mt.com/academia
Detailed information about our automatic titrators can be found starting on page 370.
Various titration techniques are used to determine the EP* or EQP* Direct titration
The titrant reacts directly with the sample (analyte). The prerequisites are that the reaction must be rapid and it must be possible to clearly detect the titration end point. If the solvent on its own consumes titrant, its blank value must be determined first before the sample under analysis is added. The actual content of a sample is then calculated minus the determined blank value.
Titrant Sample
Result = Titrant consumption
mL
Blank value Solvent
Titrant Sample mL
Result = Titrant consumption - blank value
Back titration
This method is used if the assay reaction takes too long and/or the EP cannot be determined clearly. An excess of titrant A is added to the dissolved sample and the excess is then titrated with titrant B until the EP or EQP.
Excess Titrant A (acid) Sample Titrant B (base) mL
Result = Excess - Titrant B consumption
* EP = end point, EQP = equivalence point

549
Titration
Reference section
Titrimetric analysis the right way
Reaction types for titrations
Acid-base titration
This reaction can be carried out in an aqueous or non-aqueous phase. Example
Complexometric titration
Mg2+ + EDTA [Mg EDTA]2+ (EDTA: ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid)
This reaction can be used to determine the total hardness of water (Ca & Mg), the calcium content of cheese and milk, for cement analysis (Al, Fe, Mg, Ca) and to determine the concentration of ions in galvanic baths (Cu, Zn, Cd). Example
HCl + NaOH NaCl + H2O

In practice, this reaction is used to determine the acid content of milk, wine, juices or ketchup, free fatty acids in edible fats and oils or the concentration of HCl, ammonia or amines.
Precipitation titration
Example
Redox titration
Redox reactions include diazotization, manganometry, iodometry, cerimetry and the Karl Fischer reaction. Example
NaCl + AgNO3 AgCl + NaNO3

This reaction yields an initially white precipitate of AgCl. The reaction is used, for example, to determine the NaCl content of foodstuffs such as ketchup, potato chips, and cheese, the chloride content of water and wastewater, or to determine the silver content of coins and precious metals.
2 MnO4- + 5 H2O2 + 6 H+ -> 2 Mn2+ + 5 O2 + 8 H2O

This reaction is used, for example, to determine sulfites in wine, the vitamin C content of fruit juices, the gold content of alloys, the concentration of ions in galvanic baths (Cu, Ni, Cr) or to determine peroxides.
550
www.mt.com/academia

The Karl Fischer titration is one of the most widely used titrations. It is important in industrial production as well as in scientific research and technical applications.
I2 + SO2 + 2 H2O 2 HI + H2SO4

The Karl Fischer titration is based on the Bunsen reaction. It is selective for water, occurs rapidly (1 - 2 min.) and covers a large measuring range (1 ppm - 100%).
Turbidity
Determination of surface acting agents (surfactants) The turbidity reaction follows the equation:
anionic cationic clear solution
Equivalence point titration (EQP)

E[pH]
[Surfactant] + [Surfactant] + Complex

colloidal complex cloudy solution Equivalence point
This reaction is used in particular for detergents, fabric softeners, toothpaste, cosmetics and paper.
V [ml]
The end of a titration

A titration ends at the EQP or at the pre-defined end point. The EQP is reached when an amount of titrant equivalent to the analyte has been added. The end point (EP) or the equivalence point (EQP) of a quantitative measurement is determined by means of an electrochemical (potentiometric, voltammetric, amperometric), conductometric or photometric (color change) method.
End point titration (EP)

E[pH] 9
End point V [ml]
551
Titration
Reference section
Water determination according to Karl Fischer

When evaluating raw materials and end products in research, medicine, pharmaceuticals, the food industry, the construction industry, etc., it is essential to know the water content. Water content influences product properties such as microbiological stability and shelf life, pourability and consistency, flow properties and viscosity. The water quantities contained in pharmaceutical products, for example, must be known, as their durability, stability and effectiveness can greatly depend on the water content.
Water determination according to Karl Fischer is a redox reaction based on the Bunsen reaction, where sulfur dioxide is oxidized by iodine in the presence of water:
I2 + SO2 + 2H2O SO42 + 2 I + 4 H+
552
www.mt.com/academia
Karl Fischer reaction

Karl Fischer titrators can be found starting on page page 382.
log k 4 Optimal 2 Side reactions (decomposition of reagents)
Slow pH
Optimum pH range: 5 - 7
Originally the reaction was carried out in anhydrous methanol with iodine, sulfur dioxide and excess pyridine as the buffer. Later pyridine was replaced by imidazole which is less harmful. The stoichiometry of the reaction for the ratio H2O:I2:SO2 is 1:1 in alcohols and 2:1 in non-alcoholic solvents. Higher water content (~1 mol/l and above) can also change the stoichiometry. In an alcoholic solution, an acid ester of sulfurous acid is first formed, which is neutralized by the base (B) present. Oxidation with iodine then takes place creating a sulfurous acid monoester:
ROH + SO2 + B BH+ + ROSO2 BH[ROSO2] + I2 + H2O + 2 B BH[ROSO3] + 2 BH+ + 2I

This process continues until all the water of the sample under analysis has been consumed. The optimum reaction rate is in the pH range of around pH 5.5 - 7. Bases (imidazole) are therefore used for acidic samples and acids (salicylic acids) for alkaline samples in order to maintain the pH value. At pH< 5 the reaction rate is very low, at pH> 7 the stoichiometry of the reaction changes due to side reactions.
553
Titration
Reference section
KF solutions
Commercially available KF reagents are offered as a two component or single component system:
Ipol = 20 A U = 650 mV 2 Constant current at a double pin platinum electrode = Polarization current (Ipol) During titration: I2 reacts w th water No free I2 in the solution High vo tage
Two component system Solution a: Pre-dried (~0.005% H2O), methanolic solution of SO2 and an amine. Solution b: Methanolic iodine solution with a fixed titer, which does not change even over long storage periods. Single component system I2, SO2 and an amine (imidazole) are dissolved in ethylene glycol monomethyl ether (CH3O-CH2-CH2-OH). The set titer decreases over long storage periods and must therefore be determined again by means of calibration measurement prior to use.
Bivoltammetric indication end point
Ipol = 20 A U =84 mV
Free iodine in the solution. Iodine is reduced to iodide (cathode). Ionic conductivity, the measured potential decreases 2 e I2+2e >2I
Volumetric titration
Volumetric titration using a precise piston burette enables analysis of samples with a water content of between 100 ppm and 100%. The required iodine is added as a standard solution (titrant). The water content is calculated based on consumption. The titration end point is indicated by a low iodine excess, which can be detected visually, photometrically, potentiometrically or voltammetrically.
2I >I2+2e
I2
2l-
I2
End point all water has reacted with I2
554
www.mt.com/academia
Coulometric titration
For samples with less than 1 mg of water, coulometry is the method of choice. The iodine titrant is not dosed using a burette, instead it is generated directly in a solution containing iodine by means of anodic oxidation using a generator electrode. This also means that the concentration of the titrant does not need to be determined. The electrochemical generation of iodine based on Faraday's law means that 1 mol of generated iodine is the equivalent of 96485 C. The measured current therefore corresponds exactly to the water content of the sample. This extremely sensitive method can even detect concentrations of around 10 g. For samples with more than 5% water, coulometry is comparatively time-consuming. Small sample quantities must therefore be used so as to avoid long titration times.
100%
1 g Coulo
10%
10 g
1%
0.01 g 0.1 g
100 g Volumetric 50g - 500 mg H2O/sample Optimal: 10 mg H2O/sample Coulometric 5g - 100 mg H2O/sample Optimal: 1 mg H2O/sample
1000 ppm
1g 10 g
1 mg
100 ppm
100 g
10 mg
10 ppm
100 mg
1 ppm
Volu
1000 mg
Ideal sample size
Pre-drying
Solids cannot usually be added directly. They are therefore extracted externally or vaporized using a baking oven and transported automatically to the titration unit. This procedure must always be carried out if the sample cannot be dissolved in a solvent, would react with the titration mixture, or could influence the function of the measuring electrodes. Our Karl Fischer equipment with dryers can be found on page 389.
Karl Fischer titration is more demanding than most other volumetric titration techniques, because water is present all around and moisture or any water penetration into the titration beaker can distort the result. In addition, side reactions can also distort the result. This is the case, for example, with aldehydes and ketones which react with the methanol contained in certain Karl Fischer solvents.
555
Density
Reference section
Density measurement
Density
Density is the mass m and volume V quotient of a substance (mass density). Since density is dependent on temperature, the temperature must always be specified. Relative density is the ratio of the density of a substance to the reference density 0 of a reference substance under conditions that must be specified separately for both substances.
m [kg/m3] or [g/cm3] v
d= 0
Note
DE40, DE45 and DE51 instruments can calculate the relative density: t t the density of water at 4C (d4 ) or at the measurement temperature (dt ) is used as the reference density. To this end, the density of ultra pure water according to the temperature is stored on these instruments.
556
www.mt.com/academia
Measuring principle
Density measurement on Mettler Toledo DE40, DE45 and DE51 instruments is based on the electromagnetically-induced oscillation of a U-shaped glass tube. A transmitter induces oscillation. Theoscillation period is measured with a sensor. The complete forward and backward motion of a vibration is known as a period, its duration is measured as the oscillation period T. The number of periods per second is referred to as the frequency f. Each glass tube oscillates at a "natural frequency". This changes when the tube is filled with a gas or liquid. Frequency is a function of mass. As the mass increases, the frequency decreases, i.e. the oscillation period T becomes longer.
Amplitude
Time
f=
1 1 [s ] T
Vibration stimulator/ vibration meter
Measuring tube of defined volume capacity
The oscillation period T is calculated according to the equation:
T = 2
V K+ m
c
= Density of the sample in the load cell [g/cm3] Vc = Volume of the sample (capacity of the load cell) [cm3] m = Mass of the oscillation cell [g] c K = Load cell constant [g/s2]
Therefore:
K mc 2 T 42Vc Vc
557
Density
Reference section
Digital instruments for density determination and traceable density standards can be found starting on page 400.
Density measurement
The density and the oscillation period T have the following relationship with one another:
= A T2 + B
(see diagram) A and B are constants that are dependent on the elasticity, structure and mass of the oscillation cell. Since they vary from cell to cell, they must be determined using a measurement. This is referred to as factor determination or instrument calibration. The factor of the oscillation cell is calculated by measuring the oscillation period T of two standard substances (typically air and water) with known density:
K w F = 2 T2 = A 4 Vc TA2 Tw2
T2 Tw2 Ts2
A = Density of air [g/cm3] W = Density of water [g/cm3] TA = Oscillation period of air measurement [s] TW = Oscillation period of water measurement [s]
The unknown density of a substance S is calculated using the following formula following factor determination by measuring its oscillation period:
F (TA2 TS2) = ( A S)
Resolved for S: TA2 A= 0.00120 s W= 0.99821
S = A F (TA2 TS2)
Note
558
The factor is temperature-dependent. The volume of the oscillation cell and therefore its oscillation period changes with the temperature. The factor of the cell must therefore be determined for the temperature at which samples are measured.
www.mt.com/academia
the oscillation period t described here is required to calculate the factor of the oscillation cell and thus the density of the unknown sample. However, this oscillation period is not indicated on the instrument. De40/De45/ De51 density meters only indicate the "t-value", which directly depends on the oscillation period t.
the t-value is simply provided as a guide value, which utilizes the maximum display capacity of the instrument and only uses whole numbers without decimal places.
Structure of the oscillation cell and temperature control

For correct determination of the density, extremely precise temperature measurement and control must be ensured. Since the temperature of the sample cannot be measured directly in the U-shaped tube without distorting the oscillation measurement, this problem is solved another way. the temperature is measured at three different points: temperature 1: Sensor in the oscillation cell, directly above the surface of the U-shaped tube. this temperature is indicated as a status message (cell temperature). temperature 2: temperature of the thermoblock (block temperature). this value is not indicated. temperature 3: Reference temperature, measured inside the instrument (ambient temperature). this value is not indicated. These three temperatures are then used to control the thermo module (Peltier element), which heats or cools the thermoblock.
temperature sensor 3 (ambient temperature) temperature controller thermoblock
Peltier element Vibration stimulator/ vibration meter Heat insulation
Magnet
temperature sensor 1 (cell temperature) temperature sensor 2 (block temperature)
U-shaped tube
Density
Reference section
Stability 0: The stability of the signal (T-value) is expected: Tval 4 for 77 sec. for the DE45/ DE51, and Tval 1 for 49 sec. for the DE40. The density is measured with an accuracy of . . 1 10-5 g/cm3 (DE40: 1 10-4 g/cm3). Stability 1: T he final T-value is extrapolated with a patented algorithm over the course of the increase (Tval/temp.). The density is then calculated. The measuring time is reduced by around a half, whereby the result (i.e. the density) is usually the same as the measurement values obtained with stability 0. Stability 2: T he final T-value is extrapolated with a patented algorithm over the course of the increase (Tval/temp.), whereby a slightly greater degree of uncertainty must be assumed. The density is then calculated. The measurement time is again reduced by around a half, whereby the result can deviate from the true value (measured with stability 0) by 1 or 2 at the last decimal place.
Density measurement
During a measurement, the temperature of the sample must be regulated (heating or cooling) in order to correspond exactly to the selected measurement temperature. The density of the sample changes during heating or cooling (the density is temperature-dependent). The same behavior is observed with the resonance frequency of the U-shaped tube. The sample temperature corresponds exactly to the selected temperature (and therefore the cell temperature, sensor 1) as soon as the oscillation frequency stabilizes itself. However, it always takes some time until this thermal equilibrium is achieved. In order to reduce the time until thermal equilibrium is reached, the DE40, DE45 and DE51 support the selection of stability criteria. This function can be used to reduce the required time for a measurement, without losing too much in the way of accuracy:
End value
Time End of measurement with: Stability 2 Stability 1 Stability 0
560
www.mt.com/academia
Refractive index
The refractive index n (also referred to as the index of refraction) of a substance is the ratio of the speed of light in a vacuum to its speed in the substance (dimensionless).
When a light beam enters at a defined angle from an optically less dense medium to another optically more dense medium (e.g. from air to water), its direction changes. If its entry is perpendicular, there is no change of direction. According to Snell's law, the ratio of the refractive indices of both media is proportional to the ratio of the angles of refraction and incidence of the light beam:
n1 e.g. air
n2 e.g. water
n1 = sin n2 sin
Digital instruments for determining the refractive index can be found starting on page 400.
561
Refractive Index
Reference section
Refractometer
Air
b a
Water
Critical angle
Total reflection
When a light beam moves from an optically dense to an optically less dense medium, it also changes direction. If the angle of incidence is increased, it reaches a critical limit at which light no longer enters the optically less dense medium (angle of refraction = 90). Total reflection occurs when this "critical angle" is exceeded. The refractive index is calculated from the critical angle :
= 90 sin =1
The refractive index is not only dependent on the wavelength of light, but also on the temperature of the measured sample. The standard temperature is 20C. If a measurement is carried out at a different temperature, e.g. 25C, this must be specified: nD25.
Since the refraction depends on the wavelength of the incident light, the refractive index n is measured as standard using the D-line of sodium (589.3 nm wavelength) and is called nD.
562
www.mt.com/academia
Measuring principle
The light that is emitted from the light source penetrates through the prism and falls on the sample. It is sometimes refracted (angle of incidence < critical angle) and sometimes reflected (angle of incidence > critical angle). The reflected light is detected using an optical sensor (CCD). The position of the boundary between dark and light depends on the critical angle and is used to calculate the refractive index.
Prism
Light source Optical sensor (CCD)
Structure of the optical cell

An LED is used as the light source, its beam goes through a polarization filter, an interference filter (589.3nm) and various lenses before passing through the sapphire prism and hitting the sample. The reflected light (angle of incidence > critical angle) is led via a lens to the optical sensors, which detects the critical angle. Thetemperature in the critical prism/sample area is detected using a built-in sensor.
Lens Lens Interference filter Polarization filter
Prism Lens Optical cell
Light source
Optical sensor (CCD)

563
Thermal analysis
Reference section
Thermal analysis the right way
Thermal analysis
The term "thermal analysis" collectively describes a group of measurement techniques which can be used to measure the physical and/or chemical properties of a substance, substance mixture or reaction mixtures based on the temperature or time. The sample is subjected to a controlled temperature program. These methods have been used successfully for several decades to characterize alloys, ceramics, polymers, glass, composite materials, pharmaceuticals, etc. Various techniques are used to determine specific substance properties.
Method Thermogravimetric analysis Differential thermal analysis Differential scanning calorimetry Dynamic mechanical analysis Thermomechanical analysis Thermooptical analysis Symbol TGA DTA DSC DMA TMA TOA Measurement result Mass change Temperature difference between sample and reference sample Heat flow difference between sample and reference sample Modulus, viscoelastic properties Dimensional change Physical properties, optical behaviour
1940s Substitution balance
1960s Modular TA1 concept
1970s Multiple TGA-DSC sensor
1980s Microprocessorcontrolled TA system
1993 DSC automation
564
www.mt.com/academia
Intelligent innovation
for state-of-the-art material characterization for over 40 years
Thermal analysis (TA) has played an important role at METTLER TOLEDO since the early 1960s. From the outset our products have impressed with their numerous innovative features, always combined with the knowledge and experience of our worldwide team of Swiss-trained sales representatives and service engineers.
The driving force of technology and innovation

Even the first commercial thermal analysis system, the TA1, was a resounding success. Thanks to its modular structure, the system could be used in countless applications. METTLER TOLEDO's persistence and dedication over many years has shaped the nature of thermal analysis and led to the development of unique products and services.
TA Excellence line
The TA Excellence line from METTLER TOLEDO can be used to characterize materials in a very broad temperature range. All thermal analysis instruments are controlled using user-friendly and flexible software. Each instrument configuration offers maximum measurement performance, which means you can always trust your results.
2002 DMA with high frequencies
2004 MultiSTAR DSC sensors
2005 TOPEM software option
565
Thermal analysis
Reference section
DSC Application examples
DSC is used everywhere from academia to industry where thermal values are determined, thermal processes are studied, and materials are characterized or compared. It yields valuable information relating to processing and application conditions, quality defects, damage analysis, material identification, stability, reactivity, chemical safety and the purity of materials. The method is used to study thermoplastics, thermosets, elastomers, adhesives, as well as foodstuffs, pharmaceuticals, chemicals, and composite materials.
DSC Differential scanning calorimetry

Differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) can be used to measure heat flow which is radiated or absorbed by the sample material when heated or when cooled. The heat flow difference is measured from the sensor to the sample and from the sensor to the reference sample as a function of temperature or time. Heat flow differences occur as a result of heat being absorbed or emitted by the sample, especially due to thermal effects such as melting, crystallization, chemical reactions, polymorphic transformations, evaporation and so on. Even specific heat capacities and their change for example during glass transition can be determined by means of the heat flow difference. The area below a peak of a recorded curve is directly proportional to the absorbed or emitted heat. DSC is therefore a method for the quantitative determination of thermodynamic data, such as mixture, reaction, transformation and evaporation enthalpy or heat capacity. Photo calorimetry accessories can be used to characterize UV and light curing systems, e.g. photoinitiated curing reactions during UV exposure, the effect of the exposure time, light intensity and temperature. High-pressure DSC can be used to track the influence of temperature and pressure on physical transitions and chemical reactions.
Examples of thermal events and processes that can be determined by DSC

Melting
characteristics and nucleation
Hardening Crystallization Stability Polymorphism Miscibility Liquid Effects Phase
crystal transitions of softening agents diagrams and composition history transition
Thermal Glass Heat
capacity and heat capacity changes and transformation enthalpy kinetics
Reactivity
All the necessary instrument can be found starting on page432
Reaction Reaction Purity
566
Bread crust
When complex materials are measured, different effects often overlap. The individual effects can be separated using TOPEM, a temperature-modulated technique. This is demonstrated using the example of a bread crust. The total heat flow curve corresponds to the conventional DSC curve and a definite assignment of the measured effects is not possible. In contrast, the reversing heat flow curve clearly shows a glass transition at 51C. The nonreversing heat flow curve displays the peak due to enthalpy relaxation and the evaporation of moisture from about 70C.
Chemical reactions
The question of reactivity plays a central role in assessing the stability of chemicals. It is important to know the reaction rate and the energy released in a reaction at a particular temperature. Information about the decomposition reaction that can be obtained from DSC curves is very useful for subsequent safety investigations, for example with autocatalytic reactions.
Thermal analysis
Reference section
Liquid crystals
Materials consisting of relatively stiff molecules can form liquid crystal phases. This behavior is demonstrated in the example showing DSC measurements of LC(R) MHPOBC. The material exhibits five liquid crystal transitions above the melting temperature (at 85C). The transitions that occur around 120C are very weak and are displayed in the zoomed region of the cooling curve. Since liquid crystal transitions often produce only very small thermal effects, the DSC used to measure such transitions must have high resolution and low noise.
Tips and tricks

for thermal analysis
For over 40 years METTLER TOLEDO has brought you impressive and innovative products and shared its extensive knowledge of thermal analysis. The tips and tricks listed below are intended to help users perform meaningful DSC measurements and obtain the most comprehensive information possible:
Sampling and sample preparation 1. Does the sample taken represent the entire sample?
For reliable results, several samples should be measured, if possible.
2. The aim is to ensure that the temperature gradients

within the sample are as small as possible so that overlap with adjacent thermally induced effects is minimized. A small sample mass and good contact between the material and the bottom of the crucible are required. The sample should be "as big as required, but as small as possible" in order to achieve both good resolution and a strong measurement signal.
3. Solid samples often have to be mechanically processed

(cut, ground, etc.) prior to measurement, which can result in changes to the sample under certain circumstances.
4. The sample should not be able to move in the crucible

(change of contact between the sample and bottom of the crucible) so as to avoid measurement artifacts.
5. The thermal history of the sample is lost by tempering

at a suitable temperature and thus, the material is characterized as such. However, without tempering, information regarding the conditions under which the sample was produced and stored is obtained.
569
Thermal analysis
Reference section
After the measurement Evaluation 14. Study the sample after the measurement: how
does the sample look? Has it changed color? This information then allows you to correlate the measurement effects.
Selection of suitable measurement parameters 6. When dealing with unfamiliar samples, select a
large temperature range and a relatively high heating rate (30 K/min) to record all the measurement effects. Interesting temperature ranges can be studied more precisely again in a second measurement with a lower heating rate.
15. Compare the total crucible weight before and after

measurement to roughly determine whether any decomposition gases, solvents or water vapor were released.
7. Typically, the selected starting temperature should

be at least 3 measurement minutes before the first event and the final temperature should be 3minutes after the last event.
16. Additional information can often be obtained by

cooling the sample and then heating it a second time. In addition, the cooling measurement itself provides further information, as it enables better separation of effects due to different supercooling behaviour.
8.The higher the heating rate, the stronger the

measurement signal. Small effects, such as glass transitions can be amplified by selecting a higher heating rate, e.g. 20 K/min.
9. The lower the heating rate, the better the

resolution. A low heating rate is required for optimum peak separation.
17. In order to compare measurement results, it is

essential that you always evaluate measurement curves the same way (same baseline type or tangent selection and, if necessary, the same temperature limits).
10. The crucible used should be as light and small

as possible (e.g. aluminum, 20 l) to ensure optimum peak separation.
18. Evaluations in accordance with standard

processes (ASTM, DIN, etc.) result in greater comparison reliability even between two different laboratories.
11. If there is a risk of a chemical reaction between

the crucible and sample, use a more resistant medium-pressure crucible made from stainless steel (also gold-plated) or a gold crucible.
12. Measurement effects can only be interpreted

correctly if the atmosphere around the sample is defined (open or closed crucible).
13. If only minimal measurement effects occur,

subtract a blank curve with the same conditions and/or use a crucible with an inert sample on the reference side of the sensor. The sample mass of the reference sample is calculated as follows: mR=[cp,Sample(T)*mSample (T)]/cp, Reference(T) In many cases, alumina powder with cp=0.78 J/ (g*K) (at room temp.) can be used as a reference material.
www.mt.com/ta
570
www.mt.com/academia
DTA Differential thermal analysis

All the necessary instruments can be found starting on page 432.
In DTA, the temperature of the sample under study is compared with the temperature of an inert reference material that is stable over the temperature range. Between room temperature and 1,200C, -Al2O3 is typically used, for metal samples either a reference crucible or a metal, e.g. molybdenum, with similar mass to the samples can be used. A measurement curve is plotted based on the temperature difference between the sample and reference sample, which allows statements to be made about the reaction temperature and reaction process. Heat consumption is an endothermic heating effect, while heat release is exothermic. Measurement is usually performed in an inert gas atmosphere (Ar, He, N2), however the reaction of the sample with a reactive gas (O2, halogen) can also be studied. The combination of DTA and TGA enables simultaneous measurement of temperature effects and changes in mass. The fields of application for this method in research and industry are very diverse and can be used to study:
Crystallization,
melting, phase transitions, decomposition, oxidation, reduction, corrosion, purity testing. and the optimization of reactions. of components of phase diagrams.
Kinetics
Determination
in mixtures.
Determination
571
Thermal analysis
Reference section
TGA Thermogravimetric analysis

In TGA, the mass change of a sample is measured at a defined heating and cooling rate. This is performed in a defined gas atmosphere (inert or reactive), under gas flow conditions or in a vacuum. Achange in mass is determined using a high-sensitivity balance. TGA is often combined with DTA or DSC. TGA is used to study the thermal stability and, for example, the oxidation behavior. In addition, decomposition kinetics, decomposition temperatures and thermal aging can be characterized.
Rubber analysis of SBR

In rubber analysis, the sample is first heated to 600C under inert conditions. Slightly volatile components (softening agents, often oils) evaporate. Pyrolysis of the polymers begins at about 400C. At 600C, the atmosphere is then switched from inert to oxidative, resulting in the combustion of the carbon black additive. Inorganic components remain behind as a residue. The SBR sample analyzed in the example contains 6.4% softening agent, 68.2% polymer and 21.8% carbon black. The residue (mainly zinc oxide) amounts to 3.6%.
TGA Application examples

Quantitative content analysis (moisture, fillers, polymer content, etc.) Kinetics of decomposition reactions Thermal stability Adsorption and desorption of gases Identification of decomposition products, solvents and solvates
572
www.mt.com/academia
Thermal analysis of gypsum

Gypsum loses its water of crystallization below 300C. The calcium carbonate present as an impurity in gypsum decomposes at about 700C. Decomposition of the calcium sulfate occurs in several steps from about 1,200C onward. The DSC curve recorded simultaneously with the mass signal shows further effects due to solid-solid transitions at about 390C and 1,236C: g-CaSO4 (anhydrite III) to b-CaSO4 (anhydrite II) and b-CaSO4 to a-CaSO4 (anhydrite I). The latter melts slightly below 1,400C and is observed as a sharp endothermic peak.
Residual solvents in pharmaceutical substances

Many pharmaceutical substances are recrystallized from solvents. As a result, residues of solvents often remain in the product. Combined techniques such as TGA-MS are ideal to detect and identify such undesired residues. Inthe example, methanol and acetone were used to recrystallize the active substance. The presence of these substances is confirmed easily in the mass spectrometer using masses 43 and 31. The results indicate that the weight loss step at 200C is almost entirely due to the elimination of acetone.
573
Thermal analysis
Reference section
DMA Dynamic mechanical analysis

In DMA, the viscoelastic properties are measured over time, temperature and frequency while the material is deformed under periodically changing load. Dynamic mechanical analysis is a measurement technique, which provides valuable information about the elasticity module, attenuation behavior, information about the composition and structure of polymers and the flow and relaxation behavior of substances.
Inorganic materials
The linear expansion coefficient can be determined from the slope of the expansion curves provided by samples under negligible compressive stress. The prerequisites for accurate results are a low heating rate (< 10 K/min) and blank subtraction. Especially interesting are materials with nonuniform thermal expansion such as the alloy Invar with 36% nickel, which has practically zero thermal expansion at room temperature. Duran glass has like most mineral glasses a very low expansion coefficient, which however rises sharply at the glass transition. Quartz crystal expands along its c-axis up to a solid-solid transition at about 575C. Above the transition, c-axis shrinkage occurs.
TMA Thermomechanical analysis

In TMA, dimensional changes of a sample are measured when it is heated or cooled. The thermal expansion and softening temperature determine the potential applications of a material and provide important information about its composition. The TMA measurement technique supplements DSC and in addition to measuring the expansion coefficient it can be used to determine glass transitions, which can no longer be measured in DSC. Areas of application include plastics, paints and varnishes, composites, films, fibers, ceramics, glass, alloys, coatings and adhesives.
574
www.mt.com/academia
Plastic films
Films often have a preferred orientation and hence exhibit anisotropic mechanical properties. These properties can be characterized by measuring the expansion behavior with TMA. The figure shows the TMA curves of two different PES-based films: one is stretched, the other unstretched. The unstretched sample is isotropic and shows the same behavior in both measurement directions. The behavior of the stretched sample is very different in the stretched direction compared with at right angles. In the stretched direction, the film shrinks from about 100C onward, whereas at right angles to the stretched direction, the length of the film increases with increasing temperature. The stretched sample also exhibits a greater degree of thermal stability.
Crosslinked polyethylene
is as rigid as standard PE below its crystallization melting point. However, when melting it increases volume and exhibits a rubbery behavior. The simultaneously measured SDTA curve shows the endothermic melting peak at 135C. The PE sample, which was 2.28 mm thick, was covered with a fused silica disk to evenly distribute the compressive stress. Above 140C there is an elastic deformation of 2.5%. Changing load: 0.02/0.50 N. Heating rate: 10 K/min. In contrast to crosslinked polyethylene, standard PE would be deformed and squeezed out after melting.
575
Thermal analysis
Reference section
Thermal
The melting point and its detection
The melting point is a characteristic property of a substance. It is the temperature at which the solid state of a substance changes to the liquid state. A pure substance normally has a sharp melting point, whereas an impure substance melts over a temperature range that is lower than the melting point of the pure substance (melting point depression). Some organic compounds will however melt irreproducibly due to decomposition. Melting point determination is used in research and development to identify and check the purity of a wide range of substances. If a sample is heated at a constant rate in a capillary, the transmission of light through the sample and hence the light intensity measured by a sensor changes with increasing temperature. The sample is considered to have melted when a predefined level of light transmission is reached.
All the necessary instruments can be found starting on page 424.
576
www.mt.com/academia
values
Thermooptical analysis (TOA)
"Get a better picture of your sample"
Thermooptical analysis is also known as hot stage microscopy. The sample is subjected to a controlled temperature program and visually observed through a microscope or filmed by a video camera. Information about chemical or physical changes to the sample can thus be obtained. This includes, for example, changes in color, polymorphism of active pharmaceutical ingredients, phase transitions of liquid crystals and much more. Liquid crystals are used in a wide range of applications, e.g. in all types of LCD monitors. They undergo phase transitions when heated or when a voltage is applied. The example below shows a liquid crystal substance (cholesteryl myristate). When viewed under polarized light, the material appears as illustrated in Figure (a). At 71C transition to the smectic form takes place, as illustrated in Figure (b). Thecholesteric phase is reached through further heating (c). This phase eventually results in transformation into an isotropic liquid, which no longer allows polarized light to pass through and therefore appears black.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
577
AutoChem
Reference section
Measuring heat the right way
AutoChem
Calorimetry
Calorimetry is the measurement of quantities of heat, which are associated with biological, chemical or physical processes. They can be both exothermic and endothermic. Endothermic reactions do not present a risk during manufacturing of active pharmaceutical ingredients or chemicals, while exothermic reactions always require closer consideration. Exothermic reaction:
The reaction generates heat The reaction mixture warms up if energy is not dissipated.
Endothermic reaction:
The reaction consumes heat The reaction mixture cools down if no energy is supplied to the reaction mass.
Temperature
Course of the reaction
Temperature
Course of the reaction
578
www.mt.com/academia
In research and development of new substances and active ingredients in reactors from 10 mL to 500 mL, the heat of reaction is not particularly significant because the cooling capacity of the corresponding laboratory reactor systems is usually sufficient. In chemical research, an ice bath or cryostatic temperature regulator is normally used for cooling. A heating mantle or an oil bath is typically used for heating. In addition, there is a good relationship between the heat exchange area (surface of the reactor,
which is in contact with the heating/cooling medium) and reaction volume (volume of the reaction mass), so that the generated energy can be dissipated quickly. The figure below illustrates the typical cooling behavior of various reaction vessels as a function of their volume (Source: presentation on "Safety assessment for chemical reactions"; Dr. M. Lade, Siemens A&D SP Process Safety). A commercial reactor has similar cooling behavior to a Dewar vessel, which means it is difficult to control.
Cooling behavior as a function of volume
Starting conditions: Container: 80C Environment: Room temperature

579
AutoChem
Reference section
Reaction calorimeters can be found on page 466.

If an active substance is identified, a manufacturing process is developed and implemented on a commercial scale. In contrast to the lab experiment, for the process development it is important that the process can be justified both economically and ecologically and that it meets all applicable safety regulations. In order to investigate the hazards of a process, the following parameters must be studied more closely and the following questions must be answered: Heat of reaction released in kJ/kg reaction mass (Qr) How much heat is released during a reaction? Can this heat be dissipated? Accumulated heat of reaction (Qaccu) Heat of reaction that is "stored" in the system and could heat up the reaction mass in an uncontrolled manner if the cooling rate is insufficient or if cooling fails unexpectedly. Is heat accumulated during the process? How large is the max. heat capacity and can this be controlled by the cooling system (is the maximum value of the heat released less than the cooling capacity)? Can the process be modified so it can be carried out safely (e.g. by slower dosing of the reagent)? Adiabatic temperature rise (Tad ) The temperature rise to be expected that is caused by the reaction of accumulated reactants in the event of failure of the cooling system. In order to calculate this temperature rise, the specific heat capacity of the reaction mass as well as the reaction enthalpy must be determined using a reaction calorimeter. Tad is determined for the desired and undesired reaction, where the undesired reaction is usually the decomposition reaction. The Tad of the desired reaction is determined using a reaction calorimeter, while the Tad of the undesired reaction can be measured using DSC or ARC or similar. Maximum Temperature of the Synthesis Reaction (MTSR) The MTSR comprises the process temperature (TProcess) and the adiabatic temperature rise (Tad).
Safety runaway graph Temperature desired reaction RC1 Tad secondary reaction MTSR 57.8 C Tprocess 40.0 C secondary reaction DSC, ARC, TAM...
Tad desired reaction 17.8 K cooling failure 01:55:22
TMRad
Time
Application example
The reaction is carried out at 40C. If the cooling system were to fail as the result of an error, the reaction mixture would heat up by 17.8C to 57.8C in the worst-case scenario. Using DSC (Differential Scanning Calorimetry) or ARC (Accelerated Rate Calorimeter), the measurement should be carried out at 57.8C to determine the stability of the reaction mixture. If an undesired reaction is detected, safety measures have to be taken according to the time TMRad (Timeto-Maximum-Rate), or the entire process has to be redesigned.
580
www.mt.com/academia
Reaction calorimeters
When considering different reaction calorimeters, which are used for the measurement of heat and the heat capacity against time, a distinction is made between the following principles:
Heat flow calorimetry RTCal (heat flux)
calorimetry
Heat balance calorimetry Power compensation
calorimetry
Heat flow and heat balance calorimeters usually comprise a laboratory reactor system with a precise temperature measuring system. These calorimeters can be operated both isothermally (temperature of the reaction mass Tr is kept constant) and dynamically in a ramp (temperature of the reaction mass Tr changes according to a ramp).
The temperature of the reaction mass is controlled by regulated variation of the temperature in the oil jacket. If a reaction takes place, the released/required heat is dissipated or supplied by controlled adjustment of the jacket temperature.
Tr sensor
Calibration heating
Heat flow calorimetry

In a heat flow calorimeter, the temperature difference between the thermostating jacket and the reactor contents is measured and used to calculate the heat flow through the wall. This principle requires a calibration, which is used to characterize the heat transfer. Heat flow calorimetry is extremely rugged and is the most frequently used measuring method. With a wide temperature range, it meets the needs of the pharmaceutical, chemical and petrochemical industries.
Tj jacket temperature
581
AutoChem
Reference section
RTCal calorimetry (heat flux)
RTCal technology is the latest method developed for reaction calorimetry. It is based on a heat flux sensor, which is integrated in the reactor (between the inner glass wall and the heat transfer medium). The sensor measures the heat of reaction in real time, which makes it easier to optimize the process (also online). In addition, the sensor provides information about the heat transfer via the reactor wall, which is relevant for scale up.
Tr sensor
Heat balance calorimetry

Tj, out
Tj, in
Heat balance calorimeters measure the difference in temperature between the input temperature and the output temperature of the heat transfer medium. The heat capacity and mass flow of the heat transfer medium can be used to calculate the transmitted heat. To achieve a sufficient level of accuracy, the measurement of Tj out Tj in must be precise, i.e. the temperature sensors used must be very accurate. In order to guarantee the accuracy of the result, the mass flow of the heat transfer medium must be kept constant and the reactor must be insulated. Any heat loss to the environment could distort the result significantly.
Tr sensor
Compensation heating
Power compensation calorimetry with electric heating

Power compensation calorimeters are based on the principle that a defined and constant heat flow is dissipated via the reactor wall. The heat is generated using compensation heating, which is immersed in the reaction mass. In the event of exothermy, the heating power is reduced so that the total dissipated heat remains constant, which enables the reaction energy to be calculated. This calorimetric method can only be used for exothermic reactions and generates large temperature gradients within the reaction mass (hotspots). Furthermore, the maximum exothermy that can be measured is limited to the maximum capacity of the compensation heating.
Tj jacket temperature
582
www.mt.com/academia
Reaction monitoring using infrared spectroscopy

The in-situ FTIR method is a modern form of infrared spectroscopy (medium infrared range from 4000cm1 to 650 cm1), which provides a direct insight into the sequence of reactions at molecular level and in real time. It can be used, for example, to record species, which often cannot be detected via usual analytical methods (e.g.any type of chromatography). Mechanistic investigations in organic, organometallic or catalytic chemistry would be hard to imagine without this method. Another great advantage of the method is that it does not require sampling, which tends to be time-consuming and error-prone, and therefore can be described as completely noninvasive. However, frequently it is not the single spectrum of a species that is of interest, but rather the kinetic profiles of all the components involved in a reaction (educts, products, intermediates, catalysts) that are determined from the timeresolved spectra. The profiles allow quick statements to be made regarding when a reaction begins, when the product concentration reaches a maximum and when any secondary reaction leads to the decay of the desired reaction product. The various methods of spectra evaluation, which aim to transform raw data (time-dependent single spectra) into valuable information (concentration profiles), are particularly important here. The basic principles of in-situ FTIR spectroscopy correspond to those of conventional FTIR spectroscopy and are explained briefly below. In particular, the ATR technology used in the in-situ method is addressed in detail. Another section is dedicated to the evaluation of time-resolved spectra and explains the various versions.
The right instruments can be found on page 458.
583
AutoChem
Reference section
FTIR Spectroscopy
of in-situ FTIR spectroscopy

In FTIR spectroscopy in the mid infrared range, molecular vibrations are triggered on the absorption of radiation. These are usually fundamental vibrations (combination vibrations and overtones occur in the NIR range), so that the spectra obtained for the functional groups contained in the molecule demonstrate characteristic bands. Figure 1 shows the spectrum for electromagnetic radiation with the infrared radiation area marked in red.
Basic principles
Highest energy Wavelength (nm) 10-2 100 102 104 106 108 1010
Lowest energy 1012
Gamma ray
X-ray
Ultraviolet
Visible
Infrared
Microwave
Radio frequency
1020
1018
1016
1014
1012
1010
108
106
104 Frequency (s-1)
400
500
600
700
750 nm
Visible region
Fig. 1 Spectrum for electromagnetic radiation

584
www.mt.com/academia
In Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy, the Michelson interferometer or corresponding adaptations are used to generate spectra. They are used in the first step to collect interferograms and in the second step to then calculate the corresponding spectra using Fourier transformation. The advantages of FTIR spectroscopy are its optics with great light transmitting capacity (Michelson interferometer) and the speed at which the spectra can be recorded due to the simultaneous determination of the entire spectral range via measurement. In other "dispersive" measurement processes, the individual frequencies or wave numbers of the spectrum are recorded one after the other. This can lead to distorted spectra when observing very fast reactions.
Detector Fourier transformation
x Interferogram
Spectrum
Fig. 2 Michelson interferometer

585
AutoChem
Reference section
ATR Technology
ATR technology
Basic principles of
Attenuated total reflection (ATR) measurement technology enables the measurement of systems, in which conventional transmission measurement is impossible due to interference by particles or gas bubbles. It is a surfacesensitive measurement technology, which can detect information from the liquid phase of reaction systems. It is also referred to as total internal reflection. The structure and path of the rays for transmission and ATR are shown in Figure 3. The electromagnetic radiation is coupled at a specific angle in the ATR crystal and then disperses in total reflection. At the boundary surfaces between the sample and the crystal, only a small part of the electromagnetic field, the "evanescent field", extends into the sample. The number of reflections at the boundary surface with the sample indicates the sensitivity of the measuring probe: the greater the number, the greater the sensitivity.
Fig. 3 Comparison of transmission measurement with ATR

586
www.mt.com/academia
The ATR crystal material used for reaction monitoring is usually diamond or silicon. The crystal material is selected according to spectroscopic requirements and material compatibility. Diamond has virtually unlimited mechanical and chemical resistance. However, its disadvantage is that a strong individual absorption of the diamond crystal lattice makes it unsuitable for measurements in the wave number range from 1950 cm-1 to 2250 cm1. If this wave number range is of interest, (triple bonds as in nitriles, cumulated double bonds as in ketenes or isocyanates, metal carbonyls, azide, etc.), then silicon should be used as the ATR material. Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of the probe tip with ATR crystal.
Modern, ATR-based probes are now connected to the spectrometer via flexible optical fibers with great light transmitting capacity. Figure 5 illustrates the typical structure of an in-situ FTIR system (ReactIR 45m from METTLER TOLEDO) with AgX fiber optic probe and reactor system (EasyMax from METTLER TOLEDO). This structure enables the accurate determination of concentration relationships with precisely controlled temperature, stirring speed and educt dosing.
Fig. 5 ReactIR 45m with EasyMax from METTLER TOLEDO

Gold seal ETR element ZnSe support/focusing element
Fitted in C276
Fig. 4 Diagram of ATR probes

587
AutoChem
Reference section
The raw data from the ReactIR measurement represents timeresolved reaction spectra, from which information, i.e. trend and concentration curves, can be extracted. This information can be used to make statements about the start and end of a reaction, the formation of intermediates, reaction channels and reaction kinetics. There are various options for generating usable information from the raw data. They differ fundamentally in terms of complexity and result, and are explained briefly below.
FTIR spectroscopy
Concentration profiles from time-resolved FTIR spectra
Time
Absorbance or relative concentration
Time
Fig. 6 Raw data (time-resolved spectra) and information (trend and concentration curves)
Concentration profiles through evaluation of peak height or peak area

In the first approximation, the Lambert-Beer law can be applied to the FTIR spectra, which strictly speaking is only valid for diluted solutions. By plotting the peak height or the peak integral against time, a relative concentration profile is obtained. Careful selection of the integration range and baseline can optimize results. Modern software packages enable the user to select the peaks to be evaluated and to adjust the type of peak evaluation (peak height or area, baseline selection, etc.) during the reaction, i.e. at the same time as spectra recording. For unknown or scarcely researched reactions, the peaks required for evaluation are often unknown prior to execution of the reaction. The option of specifying peaks for the evaluation while the reaction is taking place is therefore essential. Problems arise with the peak height or peak area method when using spectra for complex mixtures, which have a very large number of peaks. In these cases, it is often impossible to find isolated peaks for the individual reaction components. Certain tricks can be used to help, such as the evaluation of the second derivative of the spectra or the (scaled) subtraction of the solvent spectrum. The latest software, which is optimized for reaction tracking, can be used to perform these types of mathematical operation even during the experiment, parallel to spectra recording.
588
www.mt.com/academia
Purely mathematical/ statistical methods (e.g. ConcIRT algorithm)

Modern PCs are now so powerful that mathematical/ statistical methods can analyze the recorded data even during the experiment. ConcIRT from METTLER TOLEDO is one of these methods; it extracts both relative concentration profiles and the associated pure component spectra from complex reaction mixtures (without prior knowledge or information from a spectra database). The pure component spectra enable a plausibility check to be carried out through comparison with reference spectra. A great advantage of ConcIRT is that even very complex reaction mixtures, in which there are no isolated bands for an evaluation using band height or band integral, can be analyzed without problems.
Calibration models (K-matrix, P-matrix, PLS models)

All calibration models are based on the fact that by measuring standards, a mathematical relationship between the spectra and a known concentration of various components is produced. This mathematical relationship is then applied to spectra of unknown concentration. The requirement for setting up a calibration model is the measurement of numerous standards of known concentration. The concentration in the standards is determined by comparative analysis (e.g. HPLC) of real samples from a reaction solution or by mixing standards from gravimetrically or volumetrically determined parts of reaction components. An advantage of developing a calibration model is that absolute concentrations are determined and that in the case of PLS models even spectra with a large number of unspecific and greatly overlapping absorption bands can be evaluated with maximum reliability and accuracy. For applications in research labs with frequently changing reactions, the effort of developing a calibration model is usually not worthwhile.
589
AutoChem
Reference section
Particle Characterization
Particle analysis
This section considers a few important principles of particle characterization. The term particle size measurement is deliberately avoided, since the definition of particle size is not in any way trivial. According to the International Organization for Standardization (ISO, Geneva, Switzerland, www.iso.ch), the size of a particle is defined as the theoretical diameter of a sphere with the same volume as the particle.
590
www.mt.com/academia
The widely used method of laser diffraction corresponds in principle to the ISO definition and specifies the particle size or particle size distribution as the diameter of imaginary spheres with the same volume. A sieve analysis, however, always classifies a particle population according to the second largest dimension. With sufficient sieving, an imaginary needle at some point falls lengthways through the sieve mesh and is classified according to the mesh width. The particle shape is therefore important in particle size measurement because in most cases samples do not really have ideal spherical particles. In summary, the absolute particle size or particle size distribution of a population cannot be recorded only metrologically, but each applied measurement process gives a (different) reply signal (Fig. 2). What's the purpose of particle characterization? The main consideration when selecting an instrument for particle characterization should be the purpose of the measurement. If the measurement is for the characterization of a product/system for quality control, there are often strict specifications and even the measurement process is already specified. However, if the purpose of a measurement is actually to understand a process, to identify determining test parameters and to characterize the reply signal from the system to a variation of these parameters, then the process should always be the focus when selecting the measuring device. What effect do the individual process parameters have on the subsequent process steps (filterability, drying time) and the product quality (yield, flowability, linting propensity, etc.)? Which aspect of the particle system is the key to removing problems or optimizing a process? Is the process determined more by the proportion of coarse or fine particles?
10 m
100 m
Calculated diameter of a sphere with the same volume as the needle
SED = 25.6 m
Fig. 1 Needle and sphere with the same diameter (spherical equivalent diameter SED). In actual fact, the surface of the real needle is 10 m wide and 100 m long, which makes it 60% larger than the surface of the sphere with the same volume. Even the self-organization of the needle-shaped particles e.g. in a filter cake would be completely different to the behavior of the corresponding spheres.
Fig. 2 Comparison of results from laser diffraction (LD), Lasentec FBRM and PVM video microscopy during a crystallization process.
591
AutoChem
Reference section
Increase in number of fine particles Number %
Apparent change in number of coarse particles
Size, m
Fig. 3a Number-based distribution, absolute increasing number of particles in fine grain range with unmodified coarse grain range.
Fig. 3b Distributions from Fig. 3a, normalized representation. Apparent decrease in the coarse grain range due to normalization.
Brief examples and comments

A filtration is strongly influenced by the particle shape, the proportion of solids and the relative share of fine material. If the process is essentially determined by the proportion of solids, a measuring system should measure both the particle dimension and the rel. solid concentration at least relatively and should not output the measured data as normalized distributions. In many cases, effects that occur can only be partially explained or cannot be explained at all if only normalized particle distributions are available. A substantial part of the information is lost through normalization. The example in Figures 3a/3b illustrates this fact very clearly. Figure 3a shows the absolute number-based distribution of a particle population. The increase in fine particles with an unmodified number of coarse particles is clear. Figure 3b shows the same data record, the only difference being that the curves have been normalized. The increase in fine particles can be seen as before, however due to the different mathematical representation of the data, the number of coarse particles seems to decrease, which is clearly not the case. This plainly demonstrates that the normalized representation of measured data does not enable clear interpretation of concentration changes in the various size classes. Some measuring principles (e.g. laser diffraction) only provide normalized distributions and therefore omit an important part of the information. Measurement processes which count particles primarily provide absolute information, and this data can always be normalized mathematically by referring to the size information.
Filtrations are often strongly influenced by the share of fine material, since this blocks the pore structure in the filter cake and therefore considerably increases the filter cake resistance. In this case, the measuring system selected should offer particular sensitivity in terms of fine particles. According to the measuring principle, many analytical systems do not offer number-based distributions, but provide volumebased distribution curves (sieve analysis, laser diffraction). The median particle size of a volume-based distribution is dominated by the particles with a large diameter. Although it is possible to transform a volume-based distribution mathematically into a number-based distribution, in practice this undertaking is difficult if not impossible, since measuring systems that provide a volume-based raw signal only have very limited sensitivity in terms of fine particles. Figure 4 illustrates the relationship clearly using an imaginary particle population. The population comprises 24 small, 9 medium and 2 large particles. The distributions are represented in the form of bar charts with different weighting (number, side length, area and volume). The number distribution is dominated by the small particles, since there are a greater number of them. The large particles, which form the largest share in terms of volume, become increasingly dominant through the series of distributions. Finally, the share of the largest particles clearly prevails in the volume distribution.
592
www.mt.com/academia
Fig. 4 Imaginary particle population and distribution functions with different weighting (number distribution, side length-weighted distribution, area-weighted distribution, volume-weighted distribution)
593
AutoChem
Reference section
Offline versus in-situ measurement
The key to gaining a deep understanding of a process usually lies in knowing its dynamics. Time-resolved measurements with high density directly from the process are therefore invaluable. Other questions associated with sampling and sample preparation for offline analyses are:
Figure 5: Time dependency of the mean values from a volume-weighted distribution (red) and a numberweighted distribution (green) for the same particle system, a stirred crystallization suspension which tends to wear. The linear decrease over time indicates wear and is typical for this particle formation mechanism.
Is the sample taken representative? Is the repeatability of sampling ensured? Does the sample change when diluted (for laser diffraction considerable dilution of the sample is usually required)? How does ultrasound treatment change the result?
A second example illustrates the same fact using mean values, which are shown over time. In this actual case, undesired fine material builds up slowly but constantly in the post-stirring phase of a crystallization. If the mean value from the volume-weighted distribution is plotted over time, the effect of the fine share can barely be detected (red curve). However, plotting the numberweighted mean value (green curve) shows a clear effect as it decreases over time. The fine share would be detected at the latest in a subsequent filtration stage, where it would cause extended and therefore economically unfavorable filtration times.
In addition, control loops for the subsequent automated control of a process can only be set up using measurements in real time.
In-situ video microscopy (PVM)

Many processes in which particles are involved can only be clearly analyzed and understood if quantitative information (particle distributions, mean values, etc.) are supported by qualitative, visual information (e.g. using METTLER TOLEDO PVM technology). A good example of this is polymorphic transformations or crystallizations, which pass through a liquid phase as an intermediate state ("oiling out" effect). Ideally, the visual information should also be generated in situ in order to record the actual state in the process. Figure 6 shows a series of images from a polymorphic transformation, in which the morphology of the crystals changes dramatically.
594
www.mt.com/academia
Fig. 6 Series of images from a polymorphic transformation
595
AutoChem
Reference section
The Lasentec FBRM method from METTLER TOLEDO

A laser beam is focused in the medium to be measured using a measuring probe. Fast rotating optics enable the laser beam to rotate at 75 Hz. If a particle passes the measuring probe, it is detected by the laser beam. The return reflection is recorded by a detector. The high rotational speed of the laser enables the measurement of several thousand particles in a short period of time. This ensures statistical certainty during data recording. Even systems with very high concentrations can be measured reliably using FBRM technology. Continuous measurement of size distribution detects any change in the dimension, shape and number of particles with a high degree of sensitivity.
596
www.mt.com/academia
Laser source To detector
Lasentec probe body Beam splitter
Rotating optics
Sapphire window
Focused beam
Fig. 7 Principle of the Lasentec FBRM method

597
Index
A Ex
A
Index
a_comparator Abbe refractometers AC power pack for pipettes Academia Initiative Accessories for pipettes Accessories for titration Accuracy classes of test weights Accuracy when weighing Acid rain Acid-base titration Adapters for pipettes Adapters for reagent bottles Adaptive Cal bration Timer (ACT) for sensors Additives Adenosine triphosphate (ATP) Adiabatic temperature rise Adsorption of gases Aerosol-resistant tips AgCl-saturated AK9 coaxial cables for ISM pH electrodes Ammonia Ammonium Analysis in the food and beverage industry Analytical Balance Analytical methods and standard preparation Angle of incidence, refractive index Anthocyanins Antistatic k ts Antistatic when weighing Antitheft device for balances Anti-vibration panels Archimedes principle Assays ATEX balances ATEX ATP ATR crystal (in-s tu FTIR) ATR technology (in-s tu FTIR) Attenuation behavior, thermal analysis Autocatalytic reactions Autoclavable sensors Accumulated reaction heat (Qaccu)
101 402 290 I 237 394, 396 580 488
Auto-dispensing Automated mass comparators Automatic buffer detection (pH) Automatic dosing of powders Automatic end point detection (pH meters) Automatic Karl Fischer titrators Automatic precision weighing Automatic sample traceability Automation solutions, titration Automation tasks, titration Automation technology (weighing applications) AutoRep, pipettes Auxiliary displays for balances Avoiding aerosols
276 100 312, 313 180 320 388 508 409 378 376 92 272 154 181, 226
Buoyancy principle Burette calibration Burettes
134, 513 397 374, 396
C
C20/C30 KF coulometers Cabinets, weighing cabinets, weighing-in toxic substances Cables, pH meters Cadmium Calcium Calibration devices Calibration certificates, pipettes Calibration models, AutoChem Calibration of pipettes Calibration of pipettes, gravimetric Calibration of pipettes, service Calibration reminder, pH meters Calibration service 384, 396 145 348 345 345 114 520 589 115 177 308 XIII 477, 495 47 121 581 578 185 345 172 298 289 450 265 577 290 357 435, 566 345 298 46, 47 409 428, 430 299 130 96 506 550 574
472, 475, 488, 494 192 550 289 397 353 200 208 580 572 226 331 355 345 345 390 19 184 563 152 514 158 126 513 280 77 498 200 587 583, 586 445, 574 567 363 298, 300
Automatic temperature compensation 313
120, 235, 293
B
Back titration Balance calibration Balance interfaces Balance location Balance maintenance Balance operation Balance user interface Balances up to 6000 kg Balances up to 64 kg Balances, antistatic Balances, corner load Barcode readers Barium Bavarian State Archaeological Collection, Munich (ASM) Bench scales (industrial) 549 522 154 474 480 476 54 86 60 514 493 156 345 367 86
Calibration when weighing
Calibration, fully automatic, weighing Calibry software (pipette cal bration) Calorimeters Calorimetry Capsule filling, Quantos Carbon dioxide CarePac for routine tests, balances Carotenoids Carousel stands for pipettes Catalysis Cell cultures, pipettes Changes in color, thermal values Charger for pipettes Chemical processes, sensors Chemical reactions Chloride Chlorophyll Classic Plus Analytical Balances Cleaning un ts, density and refractive index Cloud point Color stability, pH Compact printer (balances) Comparator Balances Comparators Complexometric titration Composition of polymers
Charge neutralization, when weighing 515
Benchtop instruments, pH meters 304, 306, 308, 310, 312, 325, 326, 327 Benchtop pipetting system Betalaines Better weighing BioClean, pipette tips Biotechnology, sensors Boiling point Borofluoride Brix Bromide Buffer detection Buffer solutions Bulk tips 281 298 472 202, 210 355, 357 430 345 403, 404 345 313 330, 331 217
Atmospheric humidity when weighing 475
598
E
Concentration determination Concentration profiles, AutoChem Conductiv ty board Conductiv ty cells Conductiv ty sensors Conductiv ty Contaminating inh b tors Copper Corner load when weighing Corrosion Coulometers Coulometric titration Coulometry Critical angle, refractive index Cross-contamination of pipettes Crucible sealing press Crucibles Crystal material Crystallization Cyanide Cycle counter, pipettes 403 588 376 346 346, 347, 399 305, 314, 347 202 206 345 493 369, 571 386 386, 555 389 563 Dictionary of weighing terms Differential thermal analysis DiHEMDA detergent DiHEMDA Dilution series, pipettes Dilution, pipettes Dimensional changes of a sample Direct in tial weighing in the tare container Direct t tration Dispenser, pipette Dispensing un ts, titration Dispensing, pipettes Displacement principle, dens ty Disposable capillaries, pipettes Dissolved oxygen Distribution functions, particle analysis Certified buffer solutions DL22 F&B, titrator DMA Dynamic mechanical analysis DMA/SDTA861e DNA DNAse DO308, drying oven Dodecane, standard 138 510 461 571 435 405 400 134, 513 556 136 559 272, 402, 404, 512 369 572 574 435 184 227 Door opening, automatic on balances Dosing heads for powder dosing Dosing of powders, automated Dosing solution for powder dosing Draft shield for balances Drafts when weighing Dropping point Drying methods Drying oven, titration DSC Application examples 473 428 200 206 280 259 574 28 549 524 374 276 513 272, 275 322, 356 593 330 390 432, 564 444 200 200 396 412 37 182 180 181 44, 154 475 428, 430 505 389 566 Elasticity module, thermal analysis Electrochemical series Electrochemical series, pH measurement Electrode arm Electrode cables Electrode finder, finding the right electrode Electrode head Electrode test Electrode ValueBox Electrodes Electrodes for conductivity Electrodes for ions Electrodes for optical density Electrodes for oxygen, online Electrodes for pH Electrodes for pH, online Electrodes for turbidity, online Electrodes, gas-sensitive Electrolytes Electronic lab journal Electronic multi-channel pipettes Electronic pipettes Electronic pipettes Electrophoretic slab gel apparatus Electrostatic charges Electrostatic when weighing ELISA assays E-Man Hybrid pipette Emulsions End point detection, automatic (pH) End point titration Endothermic Equivalence point t trator Equivalence point ErgoClips, weighing-in guides for balances ErGo field assistant, pH measurement Error-free operation of balances Evaluation of thermal analysis 353 154 193 Evaporation when weighing Evaporation, minimization of Evaporation, thermal analysis Ex balances Ex Zone Excellence titrators 574 546 546 312 399 334 375 308 337 330, 338, 340, 342, 344, 348 346 342 362 356 338, 342 354 362 344 331 139 266 266 266 231 152 483 280 252 461 320 578 393 551 29, 122 320 472 570 482 516 566 77 498 394 392, 551
Conductiv ty measurement 319, 320, 327
Contamination of pipette tips
186, 230, 514 448 446 587 461, 566, 571 345 259
D
Data management, balances and titrators Data processing, LIMS Decomposition behavior Decomposition, thermal analysis Degree of curing (resins) DeltaRange density load cells Density and refractive index Density determination with balances Density determination, general Density kit for balances Density oscillation cell Density Desorption of gases Determination of glass transitions Determining the physical properties of substances Development of medicines Diameter, pipettes Desalinization with titration
Decomposition product identification 572
Densito, portable density determination 414
DSC Differential scanning calorimetry 420, 432, 436, 566 DTA Differential thermal analysis Dual Mode, titration Dynamic Lifetime Indicator (DLI), online analytics Dynamic weighing, kit Dynamics and Chemistry of Hydrometeors 564, 571 374
599
Index
Ex Pi
Index
Exothermic Expansion coefficient Expression profiling, pipettes Extension unit for pH meters
578 435, 574 280 306
Hang-Ups, pipette stands Hardening, thermal analysis Hazardous areas HB43-S compact halogen moisture analyzer Heat balance calorimetry
289 566 76, 498 110 581, 582
Internal cal bration of balances Intramolecular redox reaction Iodide Ion analysis Ion measurement Ionizer Ions Ion-selective electrode (ISE) Ion-selective half cells ISE, ion-selective electrode iSense Asset Suite software ISFET measurement ISM sensors ISM transmitters Isolate Isolation procedure Isotope method
47 196 345 315 327 514 307 345 344 344 353 353 358 419 420 513
F
FACT (Fully Automated Calibration Technology) in-situ analysis, particle characterization Fermentation, sensors Filling process control for balances Filling toxic substances Filling/dosing, balances Filter weighing Flexible method concept, titration Flexural resonator principle Flexural vibration Floor scales Flow and relaxation behavior of substances Flow rates, pipettes Fluoride Food and drinks industry, sensors Foot switch for balances Formulation/granulation, particle characterization Fourier transformation Friscolyt-B storage solution (pH) Fully automated sampling, t tration Fully automatic adjustment (FACT), balances FBRM, 4, 47, 490 461, 596 355 158 184 509 152 376 405 513 86 574 273 345 357 158, 161 461 585 331 381 47
Heat capacity, thermal analysis 432, 566 Heat compensation calorimetry 581, 583 Heat flow calorimetry Heat flow differences Heat flow measurement Heat of reaction Heat transfer Heating options, density and refractive index HG63 halogen moisture analyzer High-pressure DSC High-pressure liquid chromatography Hot stage microscopy HPLC, APIs, Quantos HR83 halogen moisture analyzer Hydrolysis Hydrometer Hydrophobic filter, pipettes 581 566 566 579, 580 581 409 109 566 181, 420 86 428, 577 181, 420 108 196 402 226
305, 307, 327
High-resolution bench/floor scales
J
Justus von Liebig 2, 472
K
Karl Fischer titration KF coulometers KF volumeters Kinetic profiles Kinetics 369, 384, 503, 551 384 384, 388 583 435, 571
I
Identification of decomposition products, thermal analysis 572 Identification of solvates, thermal analysis Identification of solvents, thermal analysis 572 572 572 200 86 81 502 113 583 362 354 362 583 594
L
L platform, Precision Balances Laboratory reactor system Laboratory reactor LabX balance software LabX database, titration LabX direct titration software Language selection on balances Large-scale multi-dispensing, pipetting Laser diffraction Carrier plate, pipettes Lead LevelControl, balances Leveling when weighing LIMS (Laboratory Information Management System) Linear expansion coefficient, thermomechanical analysis Linearity (non-linearity) when weighing Lighting cond tions when weighing 65, 85 581 464 138, 511 374 415 56 236 591, 592 222 345 30 477, 493 475
G
Gas chromatography Gas-sensitive electrodes Genetics, pipettes Glass transition determination Glass transition Good pipetting practice Good Weighing Practice Gravimetric pipette cal bration Gravitation when weighing Grid weighing pan GWP 420 344 265 566, 574 435 534 496 115, 516 487 38 496
Identifying solvents Impurities, pipettes Industrial scales Industrial terminals Infrared drying Infrared moisture analyzer Infrared spectroscopy InPro 8100 single-fiber turbidity sensor InPro 3253i pH sensor InPro 8100 turbidity sensors In-situ FTIR spectroscopy
H
Half cell, titration electrodes Halogen heating technology Halogen moisture analyzers 399 106 104, 502
In-situ video microscopy
142, 510 574 269, 491
Intelligent Sensor Management (ISM) 316, 317, 350 Intermediates, AutoChem 457, 459
600
LiQC multiparameter analysis Liquid crystal phases Liquid crystal transitions Liquid crystal, thermal analysis Liquid handling Lithium Oscillation cell for refractive index, structure Load cells, balances Low-retention tip
407 568 566 568 509 345 563 508 228
Minimizing vibrations, weighing Minimum weight (MinWeigh) MinWeigh when weighing Miscibil ty, thermal analysis Mixing with pipettes MJ33 compact moisture analyzer Modular ty, pH meters Modulo weighing modules, WM line Moisture analyzers (halogen moisture analyzers) Moisture determination Moisture determination, methods Moisture gain when weighing Moisture trap MonoBloc HighSpeed weighing cell MP70 melting point determination MS analytical balance Multi-channel pipette calibration Multi-channel pipettes Multi-dispensing Multiparameter analysis Multipurpose electrodes MultiSTAR
126 56, 518 495 566 259 113 304 90 104 502 482 516 53 424 19 120 236 208, 259 407 342
Oxygen Oxygen sensors
315 356
P
Packaging options, pipettes Parallel titration Particle analysis Particle characterization Particle dimension Particle size distr bution, shape Particle size PC software, pH measurement PCR inhibitors PCR Peltier thermostat, density/refractometry combined Pepsin-HCl for cleaning Performance test for a pipette Peristaltic pump for pipettes pH pH automation pH buffer solutions NIST pH glass electrode pH half cell pH measurement Personal protection when weighing 209 376 583, 594, 591 461, 591 593 591 590 306 200 280
LTS LiteTouch tip ejection system 238
104, 500, 503
M
M and L platforms, Precision Balances 60 M platform, Precision Balances M300 transmitter for pH, redox and dissolved oxygen Magnetic protection shield Magnetism when weighing Manual mass comparators Mass change of a sample Mass Comparators Mass comparison Mass determination Material characterization Material purity, pipettes Material testing Maximum permiss ble error for weights 65, 85 358 154 484 100 572 506 96, 506 506 509, 565 201 565
Peltier element, density determination 559 405 331 115 273, 282 146 305 330 399 345 296, 298, 300, 327, 546 320 334, 336 342 307, 322, 540, 542 296 319 321 305, 319 302, 306, 310, 314, 318, 322, 326 571 566 577 566 399 480 506 300 246 289
305, 314, 320, 358
high-performance sensors, thermal analysis 432 Multitasking, titrators mV measurement, pH/multimeter 376 322
N
521 NewClassic Analytical Balances NewClassic Precision Balances Nitrate Nitrogen oxides, electrodes Nucleation 49 73 345 345 566
pH meter (IP67) for routine work pH meter pH special electrodes pH value pH value for colors pH value/ion measuring instruments pH/conductivity meter (IP67) pH/ions pH/mu timeter
Maximum temperature of the synthesis reaction (MTSR) 580 Measurement parameters for thermal analysis Measurement uncertainty when weighing Mechanical modulus Melting characteristics Melting enthalpy Melting range determination Melting Metal electrodes Method editor, titration Method loops, titration METTLER TOLEDO Michelson interferometer Micro Balance Micro pollutants, pipettes Microcentrifuge tubes, pipettes Microprocessor, electronic pipettes 570 494 445 566 435 427 566, 571 399 372 376 II 585 20 201, 206 230 256
O
O2, online analytics of dissolved oxygen O2, pH multimeter OEM weighing modules OIML accuracy classes OIML weights Oleamide One Click Titration Online analytics Optical sensor, refractive index 356 314, 316, 318, 320 88, 90, 92, 94 520 164 200, 206 372 350 563
Melting point determination 424, 427, 576
Phase diagram determination Phase diagrams and composition Phase transitions of liquid crystals Phase transitions Photo calorimetry accessories Photoelectrodes Physical factors when weighing Physical weighing principle Pigment classes Pipet-Lite pipette Pipette adapters
435, 571
Oscillation period, density and refractive index 557, 558, 559 Oven sample changers, titration Oxidation Oxidation stability 388 571 435
601
Index
Pi Ti
R
Index
Pipette calibration Pipette calibration devices Pipette calibration software Pipette seal Pipette stands Pipette test Pipette tips Pipette tips, aerosol-resistant Pipette tips, BioClean Pipette tips, low-retention Pipette tips, special applications Pipettes, dispensing Pipettes, mixing Pipettes, multi-channel Pipettes, positive displacement
115, 156 116 121 238 289 516 200 226 202, 210 228 224 276 259 248, 260, 264, 268 272, 274
Precipitation titration Precision Balances Precision weighing modules Precision when weighing Precision, pipettes Pre-drying, titration Preload weight, balances Preprogrammed pipetting Presterilized, pipettes Preventive maintenance, pipettes Prignitz Institute for Thermal Analysis (PIT e.V.) Printer for balances Printer for titrators Proactive maintenance, balances Process control Process development Process monitoring Process technology Production certificate for balances proFACT, balances Professional development Protective covers for balances Protein crystallization Protein separation Proteomics Pulsation, pipettes Purity determination of biochemicals Purity of a fatty acid Purity testing, thermal analysis Purity, thermal analysis PVM, particle characterization Pycnometer Pyrogen Pyrolysis
550 50 88, 509 494 208 555 522 259 275 293 418 130 397 179 509 464 350 93 158 490 VIII 157 280 231 265 273 419 420 571 566 461 402, 513 200 435
Precipitation, particle characterization 461
Radio Frequency Identification Chip (RFID) RC1e reaction calorimetry Reaction calorimeters Reaction calorimetry Reaction enthalpy Reaction kinetics Reaction mechanisms Reaction tracking ReactIR Reactive species Reactivity of chemicals Reactor system Readability when weighing Ready-to-go system, titration Reagent bottles, adapters Reagent reservoirs, pipettes Rechargeable batteries for balances Redox and dissolved oxygen transmitters Redox measurements Redox titration Reference electrode for titration Reference materials Refill packs, pipette tips Refractive index Refractometer measuring cell Refractometry Relative density Reliable initial weighing Renewable raw materials Repeatability when weighing Repeating pipettes Replication, pipettes Reproduc bility when weighing Resource monitoring RNAse Reactive intermediate stages
182 466 581 466 435
Reaction and transformation enthalpy 566
566, 589 459 583 452, 454, 455, 587, 588 457 459 567 462 488 376 397 288 160 358 545 550 345, 399 410 220 402, 561 563 561, 563 556 28 419 491 276 280 475, 493 375 200 281 380 380 380 381 378 379 172, 174, 520
Pipettes, single-channel 236, 240, 244, 246, 252, 258, 274 Pipettes, adjustable spacer Pipettes, special applications Pipettes, vapor pressure Pipetting Pipetting 360 Pipetting cycles Pipetting robots PLS model, in-situ FTIR Plug and Measure sensors, online analytics Plug&Play sensors, titration Plugs and cables for electrodes Plunger forges when pipetting Polymer electrolyte Polymer structure Polymorphism Polypropylene resin Polypropylene Portable instruments, pH measurement Portable pH meters Potassium Potentiometry Powder dosing Powder dosing, dosing heads Powder, automatic weighing-in Precalibration of oxygen sensors Precalibration of pH electrodes 265 270 236 259, 524 234 255 278 589 352 374 348 238 341 574 435, 566, 577 201 200 325, 327 414 314, 316, 318, 320, 322 272, 274 345 544 180 182 180 353 353
Purity determination, thermal analysis 427
Portable meters, pH measurement
Q
Quality control and process control Quant tative content analysis Quantos QB1 antistatic kit Quantos dosing heads Quantos service Quantos work station 509 572 189 182 180, 190 191
Robotic systems, pipettes Rondo 12/15 sample changer, titration Rondo 20 sample changer, titration Rondo 30 sample changer, titration Rondo 60, Rondo 60 plus sample changer, titration Rondo automation Rondo sample changer Routine tests on balances
Positive displacement pipette
602
RTCal
466, 581 572
ServiceXXL Short-chain fatty acids Sieve analysis Simple weighing
176 418 591, 592 75 116 236 38, 43 37 561 345 566 430 574 121, 135, 138, 306, 353, 415, 510 513 I 572 387 389 265 224 86 270 435 587 259 324 216, 219 63 330, 331 432 250 485 509 273 256 299 388 574 565 506 345 209 345, 399
Synthesis lab Synthesis/laboratory reactors Synthetic dyes
456 462, 464, 468 299
Rubber analysis, thermal analysis
S
S/M/L platforms, balances Safety weighing cabinets Salinity Sample aliquotation, titration Sample changer, titration Sample delivery, density and refractive index Sample preparation for thermal analysis Sample preparation, powder dosing Sample series, titration Sample traceability, automatic (mu tiparameter analysis) Sampling, FTIR Sampling, pipettes Sampling, thermal analysis Scale up Screenings, pipettes Seal, pipettes Selecting the right balance Self-diagnosis function, pH meter Sensitivity when weighing Sensor chip, titration Sensor data, titration Sensor monitoring, pH meters Sensors Sensors for biotechnology Sensors for chemical processes Sensors for conductivity Sensors for fermentation Sensors for ions Sensors for optical density, online Sensors for oxygen, online Sensors for pH Sensors for pH, online Sensors for the food and drinks industry Sensors for turbidity, online Sensors, gas-sensitive Series pipetting Serological samples Service for balances Service for pipettes Service package with IQ/OQ/PQ, pH meters 58, 84 144 322 381 374 409 569 181 376 409 459 236, 262 569 466 280 238 3 312 489 375 375 308
Single-channel pipette cal bration Single-channel pipettes SmartGrid grid weighing pan SmartSens infrared sensor Snells law Sodium Softening agent effects Softening point, thermal analysis Softening temperature, thermal analysis Software Solid density Solutions for academia Solvate identification Solvent change Solvent Manager, titrators Spacer settings, pipettes Special pipette tips Special solutions, balances Specialty pipettes Specific heat determination Spectrometer Speed of pipetting Splash-protected pH meters Stable rack, pipettes Stand for balances Standards, electrodes Starter kits, pipettes Static buoyancy when weighing Statistical quality control, SQC, balances Stepper motor technology, pipettes Stepper motor, pipettes Storing dyes Stromboli, oven sample changers, titration Structure determination of polymers Substance properties, thermal analysis Substitution principle, weighing Sulfide (silver sulfide) Surface properties, pipette tips Surfactant, electrodes STARe Excellence, thermal analysis
T
T50 titrator T70 titrator T50, T70, T90 titrator functionality T90 t trator Tare container holder TAWN test, thermal analysis Temperature coefficient of sens tivity, weighing 372 372 376 372 478 437 489
Temperature compensation, pH measurement 312, 320, 346 Temperature controller, density measurement Temperature when weighing Temperature-modulated DSC measurement technology Test weight TGA Application examples TGA/DSC1 Thermal analysis Thermal analysis, tips and tricks Thermal expansion Thermal history Thermal process determination Thermal stability Thermal value determination Thermal values Thermal values, color change Thermo module 559 475, 481 438 522 572 440 432, 564 569 574 566 566 572 566 424, 576 577 559
Temperature sensor, titration sensors 399
Sensor wear indicator, online analytics 353 332, 356, 374 355, 357 357 346 355 342 363 356 338, 342 354 357 363 344 231, 259 270 176 292 310
Thermogravimetric analysis (TGA) 432, 654, 572 Thermogravimetric moisture determination Thermomechanical analysis (TMA) Thermooptical analysis Thiocyanate Thiourea solution Tip ejection forces Tip geometry Tips for pipettes Tips, aerosol-resistant Tips, BioClean 502 432, 564, 574 428, 564, 577 345 331 238 208 210, 218 226 202, 210
603
Index
Ti X
W
Index
Tips, low-retention Tissue samples, pipetting Titration beakers Titration using pipettes Titration TMA/SDTA840 TMA/SDTA841e Top loader, balances TOPEM (temperature-modulated technique), thermal analysis Total reflection, refractive index Touchscreen operation, balances Toxic environment, safety weighing cabinets Toxic substances, filling Trace materials, pipette tips w thout Trace metal Traceability when weighing Traceable standards, density and refractive index Transmission measurement Transmitter for turbidity Transmitter Transport case for balances Trb 8300 turbidity transmitter Turbidity Titration, equivalence point
228 265 397 259 369, 372, 394, 396 393 442 442 52 567 562 56 144 184 201 206 492 410 586, 587 365 352, 358 158 364 551
Wall fixtures for balances Water content measurement Weighing tables Weighing cabinets Weighing cells Weighing container Weighing in a vacuum Weighing modules Weighing pans Weighing platforms Weighing terminals Weighing under difficult conditions Weighing-in expensive substances Weighing-in guide Weighing-in highly effective substances Weighing-in toxic substances Weight sets for balances Weights for balances Weights, OIML Well-plates WXS weighing modules WXT weighing modules
158 384, 501 128 145 86 478 98 88 154, 478 86 86 479 184
29, 57, 122 181 181 167 164, 170 520 280 92 94
X
X platform precision balances 80, 82, 83, 84, 85 XP Analytical Balances XP Micro Balances 32, 34 20, 22 50, 51 116 40 77 79 71 24, 25 66, 69
U
U electrode U ionizer 514 152
XP Precision Balances XP26PC Pipette Calibration Balance XS Analytical Balances XS EX Precision Balances XS Ex2 Precision Balances
V
V20/V30 KF volumeters 384, 395 236 126 445, 574 236 101 252 209 385 554 Vapor pressure, pipettes for liquids with high vapor pressure Vibration absorption/prevention, weighing Viscoelastic properties Viscosity, pipettes Volume comparator Volume control, pipettes Volume ranges, pipettes Volumeter, KF titration Volumetric titration
XS high-capacity Precision Balances XS Micro Balances XS Precision Balances
604
605
Imprint
Coordination Dr. Michael Schreiber Carmen Wiederuh
Editorial team Dr. Markus Adamczyk Jan Brthel Roger Bast Michael Bliss Peter Gilmer Siegbert Holtermller Dr. Christoph Jung Bernd Knig Werner Koepsel Dr. Walter Krebs Dr. Klaus-Peter Mang Dr. Dirk Neff Karl-Armin Opfer Rdiger Paul Beate Schmitz Dr. Peter von Hollen Max Wild
Design, layout, production 4t Matthes+Traut Werbeagentur GmbH www.4t-da.de Scientific consultant: Dr. Gerhard Schilling
All rights reserved, especially regarding presentation in public, translation and photographic reproduction, including that of individual sections. It cannot be guaranteed that this document is complete, accurate and up-to-date. Subject to technical changes. No liability accepted. All rights to the catalog, including layout as well as text and graphics, are reserved by METTLER TOLEDO. Any form of reproduction, including that of extracts, other than for personal use, requires the express written authorization of METTLER TOLEDO and is otherwise prohibited. All brand names, trademarks and registered trademarks named in this catalog are the property of the owner.
Graphical support Thomas Binder
Graphical review Mettler-Toledo International Inc. Global MarCom Switzerland
606
This could be the start of a wonderful friendship.
Our world is full of wonder As research shows

Excellent research is the driving force for the development of more demanding economies. Governments are taking great steps to promote research. We support this trend. As a global company, we offer solutions and services for scientists and engineers in order to drive forward development in the biotechnology, pharmaceutical, chemical and polymer industry. You can count on us Mettler Toledo will always be your ideal partner in research and teaching.
www.mt.com/academia
Mettler Toledo AG Laboratory & Weighing Technologies CH-8606 Greifensee, Switzerland Phone +41 44 944 22 11 Fax +41 44 944 30 60
Subject to technical changes 06/2008 Mettler-Toledo AG Global MarCom Switzerland

Academia-Cat en HR

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Academia-Cat en HR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Academia World of Wonders

Innovative solutions For excellent research

METTLER TOLEDO launches the Academia Initiative for your success

For global research

Excellent solutions for your success

METTLER TOLEDO and the Academia Initiative..................................... II

pH measurement and electrodes

and Dr. Dietmar R. Kammerer.............296

Density measurement and refractometry

Turn our know-how into your success

For global research

Academia World of Wonders online

Photos: Holger Sandmann

Special Notable Significant

The PT, the first electronic precision balance.

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Archer J.P. Martin

Richard Laurence Millington

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

The legendary PM is launched.

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv Photo: dpa - B ldarchiv

For their design of the scanning tunneling microscope

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Gerd Karl Binnig

Rudolf Arthur Marcus

For their discovery of a pulsar in a binary star system

Josef H. Taylor jr. and Russel A. Hulse

Sir Harold W. Kroto

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Robert F. Curl, Jr.

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Photo: dpa - B ldarchiv Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

For pioneering work on the theory of superconductors and superfluids

For the discovery of asymptotic freedom in the theory of strong interactions

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Vitaly L. Ginzburg Anthony J. Leggett

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Photo: dpa - B ldarchiv

For contributions to the quantum theory of optical coherence

For investigations of cosmic background radiation

Photo: dpa - Bildarchiv

Photo: Wolfram Daeumel

Osamur Shimomura Roger Tsien

Photos: ProlineServer wikipedia

Choose between two levels: Classic and Excellence

METTLER TOLEDO solutions

Select the right micro balance or analytical balance

At the extreme limits for weighing

Security knows no alternative

Simple and efficient weighing

Reliable and rugged for simple weighing

For more information, go to

Suggestion: page 176

Micro Balances: Maximum resolution Intelligent solutions

100% accuracy for small samples

Complete freedom of movement

For more information, go to

minimum weight according to US Pharmacopoeia (USP).